Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-3 User & Service Manual Download Page 114 | Manualshive

Page: 114 / 2536

background image

363-206-285
Applications

2-32

Issue 3

June 2001

The DDM-2000 drop-and-continue feature also finds an excellent application in
interconnecting two rings via an intermediate transport network. In the example
shown in Figure 2-20, DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer access rings act as a DRI pair
via an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System and DACS IV-2000 interoffice network.
The advantage of this network is the grooming for DRI traffic provided by the
DACS IV-2000. Both DDM-2000 OC-3 rings provide drop and continue at each of
their two duplicate COs. Both copies of the signal are transported as separate
tributaries through the interoffice network, and path switching is implemented at
the edges of the network. Signal redundancy is preserved on an end-to-end basis.

In offices where SONET interconnections are not available, DS3 interfaces can be
used between dual OC-12 offices. This architecture is not recommended over the
all SONET architecture, since DS3 interface failures are potentially service
affecting.

Figure 2-20.

DDM-2000 Ring Interworking with FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Transport
and DACS IV-2000 Grooming

DDM-2000

DS1

DS3

OC-3

OC-3

OC-3

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

OC-48

OC-48

DDM-2000

DDM-2000

DDM-2000

DDM-2000

DDM-2000

DDM-2000

DACS IV-2000

DACS IV-2000

DACS
IV-2000

DACS
IV-2000

FT-2000

FT-2000

EC-1

EC-1

FT-2000

FT-2000

Access Ring

DS1

DS3

EC-1

EC-1

DS3

DS1

Drop & Continue

Drop & Continue

Customer

DS1/DS3

From
Async
systems

R

DDM-2000/

SLC -2000

VT1.5 (DS1)
packing/
grooming

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

Multiple Access Rings

«
...
112
113
114
115
116
...
»

Summary of Contents for DDM-2000 OC-3

Page 1: ...363 206 285 Issue 3 June 2001 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Release 13 0 and Later User Service Manual Volume I ...

Page 2: ...e responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access Trademarks 5ESS DACScan LGX SLC ST and Western Electric are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies Inc ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute Inc Common Language is a registered trademark and CLEI CLLI CLCI and CLFI are trademarks...

Page 3: ...ce and Technical Support The Lucent Technologies Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC provides a technical assistance telephone number which is staffed 24 hours a day For technical assistance simply call 1 800 225 RTAC in accordance with local operating procedures Documentation Support Telephone Number Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask question...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ... Customer Technical Support CTS l Engineering and Installation Services liii Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services liv Documentation Support liv How to Order Documents lv Standing Orders lvi How to Comment on This Document lvi Electronic Documentation lvi 1 System Introduction 1 1 Overview 1 1 Lucent 2000 Product Family 1 1 DDM 2000 Product Family 1 3 Introduction to the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multi...

Page 6: ...endor OI Applications 2 51 Service Applications 2 52 Loop Feeder 2 52 Interoffice Transport 2 52 Broadband Business Access 2 53 LAN WAN Data Networking 2 55 Gateway Between SONET and Asynchronous Interfaces 2 59 Locked STS 3c 0x1 Broadband Services 2 60 Teleprotection and SCADA Applications 2 62 Intelligent Vehicle Highway System IVHS Applications 2 64 DS1 Performance Monitoring for Tariff Verific...

Page 7: ...1 Overview 5 1 Transmission Interfaces 5 2 Ring Interfaces 5 16 OC 3 OC 12 Ring 0x1 5 16 DS3 Data Services on an OC 3 Ring 5 19 OC 3 OC 1 Ring 0x1 5 20 OC 1 Ring Function Unit Pass Through 5 23 OC 1 OC 1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring 5 24 Synchronization Interfaces 5 28 Timing Modes 5 28 Free Running 5 28 DS1 Output Modes MULT and SYNC OUT 5 29 Synchronization Messaging 5 34 Dual Homing DRI Synchroni...

Page 8: ...ool 6 8 User Panel 6 8 User Panel LEDs 6 10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6 10 ACO TST Pushbutton 6 10 UPD INIT Pushbutton 6 11 Pushbutton Combinations 6 11 Equipment Indicators 6 12 FAULT Indicators 6 12 ACTIVE Indicators 6 12 Office Alarms 6 13 TL1 X 25 Interface 6 14 ITM SNC 6 14 IAO LAN Interface 6 15 User Definable Miscellaneous Discretes Environmental Alarms and Controls 6 16 Order Wire 6 18 7 Circuit P...

Page 9: ...ck Description 7 53 BBG2 22G2B MXRVO Circuit Pack Description 7 61 BBG4 BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Description 7 66 BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack Description 7 74 BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface Circuit Pack Description 7 84 BBG20 Transmultiplexer 7 91 Transmission Optical Interface 7 99 Universal Optical Connector 7 99 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7 103 22D U OLIU Circuit Pack Descripti...

Page 10: ...15 Feature Package Provisioning 8 16 Data Communications Channel DCC Provisioning 8 16 Operations Interworking OI Provisioning 8 17 Port State Provisioning 8 20 Channel State Provisioning 8 20 Line State Provisioning 8 21 AIS or Unequipped Provisioning 8 21 Cross Connection Provisioning 8 22 Cross Connection Types 8 23 Cross Connection Provisioning Commands 8 26 Allowable Cross Connects 8 27 OC 3 ...

Page 11: ...tection Isolation and Reporting 9 23 Detection 9 23 Isolation 9 23 Reporting 9 23 Protection Switching 9 24 Automatic Line Protection 9 24 Path Protection Switching Path Switched Rings 9 27 Dual Ring Interworking DRI 9 32 OC 3 OC 12 Path Switched Ring 0x1 9 34 OC 3 OC 1 Path Switched Ring 0x1 9 34 Status of ACTIVE LED on Rings 9 34 Equipment Protection 9 34 Synchronization Reference Protection 9 3...

Page 12: ... Parameter 9 57 Performance Monitoring Data Storage and Reports 9 59 Performance Monitoring During Failed Conditions 9 59 Performance Parameter Thresholds 9 59 TCA Transmission to OS 9 60 Performance Monitoring Reports 9 60 Reports 9 61 Alarm and Status Report 9 61 Provisioning Reports 9 61 Database Change Transmission to OS 9 61 Maintenance History Report 9 61 State Reports 9 62 Equipment Report ...

Page 13: ... Reliability 10 72 A A SONET Overview A 1 Overview A 1 History A 1 Basic Purpose A 2 Technical Overview A 2 SONET Signal Hierarchy A 2 SONET Layers A 4 SONET Frame Structure A 6 Section Overhead A 6 Line Overhead A 7 Path Overhead A 8 SONET Multiplexing Procedure A 10 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A 12 SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes A 14 Virtual Tributary Signals A 15 Concatenated Mode A 16 S...

Page 14: ...xiv Issue 3 June 2001 Contents GL Glossary GL 1 ...

Page 15: ...ort 2 13 2 9 Multinode OC 3 Ring With OC 12 Ring Transport 2 15 2 10 DDM 2000 OC 12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring 2 16 2 11 OC 12 Ring Transport STS 1 VT1 5 0x1 With FiberReach OC 3 Rings 2 18 2 12 Folded Ring Configuration 2 20 2 13 OC 1 Ring Transport on OC 3 Ring Configuration 2 22 2 14 DDM 2000 FiberReach Stand Alone OC 1 Ring 2 23 2 15 DDM 2000 FiberReach Single Homing to a Stand Alone OC 1 ...

Page 16: ...rworking Application 2 47 2 33 OC 3 Ring Interfaces with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System 2 48 2 34 OC 3 Linear Extension from FT 2000 Lightwave System 2 49 2 35 OC 3 Ring Interfaces with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System 2 50 2 36 Interworking of OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 with Tellabs TITAN 5500 DCS 2 51 2 37 Self Healing Medical Campus Network Application 2 54 2 38 LAN WAN Data Networking Using DS1 VT Cr...

Page 17: ...th an Optical Extension 3 14 3 7 DDM 2000 OC 3 VT STS Hairpin Shelf 3 15 3 8 DS3 Data Services in OC 3 Shelf 3 16 3 9 DDM 2000 OC 3 Dual Homing Shelf 3 17 3 10 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf 3 19 3 11 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing Topologies 3 20 3 12 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing with 26G2 U OLIU 3 21 3 13 OC 3 OC 12 Shelf with LAN Interface 3 22...

Page 18: ... Multiplexer with OC 12 Optics Block Diagram 5 9 5 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Block Diagram DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Single Homing 5 11 5 7 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Block Diagram FiberReach Stand Alone Host Configuration 5 13 5 8 Single Homing with 27G U Dual OC 1 OLIUs 5 15 5 9 OC 3 OC 12 Ring 0x1 Single Homing 5 17 5 10 OC 3 OC 12 Ring 0x1 Dual Homing 5 18 5 11 DS3 Data Services on an OC 3 Rin...

Page 19: ...5 5 24 DS1 Timing Output with Fiber Failure Sheet 1 of 2 5 48 5 25 OC 3 and FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Dual Homing DRI Configuration 5 51 5 26 OC 3 and OC 12 Dual Homing DRI Configuration 5 53 5 27 OC 3 and OC 1 External Line Timing 5 55 5 28 OC N Derived DS1 Timing Reference 5 57 5 29 Timing from Multiplexed DS1 5 59 6 Operations Interfaces 6 1 Craft Interface Terminal Connectors 6 4 6 2 Craf...

Page 20: ...uit Pack 7 44 7 18 HDSL Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 46 7 19 HDSL DIP Switch Settings 7 51 7 20 BBF9 BBF10 IMA LAN Circuit Pack 7 53 7 21 BBF9 BBF10 IMA LAN Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 57 7 22 IMA LAN Power Settings 7 60 7 23 BBG2 MXRVO Circuit Pack 7 61 7 24 BBG2 MXRVO Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 63 7 25 BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack 7 67 7 26 BBG4 BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 69 7 27 BBG4 B...

Page 21: ...4G U Pair with Interconnect Cable Assembly 7 127 7 46 24G U OLIU Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 130 7 47 26G2 U OLIU Circuit Packs 7 135 7 48 26G2 U OLIU Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 137 7 49 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Circuit Pack 7 142 7 50 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 145 7 51 Optical System Interfaces Points S and R 7 151 8 Administration and Provisioning 8 1 Locked Cross Connection 8 2...

Page 22: ... DS3 Maintenance Signaling Non Ring Interfaces 9 16 9 6 OC 3 or EC 1 Line Maintenance Signaling Non Ring Interfaces 9 17 9 7 Maintenance Signaling VT Ring Application 9 18 9 8 Maintenance Signaling VT Ring Application Unequipped 9 19 9 9 Maintenance Signaling VT Ring Application TMUX circuit pack 9 20 9 10 Maintenance Signaling STS Ring Application 9 21 9 11 Maintenance Signaling STS Ring Applicat...

Page 23: ... 3 Universal Optical Connector 10 50 A A SONET Overview A 4 SONET STS 1 Frame Simplified Version A 3 A 5 Section Line and Path Definitions A 4 A 6 SONET Frame Format A 5 A 7 VT Path Overhead Byte A 9 A 8 SONET Multiplexing Procedure A 11 A 9 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A 12 A 10 STS 1 Synchronous Payload Envelope in Interior of STS 1 Frame A 13 A 11 Asynchronous Multiplexing A 14 A 12 Synchrono...

Page 24: ...xxiv Issue 3 June 2001 Figures ...

Page 25: ... Synchronization Messages using S1 Byte 5 40 5 5 Available Synchronization References 5 41 6 Operations Interfaces 6 1 Craft Interface Terminals 6 3 6 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 Pushbutton Combinations 6 11 7 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 1 HDSL Line Specifications 7 47 7 2 DDM 2000 OLIU Feature Summary 7 101 7 3 29G U 29H U OLIU Specifications 7 152 7 4 29G U 29H U OLIU Link Budgets Notes 7 153 7 5 Performanc...

Page 26: ... 8 39 8 20 Ring STS 3c Cross Connections 8 39 8 21 Parameters Provisionable via Hardware Switches 8 70 8 22 Parameters Provisionable via the CIT 8 71 9 Maintenance Description 9 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 In Service Software Upgrade Compatibility Note 9 9 9 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Software Compatibility Note 9 10 9 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 FiberReach Software Compatibility 9 11 9 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multip...

Page 27: ... 10 18 OC 3 Rate OLIU Mixes Maximum Link Budgets for SM Fiber dB 10 44 10 19 OC 3 Rate OLIU Mixes Maximum Link Budgets for MM Fiber dB 10 46 10 20 Sparing Guidelines 10 48 10 21 Universal Buildout Attenuators 10 51 10 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 1 Transmission Delay in Microseconds 10 55 10 23 Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT 10 56 10 24 CIT Interface Pin Connections 10 58 10 25...

Page 28: ...Tables xxviii Issue 3 June 2001 A A SONET Overview A 34 SONET Transport Rates A 20 ...

Page 29: ...reports descriptions The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer User Service Manual TOP Volume II covers Release 15 0 and provides operation and maintenance O M task oriented practice TOP supporting acceptance turnup and maintenance Intended Audiences This user service manual is used by training and by the end users responsible for O M of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer It may be used by anyone desiring specific...

Page 30: ...1 VT1 5 0X1 when shelf is equipped with 29 Type 24 Type 22 Type OLIUs in MAIN slots and 22 Type OLIUs in FUNCTION UNITS slots DCC provisioning on MAIN slots for OC 3 OC 12 to allow a remote OC 3 shelf to interconnect through its MAIN ring interfaces with a 1 1 extension on a host OC 3 OC 12 or OC 48 shelf Provisioning of asynchronous CIT port to run TL1 as well as the provisioning of the synchrono...

Page 31: ...tions to support interworking with other vendor s equipment TARP is supported by multiple vendors When DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 15 0 use TARP for OI use transmission through non TARP NEs will not be affected Future releases of DDM 2000 FiberReach R4 0 FT 2000 R9 1 and SLC 2000 R4 7 will also be TARP compatible Impact The following items list some of the areas impacted by the implementation of TARP F...

Page 32: ...rt Lucent proprietary applications such as remote Craft Interface Terminal CIT login remote software download and remote NE to NE automatic time date synchronization at start up Subnetworks of up to 256 NEs will be supported using subnetwork partitioning into multiple Level 1 areas ...

Page 33: ...is not avoided The caution is also used for property damage only accidents This includes equipment damage loss of software or service interruption Other important safety instructions that you should read are in the Operation and Maintenance section of this manual Only trained personnel should perform the procedures in that section The alert symbol appears throughout this product and in this manual...

Page 34: ...energy that reaches the retina is approximately105 or 100 000 times that at the cornea and if sufficiently intense may cause a retinal burn The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in telecommunications is thermal in origin that is damage caused by heating Therefore a specific amount of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue Damage is not instantaneous It occu...

Page 35: ...er wavelengths and higher at the longer wavelengths However damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to stare at the energized fiber end CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure Safety Precautions for Enclosed Systems Under normal...

Page 36: ...vicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers Some examples of lightguide test equipment are OTDR s Hand Held Loss Test Sets and Feature Finders 3 Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test set without verifying that all lightwave sources on the fiber are turned off 4 All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate area of lightwave tra...

Page 37: ...it packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Observe warning labels on bags and cartons Whenever possible do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots If possible open all circuit packs at a static safe work position using properly grounded wrist straps and static ...

Page 38: ... themselves using wrist straps see Figure A while handling circuit packs or working on a shelf s The jacks for connection of wrist straps are located at the lower right hand corner of each shelf and are labeled When grounding jacks are not provided an alligator clip adapter enables connection to bay frame ground Figure A Static Control Wrist Strap To Ground Connection ...

Page 39: ...f power source indicated on the marking label For information on proper electrical distribution and power requirements refer to the Power and Technical Specifications sections of this user service manual 6 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never...

Page 40: ...vices providing primary or secondary protection as applicable 4 For information on proper mounting instructions consult 363 206 204 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Installation Manual 5 Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm 6 Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations 7 Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless the telecommunication l...

Page 41: ...ering product support reliability information technical specifications and a synchronous optical network SONET overview Number 363 206 201 Title DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer System Commands Quick Reference Audience Maintenance personnel Content Abbreviated list of system commands and parameters for DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers through Release 7 2 Number 363 206 204 Title DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Insta...

Page 42: ...plexer Circuit Pack Options Job Aid Audience Maintenance personnel Content List of circuit pack options Number 363 206 222 Title DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Multiplexer Acceptance Task List Job Aid Audience Maintenance personnel Content Checklist of acceptance and turnup procedures Number 363 206 223 Title DDM 2000 OC 12 Regenerator System Commands Quick Reference Audience Maintenance personnel Content Ab...

Page 43: ...t reliability information technical specifications and a synchronous optical network SONET overview Number 363 206 305 Title DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Narrowband TARP Shelf User Service Manual Audience Maintenance personnel Content Detailed description technical specifications and O M procedures for the DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Number 363 206 310 Title DDM 2000...

Page 44: ... information for the DDM 2000 Multiplexers DDM 2000 OC 3 Drawings ED 8C724 10 OC 3 and OC 3 OC 12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED 8C724 15 Cabling Plan Rear Access ED 8C724 16 Cabling Plan Front Access ED 8C724 20 Cable Assemblies ED 8C724 21 Cable Assemblies ED 8C724 30 DDM 2000 Shelf Assembly ED 8C724 31 User Panel Assembly ED 8C724 42 Release 13 Software Ordering ED 8C724 43 Release 15 Software Or...

Page 45: ...uide Number 363 208 001 Title SLC 2000 Access System User Service Manual Number 626 500 105 Title 80 Type Cabinets Ordering Information and Lettering Guide ED 8C724 10 OC 3 and OC 3 OC 12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED 8C727 10 Typical Bay Arrangements ED 8C727 15 Cabling Plan Rear Access ED 8C727 16 Cabling Plan Front Access ED 8C727 20 Cable Assemblies ED 8C727 21 Cable Assemblies ED 8C727 30 Shel...

Page 46: ...e Guide Number 365 331 000 Title DACS III 2000 Release 2 0 Applications Planning and Ordering Guide Number 365 340 800 Title DACS IV 2000 Release 5 0 Reference Manual Number 365 575 100 Title FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Applications Planning and Ordering Guide Number 636 299 120 Title LGXâ Distribution System Planning Engineering Installation and Operation System Reference Guide Title MegaStar ...

Page 47: ...als of operation of the DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Multiplexers Content General information about the DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers including a product overview applications and architecture Number LW2212 Title DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexer Applications and Architecture Audience Fundamental planners account executives and private telecommunications network technical consultants Content Gener...

Page 48: ...ns maintenance and provisioning of DDM 2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf On site shelves are used for extensive hands on experience Number LW2611 Title DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Self Paced Course Audience Technicians supervisors maintenance engineers and operation support personnel involved in DDM 2000 FiberReach network functions Prerequisite LW2212 LW2312 LW2603 or LW2608 Content Information ...

Page 49: ...interfaces using X 25 links to an operations center Number LW2618 Title Advanced Ring Network Applications Operations and Maintenance Audience Technicians supervisors maintenance engineers and operation support personnel involved in day to day operations of FT 2000 and or DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 rings having dual ring interworking DRI traffic Prerequisites LW2608 and LW2616 Content Information support...

Page 50: ... needs Preferred Standard and Basic Agreements The Preferred level of support guarantees 24 x 7 24 hour 7 day a week coverage of the customer s network Guaranteed performance commitments for response service restoration and problem resolution times are validated by published Service Performance Reports The Standard level of support guarantees 8 x 5 8 hour 5 day a week coverage Performance commitme...

Page 51: ...ghest Level of Support Enhancements RTAC Assistance Problem Diagnosis Isolation Consultation NETWORK SYSTEMS CUSTOMER Customer Escalation Procedures Design Modifications or Updates Provide Solutions Work Arounds LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES RTAC First Lucent Contact Supports Lucent Installer LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES TRANSMISSION CTS LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES BELL LABORATORIES ...

Page 52: ...Occasionally hardware software configuration problems arise when new software releases are issued The Compatibility Data tools permit users to view the correct hardware configuration associated with a specific software release The user simply enters the appropriate software release number and COACH responds with page formatted lists of circuit packs compatible with the selected software release Th...

Page 53: ...urning over a working system When the CS O organization provides job records and installs the equipment operationally affective changes to the system are automatically identified and applied to the system at no additional cost The Engineering and Installation Services group provides the customer with an individually tailored quality tested job that meets our published high standards and the custom...

Page 54: ...ndor troubleshooting Network Integration Preventive and remedial maintenance Hardware and software upgrade services On site maintenance programs Customized MOP Method of Procedure development For more information on Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support Services contact your Lucent Technologies Account Executive Documentation Support The Lucent Technologies Customer Training and Informati...

Page 55: ... IN 46219 Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 1 888 582 3688 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST FAX 1 800 566 9568 From Europe The Middle East Africa Toll 1 317 322 6416 From Canada the Caribbean Latin America Toll 1 317 322 6646 From Asia the Pacific Region China Toll 1 317 322 6411 Worldwide FAX 1 317 322 6699 RBOC BOC Process through your Company Documentation Coordinator For commercial customers a check money orde...

Page 56: ... document Please fill out the form and return it to the address stamped on the front of the form or fax it to the number provided on the form If the feedback forms are missing send comments on this document to Lucent Technologies Customer Training and Information Products 2400 Reynolda Road Winston Salem NC 27106 You may also report errors or request changes to this document by calling the toll fr...

Page 57: ...nologies Network Systems Account Executive or the Lucent Customer Information Center 1 888 LUCENT8 1 888 582 3688 The CD ROM Product Line Order Number for the All Access and Transport Products Grouping is 300 100 010 For technical information call Lucent Technologies Documentation Support 1 800 645 6759 ...

Page 58: ...363 206 285 About This Document lviii Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 59: ...tion Overview 1 1 Lucent 2000 Product Family 1 1 DDM 2000 Product Family 1 3 Introduction to the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer 1 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Releases 1 6 Release Descriptions 1 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Release 13 0 1 16 Release Description 1 16 ...

Page 60: ...1 ii Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 61: ...the Lucent Service Net 2000 Architecture Lucent s Service Net 2000 Architecture starts with the network as it exists today and provides real world solutions to build upon your existing base It also allows a graceful evolution from rigid wire centers to a network of flexible nodes This network distributes intelligence to where it functions best The Service Net 2000 Architecture offers access bandwi...

Page 62: ...the nerve center of interoffice transmission The intelligent DACS III 2000 and DACS IV 2000 Cross Connect Systems working with the ITM XM Controller can identify failed connections and reroute signals according to a preestablished recovery plan The Lucent 2000 Product Family includes the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Sy...

Page 63: ...with a complete DS1 interface product DDM 2000 FiberReach is a SONET product that is hosted by either a DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer or a SLC 2000 Access System The extension from the host node is an OC 1 signal in a ring topology The DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer operates at 51 84 Mb s The DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer can be used in DDM Plus applications where increased capacity and interworkin...

Page 64: ...plexer is used to reflect the DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexers Since many features functions and circuit packs are common among these multiplexers information generic to all multiplexers is presented with the DDM 2000 Multiplexer designation Information specific to a multiplexer is described with the DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 or DDM 2000 FiberReach designation a...

Page 65: ... single 8 5 inch high shelf supports a mix of DS1 DS3 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 EC 1 OC 3c STS 3c and IS 3 signal interfaces satisfying a wide range of lightwave terminal and SONET electrical multiplexer applications It supports point to point hubbing DS1 DS3 EC 1 add drop STS 1 drop applications ring networks and OC 1 extensions The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is designed for easy installation and operation ...

Page 66: ...persedes Release 5 0 from this release on odd feature numbers are for ring releases while even feature numbers are for linear releases and is a two fiber virtual tributary VT path switched ring release that requires the use of 22F OLIUs in the Main 1 and Main 2 slots of all shelves in the ring Time slots must be reserved all the way around the ring limiting the ring capacity to 84 DS1s The ring in...

Page 67: ...aces Release 6 1 and includes linear optical extensions from an OC 3 ring and an automatic synchronization reconfiguration feature Automatic synchronization reconfiguration provides the ability to automatically select another synchronization source and to automatically reconfigure the synchronization provisioning in the event of a synchronization source failure or a synchronization change in the n...

Page 68: ...ervice lines no protection lines are used between the OC 12 Multiplexer ring and the OC 3 Multiplexer ring Switching is not done on the DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer rather VT1 5 or STS 1 level switching is done at the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Enhanced DS3 PM provides a collection from the fiber or high speed interface of the DS3 parity bit P Bit and frame and multiframe F M bit ES SES and UAS to th...

Page 69: ... Requires FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 6 0 software OC 3 IS 3 linear extensions from OC 12 rings 1 1 linear OC 3 and IS 3 extensions from OC 12 rings Increased subnetwork sizes A DDM 2000 SLC 2000 subnetwork of 32 NEs A mixed DDM 2000 SLC 2000 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System OC 3 Release 7 2 subnetwork of 24 to 32 NEs New features Multiple Operations System OS Gateway Network Element GNE ...

Page 70: ...nly users increased from 50 to 100 Lockout of nonpriviliged users and log of all login attempts is provided Electrical facility loopbacks DS1 DS3 and EC 1 equipment loopbacks of the incoming low speed signal back towards the DSX STS path trace Provided in the J1 byte of the SONET path overhead to verify STS path continuity Allows labeling of STS 1s and retrieval of the path by the label For exampl...

Page 71: ...g mixed fiber and radio topologies MegaStar applications require the BBG10 OHCTL New Features S1 Byte synchronization messaging Uses the S1 byte of the SONET overhead to pass timing status information to different nodes in a loop timed network Synchronization messaging mode S1 byte or K2 byte is provisionable on a per OC N basis CPro 2000 ITM SNC Release 8 1 is supported by CPro 2000 Releases 5 0 ...

Page 72: ... 2000 systems via the TL1 X 25 link as an alternative to CIT commands New controllers The new BBG8 BBG8B and BBG9 controller circuit packs provide expanded memory and processing capacity needed to support large networks Feature enhancements available with the new controllers include Remote software download Software can be downloaded from a PC connected to a DDM 2000 SLC 2000 network element to ei...

Page 73: ... operating voltage to return Assuming an insufficient voltage level an L will be displayed on the SYSCTL SYSCTL optical faceplate latch An optical switch on the BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack latch causes a suspension of controller operations and an F to be displayed on the controller panel display when the latch is pulled Closing the latch causes a controller reset Release 9 1 is a ring release w...

Page 74: ... 2 2 and 4 0 27G2 U OLIU The new 27G2 U OLIU supports the new cross connects necessary to provide enhanced FiberReach topologies Release 11 0 is an enhanced ring release which provides all the features of Release 9 1 In addition Release 11 0 supports the following applications and features New Applications OC 12 high speed optics for OC 3 shelf Increases ring capacity by providing low speed DS1 an...

Page 75: ...elf Remaining traffic can be passed through on the OC 12 ring Data Services Interface A new DS3 circuit pack and cross connect software provide the DDM 2000 interface to an external LAN router ATM switch for providing Native Mode LAN or general data services via the SONET network Enhanced Software Download The software upgrade from Release 9 1 to 11 0 and later releases provides a software install...

Page 76: ...MXRVO Multiplexer or BBF5 Jumper circuit packs The 26G2 U provides OC 1 ring pass through OC 1 ring hairpin single homed and dual homed and OC 1 ring hairpin local drop applications Transmultiplexer DS3 path termination The new TMUX circuit pack BBG20 provides path termination functions for an M13 or C bit parity DS3 signal It demultiplexes the DS3 into 28 DS1s performs DS1 PM maps each DS1 into a...

Page 77: ... subnetworks of up to 256 NEs by partitioning into multiple areas connected via Level 2 Intermediate Systems ISs IntrAOffice LAN IAO LAN Provides an extension of the SONET DCC for operations data communications All NE to NE features supported over the DCC are supported over the IAO LAN Supports ITM SNC software download to DDM 2000 Supports ITM SNC as the TL1 GNE for DDM 2000 Stratum 3 timing gene...

Page 78: ...mote login and OS RTRV FECOM to report the provisioned state of each DCC equivalent to existing CIT command RTRV FECOM Release 15 0 is an enhanced ring release which provides all the transmission features of Release 13 0 In addition Release 15 0 supports the following applications and features New Applications IMA LAN Interface With the introduction of a new low speed circuit pack Release 15 0 pro...

Page 79: ...lves STS 1 and VT1 5 cross connections between MAIN slots equipped with the 29G U 29H U OLIU and FUNCTION UNITS slots providing a fully flexible assignment of VT and STS 1 timeslots out of any of the 12 STS 1s that are available on the 29 type OLIU In service upgrades to the new 29G U 29H U OLIU Stratum 3 timing generator circuit pack BBF4 The TG3 operates with an internal oscillator of 4 6 ppm lo...

Page 80: ...363 206 285 System Introduction 1 20 Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 81: ...Ring 2 18 Folded Ring 2 19 OC 1 Ring Transport on OC 3 Ring 2 21 Stand Alone OC 1 Ring Hub Networks 2 23 Dual Homing 2 25 OC 1 Ring Transport on OC 3 Ring 2 25 Dual Ring Interworking DRI 2 27 Dual Homing with DRI 2 33 OC 3 OC 12 Linear Optical Extensions from OC 3 OC 12 and FT 2000 Rings 2 34 Hairpin Cross Connections on Rings 2 35 Enhanced Routing 2 36 OC 1 Ring Pass Through 2 37 OC 1 Ring Hairpi...

Page 82: ...ions 2 52 Loop Feeder 2 52 Interoffice Transport 2 52 Broadband Business Access 2 53 LAN WAN Data Networking 2 55 Gateway Between SONET and Asynchronous Interfaces 2 59 Locked STS 3c 0x1 Broadband Services 2 60 Teleprotection and SCADA Applications 2 62 Intelligent Vehicle Highway System IVHS Applications 2 64 DS1 Performance Monitoring for Tariff Verification 2 66 DS3 Transmultiplexer TMUX Applic...

Page 83: ...part of this section Service Applications describes some of the many service applications that can be served with DDM 2000 Multiplexers Because the DDM 2000 Multiplexers are very flexible most of the service applications described in the second part of this section can be served with many of the network configurations described in the first part The particular network configuration used for a part...

Page 84: ...2000 Multiplexers also have Canadian Standards Association CSA Certification Standard C22 2 No 225 M90 Standard access node configurations are available in Lucent s 51A 80 type and 90 type BRT 2000 cabinets Fiber distribution of DS1 services is supported with the DDM Plus extension shelf or DDM 2000 FiberReach which allows mixing of DS1 line repeater interfaces for embedded metallic facilities and...

Page 85: ... Family offers a wide range of self healing network features that automatically protect against service outage caused by cable cuts and equipment failures which in turn protect customers and generate increased revenue These self healing features include flexible DACS based restoration with the ITM XM controller FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System two and four fiber rings DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 virtual...

Page 86: ...iving node the signal having the highest integrity based on SONET path information is selected and dropped as outgoing traffic At intermediate nodes the traffic is passed through without changing the SONET path information The DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 s VT1 5 STS 1 Time Slot Interchange TSI capabilities make the provisioning of add drop and pass through traffic quick and easy The self healing nature of...

Page 87: ...363 206 285 Applications Issue 3 June 2001 2 5 Figure 2 1 Path Switched Ring Node C Node A Node B Node D AC CA a Normal Operation Node A Node B Node D AC CA AC CA Node C AC CA b Path Failure SWITCH MADE ...

Page 88: ...1 ports and the high speed interface at each node The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer can easily adapt to unpredicted growth at a ring node Extensive equipment reuse between DDM 2000 OC 3 terminal add drop and ring nodes offers a significant operational advantage The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer ring shelf is the same shelf as used in terminal and add drop applications Also circuit packs can be retained wh...

Page 89: ...s System RT Site SLC RT 2000 OC 3 DS1 QUAD T1 2000 DS1 VF DS0 ISDN Access System SLC MSDT OC 3 DDM 2000 RT Site OC 3 DS1 DDM Plus VF DS0 ISDN OC 3 VT STS 1 TSI QUAD DS1 T1 OC 3 Central Office DDM 2000 RT Site OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 SLC DS1 MSDT R R R R DS1 EC 1 5ESS R etc Switch TO DACS IV 2000 DDM 2000 Fiber Reach DS1 OC 1 ...

Page 90: ...3 Multiplexer path switched ring DS3s EC 1s may also be carried between offices on DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Interoffice Ring VT1 5 STS 1 TSI Central Office DDM 2000 Central Office Central Office Central Office DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 R 5ESS Switch OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS1...

Page 91: ...STS 1 level STS 3c level for OC 3c traffic Such a ring provides an economical flexible and reliable solution for loop feeder networks Figure 2 4 OC 12 Path Switched Ring STS 1 Level Path Switching remote terminal DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM Plus DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 12 remote terminal OC 3c OC 12 remote terminal DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DDM Plus central office DDM 2...

Page 92: ... ring Figure 2 5 OC 12 Path Switched Ring Using OC 12 Multiplexer Mixed STS 1 and VT1 5 Path Switching DS1 DS3 STS 1E DACS IV 2000 5ESS Switch DS3 DDM Plus T1 QUAD DS1 DS1 ISDN VF DS0 DS1 MSDT VF DS0 ISDN Access System RT OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 RT Site Access System RT DDM 2000 OC 3 DS1 IS 3 IS 3 IS 3 IS 3 IS 3 IS 3 DDM Plus VF DS0 DDM 2000 DDM Plus OC 3 QUAD DS1 IS 3 ISDN T1 QUAD DS1 DS1 MSDT...

Page 93: ...other higher bandwidth STS path switched traffic while the OC 3 multiplexer is used at sites requiring VT path access for DS1 FiberReach etc Figure 2 6 shows an OC 12 ring that includes both OC 3 and OC 12 multiplexers Figure 2 6 OC 12 VT Path Switched Ring Using DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer With OC 12 Optics Alternatively a DDM 2000 FiberReach can be equipped with OC 12 optics This option offers a c...

Page 94: ...her bandwidth STS path switched traffic while the FiberReach multiplexer is used at sites requiring VT path access for DS1 T1 etc Figure 2 7 shows an OC 12 ring that includes both OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach multiplexers Figure 2 7 OC 12 Path Switched Ring Using DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and FiberReach Multiplexers With OC 12 Optics CO OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 T1 OC 1 DS3 OC 3c DS3 EC 1 OC 3c DDM 2000 OC 3...

Page 95: ...is spare fiber in place these high demand sites may be cut to a new OC 3 ring without interrupting service Alternatively driven by fiber exhaustion or evolution to customer DS3 services the OC 3 ring may be upgraded in service to an OC 12 ring In this configuration Figure 2 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer equipment is colocated with a DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer shelf to provide a unified VT1 5 path sw...

Page 96: ...T1 5 switching granularity across the entire OC 12 bandwidth at any node on the ring resulting in a full fledged VT1 5 path switched OC 12 ring The DDM 2000 OC 12 path switched ring can be used in conjunction with the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer by an access provider to provide OC 3 ring service on an OC 12 ring for end users It is becoming more frequent that a single end user desires a virtual priv...

Page 97: ...ltinode OC 3 Ring With OC 12 Ring Transport DDM 2000 OC 12 STS 1 Path Switched OC 12 Ring DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Single Homed OC 3 Ring Dual Homed OC 3 Ring ...

Page 98: ...d OC 3c transport Figure 2 10 DDM 2000 OC 12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 Central Office DDM 2000 OC 12 Central Office Central Office Central Office IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 R 5ESS Switch DS3 EC 1 OC 3 OC 3c DS3 EC 1 OC 3 OC 3c TO DACS IV 2000 R 5ESS Switch DS3 EC 1 OC 3 OC 3c TO DACS IV 2000...

Page 99: ...ime slots on the OC 12 ring Each OC 12 node can provision the same STS 1 time slots as other OC 12 nodes to drop to the OC 3 shelf to share STS 1s among several OC 3 shelves or the OC 12 node can provision different STS 1s at different sites With 0x1 operation the OC 12 ring passes the contents of these STS 1 time slots between the low speed OC 3 IS 3 lines and OC 12 high speed lines without termi...

Page 100: ...DDM 2000 OC 12 ring rather STS 1 VT level path switching is done elsewhere in the network Figure 2 11 OC 12 Ring Transport STS 1 VT1 5 0x1 With FiberReach OC 3 Rings OC 1 Path Switched Ring 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexers can be configured in an OC 1 path switched ring The path switched OC 1 ring is best suited for DS1 DS0 and broadband DDM 2000 OC 3 12 STS 1 Path Switched OC 12 Ring DDM 2000 O...

Page 101: ... benefits provide bandwidth flexibility ease the process of adding and deleting nodes and supply survivability against single node failures When route diversity is not available or fiber cable cuts are not a driving concern the two fiber path switched ring feature can be applied in a folded a folded ring is a single path ring configuration Figure 2 12 This use of DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and SLC 2000 a...

Page 102: ...tion OC 3 DDM Plus DDM 2000 OC 3 SLC 2000 T1 QUAD DS1 VF DS0 ISDN DS1 Access System RT SLC 2000 MSDT VF DS0 ISDN DS1 OC 3 RT Site OC 3 DACS IV 2000 Central Office DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 TO 5ESS RT Site DDM Plus VF DS0 RT DS1 SLC 2000 Access System T1 QUAD DS1 Switch etc DS1 EC 1 R R R R ...

Page 103: ...erReach node on the ring no additional fiber or host circuit packs need to be added With the dual OC 1 capability of the 27 type OLIU a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring node supports up to six single homed OC 1 extensions a SLC 2000 Access System ARM shelf can supply up to two single homed OC 1 extensions Thus competing businesses in the same serving area can receive a dedicated access facility into the backbon...

Page 104: ...berReach DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach RT Sites OC 3 OC 1 Wire Center Access System DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 1 OC 1 SLC 2000 DS1 EC 1 IS3 Up to 6 separate OC 1 extensions per DDM 2000 OC 3 Host Systems DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 Multiple nodes on a High Rise Fiber in the Riser ring ...

Page 105: ...be flexibly groomed and dropped at the host to a mix of DS1 EC 1 and OC 3 interfaces as shown in Figure 2 14 Channels can be established directly between two DDM 2000 FiberReach remotes on the same OC 1 ring This configuration would be very effective for customers within a short radius of the wire center or for isolated demand at a distant location where there is no appropriate access network yet ...

Page 106: ...s from a stand alone DDM 2000 SLC 2000 host system as shown in Figure 2 15 Figure 2 15 DDM 2000 FiberReach Single Homing to a Stand Alone OC 1 Hub Host DACS IV 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 EC 1 DS1 Wire Center DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 ...

Page 107: ...C 1 extensions from OC 12 rings are available in R11 using OC 12 optics in the OC 3 shelf The host nodes can be two DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 or two SLC 2000 Access Systems or one DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Multiplexer and one SLC 2000 Access System Path protection switching is employed for dual homed applications just like in single homed applications That is 60 millisecond path switching is supplied by the r...

Page 108: ...ach Dual Homing to a DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring DDM 2000 FiberReach Wire Center DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 RT Sites OC 1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 DS1 EC 1 IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 tpa 826720 01 ...

Page 109: ...e interconnecting nodes Typically such a topology is used to interconnect a loop feeder access ring to a higher bandwidth interoffice ring as shown in Figure 2 17 This architecture can withstand any single equipment or fiber failure in each of the rings or a failure which could range from a CO shutdown in the case of fire for example or equipment failure or failure of the facility connecting the t...

Page 110: ...e 2 17 Dual Access Configuration Network Access Network Interoffice Secondary CO Primary CO CO LAN Access System SLC 2000 RT DDM Plus Access System SLC 2000 Insurance Company Office Voice Data DDM Plus DDM 2000 BRT 2000 Bridge LAN T1 Server File BRT 2000 ...

Page 111: ...are in CO B and CO C Both nodes have the signal available to them at all times When a failure occurs the two terminating nodes and the two shared nodes switch so that traffic is carried through CO C and around the node failure Figure 2 18 Dual Ring Interworking Concepts DUAL RING INTERWORKING A Z A Z 1 DRI Configuration Two Rings Interconnected by Two Nodes 2 Circuit Originating and Terminating in...

Page 112: ...ry node and simultaneously continuing it on to the secondary node This capability is called drop and continue The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer allows DS1 signals to be multiplexed for handoff at an economical EC 1 or OC 3 rate in the COs Also the DDM 2000 OC 3 s flexible TSI can be used to prepackage all DRI protected DS1s into a single EC 1 for economical handoff to the OC 48 ring This capability al...

Page 113: ...ave System Dual Ring Interworking FT 2000 OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 12 FT 2000 OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 12 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 CO 2 CO 1 OC 48 OC 3 12 2 Fiber Bidirectional Line Switched Ring DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 OC 3 12 OC 3 12 DS3 EC 1 VT1 5 STS 1 drop continue EC 1 OC 3 EC 1 OC 3 ...

Page 114: ...mented at the edges of the network Signal redundancy is preserved on an end to end basis In offices where SONET interconnections are not available DS3 interfaces can be used between dual OC 12 offices This architecture is not recommended over the all SONET architecture since DS3 interface failures are potentially service affecting Figure 2 20 DDM 2000 Ring Interworking with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave...

Page 115: ... single 0x1 cross connections employed by the host In the dual wire center architecture the access network is also protected from a catastrophic failure of one wire center because the access and interoffice networks have duplicate points of interworking The DDM 2000 OC 3 systems in the two wire centers employ the drop and continue cross connection Figure 2 21 DDM 2000 FiberReach Ring Dual Homing t...

Page 116: ...ons are available on all NEs This gives the end user full control of performance monitoring PM data network reconfigurations and provisioning of the network OC 3 optical extensions can also be used to interconnect SONET subnetworks Examples include interconnection of two access networks and interconnection between access and interoffice rings Optical extensions can be used to interconnect OC 3 and...

Page 117: ... within an OC 3 signal rather than install another OC 3 shelf you can use the unused Function Unit slots in any other OC 3 shelf This type of cross connection does not use any time slots on the OC 3 ring itself Figure 2 22 also shows how hairpin cross connections can be used on a ring Hairpin cross connections can also be used in ring configurations with multiple optical extensions to provide a hu...

Page 118: ...C 1 capacity or up to an additional 168 VT1 5 channels For example a DDM 2000 OC 3 system with 22 type OLIUs in the main slots and 27G2 U dual OC 1 OLIUs in each function unit supports up to 168 VT1 5 channels 84 between high speed OC 3 and low speed OC 1 and another 84 channels that pass directly between this host s remote FiberReach system The OC 1 ring interconnection enhanced routing options u...

Page 119: ... the pass through cross connections that can be provisioned for rings terminating on main slots This allows traffic to be routed from one FiberReach node to another FiberReach node on the same OC 1 ring without using bandwidth on the OC 3 OC 12 ring Figure 2 23 OC 1 Ring Pass Through in a Function Unit RT HOST NODE DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 SLC R 2000 RT HOST NODE DDM 2000 SLC R 2000 DDM 2000 SLC R 2000...

Page 120: ...27G2 U OLIUs There may be a single pair of 27G2 U OLIUs that terminates both rings or one pair of 27G2 U OLIUs in each of two function units that terminates the rings Each rotation of one ring is cross connected to the corresponding rotation of the other ring This allows traffic to be routed from one FiberReach node on one OC 1 ring to any other FiberReach node on another OC 1 ring without using b...

Page 121: ...At the OC 3 shelf there may be a single 27G2 U OLIU that terminates both rings or a 27G2 U OLIU in each of two function units that terminates the rings The other rotation of each ring terminates on a different OC 3 shelf This allows traffic to be routed from one FiberReach node on one OC 1 ring to any other FiberReach node on another OC 1 ring without using bandwidth on the OC 3 OC 12 ring Figure ...

Page 122: ...outed from a FiberReach node on an OC 1 ring to a local drop without using bandwidth on the OC 3 OC 12 ring A mix of the enhanced routing services shown in Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 and Figure 2 26 can be created in a single DDM 2000 FiberReach host 27G2 U OLIUs are needed for these services Beginning with Release 13 0 the single OC 1 26G2 U OLIU with built in multiplexer capabilities fu...

Page 123: ...nning flexibility and network equipment savings Starting at the OC 3 rate the access network can be sized to maximize utilization with an easy upgrade to higher capacities like OC 12 A single 8 5 inch shelf provides OC 3 optical transport for a mix of DS1 and DS3 traffic Equipped in this manner the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is a low cost full function terminal The OC 3 point to point network Figur...

Page 124: ...une 2001 Figure 2 27 OC 3 Point to Point Topology Folded Ring SLC DDM Plus DS1 Series 5 RT QUAD DS1 T1 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Remote Terminal Site R DDM 2000 OC 3 Central Office 5ESS R DS1 EC 1 Switch DACS IV 2000 DS1 To DDM Plus Wall Cabinet DT ...

Page 125: ...g copper wiring in the building risers From a basement cabinet the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer and DDM Plus or DDM 2000 FiberReach provide direct DS1 service over this wiring to cabinets on the floors above Figure 2 28 Metro Application Copper in the Riser OC 3 OC 3 Protection Route DDM Plus Series 5 BRT 2000 DS1 SLC RT DS1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Basement Series 5 BRT SLC Series 5 RT BRT SLC RT METALLIC CUST...

Page 126: ...nterface into four standard DS1 signals Self healing needs can be met with cabled ring or diverse routing The OC 3 bandwidth to customer locations also positions the network to deliver higher bandwidth services such as video Figure 2 29 Metro Application Fiber in the Riser BRT Basement Series 5 SLC RT OC 3 DS1 OC 3 Protection Route DDM Plus BRT 2000 DS1 SLC Series 5 RT CUSTOMER LOCATION DDM Plus D...

Page 127: ...rminal site The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer provides economical and reliable access to the serving 5ESSâ switch The OC 3 capacity supports a growing campus as up to 84 DS1s 2016 voice channels can be provisioned as needed Figure 2 30 Campus CENTREX Configuration DS1 Series 5 RT SLC Protection Route DDM Plus DS1 DS1 5ESS OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Switch CENTREX BRT 2000 Customer Location C QUA...

Page 128: ...or more efficient and flexible network growth Figure 2 31 shows a business narrowband application using the DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer on an OC 1 path switched ring This application provides protected POTS ISDN and special services as well as DS1 services The ring host is a DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 remote node on an OC 3 OC 12 path switched ring via a SLC 2000 ARM or a DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Fi...

Page 129: ...th DDM 2000 Multiplexers and FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Systems Refer to 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi Vendor Operations Interworking Guide for more information Figure 2 32 Operations Interworking Application FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Ring OC 48 Line...

Page 130: ...June 2001 Figure 2 33 OC 3 Ring Interfaces with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System FT 2000 OC 3 OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 OC 3 Ring 0x1 OC 48 Linear 1 1 ...

Page 131: ...tension from FT 2000 Lightwave System Wavestar 2 5G and FT 2000 runing TARP needs R15 0 or higher of the DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 or OC 12 Linear 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 tpa853831 01 FT 2000 or WaveStar 2 5G WaveStar 2 5G and FT 2000 runningTARP needs R15 0 or higher of the DDM 2000 OC 3 ...

Page 132: ...es with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 CO 2 CO 1 OC 48 2 Fiber Bidirectional Line Switched Ring DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 VT1 5 STS 1 drop continue OC 3 IS 3 OC 3 IS 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 133: ...ers to offer more flexible services to generate revenues and improve overall network maintenance efficiency Figure 2 36 Interworking of OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 with Tellabs TITAN 5500 DCS TITAN is a trademark of Tellabs Inc OC 48 OC 12 OC 3 OC 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 1 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 tpa...

Page 134: ...ples include long span optics OC 12 regenerators easy capacity upgrades and full DS1 and DS3 add drop capability Interoffice applications include point to point stand alone SONET electrical multiplexing add drop path switched ring and DRI The DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers provide the following features for interoffice applications DS1 transport DS3 transport EC 1 transport OC 3c transport S...

Page 135: ... business relies on telecommunications the more important self healing networks become In particular finance medical transportation education and government users are insisting on a highly reliable network These users are also driving for higher bandwidth data and video services The large multisite medical facility shown in Figure 2 37 uses broadband services for intersite imaging and video needs ...

Page 136: ...Offfice DACS III 2000 FT 2000 OC 48 5ESS Switch DS3 BRT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Access Imaging Stations Data ISDN T1 Mux Voice PRI Access System BRT 2000 BRT 2000 RT BRI ISDN BRI System RT Voice data Main Hospital OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 Outpatient Facility OC 3c Main Frame Administration Center SLC 2000 R SLC 2000 R R Imaging Stations Broadband Terminal ...

Page 137: ...g demands for such LAN services The DS1s from the LAN circuit pack can also be multiplexed into a DS3 by a transmultiplexer TMUX circuit pack see Figure 2 39 and connected to an ATM edge switch that supports the IMA protocol for transmission over the ATM transport ATM transport network or a facilities ring SONET network Using such an approach DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers can provide the necessary tr...

Page 138: ...cations 2 56 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 2 38 LAN WAN Data Networking Using DS1 VT Cross Connections OC 3 12 ITM SNC DDM 2000 DS1 DS3 OC N DDM 2000 DS1 DS3 OC N 10 100BaseT LAN LAN 10 100BaseT DDM 2000 DDM 2000 L L A A N N ...

Page 139: ...Transmultiplexer Circuit Pack OC 3 12 OC 3 12 tpa 852266 03 LAN LAN 10 100BaseT 10 100BaseT DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 L A N L A N T M U X T M U X DS3 Channel DS3 Channel ATM Edge Switch ATM Edge Switch ATM The facilities network can be used instead of ATM transport network ITM SNC ...

Page 140: ...in the DDM 2000 function units connecting data edge devices with services such as Ethernet Token Ring ATM FDDI Frame Relay and others to the SONET access ring Figure 2 40 DDM 2000 Data Service with ATM Switch OC 12 3 STS 1 dedicated to ATM based data services DDM 2000 Ethernet LAN ITM SNC DDM 2000 DS1 DS3 OC N DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Ethernet LAN DS1 DS3 OC N DS3 DS3 DS3 SNMP agent over 10baseT...

Page 141: ...ultiplexers with Release 3 1 or later software This configuration is a specific application for interfacing DS1 signals at one end of a SONET system and DS3 interfaces at the other end NOTE A complete loss of CO 1 or CO 2 would protect the end to end path However unless there is a specific application requiring this gateway functionality it is recommended that DRI be done with standard SONET EC 1 ...

Page 142: ...erformed through the external ATM based router Figure 2 42 shows an STS 3c 0x1 application Each OC 12 node provisions the same dropped STS 3c time slot as other nodes on the same ring For different applications an OC 12 node can assign the other STS 3cs to different time slots at different sites With 0x1 applications the OC 12 ring passes the contents of these STS 3c time slots between the low spe...

Page 143: ...city is limited to the OC 12 line rate Figure 2 42 Locked 0x1 STS 3c Broadband Services Using DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer With OC 12 Optics OC 12 OC 12 ATM Switch B DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3c OC 3c OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 m1 m2 m2 m2 m2 m1 m1 m1 Fn c 1 Fn c 1 Fn c 1 Fn c 2 Fn c 2 Fn c 1 Fn c 2 Fn c 2 ATM Switch A ATM Switch D ATM Switch C OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c t...

Page 144: ...hm and provisioned as an unprotected path between any two nodes on the ring As shown in Figure 2 43 locked cross connection can be used to interconnect adjacent nodes all the way around SONET rings thereby permitting access to the DS1 at each SONET node Figure 2 43 shows a single DS1 locked between ring nodes but this can be extended to an arbitrary number of DS1s within the available SONET bandwi...

Page 145: ...n could be a DRI to provide node survivability Figure 2 43 Teleprotection and SCADA Application DS1s Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer HOST DDM 2000 OC 3 12 Ring OC 1 Ring Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer Power Grid Fiber Reach Fiber Reach DS1s Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer Drop Insert T1 Multiplexer DS1s D...

Page 146: ...carrying data between roadside equipment such as traffic counters speed sensors variable messaging signs video cameras toll taking equipment pay phones and call boxes and a traffic operations center where incoming data is processed and responses are generated The DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers provide a perfect backbone for carrying this information The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer SONET ring c...

Page 147: ...VF RS232 DT Shelf DS3 Encoder Matrix Switch Roadside Hub Roadside Hub OC 3 OC 12 Roadside Hub MSDT Local Controller RS 232 Loops Sensors etc Access Cabinet VF DDM 2000 OC 3 SLC 5 COT DDM 2000 DS3 Decoder DS1 NTSC Video OC 3 OC 12 Traffic Operations Center OC 12 VF RS 232 SLC 5 COT R Analog Video Optical Terminal Analog Video Optical Terminal ...

Page 148: ...s to the remote office and sends a message in the opposite direction of the ESF data link reporting these error statistics The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer receives this message and stores the information locally on its DS1PM circuit pack The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer does this continuously gradually building a repository of DS1 performance data on the link from location A to location Z This informat...

Page 149: ...on End to End DS1 Path Performance Data at OS Center OS Z to A PM A to Z PM DACS IV 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 CO B DACS IV 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 CO A OC 48 LAN Bridge Router M DS1s M DDM 2000 OC 3 Remote Office LAN Bridge Router M DS1s M DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM Plus DDM Plus DS1s BRT 2000 Company HQ OC 3 OC 3 Z A ...

Page 150: ...this feature In the transmit direction the TMUX accepts one DS3 signal and demultiplexes it into 28 DS1s Performance monitoring can then be performed on the DS1s before they are mapped into floating VT1 5s The 28 VT1 5s are then multiplexed into STS 1s before being sent to the high speed OLIU In the receive direction the reverse process takes place The TMUX circuit pack also provides enhanced DS3 ...

Page 151: ... 2000 FiberReach shelves Applications for business customers the private network cell sites PBXs customer premises equipment CPE and other applications are supported The BBF8 circuit pack fits into the low speed slots and provides two four wire HDSL interfaces Each interface provides a full DS1 payload capacity mapped to a SONET VT1 5 and then VT cross connected into an STS 1 Once in SONET the DS1...

Page 152: ...s 2 70 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 2 47 HDSL Application DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 tpa 852329 01 OC 3 12 Path Switched Ring DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Network Interface CPE DDM 2000 FiberReach HDSL H D S L HDSL Cell Site OC 1 ...

Page 153: ...al Ring Interworking DRI Shelf 3 13 OC 3 Ring Shelf with Optical Extension 3 14 OC 3 VT STS Hairpin Shelf 3 15 DS3 Data Services in OC 3 Shelf 3 16 OC 3 Dual Homing Shelf 3 17 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf 3 18 OC 3 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing 3 20 OC 3 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing with 26G2 U OLIU 3 21 LAN Interface 3 22 HDSL Interface 3 23 Transmultiplexer 3 24 DDM 200...

Page 154: ...3 ii Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 155: ... shelf measures 8 5 inches high by 21 25 inches wide by 12 inches deep and fits in a standard 23 inch wide bay User panels are interchangeable between shelves old in the new or new in the old Each shelf is a stand alone entity with its own fiber cabling and interfaces to DSX 1 DSX 3 STSX 1 office power and operations interfaces Cabling for office alarms craft interface terminal CIT interfaces and ...

Page 156: ...hese OLIUs are designated by a U The universal optical connectors are receptacles on the faceplate of the OLIUs that allow a single OLIU to support either STâ FC PC or SC connectors as needed A DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer shelf consists of the following 36 circuit pack slots 26 four inch slots 10 eight inch slots User panel Fully connectorized backplane Front and back covers ...

Page 157: ...ULT Lucent 2 3 4 GROUP A Lucent FAULT S1 1 BBF1B BBF1B S1 1 DS1 5 DS1 X X X X X X X X X X Lucent FAULT 1 S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 BBF1B BBF1B BBF1B C S1 1 S1 1 SYSCTL BBG9 OHCTL BBG8 FA 4 AUX CTL S1 1 FAULT DS1 BBF1B BBF1B 5 Lucent Lucent FAULT S1 1 BBF1B BBF1B S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 DS1 8 P X X X X X X X X X X Lucent FAULT Lucent FAULT Lucent FAULT S1 1 DS1 Lucent FAULT BBF1B BBF1B BBF1B BBF1B 6 B S...

Page 158: ...TX LAN BBF10 LAN Interface 100 BaseFX LAN BBG2 VT to STS 1 Multiplexer MXRVO BBG2B VT to STS 1 Multiplexer Enhanced MXRVO BBG4B DS3 Low speed Interface DS3 BBG5 System Controller SYSCTL BBG6 EC 1 Interface STS1E EC 1 BBG7 Overhead Controller OHCTL BBG8 BBG8B System Controller SYSCTL BBG9 Overhead Controller OHCTL BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface DS3 BBG20 Transmultiplexer TMUX 22F2 U OC 3 OLIU wi...

Page 159: ...ciated with the function unit s housing 27G U OLIUs Required in low speed slots 4 and 8 associated with function units s housing 27G2 U OLIUs Required for enhanced DS3 performance monitoring Replaces BBG4 Used in DDM 2000 FiberReach host shelves Requires Group 4 shelf For supplying 48V to low speed slots equipped with BBF9 BBF10 or BBF6 circuit packs Furthermore BBF9 BBF10 packs can be used with B...

Page 160: ...e next section of the shelf consists of two 8 inch slots reserved for control circuit packs The auxiliary control slot is reserved for a required overhead controller OHCTL circuit pack The system controller SYSCTL slot is reserved for the SYSCTL circuit pack The user panel mounted on the right side of the shelf consists of the following Two 48 volt fuses 5A Four alarm LEDs ACO TEST pushbutton cont...

Page 161: ...f Descriptions and Configurations Issue 3 June 2001 3 7 Figure 3 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Front Panel DDM 2000 OC 3 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations MN CR MJ PMN FE ACTY ACO PWR ON ABN NE CIT ACTY FB FA B A ...

Page 162: ...y filled OC 3s 6 single homed or 12 dual homed OC 1 extensions or a mix with other services not to exceed the OC 3 shelf capacity In a linear add drop configuration this capacity may be utilized in any combination of low speed inputs as follows 56 DS1s 28 DS1s and 1 DS3 or EC 1 2 DS3s or EC 1s 2 OC 3s System growth proceeds in a modular fashion Capacity can grow in increments of 4 DS1 signals up t...

Page 163: ...h shelf configuration requires a SYSCTL and OHCTL circuit pack to provide the basic maintenance feature set single ended operations SEO data communication channel DCC processing and the TL1 X 25 interface A synchronous timing generator TGS circuit pack distributes a common clock to the transmission circuit packs and is required for all configurations A protection TGS circuit pack is recommended Eq...

Page 164: ...BF2B circuit pack optionally provides DS1 timing outputs It is recommended for rings to minimize protection switching times in case of a manual circuit pack removal Signal degrade protection switching requires 22D U or 22G U 22G2 U or 22F2 U OLIUs The BBF3 is the DS1PM circuit pack which can be used in place of or mixed with the BBF1 1B If mixed within a low speed group the protection circuit pack...

Page 165: ...h of these configurations Due to cable congestion it is recommended that no more than four BBG19s be used per shelf A G4 shelf or G3 to G4 Fron Cover Modification Kit is required Note The following circuit packs require the G4 Shelf or G3 to G4 Front Cover Upgrade Kit 24G U OLIU 27G U 27G2 U OLIUs 26G2 U OLIU always requires G4 Shelf for backplane compatibility and BBG19 DS3 Additionally the G3 to...

Page 166: ...g capacity must not exceed 84 DS1s The shelf can be used in an OC 12 VT1 5 path switched ring 0x1 application Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Shelf D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 6 7 D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 2 3 4 D S 1 5 D S 1 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M X R V O M X R V O 1 1 A B S Y S C T L U S E R A N E L P AUXCTL S...

Page 167: ...elf can also support MXRVOs and DS3 interfaces for non DRI circuits DRI traffic can be interconnected using 22 type OLIU circuit packs in the function unit slots Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 DRI Shelf D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 6 7 D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 2 3 4 D S 3 D S 3 1 D S 1 5 D S 1 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M...

Page 168: ...tical extension capability Optical extensions can also be provided from function unit A Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Shelf With an Optical Extension D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 6 7 D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 2 3 4 D S 3 D S 3 1 D S 1 5 D S 1 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M X R V O M X R V O 1 1 1 A B S Y S C T L U S E ...

Page 169: ...s cross connections between Function Units B and C when equipped with 22 type OLIUs STS1E or DS3 circuit packs The hairpin feature keeps local VT STS traffic from being placed on the OC 3 ring This increases the usable bandwidth on the OC 3 ring and may remove the need to add additional OC 3 shelves Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Fig...

Page 170: ...rs are required for use in function units A B or C However up to six BBG19s can be installed connecting customer data edge devices with services such as Ethernet Token Ring ATM FDDI Frame Relay and others to the OC 3 ring Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 8 DS3 Data Services in OC 3 Shelf C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U 1 1 1 A B...

Page 171: ... OLIUs in the Function Unit In this application two DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves are hosting one or two DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 rings Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 9 DDM 2000 OC 3 Dual Homing Shelf D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 6 7 D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 2 3 4 1 D S 1 5 D S 1 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M X R V O M X R V O 1 1 1 A B S Y S C T...

Page 172: ...s Using 27 type dual OC 1 OLIUs in the Function Units a single OC 3 shelf can support up to six OC 1 extensions in a single homing arrangement the 27 type OLIUs must be equipped in pairs When fully loaded with six 27 type OLIUs the OC 3 shelf can support up to 12 OC 1 extensions in a dual homing arrangement for a maximum capacity of 84 DS1s Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the sh...

Page 173: ...TL SYSCTL 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P O H C T L Timing Main Group A Group B Group C Low Speed S Y S C T L u s e r p a n e l Main Low Speed D S 1 P D S 1 D S 1 P D S 1 D S 1 P D S 1 Function Units D S 1 P D S 1 A B C D Group 2 6 G U O L I U 2 6 G U O L I U C A B Function Units OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf O L I U 2 7 G O L I U 2 7 G U U 2 2 O L I U 2 2 O L I U DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf ...

Page 174: ...shows a host shelf that is equipped for the OC 1 Ring Hairpin Local Drop application Equipping the main slots with 24 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 11 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing Topologies 1 T G 2 T G 1 1 1 1 S Y S C T L U S E R A N E L P AUXCTL SYSCTL 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P O H C T L Timing Main Group A Group B Group C Low Speed S Y S C...

Page 175: ... Local Drop applications The Group 4 shelf is required Figure 3 12 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing with 26G2 U OLIU 1 T G 2 T G 1 1 1 1 S Y S C T L U S E R A N E L P AUXCTL SYSCTL 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P O H C T L Timing Main Group A Group B Group C Low Speed S Y S C T L u s e r p a n e l Main Low Speed D S 1 P D S 1 D S 1 P D S 1 D S 1 P D S 1 Function Units D S 1 P D S 1 A B C D Gro...

Page 176: ...ass it on to the BBG2Bs These interfaces provide for either electrical or optical LANs A maximum of three LAN circuit packs are allowed per LOW SPEED GROUP Both FUNCTION UNITS slots must be equipped with MXRVO circuit packs Mixing with DS1 DS1PM or T1EXT circuit packs is allowed within the same LOW SPEED GROUP Equipping the main slots with 22 type 24 type 27 type or 29 type OLIUs support a LAN int...

Page 177: ...time there is a limit of three HDSL circuit packs per function unit including the Protection slot Future enhancements will increase this capacity Equipping the main slots with 24 type or 29 type OLIUs allows the shelf to provide an OC 12 ring interface Figure 3 14 OC 3 OC 12 Shelf with HDSL Interface 6 7 2 3 4 1 5 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M X R V O M X R V O 1 1 1 A B S Y S C T L U S E R A ...

Page 178: ...1 payload envelope s using SONET asynchronous mapping The STS 1 path overhead and pointer bytes are added and the resulting signal is sent to the high speed OLIU circuit pack In the receive direction the reverse process takes place The STS 1 signal s from the OLIU circuit pack goes through STS 1 pointer interpretation path overhead is removed and processed and the twenty eight VT1 5s are stripped ...

Page 179: ...00 Fan Shelf Figure 3 16 provides forced convection cooling to DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves in uncontrolled environments Figure 3 16 DDM 2000 Fan Shelf POWER B J1 Miscellaneous Alarm Cable Ground A ALARM RESET TEST FAN FAULT 3 4 2 1 FAULT CONTROL FAULT FILTER REPLACE POWER ON POWER RESET A B Rear View Front View ...

Page 180: ...2000 Fan Shelf can cool two DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves The fan shelf is 3 9 inches high by 9 3 inches deep by 21 2 inches wide and weighs 25 pounds Mounting brackets can be attached in three positions to accommodate both front and rear access installations in different bay frames The fan shelf is fully accessible from the front for service and maintenance When the front cover is removed the four fan un...

Page 181: ...r one or both 48 V power feeders fail Alarm and power cable openings are provided for both rear and front access installations A ground stud is provided on the left rear of the fan shelf to meet the UL grounding requirements for rear and front access applications Two ground cables are provided with the fan shelf one 6 inch cable for rear access applications and one 18 inch cable for front access a...

Page 182: ...elf alarm interface is not activated Four red FAN FAULT LEDs indicate faults in each of the four independent fan units The red FILTER REPLACE LED indicates that it is time to replace the filter The red CONTROL FAULT LED indicates a fault in the fan shelf monitoring and control system The red POWER FAULT LED indicates a failure in one of the 48 V power feeders The green POWER ON LED indicates that ...

Page 183: ...ower Description 4 2 Circuit Packs 4 3 OLIU Circuit Packs 4 3 TG Circuit Packs 4 3 DS3 TMUX Circuit Packs 4 3 STS1E Circuit Packs 4 3 MXRVO Circuit Packs 4 3 DS1 DS1PM HDSL T1EXT LAN Circuit Packs 4 3 Control Circuit Packs 4 4 LEDs 4 5 Power Minor Alarm 4 5 Power Distribution 4 6 ...

Page 184: ...4 ii Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 185: ... the circuits within the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer are generated by DC to DC converters mounted on circuit packs within the shelf The information in this section is for typical applications only Refer to Section 10 Technical Specifications 801 525 168 DDM 2000 Floor Plan Data Sheets and T 82046 30 Power Systems DC Distribution Circuit for Digital Transmission System for proper engineering of batte...

Page 186: ... modules are located on the TG OLIU MXRVO OHCTL SYSCTL STS1E and DS3 TMUX circuit packs The power converter on the MXRVO STS1E circuit pack in the Function Unit slots also provides power to the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs located in the corresponding multiplexer group Figure 4 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Power Architecture U 48V A FUSE 48V FUSE B GROUP A O 2 O TGS 1 D S 1 1 D S 1 1 2 5 6 2 P C FUNCTION UNITS D S ...

Page 187: ... 48 volts to these converters via diode ORed circuits and a fuse mounted on each of the circuit packs The converters provide 5 volts DC power for the DS3 TMUX circuit packs STS1E Circuit Packs 4 The STS1E circuit packs are powered by 48 volt to 5 volt DC to DC converters located on the circuit packs The backplane power feeders supply A and B 48 volts to these converters via diode ORed circuits and...

Page 188: ...ack Each MXRVO STS1E power converter can support the load of all DS1 DS1PM HDSL circuit packs in the group a condition that occurs if there is an MXRVO STS1E circuit pack failure NOTE If any DS1PM HDSL LAN circuit packs are used in a Function Unit group both Function Unit slots must be equipped with MXRVO STS1E circuit packs Requirements for equipping both Function Unit slots prevent the potential...

Page 189: ... be operated via the 48 volt power leads The 48 volt power leads are supplied through an electronic gate or relay contact normally held open by the converter The power fusing and LED circuits shown in Figure 4 2 are used on all circuit packs with on board DC to DC converters Figure 4 2 Circuit Pack Power and LED Control Power Minor Alarm 4 A yellow power minor PMN alarm LED is provided on the user...

Page 190: ...ly Consult 801 525 168 DDM 2000 Floor Plan Data Sheets and T 82046 30 Power Systems DC Distribution Circuit for Digital Transmission System for proper engineering of battery plant and feeders Figure 4 3 Typical 48 Volt Power Supply for DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Single Shelf RTN A RTN B 48 V A 48 V B 48 V A RTN A RTN B 48 V B 12 GA To DDM 2000 Shelf NOTE NOTE Feeder size is selected per T82046 30 a...

Page 191: ...ss Through 5 23 OC 1 OC 1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring 5 24 Synchronization Interfaces 5 28 Timing Modes 5 28 Free Running 5 28 Line Timing 5 28 DS1 External 5 29 Holdover 5 29 DS1 Output Modes MULT and SYNC OUT 5 29 DS1 Output Mode MULT 5 29 DS1 Output Mode SYNC OUT 5 30 Synchronization Messaging 5 34 Applications 5 35 Feature Details and Options 5 39 Examples 5 42 Dual Homing DRI Synchronization C...

Page 192: ... Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents OC 3 and OC 12 5 52 OC 3 and OC 1 External Line Timing 5 54 Network Timing Distribution 5 56 Interoffice Timing Distribution 5 56 Access Network Timing Distribution 5 58 ...

Page 193: ...on interfaces Table 5 1 summarizes the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer transmission interfaces for the current software release Table 5 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Transmission Interfaces Application Ring R13 0 R15 0 DS1 Low Speed X X DS3 Low Speed X X DS3 Data X X EC 1 Low Speed X X IMA LAN X IS 3 X X OC 3 X X OC 1 X X OC 12 X X 24 type and 29 type X X 24G U OLIU only ...

Page 194: ...onous optical network SONET standard multiplexing refer to Appendix A On the low speed side each group of 28 DS1 signals map into 28 asynchronous floating mode VT1 5 signals The VT1 5 signals are combined into seven VT groups and then multiplexed to one STS 1 signal A DS3 signal maps directly to an STS 1 signal via the asynchronous mapping An EC 1 or OC 1 signal is converted to an STS 1 signal Thr...

Page 195: ...Function Function Unit Unit 2 P 2 P 1 1 STS 1 STS 1 7 6 MXRVO MXRVO DS1 2 P 1 STS1E STS 1 STS 1 1 2 P Receive Clocks to the TGSs 1 2 P Main External Reference Inputs Receive Clocks from the Main OLIUs 1 tpa832481 01 2 P DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs Intrashelf Timing to Main and Function Unit Slots Timing Control SYSCTL OHCTL TGS DS3 DS3 EC 1 OLIU Note Note 21 type 22 type or 24 type OLIU OC 3...

Page 196: ...n in Figure 5 2 In this application STS 1 signals are routed between the main slots and the function group slots For both STS 1 drop and hubbing applications default STS 1 routing is provided based on circuit pack equipage with other routing options supported through provisioning The OC 3 Multiplexer also supports an optimized interface the IS 3 to the DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer This is implemente...

Page 197: ...3 Unequipped 2 5 4 3 1 28 DS1 OC 3 VT G Low Speed 8 P 7 6 SYSCTL MXRVO STS 1 OC 3 STS 1 1 1 1 OHCTL Function Unit Receive Clock Control 2 P Main OC 3 2 P 2 P 2 1 2 P Timing Receive Reference Inputs DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs TG Timing to Main DS1 External Clocks from OLIUs Lucent Intrashelf and Function Unit Slots Position OLIU Note OLIU Note ...

Page 198: ...S 1 1 1 VT G 1 STS 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 8 P DS1 OC 3 OC 3 Unit Low Speed OC 3 OC 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 1 28 DS1 Function OC 3 1 Receive Clock 2 P OC 3 Main SYSCTL OHCTL Control 1 2 P Timing Receive Reference Inputs DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs and Function TG Timing to Main DS1 External Clocks from OLIUs Lucent Intrashelf Unit Slots OLIU Note OLIU Note OLIU Note ...

Page 199: ... combination can be added dropped from the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer self healing ring at any node Because of the ring s path protection scheme time slots must be reserved all the way around the ring for all ring traffic limiting the capacity of the ring to the OC 3 line rate Like the add drop topology the TSI feature offers full flexibility in assigning signals between low speed DS1 DS3 EC 1 or O...

Page 200: ...1 DS1 VT G Function Unit 2 P 1 STS 1 MXRVO DS3 DS1 Function Unit 2 P 1 STS 1 STS 1 3 1 2 P OC 3 OC 3 Receive Clocks to the TGs 1 2 P Function Unit Main 1 2 P DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs Intrashelf Timing to Main and Function Unit Slots Timing Control SYSCTL OHCTL TG DS1 28 DS3 OLIU Note 1 OLIU Note 1 Note External Reference Inputs Receive Clocks from OLIUs OC 3 or OC 12 OC 3 or OC 12 1 22 or...

Page 201: ...re dropped can contain any combination of VT G EC 1 or DS3 signals routed to the function units Figure 5 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer with OC 12 Optics Block Diagram Low Speed 8 P 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DS1 VT G DS1 28 Function Unit 2 P 1 STS 1 7 MXRVO DS1 2 P 1 STS1E STS 1 STS 1 1 Receive Clocks to the TGSs 1 2 P Main External Reference Inputs Receive Clocks from the Main OLIUs 1 2 P DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Refere...

Page 202: ... 5s Enhanced routing hairpin connections between OC 1 rings terminating on function unit slots do not consume bandwidth on the ring supported by the OLIUs in the main unit slots This increases the total capacity of the shelf beyond the 84 VT1 5s supported by the main unit OLIUs The 27 type OLIU circuit pack interfaces between two 1310 nm OC 1 optical lines in the transmit and receive directions It...

Page 203: ...LIUs 1 2 P DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs Intrashelf Timing to Main and Function Unit Slots Timing Control SYSCTL OHCTL TG 1 2P OLIU Note 2 STS 1 OLIU Note 1 OC 1 Notes 1 2P OLIU Note 2 STS 1 OC 1 1 2P OLIU Note 2 STS 1 OC 1 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Function Unit Function Unit Function Unit 1 22 or 24 type OLIU 2 27 type OC 1 OLIU One direction of two independent OC 1 rings 3 One or two STS 1s Shel...

Page 204: ...dard SONET overhead is added on each OC 1 interface transmitted by the 27 type OLIU In the receive direction the 27 type OLIU processes the SONET overhead monitors the received signals for parity errors loss of signal line and path AIS etc performs standard STS 1 or VT1 5 path switching as required and routes the signals to any function unit In both directions of transmission the two OC 1 ring int...

Page 205: ... DS1 VT G Function Unit 2 P 1 STS 1 MXRVO DS3 DS1 Function Unit 2 P 1 STS 1 STS 1 3 1 2 P OC 3 OC 3 1 2 P Function Unit Main 1 2 P DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 Reference Outputs Intrashelf Timing to Main and Function Unit Slots Timing Control SYSCTL OHCTL TG DS1 28 DS3 OLIU Note 1 OLIU Note 2 Note External Reference Inputs Receive Clocks from OLIUs OC 1 OC 1 OC 1 OC 1 1 27 type OLIU 2 22 type OLIU tpa 851644 0...

Page 206: ... the OC 1 ring interfaces and interfaces in the function unit slots and route signals between function unit slots When used in the function unit shelf positions the 27 type can route signals from the OC 1 ring interfaces to the main slots 27G2 U OLIUs route signals between OC 1 interfaces in the same or different function unit slots In DDM 2000 FiberReach host applications using the DDM 2000 OC 3 ...

Page 207: ...e 3 June 2001 5 15 Figure 5 8 Single Homing with 27G U Dual OC 1 OLIUs OUT OUT OUT OUT OC 1 Ring Extension 1 OC 1 Ring Extension 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 OC 3 FN 1 FN 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach IN IN IN IN ...

Page 208: ...ing is done on the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer This allows DDM 2000 OC 3 nodes running ring software to interface with DDM 2000 nodes of an OC 12 ring in such a way as to provide ring on ring architecture Each OC 3 ring so supported occupies up to three STS 1 time slots on the OC 12 ring Each OC 12 node can provision the same STS 1 time slots as other OC 12 nodes to drop to the OC 3 shelf to share S...

Page 209: ...e 3 June 2001 5 17 Figure 5 9 OC 3 OC 12 Ring 0x1 Single Homing O L I U TSI 21 Type OLIUS O L I U DDM 2000 OC 12 Shelf DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 Main 1 22 Type OLIU Main 2 22 Type OLIU Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main B 2 Main B 1 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 210: ... Homing O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main B 2 Main B 1 OC 3 OC 3 O L I U O L I U Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main B 2 Main B 1 21 Type OLIUS 22 Type OLIU 22 Type OLIU DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 Shelf DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Shelf TSI 21 Type OLIU ...

Page 211: ...DS3 Data Services Interface circuit pack to connect to data edge devices providing access to the SONET ring for ATM Ethernet Token Ring FDDI Frame Relay and other data services Figure 5 11 DS3 Data Services on an OC 3 Ring O L I U O L I U Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main 2 Main 1 DS3 DS3 BBG19 BBG19 DATA SERVICES DEVICE tpa 852254 01 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf ...

Page 212: ...ath protection switching is done on the DDM 2000 FiberReach shelf In single homing the DDM 2000 FiberReach ring interconnects through the ring interface with the low speed OC 1 0x1 interface on a single OC 3 shelf In dual homing the OC 1 ring interconnects with the OC 1 0x1 interfaces on two separate and normally non colocated OC 3 shelves Different function unit slots on the two shelves must be u...

Page 213: ...faces Issue 3 June 2001 5 21 Figure 5 12 OC 3 OC 1 Ring 0x1 Single Homing O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main 2 Main 1 DS1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26G U OLIU 26G U OLIU 27 type OLIUs ...

Page 214: ...C 1 Ring 0x1 Dual Homing O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main 2 Main 1 27G U OLIUS DS1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26G U OLIU 26G U OLIU O L I U O L I U Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN 1 FN 2 Main 2 Main 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 27G U OLIU ...

Page 215: ...on unit pass through connection consumes no bandwidth on the ring supported by the OLIUs in the main slots Figure 5 14 shows an example of this configuration Figure 5 14 OC 1 Ring Function Unit Pass Through O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 FN 2 DS1 DDM 2000 Fiber Reach Shelf OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Main 1 Main 2 Main OLIUs required for Function Unit Pass through c...

Page 216: ... OC 1 ring terminate on a pair of 27G2 U OLIUs in the same function unit In the dual homing cases each rotation of an OC 1 ring terminates on a 27G2 U OLIU in a function unit in a different OC 3 shelf Figure 5 15 OC 1 OC 1 Function Unit Hairpin Ring Inter Function Unit Single Homing O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 FN 2 OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 F...

Page 217: ... 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 FN 2 OC 1 OC 1 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU FN 2 O L I U O L I U DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf FN 1 FN 2 FN 1 FN 1 Main OLIUs required for hairpin cross connects Main 1 Main 2 Main 2 Main 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf tpa 851669 01 26G2 U or 27G2 U OLIUs 26G2 U or 27G2 U OLIUs 26G2 U or 27G2 U OLIUs 26G2 U or 27...

Page 218: ...nit Single Homing O L I U O L I U Main 1 Main 2 27G2 U OLIUs OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 FN 2 OC 1 OC 1 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 tpa 851670 01 Main OLIUs required for hairpin cross connects Main 1 Main 2 DS1 T1 DS1 T1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf ...

Page 219: ...in 1 Main 2 FN 2 OC 1 OC 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Main 1 Main 2 FN 1 FN 2 OC 1 OC 1 26 type OLIU 26 type OLIU Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 O L I U O L I U DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf FN 1 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU Main 1 Main 1 Main 2 Main 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf DDM 2000 FiberReach Shelf DS1 T1 DS1 T1 Main OLIUs required for hairpin cross connects tpa 851671 01 ...

Page 220: ...he reference signal feeding the PLL is selected from the internal oscillator or a line timing clock derived from the incoming optical line In line timing mode the OC N line being selected for transmission is also selected as the timing reference In addition the OC 3 line in function unit C selected for transmission can optionally be selected for the timing reference This selection is under the con...

Page 221: ...ple DDM 2000 Multiplexers are installed in a network bay frame a single pair of DS1 timing references from the building integrated timing supply BITS can be used to externally synchronize all shelves in a bay This unique feature reduces the number of BITS output ports required to externally synchronize multiple DDM 2000s thus minimizing network costs Each DDM 2000 provides two sets of DS1 input an...

Page 222: ... This external reference typically comes from a BITS In line timing SYNC OUT mode the DDM 2000 will use a selected optical reference for synchronization The derived DS1 is carried to the BITS by a special SYNC OUT cable which is capable of externally timing the DDM 2000 if the DS1 external SYNC OUT mode is selected See 363 206 200 DDM 2000 Multiplexer Applications Planning and Ordering Guide for c...

Page 223: ...ee Running DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Loop Timed a Free Running Loop Timing Configuration CO Small CO or RT DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Loop Timed CO Clock Source Stratum 3 or better RT DS1 Timing Output BITS Clock b External Timing Loop Timing Configuration Optional BBF2B DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 tpa 820926 01 OC N OC N TG TG TG TG ...

Page 224: ...nteroffice applications A DDM 2000 network may have all DS1 references traceable to a primary reference source PRS called synchronous operation or multiple PRSs called plesiochronous operation The PRS is equipment that provides a timing signal whose long term accuracy is maintained at 10 11 or better with verification to universal coordinated time time and frequency standard maintained by the U S ...

Page 225: ... 3 or better Stratum 3 or better DS1 DS1 External Clock CO DDM 2000 DDM 2000 CO Clock Source Stratum 3 or better Stratum 3 or better May be Plesiochronous DS1 DS1 External Clock CO DS1 Timing Output Optional BBF2B d External Timing Plesiochronous BBF2B DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 c External Timing At Both Ends Configuration OC N OC N tpa 820927 01 TG TG TG TG ...

Page 226: ...rs provide a synchronization messaging feature to ensure the integrity of network synchronization during both normal and abnormal conditions Through the use of synchronization messaging the current quality of the timing source can be conveyed from one DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer to the next NOTE If the DDM 2000 is used in a multi vendor environment certain synchronization options may need to be exer...

Page 227: ... a local BITS failure the quality of the DS1 timing output at the slave office will now be traceable directly to the DDM 2000 Multiplexer If the master DDM 2000 system contains a TG3 circuit pack stratum 3 accuracy will be maintained indefinitely This provides acceptable timing for stratum 3 NEs at slave offices If the master DDM 2000 contains a TGS circuit pack stratum 3 accuracy will be maintain...

Page 228: ...ver or switch to an alternate reference Figure 5 20 DS1 Timing Output Dual Homing Linear BITS DDM 2000 DS1 CO PRS Traceable DDM 2000 loop timed RT DDM 2000 loop timed DDM 2000 OC N OC N OC N Normal BITS CO DS1 Failure Recovery RT BITS DDM 2000 DS1 CO PRS Traceable DDM 2000 RT DDM 2000 loop timed DDM 2000 OC N OC N OC N BITS CO DS1 RT holdover AIS PRS Traceable PRS Traceable BITS DDM 2000 DS1 CO PR...

Page 229: ...g network in Figure 5 20c normal operation includes an external timing reference at each of the COs The RT sites are each line timed from the CO DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers on the left If a fiber failure occurs between the first two DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers the automatic synchronization reconfiguration feature will cause the line timed DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers to change their direction of line ...

Page 230: ...ging is that it helps prevent provisioning errors Provisioned timing loops on the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers will be quickly detected through the synchronization messaging algorithm and prevented by forcing a shelf into holdover The system can then be reprovisioned correctly PRS Traceable BITS Normal DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 PRS Traceable BITS DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Sync Flow DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 20...

Page 231: ...ther OC N interfaces that are enabled for synchronization messaging the appropriate message indicating the quality of its timing and its active timing mode Table 5 3 and Table 5 4 list the associated internal timing status and DS1 output states that are associated with synchronization messages received from the OC N interface when synchronization messaging is enabled The tables list the messages f...

Page 232: ...uality of the reference signal will be transmitted instead for example Stratum 1 When the DDM 2000 OC 3 system is configured for external timing and its DS1 output port is provisioned for SYNC OUT mode the Timing Looped Back TLB message for K byte or Don t Use message for S byte will be sent on the OC N interfaces towards the NE from which the DS1 timing output is being derived The SQU message for...

Page 233: ...nce take precedence This feature guarantees the non revertive operation of reconfiguration The line timing reference is provisioned by the set sync command The existence of automatic synchronization reconfiguration does not change the system s behavior on traditional line failures for example LOF LOP LOS and others There are synchronization references in the DDM 2000 OC 3 system that can be provis...

Page 234: ...e recovery from a fiber failure Through these examples one can extend the same concept to any other network that may include different topologies number of sites failure locations and number of BITS clocks NOTE All nodes in a ring using automatic synchronization reconfiguration must have the synchronization messaging and automatic synchronization reconfiguration features enabled to prevent alarms ...

Page 235: ...valid to be used Automatic synchronization reconfiguration is not an option for externally timed DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Multiplexers therefore a change in the synchronization message will not cause an automatic synchronization reconfiguration The stratum level of the BITS clock at the CO Site A must be equal to or better more accurate than the stratum level of the BITS clocks used at the other sites ...

Page 236: ...ble the synchronization status messages are not used All other non host nodes will track the holdover clock at site B Although no timing loops have been formed the timing of all non host nodes will differ from the host node by the accuracy of the holdover clock at site B Figure 5 22 Synchronization Reconfiguration Externally Timed Access Ring Sheet 2 of 2 SQU SQU SQU DDM 2000 Site A DDM 2000 Site ...

Page 237: ...nchronization messaging and automatic synchronization have both been enabled for this network In Figure 5 23b a fiber has been cut between sites A and B Immediately the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer at site B enters holdover and sends out the internal clock IC message to site C The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer at site B cannot switch to line time from site C because it is receiving the TLB message on tha...

Page 238: ...DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is receiving the SQU message from site A it will switch to line time from site A because SQU is higher quality than IC After the switch occurs the TLB message is sent back to site A and the SQU message is retransmitted to site C Figure 5 23 Synchronization Reconfiguration Access Ring Sheet 2 of 3 PRS Traceable BITS DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 PRS Traceable BITS Sync Flow S...

Page 239: ...age is a better quality message than the internal holdover capability so the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer at site B switches to line time from site C After the switch occurs the TLB message is sent back to site C and the SQU message is forwarded to site A When the failure clears the synchronization remains in the new configuration unless it is manually switched back Figure 5 23 Synchronization Reconf...

Page 240: ...ent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where it is valid to be used The TLB message is sent to indicate where line timing has been used and thus where using that timing would create a timing loop Synchronization messaging has been enabled for this network but automatic synchronization reconfiguration has not been enabled Figure 5 24 DS1 Timing Output with Fiber Failure S...

Page 241: ...er switch to an alternate reference if available or enter holdover If the automatic synchronization reconfiguration feature had been enabled in this example at this point sites C and B would attempt to switch line timing directions to retime from site D Figure 5 24 DS1 Timing Output with Fiber Failure Sheet 2 of 2 BITS Sync Flow DDM 2000 DS1 CO PRS Traceable DDM 2000 RT DDM 2000 DDM 2000 BITS CO D...

Page 242: ...T 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System must be provisioned to write stratum 3 synchronization message to the K2 byte so the DDM 2000 ring can use synchronization messaging The two DDM 2000 OC 3 DRI nodes coordinate timing using synchronization status messages on the OC 3 ring so that all nodes will accept timing in the same direction The two DDM 2000 OC 3 DRI nodes must be provisioned for line timing with ...

Page 243: ...OC 3 and FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Dual Homing DRI Configuration OC 3 DDM 2000 FN C External Clock Stratum 3 or better FT 2000 FN C OC 3 DDM 2000 FN C External Clock Stratum 3 or better FT 2000 DDM 2000 FN C OC 48 OC 3 Path Switched Ring DDM 2000 Sync Messaging Disabled Timing Direction ...

Page 244: ...00 OC 3 DRI nodes coordinate timing using synchronization status messages on the OC 3 ring so that all nodes will accept timing in the same direction The two DDM 2000 OC 3 DRI nodes must be provisioned for line timing with timing derived from function unit C Synchronization messaging on the OC 3 span between the two OC 3 DRI nodes must be disabled so timing loops are not formed Synchronization mes...

Page 245: ... and OC 12 Dual Homing DRI Configuration OC 3 DDM 2000 FN C External Clock Stratum 3 or better FN C OC 3 DDM 2000 FN C External Clock Stratum 3 or better DDM 2000 FN C OC 3 Path Switched Ring DDM 2000 Sync Messaging Disabled Timing Direction OC 12 Path Switched Ring DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 ...

Page 246: ...he local DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer times its transmitted signals at the low and high speed interfaces from the internal oscillator that is locked on the external reference The remote DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer recovers timing from the incoming OC N signal and unidirectional timing path and uses this timing for its transmitted signals This timing configuration is also recommended for multispan...

Page 247: ... Interfaces Issue 3 June 2001 5 55 Figure 5 27 OC 3 and OC 1 External Line Timing TG DDM 2000 OC 3 OLIU DDM 2000 FiberReach OLIU DDM 2000 FiberReach OLIU DDM 2000 FiberReach Line Timed Line Timed Line Timed External Clock active timing direction ...

Page 248: ...he network timing Interoffice Timing Distribution 5 One way SONET can be used to improve the quality of interoffice network timing is through the use of OC N timing distribution DDM 2000 OC 3 supports the evolution to interoffice OC N timing distribution by providing a DS1 timing output derived from the incoming OC N signal The DS1 timing output is traceable to the clock source that times the DDM ...

Page 249: ...better more accurate than the stratum level of the BITS clocks used at the RT site This is necessary to maintain the stratum level hierarchy Figure 5 28 OC N Derived DS1 Timing Reference OC N timing distribution has several potential advantages It preserves transport bandwidth for customer services and guarantees a high quality timing signal Also as the CO architecture evolves to replace DSX inter...

Page 250: ... configuration it is important that the DS1 reference to the DDM 2000 OC 3 in the CO be traceable to the same clock used to source the DS1s being carried to the customer site or small CO If it is not slips may occur Although an ideal source of timing OC N timing distribution via a DS1 timing output cannot be used to provide timing in all applications In cases where the local equipment is not provi...

Page 251: ...ude passing synchronization from the public switched network to a PBX based private network Figure 5 29 and synchronizing an end office remote switch to a larger office s host switch Figure 5 29 Timing from Multiplexed DS1 DDM 2000 DS1 Customer Network RT PBX External Clock Stratum 3 or DDM 2000 Better DS1 CO DS1 DS1 Carrying Data and Used as a Timing Reference OC N tpa 814268 01 TG TG May be a TG...

Page 252: ...363 206 285 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces 5 60 Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 253: ...2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool 6 8 User Panel 6 8 User Panel LEDs 6 10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6 10 ACO TST Pushbutton 6 10 UPD INIT Pushbutton 6 11 Pushbutton Combinations 6 11 Equipment Indicators 6 12 FAULT Indicators 6 12 ACTIVE Indicators 6 12 Office Alarms 6 13 TL1 X 25 Interface 6 14 ITM SNC 6 14 IAO LAN Interface 6 15 User Definable Miscellaneous Discretes Environmental Alar...

Page 254: ...6 ii Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 255: ...d indicators Equipment status indicators Office alarms TL1 X 25 interface to an alarm surveillance OS such as Telcordia s Network Monitoring and Analysis NMA Operations Systems Intelligent Network Elements OPS INE and Lucent Technologies ITM SNC Integrated Transport Management SubNetwork Controller IntrAOffice LAN IAO LAN interface for use with ITM SNC User definable miscellaneous discrete environ...

Page 256: ... and administrative activities The CIT can be either an RS 232 D terminal or personal computer PC An MS DOS PC is required for software download and to run CPro 2000 software Any PC may function as a CIT when loaded with a commercially available terminal emulation program See Section 10 Technical Specifications for PC specifications Table 6 1 lists some of the terminals and PCs that can be used wi...

Page 257: ...rademark of AT T Was Teletype 5425 or ATTIS 4425 These MS DOS MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation PCs were tested with PROCOMM PROCOMM is a registered trademark of Datastorm Technologies Inc terminal emulation software for maintenance Other terminal emulation software may also work properly CTRM software is required for software downloads and is supplied with the DDM 2000 OC ...

Page 258: ...he rear access CIT interface CIT 2 is configured as data terminal equipment DTE to allow a permanent modem connection without requiring a null modem However a null modem is required when connecting a CIT directly to the rear access DTE interface CIT access via a modem connection is identical to local CIT access Figure 6 1 Craft Interface Terminal Connectors Front View S U CIT Rear View CIT L E N A...

Page 259: ...ine context sensitive help is always available to help the technician through command execution The output messages and reports are presented in easy to read sentences and tables The following functions are provided via the CIT interfaces for the local and remote DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer shelves Loopbacks and testing Protection switching Performance monitoring PM Provisioning Fault management Sof...

Page 260: ...sion 3 0 or later on an MS DOS PC The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer uses flash erasable program memory EPROM devices that can be upgraded through direct download from an MS DOS PC Upgrades are made available through the distribution of floppy disks compatible with the recommended PCs Modem Access 6 The rear access CIT interface CIT 2 is configured as DTE to allow a permanent modem connection without r...

Page 261: ...tem using the data communications channel DCC over OC N interfaces or the IAO LAN The DDM 2000 OC 3 system supports one incoming remote login session and one outgoing login session over the DCC at a time For example a local user can gain remote access to a remote DDM 2000 in the same subnetwork at the same time a remote user at another DDM 2000 in the subnetwork can gain remote access to the local...

Page 262: ...ne options In response to a user the tool automatically compiles and sends all the necessary commands to perform a task If the user is provisioning cross connections for example the tool automatically prevents provisioning errors by comparing the new provisioning information with the ring inventory For more information see 365 576 130 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 7 0 See Section 10 Technical Spec...

Page 263: ...0 0 0 CR MN MJ NE ACTY S1 1 S1 1 SYSCTL USER PANEL BBG9 BBG8 OHCTL FA FB LEDs Fault 48V A Fuse 48V B Fuse Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Power Minor Alarm ACO LED Test Abnormal Near End Activity Far End Activity 7 Segment Display Far End Select Pushbutton Update Initialize Pushbutton Craft Interface Terminal Connector Ground Jack Power On A A Power On B B PWR ON ACO TST ...

Page 264: ...0 the FE SEL pushbutton allows technicians to see far end DDM 2000 conditions from the local shelf In TARP Release 13 0 when the FE SEL pushbutton is pushed for the first time the FE ID display shows L and the user panel LEDs show the conditions of the local shelf only Each time the FE SEL pushbutton is pushed again within 15 seconds the FE ID display will show the local shelf address with the dec...

Page 265: ...on the controller panel display when the latch is pulled Closing the latch causes a controller reset Pushbutton Combinations 6 The three pushbuttons described previously are used in combinations to perform seven functions These functions listed in Table 6 2 are used as part of the procedures described in the TOP section of this manual Volume II Table 6 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 Pushbutton Combinations Funct...

Page 266: ...l or signal degrade threshold The FAULT LED on the BBG9 OHCTL blinks when a failure of the DCC from a far end shelf is detected ACTIVE Indicators 6 A green ACTIVE indicator is provided on each 1x1 0x1 and 1 1 protected circuit pack It indicates which circuit packs service and or protection are active carrying service at any given time Although there is no ACTIVE LED on each low speed circuit pack ...

Page 267: ... be activated unless a condition of greater duration than the alarm hold off delay occurs When a failure clears an alarm clear delay prevents premature clearing of the alarm As with the user panel indicators when multiple alarms are active the highest level office alarm audible and visual is activated When the highest level alarm clears the office alarm bumps down to the next highest level active ...

Page 268: ... a TL1 X 25 GNE for Tellabs TITAN R5 0 The GNE serves as a single interface to the OS for the Lucent NEs in the same Lucent 2000 Product subnetwork using X 25 interfaces The GNE receives operations information from all the Lucent NEs through the DCC and reports this information as well as its own information to the OS The operations information is in the form of TL1 messages Through the GNE the OS...

Page 269: ...e for operations data communications The IAO LAN is necessary to support the following ITM SNC R5 0 features ITM SNC as the TL1 GNE for DDM 2000 ITM SNC software download to DDM 2000 Because the IAO LAN is effectively an extension of the SONET DCC the IAO LAN may also be used to join multiple otherwise separate subnetworks All NE to NE OI features that are supported by DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 and OC 1...

Page 270: ...nput Four control points are provided to control equipment pumps generators etc at remote terminal sites When activated the control points provide a contact closure between the control point output and ground OS access to all miscellaneous discretes alarm status points 1 through 21 is provided via TL1 X 25 Figure 6 4 shows OS access to miscellaneous discretes through the DDM 2000 Multiplexer at th...

Page 271: ... 4 Miscellaneous Discretes Fan Control Output Misc Control Outputs 1 3 4 2 Fan Unit 2 3 4 5 Remote Terminal Misc Alarm Status Inputs Input Common 1 Central Office 48V External Minor 21 cabinet 48V Power Minor 6 7 8 9 16 15 Output Common CIT or TL1 X 25 tpa 852346 01 ...

Page 272: ...00 OC 3 shelves connected to each other via OLIUs in the Main slots In multi span applications order wire communication is available only between the CO and the first RT The BBG10 OHCTL provides enhanced order wire capability intended for MegaStar applications Six 64Kb s overhead channels E1 E2 and F1 from two OLIUs are multiplexed onto a DS1 interface for connection to an external Channel Service...

Page 273: ...iption of Operation 7 4 BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary 7 9 BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack Description 7 10 Purpose of Circuit 7 10 Faceplate Indicator 7 10 General Description of Operation 7 12 Detailed Description of Operation 7 12 BBG9 OHCTL Quick Reference Summary 7 14 Synchronization 7 15 Synchronization Functions 7 15 BBF2B BBF4 TGS TG3 Circuit Pack Description 7 15 Purpose of Circuit 7 1...

Page 274: ...ceplate Indicator 7 33 General Description of Operation 7 35 Detailed Description of Operation 7 35 DS1PM Hardware Settings 7 39 DS1PM Quick Reference Summary 7 40 177A Retainer Card Description 7 41 Purpose of Card 7 41 BBF5 Jumper Circuit Pack Description 7 43 Purpose of Circuit 7 43 BBF8 High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line 7 44 Purpose of Circuit 7 44 HDSL Faceplate Indicator 7 44 General Des...

Page 275: ... BBG4B DS3 Quick Reference Summary 7 73 BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack Description 7 74 Purpose of Circuit 7 74 STS1E Faceplate Indicators 7 74 General Description of Operation 7 76 Detailed Description of Operation 7 78 STS1E Hardware Settings 7 81 STS1E Quick Reference Summary 7 81 BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface Circuit Pack Description 7 84 Purpose of Circuit 7 84 BBG19 DS3 Faceplate Indicators 7 8...

Page 276: ...late Indicators 7 111 General Description of Operation 7 112 Detailed Description of Operation 7 113 22D U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7 116 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7 118 Purpose of Circuit 7 118 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 118 General Description of Operation 7 120 Detailed Description of Operation 7 120 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU ...

Page 277: ... OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7 140 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7 141 Purpose of Circuit 7 141 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 141 General Description of Operation 7 143 Detailed Description of Operation 7 143 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7 148 Long Reach OC 12 Interface 29G U 29H U 7 150 ...

Page 278: ...7 vi Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 279: ...ller SYSCTL BBG9 overhead controller OHCTL Synchronization circuit pack BBF2B timing generator TGS BBF4 timing generator 3 TG3 Transmission circuit packs BBF1 BBF1B DS1 low speed interface DS1 BBF3 BBF3B DS1 performance monitoring DS1PM BBF8 high bit rate digital subscriber line HDSL BBG2 BBG2B VT to STS 1 multiplexer MXRVO BBG4 BBG4B DS3 low speed interface DS3 BBG6 EC 1 high speed and low speed ...

Page 280: ... of the signal transmission through the DDM 2000 OC 3 All system features are implemented or supported through the control system However transmission is unaffected by control system failure If a controller does fail protection switches are not done Therefore if there is another circuit pack failure requiring a protection switch along with the controller failure service may be affected depending o...

Page 281: ...8B SYSCTL must be used with the BBG9 OHCTL BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL Faceplate Controls and Indicators 7 The BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate controls and indicators are shown in Figure 7 1 The SYSCTL has a red FAULT LED and a 7 segment numeric LED display as well as the FE SEL and UPD INIT pushbuttons on its faceplate The red FAULT LED lights on detection of a circuit pack failure Figure 7 1 BBG8...

Page 282: ... 7 Processor 7 Figure 7 2 provides an overall block diagram of the SYSCTL circuit pack This processor is the highest level processor in the system Memory 7 Program Flash EPROM 7 The main program is stored in the flash EPROM which combines the nonvolatility of EPROM with the in circuit reprogramming ability of electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programm...

Page 283: ...Fault Timer Processor 7 Segment LED Display FE and Update Initialize Buttons User Panel LED s and ACO Button Office Alarms Fan Control Power Monitor Power Circuit Interface User Interfaces Memory Intrashelf Control Internal Interfaces Main Processor Bus Intershelf Control Sanity 48 V A 48 V B Miscellaneous Discretes Inputs Outputs ...

Page 284: ... 3 Transport Overhead Channel 7 The OHCTL terminates an overhead channel from each main and function unit slot in the shelf passing information to the SYSCTL over the intra shelf processor bus Power Monitoring and Fan Control 7 The SYSCTL monitors the two 48 volt feeders and generates an alarm if one fails It also monitors AC power in a RT application via a PMN alarm input closure and can control ...

Page 285: ...rces of 48 volts which are diode ORed fused and filtered prior to conversion to a 5 volt source to power the rest of the circuit pack A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting 7 The BBG8 BBG8B has two hardware switches Switch 1 S1 for Product Identification see Figure 7 3 and Switch 2 S2 for TBOS Termination used with Release 11 1 and e...

Page 286: ...1 The switch is set by moving the slide toward the desired position 2 The FAULT LED will also light if the companion OHCTL is not inserted Figure 7 3 BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL Option Switches S1 1 2 ON OFF ON S1 Edge Connector Component Side S2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF ON S2 3 ...

Page 287: ...craft interface automatically provisioned to 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19 200 baud Provides interface for all advanced provisioning PM administration and maintenance activities User Panel 7 Alarm and status indicators Controls Miscellaneous Discrete Functions 7 Miscellaneous discrete functions provided by the SYSCTL are as follows Miscellaneous discrete environmental alarms and control Maintenanc...

Page 288: ...it pack is used in conjunction with the DDM 2000 OC 3 BBG8 BBG8B system controller SYSCTL It provides overhead channel interfaces for the system Faceplate Indicator 7 The OHCTL circuit pack faceplate indicator is shown in Figure 7 4 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack failure The red FAULT LED flashes in the event of a SONET DCC failure ...

Page 289: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Issue 3 June 2001 7 11 Figure 7 4 BBG9 OHCTL Circuit Pack FAULT x x S1 1 x x x BBG9 OHCTL ...

Page 290: ...each main and function unit slot The overhead channel includes a 192 kb per section DCC SONET bytes D1 D3 and a 64 kb s order wire channel SONET byte E1 User Definable Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls 7 The system provides four miscellaneous discrete control outputs and 21 miscellaneous discrete alarm status inputs when the DDM 2000 OC 3 is configured as a RT For this appli...

Page 291: ... Orderwire Channel Overhead Processors Overhead To From Main And Function Unit Slots Service And Protection Messages Main Processors Processor Bus To From Miscellaneous Discrete From Shelf 48V Fuses To From Equipment Co located Memory Control SYSCTL SYSCTL Operations Center To From SONET To From SONET Transport tpa 813446 01 Intra shelf Inter shelf ...

Page 292: ...his capability BBG9 OHCTL Quick Reference Summary 7 Functions 7 Major functions of the OHCTL circuit packs are as follows SONET overhead communications channel interface to OLIU circuit packs An X 25 message based OS interface External order wire interface Inventory information CLEI code date of manufacture etc Intra office IAO LAN interface DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 and OC 12 R7 0 support an IntrAOffic...

Page 293: ...timing and DS1 Output timing to be derived from either the main or function unit C OLIU The timing circuit packs distribute clock and frame signals derived from the selected reference source to the transmission circuit packs The BBF4 circuit pack provides stratum 3 accuracy while the BBF2B provides stratum 4 accuracy BBF2B BBF4 TGS TG3 Circuit Pack Description 7 Purpose of Circuit 7 The synchronou...

Page 294: ...ction of circuit pack hardware failure or improper switch settings The red FAULT LED flashes in the event of an incoming DS1 timing reference failure The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is providing timing to the rest of the shelf Figure 7 6 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack A TIV C E Lucent TGS S1 1 FAULT x x x x x BBF2B A TIV C E Lucent TG3 S1 1 FAULT x x x x x BBF4 ...

Page 295: ...ine formerly loop timing mode the TG circuit pack derives local shelf timing from the received OC N signal In addition the timing function can also be derived from an OLIU equipped in function unit C This option is only available through software provisioning In free running mode the TG circuit pack derives timing from a high stability temperature compensated voltage controlled crystal oscillator ...

Page 296: ...ctions as well as controlling the faceplate LEDs Figure 7 7 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram PLL Digital Internal Oscillator Output Drivers Outputs Timing 48V A 48V B From Fuses Timing Select From Companion TGS Cross coupled Reference Mode Line Timing References DS1 Output Source Select DS1 Interface DS1 Output Mode Xmit DS1 Interface PLL To From SYSCTL To Next Shelf or BITS Clock...

Page 297: ...ming Free Running 7 For free running operation the TG derives timing from a temperature compensated voltage controlled crystal oscillator TCVCXO and a digital phase locked loop DPLL with a full temperature range end of life accuracy of 15 parts per million ppm for the BBF2B TGS and 4 6 ppm for the BBF4 TG3 DS1 Output 7 The DS1 output port of the TG circuit pack can be provisioned for either MULT o...

Page 298: ...sioned to output a buffered copy at a DSX level of the DS1 signal at the input port A DS1 traceable source is applied to the first DDM 2000 shelf The output of the first shelf is then cabled to the second shelf and all subsequent shelves fed from the previous ones In this way a MULT chain is formed from a single DS1 reference The MULT capability is only available for a DDM 2000 provisioned for ext...

Page 299: ...converter causes the red FAULT LED to light TG Hardware Settings 7 The TG circuit pack option switches provide the following functions DS1 Reference Line Coding Selects either alternate mark inversion AMI or AMI with bipolar 8 zero substitution B8ZS line coding for both DS1 input and DS1 output DS1 Reference Format Selects either super frame SF or extended super frame ESF for both DS1 input and DS...

Page 300: ... BBF2B BBFY TGS circuit pack Figure 7 8 TG Option Switches for DDM 2000 OC 3 Sheet 1 of 2 Notes 1 The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position 2 If the invalid switch setting is selected the FAULT LED lights and an alarm is generated 1 2 3 4 ON OFF S1 5 1 2 3 ON OFF S2 Edge Connector Component Side ...

Page 301: ...ESF ON OFF Note Controls line coding and frame format for both DS1 input and output Factory default TG Timing Mode Switch Settings Timing Mode Switch Settings S1 3 S1 4 S1 5 DS1 Output Free Running ON ON OFF DS1 External MULT Mode OFF ON OFF Line Timing Main ON OFF OFF Line Timing SYNC OUT Mode ON OFF ON DS1 External SYNC OUT Mode ON ON ON Invalid OFF OFF ON Invalid OFF OFF OFF Invalid OFF ON ON F...

Page 302: ...C 3 line is the factory default Line formerly loop timing for function unit C can be provisioned with the CIT Holdover Mode 7 The holdover mode maintains the last good reference frequency during unprotected failure of external or line formerly loop timing references Maintenance and Control 7 The following maintenance functions are provided on the TG circuit pack a DS1 reference monitoring b TG and...

Page 303: ...smission circuit packs are the DS1 DS1PM HDSL MXRVO DS3 TMUX and STS1E BBF1 BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Description 7 Purpose of Circuit 7 The DS1 circuit pack provides a low speed interface between asynchronous DS1 rate signals and SONET virtual tributary group VT G signals DS1 Faceplate Indicator 7 The DS1 circuit pack FAULT indicator is shown in Figure 7 9 This red FAULT LED is lit by the SYSCTL on ...

Page 304: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 26 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 9 BBF1 BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack FAULT AT T x x S1 1 DS1 x x x BBF1B ...

Page 305: ...eaves the four VT1 5s to create a VT G signal that it sends to the MXRVO STS1E pack using the frame sync and clock received from the MXRVO STS1E Receive Direction 7 The DS1 receives a VT G with clock and frame information from the MXRVO STS1E and demultiplexes the VT G into four unique VT1 5 signals Each VT1 5 passes through circuitry that performs pointer interpretation removes the VT path overhe...

Page 306: ...o VT 1 5 Processor Adds Removes VT OH LBO DS1 to VT 1 5 Processor Adds Removes VT OH DS1 to VT 1 5 Processor VT OH To From DSX 1 VT OH VT 1 5 VT 1 5 VT 1 5 VT 1 5 DS1 1 DS1 2 Prot Sw Bus To From Loopback Loopback Loopback Prot Sw Bus To From Byte Interleave Disinterleave Control 5V Power To From SYSCTL Circuit Pack Prot Sw Bus To From Intrashelf To From MXRVO STS1E CPs Service Protection From MXRV...

Page 307: ...uit pack s The DS1 protection switch points are implemented with on board relays on the DSX 1 side and with logic selectors at the VT G level on the active and standby MXRVO STS1E circuit packs The SYSCTL controls these relays through two serial interfaces so that a failure of one serial interface to the DS1 does not prevent control of the relays If 5 V power on the DS1 fails the relays default to...

Page 308: ...X DEMUX DESYNC device and bridges the desynchronizer output signal transmitted towards the DSX 1 back to the DS1 synchronizer input When the loopback is operated the DS1 interface device forces AIS towards the DSX 1 The DS1 circuit pack also provides a facility loopback for all four DS1 signals Release 9 1 and later on a circuit pack When this loopback is completed all four DS1 signals received fr...

Page 309: ...e desired position DS1 Cable LBO Settings 613C 608C Cable Length feet 1249C Cable Length feet Other Cable dB Loss at 772 KHz DIP Switch Settings S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 0 to 133 0 to 90 0 to 0 6 OFF OFF OFF 133 to 267 90 to 180 0 6 to 1 2 OFF OFF ON 267 to 400 180 to 270 1 2 to 1 8 OFF ON OFF 400 to 533 270 to 360 1 8 to 2 4 OFF ON ON 533 to 655 360 to 450 2 4 to 2 8 ON OFF OFF Minimum of 30 feet required ...

Page 310: ...O STS1E circuit pack Receive Functions 7 Major receive functions of the DS1 circuit pack are as follows Receives a SONET VT G clock and frame synchronizing signals from its associated MXRVO STS1E Demultiplexes the VT G into four VT1 5 signals Terminates VT path and the embedded DS1 signal from each VT1 5 SPE Desynchronizes the DS1 signals Encodes each DS1 signal into either AMI or B8ZS format Pre ...

Page 311: ...nal BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM Circuit Pack Description 7 Purpose of Circuit 7 The DS1PM circuit pack provides all of the functions of a BBF1B circuit pack and also provides performance monitoring PM of SF and ESF signals to allow for T1 tariff verification For PM the DS1 signals from the DSX are monitored PM data from the opposite direction is provided by accessing the ESF data link The new BBF3B has the a...

Page 312: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 34 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 12 BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM Circuit Pack FAULT AT T x x S1 1 x x x DS1PM BBF3B ...

Page 313: ...t sends to the MXRVO STS1E circuit pack using the frame sync and clock received from the MXRVO STS1E Receive Direction 7 The DS1PM receives a VT G with clock and frame information from the MXRVO STS1E and demultiplexes the VT G into four unique VT1 5 signals Each VT1 5 passes through circuitry that performs pointer interpretation removes the VT path overhead bits the fixed stuff bits and the overh...

Page 314: ...1 to VT 1 5 Processor VT OH To From DSX 1 VT OH VT 1 5 VT 1 5 VT 1 5 VT 1 5 DS1 1 DS1 2 Prot Sw Bus To From Loopback Loopback Loopback Prot Sw Bus To From Byte Interleave Disinterleave Control 5V Power To From SYSCTL Circuit Pack Prot Sw Bus To From Intrashelf DS1 to VT 1 5 Loopback Framer Framer Framer Framer To PM Processor To PM Processor To PM Processor To PM Processor PM Processor From Framer...

Page 315: ...1PM circuit pack protection is provided and this protection is independent of the MXRVO STS1E circuit pack s The DS1PM protection switch points are implemented with on board relays on the DSX 1 side and with logic selectors at the VT G level on the active and standby MXRVO STS1E circuit packs The SYSCTL controls these relays through two serial interfaces so that a failure of one serial interface t...

Page 316: ...S1 interface device forces AIS towards the DSX 1 The DS1PM circuit pack also provides a facility loopback for all four DS1 signals Release 9 1 and later on a circuit pack When this loopback is completed all four DS1 signals received from the DSX are simultaneously looped back toward the DSX The loopback is a bridge so the transmitted DS1 signals towards the high speed interface are not affected Th...

Page 317: ...pack option switches are shown in Figure 7 14 Note The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position DS1 Cable LBO Settings 613C 608C Cable Length feet 1249C Cable Length feet Other Cable dB Loss at 772 KHz DIP Switch Settings S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 0 to 133 0 to 90 0 to 0 6 OFF OFF OFF 133 to 267 90 to 180 0 6 to 1 2 OFF OFF ON 267 to 400 180 to 270 1 2 to 1 8 OFF ON OFF 400 to 533 270...

Page 318: ...ions of the DS1PM circuit pack are as follows Receives a SONET VT G clock and frame synchronizing signals from its associated MXRVO STS1E Demultiplexes the VT G into four VT1 5 signals Terminates VT path and the embedded DS1 signal from each VT1 5 SPE Desynchronizes the DS1 signals Encodes each DS1 signal into either AMI or B8ZS format Pre equalizes with LBO each DS1 and provides them to a DSX 1 a...

Page 319: ...ear end and far end performance Detects VT path AIS Inserts DS1 AIS toward fiber and toward DSX 1 Inserts and detects VT path yellow signal 177A Retainer Card Description 7 Purpose of Card 7 To ensure proper operation of DS1 DS1PM circuit pack protection switching the 177A Retainer card Figure 7 15 must be installed in all unused slots within a low speed group that is partially equipped with DS1 D...

Page 320: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 42 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 15 177A Retainer Card x x S1 1 x x x 177A RTNR tpa 789738 01 ...

Page 321: ...27G2 U OLIUs The BBF5 circuit pack is not needed in Group 4 shelves in any application The BBF5 must be installed in Slot 8 of the low speed group associated with the function unit where both function unit slots are equipped with 27G U OLIUs BBF5 circuit packs must be installed in slots 4 and 8 of the low speed group associated with the function unit where both function unit slots are equipped wit...

Page 322: ...BF8 circuit pack fits into the low speed slots and provides two four wire HDSL interfaces Each interface provides a full DS1 payload capacity mapped to a SONET VT1 5 and then VT cross connected into an STS 1 Once in SONET the DS1 payload is treated as a normal DS1 HDSL Faceplate Indicator 7 The HDSL circuit pack FAULT indicator is shown in Figure 7 17 This red FAULT LED is lit by the SYSCTL on det...

Page 323: ...etween the two nodes The other node slave may only retrieve or view these parameters In each pair of HDSL nodes there must be one master and one slave The HDSL signal format used by the BBF8 is compatible with PairGain HDSL equipment Since the BBF8 circuit pack does not provide line powering the far end PairGain HDLS equipment must be externally powered Detailed Description of Operation 7 Transmis...

Page 324: ... circuit packs including Protection may be used in a function group Powering for these packs is determined by the MXRVO for the OC 3 shelf The 28 type OLIU is required for powering in the FiberReach shelf Pack mixing with Quad DS1 circuit packs is not allowed The HDSL interfaces do not support line powering The BBF8 is compatible with DDM 2000 Release 6 2 and later tpa 852355 01 To From Lightning ...

Page 325: ... Timing Circuitry 7 The timing distribution to the HDSL contains ten timing signals two high speed clocks active and standby four VT G clocks two active and two standby and four frame sync signals two active and two standby The HDSL receives from the MXRVO an STS 1 rate high speed clock that provides the frequency reference for the desynchronizing phase locked loop This high speed reference clock ...

Page 326: ... or recovers from a transient failure The incoming HDSL signal is monitored for HDSL synchronization errors Incoming VT1 5 signals are monitored for VT AIS VT LOP and yellow Loopbacks 7 The HDSL circuit pack has two types of loopback terminal and facility Both types are controlled by the SYSCTL via the intra shelf control bus The two loopbacks must be done independently The terminal loopback is pr...

Page 327: ...ck Time out NONE 20 60 120 minutes Alarm Notification ENABLE or DISABLE Allocation of DS0 time slots on HDSL loop ALTERNATE or CONTIGUOUS Margin Alarm Threshold 0 15 dB 1 dB increments DS0 blocking individually T1 FT1 Fast Loss of Sync Word LOSW ENABLE or DISABLE Performance Monitoring 7 From any unit in a system HDSL performance data may be accessed for each HDSL span in the circuit including up ...

Page 328: ...reshold on Loop 2 Power Circuitry 7 The MXRVO circuit packs supply 5V power to the HDSL circuit packs in the corresponding DS1PM circuit pack groups These inputs are diode ORed and the output is fused and then filtered before it is used to power the rest of the circuit pack A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light CAUTION For power reliability when a muldem is equipped ...

Page 329: ...s HDSL options selectable via S1 Figure 7 19 HDSL DIP Switch Settings HDSL Options DIP Switch Settings HDSL Port 1 HDSL Port 2 S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 HDSL Master OFF OFF START UP Slave ON ON HDSL Local OFF OFF MANAGEMENT Through ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON OFF S1 Component Side Edge Connector ...

Page 330: ...gnals Terminates VT path and the embedded DS1 signal from each VT1 5 SPE Desynchronizes the DS1 signals and maps directly into PairGain HDSL Provides HDSL to VT1 5 mapping Recovers DS1 clock and NRZ data from each HDSL payload Synchronizes and maps each data signal to a VT1 5 SPE Control Functions 7 The major control functions of the HDSL circuit pack are as follows Protection switching for MXRVO ...

Page 331: ...ignals The BBF10 provides the same function as the BBF9 but provides a 100 BaseFX LAN port IMA LAN Faceplate Indicator 7 The BBF9 BBF10 circuit pack FAULT indicator is shown in Figure 7 20 This red FAULT LED is lit by the SYSCTL on detection of a IMA LAN circuit pack failure In the event of an incoming LAN signal failure this LED flashes on and off Figure 7 20 BBF9 BBF10 IMA LAN Circuit Pack BBF9 ...

Page 332: ...ication The LAN interface converts incoming MAC frames to an ATM cell format using ATM adaptation layer 5 AAL5 encapsulation as specified in IETF RFC 1483 ATM cells are distributed in round robin order on 1 to 8 ESF formatted DS1 signals using the ATM forum IMA Specification Version 1 1 for inverse multiplexing The DS1 signals are mapped into asynchronous VT1 5 signals four of which are muxed to c...

Page 333: ...eed 100 Mb s when interfacing with other 802 3 compliant devices over fiber The circuit pack occupies two adjacent low speed slots and converts an optical signal to from one to 8 DS1 signals to provide native mode LAN transport through a SONET WAN LAN port 100BaseFX IEEE 802 3 compliant SC optical connector 1300 nm nominal center wavelength 62 5 micron multimode fiber Buffering 5 MByte for each di...

Page 334: ...F Loss of IMA frame Loss of IMA Delay Synchronization LODS Loss of Cell Delineation LCD and excessive AAL5 CRC errors The alarm level for a local LAN port failure is user provisionable Major Minor Not Alarmed Control Circuitry 7 The IMA LAN circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra shelf control bus It provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack and the i...

Page 335: ...rnal Optical Transceivers MII MII EDO to SDRAM PAL IMB SCRAM Debug Port for SW IDE Debug Port for RS 232C Microprocessor Flash 5 MB SDRAM 1 MB 1MB SRAM MII Interface RFC 1483 ATM Cell Control UTOPIA UTOPIA IMA 128k x 8 SRAM Microprocess Bus DS1 Framers 8 C1 C1 VT G to MXRV0 DS1 FRAMER VT1 5 VT1 5 Slot 1 Backplane Interface Slot 2 Backplane Interface CUSTOM DEVICE 1 LEDS Ima ck pk bdiag ...

Page 336: ...IS VT LOP and yellow Loopbacks 7 The IMA LAN circuit pack has a DS1 terminal loopback controlled by the SYSCTL via the intra shelf control bus The terminal loopback is provided on the circuit pack for each DS1 The loopback is done inside the MUX DEMUX DESYNC device and bridges the desynchronizer output signal transmitted towards the DSX 1 back to the DS1 synchronizer input Performance Monitoring 7...

Page 337: ... fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light IMA LAN Power Settings 7 Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the opening in the faceplate of the IMA LAN circuit pack The only hardware option settings on IMA LAN circuit packs are the power settings located on the bottom circuit board shown in Figure 7 1 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the power ...

Page 338: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 60 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 22 IMA LAN Power Settings 48V 48V 48V 5V 5V 5V ...

Page 339: ...cuit pack interfaces between the DS1 and OLIU circuit packs MRXVO Faceplate Indicators 7 The MXRVO circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 23 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is active carrying service Figure 7 23 BBG2 MXRVO Circuit Pack FAULT AT T x x S1 1 x x x ACTIVE BBG2 MXRVO ...

Page 340: ...smit direction from the DS1 low speed packs the VT G signals from each DS1 are combined into an STS 1 signal see Figure 7 24 The STS 1 path overhead and pointer are inserted and the signal is transmitted to the OLIU Receive Direction 7 In the receive direction from the OLIU the STS 1 path is terminated Then the STS 1 signal is split into seven VT G signals for transmission to the DS1 circuit packs...

Page 341: ...itch points reside on the OLIU and on each low speed circuit pack for the STS 1 and VT G signals respectively Optional 1x1 nonrevertive MRXVO circuit pack protection is provided and is independent of the OLIU and low speed DS1 circuit packs 7 OF 8 VT G 1 VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G VT G 5V PWR DS1 CPs VT G to STS 1 Multiplexer STS 1 to VT G Demu...

Page 342: ...reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra shelf control bus An out of service test is performed whenever the MXRVO circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure Performance Monitoring 7 The MXRVO circuit pack provides PM circuitry for STS path parameters derived from B3 coding violations Power Circuitry 7 The MXRVO provides power to the corresponding DS1 low speed circui...

Page 343: ...des timing signals to DS1 circuit packs Control Functions 7 Major control functions are as follows STS 1 path overhead processing Protection switching for OLIU circuit pack protection Protection switching for DS1 circuit pack protection Inventory information CLEI code date of manufacture etc Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The major maintenance signal functions are as follows Detects STS 1 path AIS...

Page 344: ... speed interface between asynchronous DS3 rate signals and SONET STS 1 signals The BBG4B DS3 provides the same functions as the BBG4 DS3 and can be used in place of the BBG4 DS3 in all applications In addition the BBG4B DS3 has enhanced DS3 PM capabilities BBG4 BBG4B DS3 Faceplate Indicators 7 The BBG4 BBG4B DS3 circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 25 ...

Page 345: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Issue 3 June 2001 7 67 Figure 7 25 BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack FAULT AT T x x S1 1 x x x ACTIVE DS3 BBG4B ...

Page 346: ...try 7 Transmit Direction 7 Figure 7 26 provides an overall block diagram of the BBG4 BBG4B DS3 circuit pack The transmit direction is the direction towards the STS 1 signal and receive direction refers to the direction towards the DSX 3 In the transmit direction the BBG4 BBG4B DS3 receives an incoming B3ZS encoded DS3 signal from the DSX 3 A closed protection relay contact routes the DS3 to a circ...

Page 347: ...modes These three modes are as follows VMR with DS3 AIS insertion default VM without removal of violations but with AIS insertion No violation monitoring CC mode with options for AIS insertion No AIS insertion DS3 Receiver Hybrid Protection Relays Multiplexer Demultiplexer DS3 Driver LBO Intrashelf STS 1 To From OLIU CPs From From Shelf 48V Fuses SYSCTL 48V A 48V B Timing Control To From Loopback ...

Page 348: ...3 circuit pack requires STS 1 timing supplied via the circuit pack edge connector from the backplane Protection Circuitry 7 Optional 1x1 nonrevertive BBG4 BBG4B DS3 circuit pack protection is provided Switch points for the STS 1 side of the DS3 are located on the OLIU circuit packs Switch points for the DS3 side are implemented with relays on the BBG4 BBG4B DS3 circuit pack To ensure that the rela...

Page 349: ... the DS3 desynchronizer output signal transmitted towards the DSX 3 back into the DS3 synchronizer input Operation of the loopback does not affect the signal transmitted to the DSX 3 The facility loopback bridges the STS 1 output signal to the OLIU back towards the DSX 3 Operation of this loopback does not affect the signal transmitted to the fiber Both loopbacks are controlled by the SYSCTL throu...

Page 350: ...ircuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7 27 The BBG4 BBG4B DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table BBG4 BBG4B DS3 LBO Settings Figure 7 27 BBG4 BBG4B DS3 Line Build Out LBO Jumpers Cable Length Ft 735A Cable 734D Cable LBO Setting 0 to 125 125 to 250 0 to 225 225 to 450 LBO IN LBO OUT LBO IN Edge Connector LBO OUT Component Side ...

Page 351: ...lly checks and or corrects P bit parity errors Synchronizes the data signal to STS 1 signal rate Inserts STS 1 path overhead Provides the STS 1 signal to the OLIU circuit packs Receive Functions 7 The following receive functions are performed by the BBG4 BBG4B DS3 circuit pack Desynchronizes the incoming STS 1 signal Terminates the STS 1 path Optionally checks and or corrects P bit parity errors B...

Page 352: ...serts and detects STS 1 path trace BBG4B only BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack Description 7 NOTE All references to high speed applications of the BBG6 STS1E circuit pack are not applicable to DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 13 0 Purpose of Circuit 7 The STS1E circuit pack provides an interface between EC 1 and DS1 rate high speed or EC 1 and OC 3 rate low speed applications STS1E Faceplate Indicators 7 The STS1E ci...

Page 353: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Issue 3 June 2001 7 75 Figure 7 28 BBG6 STS1E Circuit Pack FAULT AT T x x S1 1 x x x ACTIVE BBG6 STS1E ...

Page 354: ...ate 51 84 Mb s In the high speed mode the STS1E circuit pack interfaces with the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack at the VT G rate 6 192 Mb s The STS1E circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL for maintenance provisioning and PM functions and interfaces to the TG circuit pack for timing Figure 7 29 STS1E Circuit Pack Low Speed and High Speed Modes Circuit Pack OC 3 Signal OLIU Circuit Pack STS 1 Signal EC 1 ...

Page 355: ...VT G VT G VT G 5V PWR VT G to STS 1 Multiplexer STS 1 to VT G Demultiplexer Protection Switch Selector Adds STS 1 Removes STS 1 Path Overhead Path Overhead SYSCTL To From Pointer Processor STS 1 P STS 1 To From SONET Transport OH To From OHCTL Control Circuit EC 1 EC 1 Terminal Service And Packs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DS1 CPs To From To DS1 Main High Speed Low Speed Selector Adds STS 1 Transport Overhead...

Page 356: ...irection In the transmit direction the incoming EC 1 signal is processed and routed to the backplane as an STS 1 signal In the low speed mode the STS1E circuit pack can be configured for a VT based STS 1 In this case the STS 1 path overhead POH for the EC 1 is terminated For non VT based STS 1s the STS 1 path is sent through the STS1E circuit pack unaffected Regardless of the operating mode the ST...

Page 357: ...rotection switch STS1E circuit pack protection switch points for the STS 1 side are located on the OLIU circuit packs Switch points for the EC 1 side are implemented with relays on the STS1E circuit pack To ensure that the relays can be operated when the circuit pack fails the relay is controlled by the SYSCTL via the control interface Also if power to the board is lost the relay switches autonomo...

Page 358: ...e EC 1 output signal transmitted towards the STSX 1 back into the STSX 1 transport overhead processor input Performance Monitoring 7 The STS1E provides PM circuitry for the following performance parameters Line parameters derived from B2 coding violations STS 1 parameters derived from B3 coding violations Power Circuitry 7 The STS1E receives two sources of 48 volts that are diode ORed fused and fi...

Page 359: ...y 7 Transmit Functions High Speed Mode 7 The STS1E transmit high speed mode functions are as follows Selects VT Gs from DS1 DS1PM circuit packs multiplexes VT Gs with protection selection into a SPE and adds STS 1 path overhead Adds SONET transport overhead B3ZS encodes and scrambles data converts to bipolar format and sends it to the STSX 1 Cable Length Ft LBO Setting 735A Cable 734D Cable 0 to 1...

Page 360: ...esses STS 1 pointers and frame synchronizes the STS 1 signal Optionally provides 6 48 Mb s reference clock for TG circuit packs Terminates STS 1 path Demultiplexes the SPE into seven VT G signals and supplies VT G signals to the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs Receive Functions Low Speed Mode 7 The STS1E receive low speed mode functions are as follows Selects an STS 1 input from the OLIU circuit pack and ...

Page 361: ... 1 line signal degrade BER Maintenance Signal Functions Low Speed Mode 7 The major maintenance signal functions low speed mode are as follows Detects STS 1 path AIS VT cross connected Detects STS 1 LOP Detects VT LOP VT cross connected Inserts VT path AIS VT cross connected Inserts STS path AIS STS cross connected Inserts STS 1 path unequipped signal Inserts and detects EC 1 line AIS Inserts and d...

Page 362: ...ace between asynchronous DS3 rate signals and SONET STS 1 signals It provides front access to DS3 Data Services such as Ethernet Token Ring ATM FDDI Frame Relay and others via BNC faceplate connectors BBG19 DS3 Faceplate Indicators 7 The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 32 Figure 7 32 BBG19 DS3 Circuit Pack ACTIVE FAULT Lucent BBG19 DS3 SNI25 OUT IN tpa 852246 01 ...

Page 363: ...itry 7 Transmit Direction 7 Figure 7 33 provides an overall block diagram of the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack The transmit direction is the direction towards the STS 1 signal and receive direction refers to the direction towards the data services device In the transmit direction the BBG19 DS3 receives an incoming B3ZS encoded DS3 signal from the data services device BNC connectors on the faceplate of th...

Page 364: ...BBG19 DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram DS3 Receiver Multiplexer Demultiplexer DS3 Driver LBO Intrashelf STS 1 To From OLIU CPs From From Shelf 48V Fuses SYSCTL 48V A 48V B Timing Control To From Loopback To From DS3 TGS CPs Service Protection tpa 852245 01 Data Services Device ...

Page 365: ... the SYSCTL such as active and fault LED controls Timing Circuitry 7 The BBG19 DS3 derives its timing information from the recovered DS3 clock from the data services device incoming signal In the transmit direction a 44 736 MHz clock is recovered from the incoming DS3 signal and is used to recover DS3 data In the receive direction a smoothed 44 736 MHz clock is generated by a phase locked loop to ...

Page 366: ...ck bridges the DS3 desynchronizer output signal transmitted towards the data services device back into the DS3 synchronizer input Operation of the loopback does not affect the signal transmitted to the data services device The facility loopback bridges the STS 1 output signal to the OLIU back towards the data services device Operation of this loopback does not affect the signal transmitted to the ...

Page 367: ... circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7 34 The BBG19 DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table BBG19 DS3 LBO Settings Figure 7 34 BBG19 DS3 Line Build Out LBO Jumpers Cable Length Ft LBO Setting 735A Cable 734D Cable 0 to 125 125 to 250 0 to 225 225 to 450 LBO IN LBO OUT LBO IN Edge Connector LBO OUT Component Side ...

Page 368: ...k and NRZ data Optionally checks and or corrects P bit parity errors Synchronizes the data signal to STS 1 signal rate Inserts STS 1 path overhead Provides the STS 1 signal to the OLIU circuit packs Receive Functions 7 The following receive functions are performed by the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack Desynchronizes the incoming STS 1 signal Terminates the STS 1 path Optionally checks and or corrects P bi...

Page 369: ... the data services device Inserts and detects STS 1 path trace BBG20 Transmultiplexer 7 Purpose of Circuit 7 The BBG20 Transmultiplexer TMUX circuit pack provides a low speed interface between asynchronous DS3 rate signals and SONET STS 1 signals The BBG20 TMUX provides DS1 DS3 VT and STS 1 performance monitoring capabilities with R13 0 and later BBG20 TMUX Faceplate Indicators 7 The TMUX circuit ...

Page 370: ...3 signal and demultiplexes it into 28 DS1s Performance monitoring is performed on the DS1s before they are mapped into floating VT1 5s The 28 VT1 5s are then multiplexed into an STS 1 payload envelope using SONET asynchronous mapping The STS 1 path overhead and pointer bytes are added and the resulting signal is sent to the high speed OLIU circuit pack In the receive direction the reverse process ...

Page 371: ...standby circuit pack and the other to its own receiver The BBG20 TMUX receiver performs equalization and clock recovery The TMUX circuitry performs B3ZS decoding and demultiplexes it into 28 DS1s Performance monitoring is performed on the DS1s before they are mapped into floating VT1 5s The 28 VT1 5s are then multiplexed into an STS 1 payload envelope using SONET asynchronous mapping The STS 1 pat...

Page 372: ...tatus of the circuit pack status of the incoming STS 1 and DS3 signals as well as the circuit pack inventory information CLEI code date of manufacture etc These maintenance elements are used by the SYSCTL for fault detection and isolation Conversely the BBG20 TMUX responds to control signals from the SYSCTL such as active and fault LED controls DS3 Receiver Hybrid Protection Relays DS3 Driver LBO ...

Page 373: ... the standby state until provisioned active by the SYSCTL On the DS3 side a single DS3 input from a DSX 3 is sent to both the active and standby BBG20 TMUX circuit packs Only the active unit selects the DS3 input The SYSCTL supervises the state of the active and standby units so that the relay state of each is always the inverse of the other The hybrid on the active unit splits the DS3 input signa...

Page 374: ...y the SYSCTL through the intra shelf control bus Performance Monitoring 7 The BBG20 TMUX circuit pack provides PM circuitry for the following performance parameters STS path parameters derived from B3 coding violations VT path parameters derived from V5 coding violations DS3 path parameters derived from P bit F M bit or C bit coding violations DS3 line errors based on B3ZS violations DS1 path para...

Page 375: ...7 37 BBG20 TMUX Line Build Out LBO Jumpers Power Circuitry 7 The BBG20 TMUX circuit pack receives two sources of 48 volts that are in turn diode ORed fused and filtered before conversion to 5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light Cable Length Ft 735A Cable 734D Cable LBO Setting 0 to 65 65 to 250 0 to 120 120 to 450 LBO ON ...

Page 376: ...LIU circuit packs Receive Functions 7 The BBG20 TMUX receive functions are as follows Interprets the STS 1 pointer values Terminates the STS 1 path Disinterleaves the STS 1 signal into 28 VT1 5s and interprets VT pointer values Converts the VT1 5 signals to 28 DS1 signals Multiplexes the 28 DS1 signals to an M13 or C bit formatted DS3 signal B3ZS encodes the outgoing DS3 signal Pre equalizes the D...

Page 377: ...ctor 22D U OLIU 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 24G U 24H U OLIU 22F U 22F2 U 26G2 U OLIU 27G U 27G2 U OLIU 29G U 29H U Ship with SC buildout and ST shiped loose with each pack This connector 29G U 29H U Figure 7 38 is a two part connector consisting of a faceplate mounted block and an optical buildout The faceplate block optionally supports an ST SC or FC type optical buildout A 0 dB SC type conn...

Page 378: ...ons 7 100 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 38 Universal Optical Connector A3080 Buildout White FC Type A2070 A3070 Buildout White Type A2060 A3060 Buildout Blue SC Type ST Faceplate mounted block that universally accepts SC or FC buildout ST ...

Page 379: ... 155 52 33 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM No OC 3 22G U 155 52 51 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM 7 0 dB OC 3 3 22G2 U 155 52 51 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM No OC 3 22G3 U 155 52 55 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM No OC 3 22G4 U 155 52 55 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM No OC 3 24G U 622 08 51 Yes STS 1 STS 3c VT1 5 SM 8 0 dB OC 3 7 24H U 26G2 U 51 84 44 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM 13 8 dB FiberReach OC 1 27G U 51 84 44 Yes STS 1 VT1 5 SM MM 13 8 ...

Page 380: ...nsmitter and one optical receiver unless specified otherwise The Span Length column shows maximum span length for single mode fiber in controlled environment based on certain assumptions about loss budget See Chapter 10 Technical Specifications for details The VT STS Sig Degrade PS column indicates which OLIUs support VT1 5 path protection switching based on signal degrade conditions on individual...

Page 381: ...y When used to perform DS1 DS3 add drop or VT1 5 routing STS 1 path overhead access is also provided The 22F U provides a universal optical connector capable of interfacing with STS 1 The 22F2 U provides additional VT1 5 STS 1 path signal monitoring to support VT1 5 STS 1 path protection switching All three circuit packs have the same optical interface specifications 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU Faceplat...

Page 382: ...acom channel is passed via serial data links to the control packs while other bytes for example framing parity check are processed on board The STS 1 signals go through a pointer processor to guarantee STS 1 frame alignment to the local system clock before being routed to the other main and function unit slots If an incoming STS 1 signal from the fiber is to be VT1 5 cross connected VT1 5 pointer ...

Page 383: ...e signal with a frame synchronous scrambler The output from the multiplexer is in the SONET STS 3 format and is used to amplitude modulate the laser transmitter converting the electrical signal to an NRZ encoded SONET compatible OC 3 optical signal Receive Direction 7 In the receive direction the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ encoded OC 3 signal to equivalent electrical pu...

Page 384: ...elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack status of the incoming optical and electrical signals as well as inventory information CLEI code date of manufacture etc These maintenance elements are used by the SYSCTL for fault detection and isolation Conversely the 22F type OLIUs respond to control signals from the SYSCTL such as STS 1 routing VT1 5 routing protection switching and LED con...

Page 385: ...3 Demultiplexer Converts OC 3 to STS 3 Section and Line OH Processes VT1 5 and or STS 1 3 Byte STS 3 into 3 STS 1s Intrashelf STS 1 Termin ation VT1 5 Pointer Processor Cross Connect 48V B Timing STS 1 Router Path Overhead an STS 3 Byte Interleaves Disinterleaves an Overhead Transport Control Protection STS 1 STS 1 STS 1 STS 1 Service STS 1 STS 1 STS 1 SONET From Fuses To From Slots To From SYSCTL...

Page 386: ...rcuit packs in the main and function unit slots It selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL The 22F type OLIU provides selectors for timing signals from the TG circuit packs monitors these inputs and autonomously selects either TG circuit pack The SYSCTL can inhibit autonomous selection and make its own selection Fault Detection Circuitry 7 The...

Page 387: ...ons Adds SONET transport overhead and if VT1 5 cross connected adds STS 1 path overhead Byte interleaves and scrambles the three selected STS 1 signals to produce an STS 3 signal Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC 3 optical signal from an STS 3 electrical signal Receive Functions 7 The following are major receive functions of the 22F type OLIU circuit pack Receives a SONET sta...

Page 388: ...tion switching based on STS 1 unequipped STS 1 AIS STS 1 LOP VT AIS and VT LOP Supports path protection switching based on VT unequipped 22F2 U only Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The major maintenance signal functions are as follows Inserts and detects STS 1 path AIS or inserts and detects VT1 5 path AIS Inserts and detects OC 3 line AIS Inserts and detects STS 1 path unequipped signal Inserts an...

Page 389: ...een STS 3 and three STS 1 signals and SONET transport overhead access It also provides routing of the STS 1s between the IS 3 interface and other main and function unit slots in the shelf 22D U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 The 22D U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 41 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure In the event of an incoming signa...

Page 390: ...ransmitter to create the IS 3 output The received IS 3 signal is converted back to an electrical STS 3 This STS 3 is descrambled and demultiplexed to three STS 1 signals and transport overhead is accessed Some of the overhead for example section datacom channel is passed via serial data links to the control packs while other bytes for example framing parity check are processed on board The STS 1 s...

Page 391: ...s adds SONET transport overhead then byte interleaves and scrambles the signal with a frame synchronous scrambler The output from the multiplexer is in the SONET STS 3 format and is used to amplitude modulate the STS 1 1 STS 1 2 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 STS 1 3 Pointer STS 1 3 STS 1 Processor STS 1 1 STS 1 2 STS 1 3 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 STS 1 3 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 Multiplexer 3 STS 1s into Write Section and Line OH...

Page 392: ...essing is performed on each STS 1 that is to be VT1 5 cross connected STS 1 path overhead termination is also done on these VT1 5 based signals STS 1s that do not require VT1 5 cross connections are passed through without VT1 5 pointer processing or STS 1 path overhead termination The output from the VT1 5 pointer processor is sent to the STS 1 VT1 5 router The router cross connects the appropriat...

Page 393: ...ls from the circuit packs in the main and function unit slots and selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL The 22D U OLIU provides selectors for timing signals from the TG circuit packs The 22D U OLIU monitors these inputs and can autonomously select either one The SYSCTL can inhibit autonomous selection and make its own selection Fault Detecti...

Page 394: ...head and if VT1 5 cross connected adds STS 1 path overhead Byte interleaves and scrambles the three selected STS 1 signals to produce an STS 3 signal Converts the STS 3 electrical signal to an IS 3 optical signal and transmits it over the fiber Receive Functions 7 The following are major receive functions of the 22D U OLIU circuit pack Receives an IS 3 optical signal and converts it to an electric...

Page 395: ...ath protection switching Supports path protection switching based on STS 1 unequipped STS 1 AIS STS 1 LOP VT AIS VT unequipped and VT LOP Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The following are the major maintenance signal functions of the 22D U OLIU circuit pack Inserts and detects STS 1 path AIS or inserts and detects VT1 5 path AIS Inserts and detects SONET line AIS and inserts and detects line FERF I...

Page 396: ...2G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU can be used in place of the 22G U in all applications 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 The 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 43 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure In the event of an incoming signal failure this LED will flash on and off The green ACTIVE LED light...

Page 397: ...6 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Issue 3 June 2001 7 119 Figure 7 43 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U OLIU Circuit Pack OLIU x x x x x Universal Optical Connectors Lucent Lucent 22G U FAULT ACTIVE S1 1 IN OUT tpa 832538 01 ...

Page 398: ...optical interface may be routed as STS 1s If appropriate VT1 5 routings may be established between STS 1s using a limited VT1 5 cross connection Each 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU provides timing signals to and receives timing signals from the TG circuit packs Detailed Description of Operation 7 Figure 7 44 is a block diagram of the 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU Transmission Circuitry 7 STS 1 ...

Page 399: ... done on these VT1 5 based signals STS 1s that do not require VT1 5 cross connections are passed through without VT1 5 pointer processing or STS 1 path overhead termination The output from the VT1 5 pointer processor is sent to the STS 1 VT1 5 router The router cross connects the appropriate VT1 5 tributaries and sends each of the three STS 1 signals to the appropriate main or function unit slots ...

Page 400: ...S 3 into OC 3 Demultiplexer Converts OC 3 to STS 3 Section and Line OH Processes VT1 5 and or STS 1 3 Byte STS 3 into 3 STS 1s Intrashelf STS 1 Termin ation VT1 5 Pointer Processor Cross Connect 48V B Timing STS 1 Router Path Overhead an STS 3 Byte Interleaves Disinterleaves an Overhead Transport Control Protection Service SONET From Fuses To From Slots To From SYSCTL To From OHCTL Main FN 48V A 4...

Page 401: ... U OLIU interfaces with STS 1 signals from the circuit packs in the main and function unit slots It selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL The 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU provides selectors for timing signals from the TG circuit packs monitors these inputs and autonomously selects either TG circuit pack The SYSCTL can inhibit autonomous s...

Page 402: ... packs Provides VT1 5 STS 1 signal cross connections Adds SONET transport overhead and if VT1 5 cross connected adds STS 1 path overhead Byte interleaves and scrambles the three selected STS 1 signals to produce an STS 3 signal Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC 3 optical signal from an STS 3 electrical signal Receive Functions 7 The following are major receive functions of th...

Page 403: ...e protection switching Supports STS 1 BER signal fail 10 3 or 10 6 path protection switching Supports path protection switching based on STS 1 unequipped STS 1 AIS STS 1 LOP VT AIS VT unequipped and VT LOP Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The major maintenance signal functions are as follows Inserts and detects STS 1 path AIS or inserts and detects VT1 5 path AIS Inserts and detects OC 3 line AIS In...

Page 404: ... OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 The 24G U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 45 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure In the event of an incoming signal failure this LED will flash on and off The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is active carrying service A faceplate mounted universal optical connector allows the 24G U OLIU to ac...

Page 405: ...45 24G U OC 12 OLIU Circuit Pack 24G U Pair with Interconnect Cable Assembly OLIU 24G U ACTIVE SMRX0 FAULT LUCENT S tpa 852243 01 x x x x x IN OUT OLIU 24G U ACTIVE SMRX0 FAULT LUCENT S tpa 852255 01 x x x x x IN OUT OLIU 24G U ACTIVE SMRX0 FAULT LUCENT S x x x x x IN OUT ...

Page 406: ...r from the optical interface may be routed as STS 1s If appropriate VT1 5 routings may be established between STS 1s using a limited VT1 5 cross connection Each 24G U OLIU provides timing signals to and receives timing signals from the TG circuit packs Detailed Description of Operation 7 Figure 7 46 is a block diagram of the 24G U OLIU Transmission Circuitry 7 STS 1 Router and VT1 5 Cross Connect ...

Page 407: ...termination is also done on these VT1 5 based signals STS 1s that do not require VT1 5 cross connections are passed through without VT1 5 pointer processing or STS 1 path overhead termination The output from the VT1 5 pointer processor is sent to the STS 1 VT1 5 router The router cross connects the appropriate VT1 5 tributaries and sends each of the three STS 1 signals to the appropriate main or f...

Page 408: ... 48V B Timing STS 1 Router Path Overhead Byte Interleaves Disinterleaves an Overhead Transport Control Protection Service SONET From Fuses To From To From SYSCTL To From OHCTL 48V A 48V Shelf Service Protection To From TGS CPs Tx Fiber Service or Protection Rx Fiber Service or Protection 3 STS 1s an STS 12 Converts STS 12 to STS 12 STS 12 into 12 STS 1s OC 12 OC 12 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 STS 1 3 Processo...

Page 409: ...r protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL The 24G U OLIU provides selectors for timing signals from the TG circuit packs monitors these inputs and autonomously selects either TG circuit pack The SYSCTL can inhibit autonomous selection and make its own selection Fault Detection Circuitry 7 The 24G U OLIU circuit pack has in service and out of service built in test capability In servi...

Page 410: ...th overhead Byte interleaves and scrambles up to three selected STS 1 signals plus the other nine to twelve STS 1s on the ring to produce an STS 12 signal Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC 12 optical signal from an STS 12 electrical signal Receive Functions 7 The following are major receive functions of the 24G U OLIU circuit pack Receives a SONET standard OC 12 optical signa...

Page 411: ...ion switching for up to three STS 1s Supports path protection switching based on STS 1 unequipped STS 1 AIS STS 1 LOP VT AIS VT unequipped and VT LOP for up to three STS 1s Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The major maintenance signal functions are as follows Inserts and detects STS 1 path AIS inserts and detects VT1 5 path AIS for up to three STS 1s Inserts and detects OC 12 line AIS Inserts and de...

Page 412: ...slot The 26G2 U OLIU may be used in the main slots of the DDM 2000 FiberReach wideband shelf or the function unit slots of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf Group 4 or later The fiber is accessed via a pair of universal optical connectors on the 26G2 U faceplate that supports STâ SC and FC type optical connectors Both single mode and multi mode facilities are supported 26G2 U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 The...

Page 413: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions Issue 3 June 2001 7 135 Figure 7 47 26G2 U OLIU Circuit Packs OLIU x x x x x Universal Optical Connectors 26G2 U FAULT ACTIVE S1 1 IN OUT Lucent Lucent Lucent ...

Page 414: ...g signal which drives a separate laser transmitter to create an OC 1 output The 26G2 U circuit pack converts a received OC 1 signal back to an electrical STS 1 descrambles and demultiplexes it and processes the transport overhead It sends some of the overhead for example section data communications channel via serial data links to the control packs and processes other bytes for example framing par...

Page 415: ...NET STS 1 format and is used to modulate the amplitude of the laser transmitter converting the electrical signal to an NRZ encoded SONET compatible OC 1 optical signal In the OC 3 shelf the 26G2 U OLIU provides an interface between the STS 1 optical signal and electrical VT G signals Three STS 1 paths will be brought out to the backplane for STS 1 routing throughout the OC 3 shelf The 26G2 U also ...

Page 416: ...oss connects the appropriate VT1 5 tributaries and sends two STS 1 signals to the appropriate main or function unit slots and up to 8 VT Gs to the low speed slots The 26G2 U terminates an STS 1 optical signal converts it to an electrical signal frames on and descrambles the signal and processes the transport overhead Control Circuitry 7 The 26G2 U OLIU circuit pack interfaces with the BBG8 system ...

Page 417: ... transient failure The 26G2 U OLIU has STS 1 and VT1 5 signal degrade protection switching and STS signal degrade protection switching capabilities Performance Monitoring 7 The 26G2 U OLIU provides PM circuitry for the following performance parameters STS 1 section severely errored frame seconds SEFS Line coding violations B2 parity Line errored seconds STS 1 path coding violations B3 parity STS 1...

Page 418: ...STS 1 path overhead c Processes the STS 1 pointer and frame synchronizes the STS 1 signals d Processes the VT1 5 pointers and frame synchronizes the VT1 5 signal e Provides path protection switching f Provides VT1 5 STS 1 signal cross connections g Sends VT Gs to the DS1 circuit packs Control Functions 7 The major control functions are as follows a Processes transport and path overhead b Stores in...

Page 419: ...bilities STS 1 path overhead access is also provided 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7 The 27G U 27G2 U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7 49 The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure In the event of an incoming OC 1 signal failure this LED will flash on and off The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is active carrying servic...

Page 420: ...criptions 7 142 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 7 49 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Circuit Pack OLIU x x x x x Universal Optical Connectors 27G U FAULT ACTIVE S1 1 Universal Optical Connectors Lucent Lucent Lucent Lucent 2 IN 2 OUT 1 IN 1 OUT Lucent ...

Page 421: ...om the optical interface may be routed as STS 1s If appropriate VT1 5 routings may be established between STS 1s using a VT1 5 cross connection Each 27G U 27G2 U OLIU provides timing signals to and receives timing signals from the TG circuit packs Detailed Description of Operation 7 Figure 7 50 is a block diagram of the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Transmission Circuitry 7 STS 1 Router and VT1 5 Cross Connec...

Page 422: ...synchronous to each other which are sent to the VT1 5 pointer processor VT1 5 pointer processing is performed on each STS 1 that is to be VT1 5 cross connected STS 1 path overhead termination is also done on these VT1 5 based signals STS 1s that do not require VT1 5 cross connections are passed through without VT1 5 pointer processing or STS 1 path overhead termination The output from the VT1 5 po...

Page 423: ...rts OC 1 to STS 1 Section and Line OH Processes VT1 5 and or Intrashelf STS 1 Termin ation VT1 5 Pointer Processor Cross Connect 48V B Timing STS 1 Router Path Overhead Overhead Transport Control Protection Service SONET From Fuses To From Slots To From SYSCTL To From OHCTL Main FN 48V A 48V Shelf OC 1 OC 1 Service Protection To From TGS CPs Tx Fiber Service or Protection Rx Fiber Service or Prote...

Page 424: ...n external command incoming optical signal failure or internal equipment fault The 27G U 27G2 U OLIU circuit pack is protection switched by the SYSCTL when the SYSCTL detects a fault on the active 27G U 27G2 U OLIU and the companion 27G U 27G2 U OLIU is good The 27G U 27G2 U OLIU interfaces with STS 1 signals from the circuit packs in the main and function unit slots It selects the signals from th...

Page 425: ...ty STS 1 path errored seconds VT path coding violation counts V5 parity VT path errored seconds Power Circuitry 7 Power for the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU circuit pack is provided by a DC to DC converter located on the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU circuit pack The converter supplies 5 volts Both A and B 48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converter through diode ORed circuit pack mounted power select circuit...

Page 426: ...optical signal from each STS 1 electrical signal Receive Functions 7 The following are major receive functions of the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU circuit pack Receives two SONET compatible OC 1 optical signals and converts each to an electrical STS 1 signals Extracts STS 1 rate clock and retimes the received data Extracts transport overhead and if VT1 5 cross connected extracts STS 1 path overhead from each...

Page 427: ... 10 6 path protection switching Supports path protection switching based on STS 1 unequipped STS 1 AIS STS 1 LOP VT AIS VT unequipped and VT LOP Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The major maintenance signal functions are as follows Inserts and detects STS 1 path AIS or inserts and detects VT1 5 path AIS Inserts and detects OC 1 line AIS Inserts and detects STS 1 path unequipped signal Inserts and de...

Page 428: ... least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29H U line The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ coded signal The 29H U OLIU long reach OC 12 interface supports span lengths up to 96 km assuming 0 25 dB km single mode fiber including splices and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 7 4 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 7 51 Table ...

Page 429: ... Figure 7 51 Optical System Interfaces Points S and R OLIU Point S Transmitter Tx Transmitter Connector Assembly Station Cable Fiber Crossconnect Fiber Crossconnect Outside Plant Cable Connections OLIU Rx Assembly Station Cable Receiver Receiver Connector Point R ...

Page 430: ...emperature Controller FDA Classification Optical Source Faceplate Optical Connector None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Connector None InGaAs PIN UOC Buildout Assembly multi mode None InGaAs P...

Page 431: ... 29H U meet or exceed long reach LR values described in TR 253 Iss 2 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 7 51 The minimum system gain for the DDM 2000 already takes into account aging temperature and manufacturing tolerances as these figures are built into the minimum transmitter power The DDM 2000 system gain can thus not be directly compared with the D...

Page 432: ... cable loss 0 4 dB km and splice loss 0 2 dB per splice 11 total splices associated with single mode fiber in the 1310 nm range For the 29G U the maximum distance is not dispersion limited because single longitudinal mode laser is used Given the attenuation assumption the maximum span length for the 29G U is 51 km Attenuation can be the limiting factors in span length A rough rule of thumb for att...

Page 433: ...2 Errored Seconds ES B2 Errored Seconds Type A ESA B2 Errored Seconds Type B ESB B2 Severely Errored Seconds SES B2 Unavailable Seconds UAS Line Protection Switch Counts PSC L STS Pointer Justification PJC 1 13841 1384 1 900 40 1 900 30 1 900 30 1 63 20 1 63 30 1 63 2 1 65535 60 1 1328736 132874 1 65535 900 1 65535 90 1 65535 90 1 4095 60 1 4095 90 1 255 4 1 9999999 5760 line line line line line l...

Page 434: ... Seconds UAS P Unavailable Seconds SEFS 1 16383 40 1 900 25 1 63 4 1 63 10 1 63 2 1 1048575 3820 1 65535 250 1 4095 40 1 4095 10 1 4095 8 t3 t3 t3 t3 t3 DS3 Line CV L Coding Violations Errored Seconds Line ES L Severely Errored Seconds Line SES L 1 16383 40 1 900 25 1 63 4 1 1048575 3865 1 65535 250 1 4095 40 t3 t3 t3 VT1 5 Path V5 Errored Seconds ES V5 Severely Errored Seconds SES V5 Unavailable ...

Page 435: ...6 1 16383 13296 1 65535 648 1 4095 100 1 4095 10 1 65535 648 1 4095 100 1 4095 10 1 1048575 691 1 1048575 132960 1 1048575 132960 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 DS1 Line ES L Line Errored Seconds 1 900 65 1 65535 648 Threshold is set once for both current quarter hour and current day Release 6 0 and later linear releases Release 7 0 and later ring releases feature package option Release 5 1 and later ...

Page 436: ...363 206 285 Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 158 Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 437: ...roller Maintenance and Memory Administration 8 5 Controller Maintenance 8 5 Memory Administration 8 5 System Backup and Restoral 8 6 Service Affecting Actions 8 7 Multiplexing and Mapping 8 8 DS1 to OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 8 8 DS3 to OC 3 OC 12 8 12 EC 1 to OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 8 12 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 to OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 8 13 OC 3 to OC 1 8 13 OC 1 to OC 1 Hairpin 8 14 DS3 to EC 1 Hairpin 8 14 EC 1 to EC 1 Hairpin...

Page 438: ...8 20 Remote OS Access TL1 X 25 GNE 8 20 Remote CIT Login 8 20 Remote Software Download and Copy 8 20 Subnetwork Size 8 20 Cross Connection Provisioning 8 21 Cross Connection Types 8 22 Manual Cross Connections 8 25 Allowable Cross Connects 8 26 OC 3 OC 12 OC 1 Path Protected Ring Application 8 39 OC 3 OC 12 Path Protected Ring Drop and Continue Application 8 39 OC 3 OC 12 Path Protected Ring Optic...

Page 439: ...ning 8 50 OC 3 OC 12 Ring Network Drop and Continue Cross Connection Example 8 53 OC 3 OC 12 VT1 5 Path Switched Ring 0x1 Single Homing 8 55 Example Cross Connections 8 56 OC 3 OC 1 Ring Cross Connection Provisioning 8 59 OC 3 OC 1 Ring Network Cross Connection Example 8 60 Single Homed OC 3 OC 1 Path Switched Ring Example 8 63 Dual Homed OC 3 OC 1 Path Switched Ring Example 8 66 Switch Selectable...

Page 440: ...8 iv Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 441: ...xer provides automatic version recognition of all hardware firmware and software installed in the system Each circuit pack Common Language code equipment catalog item ECI code apparatus code and series number and serial number is stored on the circuit pack and is accessible by the system controller SYSCTL via the craft interface terminal CIT Circuit packs with socketed devices also report those de...

Page 442: ...swords Replacement of the SYSCTL circuit pack causes the system to default back to the default logins and passwords Up to 100 logins and passwords can be added deleted and changed by three authorized privileged users Login and password security can be enabled or disabled Timeouts can be provisioned independently for front and rear access CIT interfaces and the synchronous optical network SONET sec...

Page 443: ...ext ID map ent tl1msgmap Enter TL1 message map for OS ent ulsdcc l3 Enter Upper Layer Section DCC Layer 3 ent ulsdcc l4 Enter Upper Layer Section DCC Layer 4 dlt ulsdcc l4 Delete Upper Layer Section DCC Layer 4 init pm Initialize Performance Monitoring ins prog Install Program reset System Reset set date Set network element NE Date and time set ne Set NE name set x25 Set X 25 baud rate for OS Repo...

Page 444: ...ware can be downloaded using a PC through the EIA 232 D interface on the user panel to another system connected to the local system via the SONET DCC The DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers can upgrade the system software while in service DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers use flash erasable programmable read only memory flash EPROM chips to provide this capability Software can be downloaded fr...

Page 445: ...SCTL is failed a protection switch cannot be done and service carried by the failed circuit pack will be affected Memory Administration 8 All transmission affecting parameters that are set by software such as bipolar 8 zero substitution alternate mark inversion B8ZS AMI encoding on DS1 interfaces and STS 1 VT cross connect assignments are stored in nonvolatile memory on the SYSCTL circuit pack and...

Page 446: ...ks This feature saves a copy of a node s provisionable parameters so they can be restored at a later date if necessary The feature provides backup and restoral for all provisionable parameters including Network Element NE provisionable parameters Cross connections Port and line provisionable parameters Performance Monitoring PM threshold parameters Refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces of this ...

Page 447: ...a Loss of service may continue on channels associated with the replaced circuit pack after the shelf is powered up Executing the command init sys all sets all provisioning data including cross connect provisioning to default values This causes loss of service on any channel connected with non default cross connections Failing to disable the SYSCTL circuit pack before it is removed in accordance wi...

Page 448: ... OC 12 8 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer uses the floating VT mode asynchronous mapping for clear channel DS1 transport Each DS1 signal is mapped to a VT1 5 signal four VT1 5s are byte interleaved to form a VT G signal and seven VT Gs are byte interleaved to form a VT structured STS 1 signal The STS 1 signals are byte interleaved to create STS 3 and STS 12 signals respectively In the opposite direct...

Page 449: ...g can be overridden using the ent crs vt1 and ent crs sts1 commands See Section 11 Commands and Reports for more information on these commands With this default mapping each DS 1 port is associated with a specific timeslot a VT G in an STS 1 and a specific VT1 5 in a VT G All a location ports are associated with STS 1 number 1 b location ports are associated with STS 1 number 2 and c location port...

Page 450: ...3 4 2 1 a 3 1 3 1 3 1 a 3 2 10 2 3 1 a 3 3 17 3 3 1 a 3 4 24 4 3 1 a 4 1 4 1 4 1 a 4 2 11 2 4 1 a 4 3 18 3 4 1 a 4 4 25 4 4 1 a 5 1 5 1 5 1 a 5 2 12 2 5 1 a 5 3 19 3 5 1 a 5 4 26 4 5 1 a 6 1 6 1 6 1 a 6 2 13 2 6 1 a 6 3 20 3 6 1 a 6 4 27 4 6 1 a 7 1 7 1 7 1 a 7 2 14 2 7 1 a 7 3 21 3 7 1 a 7 4 28 4 7 1 b 1 1 1 1 1 2 b 1 2 8 2 1 2 b 1 3 15 3 1 2 b 1 4 22 4 1 2 b 2 1 2 1 2 2 b 2 2 9 2 2 2 b 2 3 16 3 ...

Page 451: ...2 13 2 6 2 b 6 3 20 3 6 2 b 6 4 27 4 6 2 b 7 1 7 1 7 2 b 7 2 14 2 7 2 b 7 3 21 3 7 2 b 7 4 28 4 7 2 c 1 1 1 1 1 3 c 1 2 8 2 1 3 c 1 3 15 3 1 3 c 1 4 22 4 1 3 c 2 1 2 1 2 3 c 2 2 9 2 2 3 c 2 3 16 3 2 3 c 2 4 23 4 2 3 c 3 1 3 1 3 3 c 3 2 10 2 3 3 c 3 3 17 3 3 3 c 3 4 24 4 3 3 c 4 1 4 1 4 3 c 4 2 11 2 4 3 c 4 3 18 3 4 3 c 4 4 25 4 4 3 c 5 1 5 1 5 3 c 5 2 12 2 5 3 c 5 3 19 3 5 3 c 5 4 26 4 5 3 c 6 1 6...

Page 452: ...2 EC 1 to OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 8 The STS1E low speed interface receives an EC 1 signal from the backplane coaxial connector which is then routed as an internal STS 1 This signal can be STS 1 or VT1 5 cross connected to the OC 1 OC 3 or OC 12 interface Three internal STS 1 signals are multiplexed into an STS 3 or STS 12 and converted to an optical OC 3 or OC 12 signal In the opposite direction a receive...

Page 453: ...ons In dual homing applications each of the two OC 3 shelves terminating the OC 1 ring extension is equipped with only one 27 type OLIU in a function unit slot Each VT is mapped from the OC 3 OLIUs for example m 1 1 1 m 2 1 1 m 3 1 1 into the 27 type OLIUs with two STS 1s from which to choose a 1 or a 2 In the dual homing application the user must map a VT from the OC 1 ring to the same VT in the ...

Page 454: ...ich correspond to the OC 1 lines supported by the 27G2 U OLIU must be different If the second 27G2 U is in a different function unit note that connections between the A and the B function units are not allowed The traffic handling capacity consumed by the OC 1 to OC 1 hairpin connections is independent of a shelf s main to function unit traffic handling capacity Thus a shelf using such connections...

Page 455: ...Each parameter is given a default The defaults for software parameters are maintained in the SYSCTL circuit pack All provisioning data is stored in nonvolatile memory to prevent data loss during power failures Remote Provisioning 8 Software control of many provisioning parameters allows remote provisioning of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer This feature is provided especially for parameters likely t...

Page 456: ...overhead to communicate between NEs and follows the active SONET transmission line and or IAO LAN In a given subnetwork the NEs on each side of an optical span must have their user side network side OSI terminology parameters provisioned to opposite values Local procedures should determine the user and network side of a span For example the CO terminal can be designated the network side and the RT...

Page 457: ...nologies 2000 Product Family Multi Vendor Operations Interworking Guide NSAP Provisioning 8 The network services access point NSAP is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies each NE for OI purposes The NSAP is used for subnetwork DCC communications using the OSI protocol A unique NSAP is programmed into the SYSCTL circuit pack at the factory and does not have to be modified by the user un...

Page 458: ...isable TDC TID NSAP Entries It is recommended that TARP default values always be used with the possible exceptions of Manual Adjacency and the TDC parameters TARP Manual Adjacency may be used to propagate TARP messages beyond any non TARP nodes in a subnetwork if necessary In the unlikely event the TDC contains inaccurate information the TDC parameters may be used to update the TDC Eliminated Prov...

Page 459: ...ioning 8 Subnetwork partitioning also involves the assignment of level 2 Intermediate Systems ISs The ent ulsdcc l3 command is used to assign DDM 2000 to serve as a level 2 IS See the ent ulsdcc l3 command in Section 11 Commands and Reports for more information on NSAP provisioning ...

Page 460: ...ates While an end to end circuit is being set up particularly during VT1 5 or STS 1 cross connection provisioning transient maintenance signals may result Without automatic channel state provisioning these are reported as alarms or events The technicians are expected to ignore these transient alarms and initiate corrective action only if the alarms persist after the provisioning is completed To av...

Page 461: ...rom the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System to other Lucent 2000 Product Family systems in the same subnetwork Refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces for more information Remote Software Download and Copy 8 The DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers can upgrade the system software while in service Software can be downloaded locally using a PC through the EIA 232 D interface on the user panel or remotel...

Page 462: ...lable time slot in any function unit equipped with low speed STS1E DS3 or DS1 circuit packs For bidirectional hub applications at a ring node the normal default two way cross connection is used to connect a like signal in the high speed main slot to any available time slot in either the A B or C function unit which has been equipped with OLIU circuit packs The bidirectional pass through service is...

Page 463: ...terfaces With this cross connection all added signals are bridged on to both rotations of the ring and the better of the two signals received from the two rotations of the ring is dropped Another type of cross connection allows a VT1 5 or STS 1 channel to be passed through between two high speed ring interfaces or between two OC 1 ring interfaces supported by 27G2 U OLIUs in function units This is...

Page 464: ...s ignored A signal is transmitted from a non ring interface DS1 interface through the specified channel m 1 1 1 on ring 2 using ring interface m1 The provisioned AIS or unequipped signal is transmitted on the other direction around the ring ring 1 using ring interface m2 This signal will not cause any alarms at pass through nodes and will only cause alarms at terminating nodes if cross connections...

Page 465: ...in Release 11 0 the mixing of 0x1 pass through and hairpin add drop cross connects is allowed Beginning in Release 13 0 VT1 5 and STS 1 signals terminating on 26G2 U OC 1 OLIUs in function units may be hairpin connected The available interfaces are DS1 to EC 1 OC 3 EC 1 to OC 3 EC 1 to EC 1 OC 3 to OC 3 OC 1 to OC 1 Table 8 4 lists the number of available VT1 5 cross connections including hairpin ...

Page 466: ...ignal cross connections cnvt crs Convert Cross Connection This command converts an existing STS 1 cross connection to 28 individual VT1 5 cross connections with the same endpoints as the STS 1 cross connection VT1 5 signals carried within the original STS 1 appear in the same time slots in the upstream or downstream DDM 2000 OC 3 before and after the conversion takes place The cnvt crs command has...

Page 467: ...l port OLIUs in the same function unit no path switching Dual 0x1 NR A two way dual 0x1 cross connection between a ring interface and a non ring interface is a bidirectional cross connection between a channel on a ring interface and a port on a non ring interface no path switching Pass Through A two way pass through cross connection on a ring interface is a bidirectional cross connection on a sing...

Page 468: ...ted ring rotation STS 3c An STS 3c cross connection is a main to FN C two way dual 0x1 cross connect for OC 3 concatenated transmission Table 8 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Cross Connect Types Allowable Main to Main From MAIN To MAIN Circuit Pack Cross Connect Type 22 Type 24 Type 27 Type 29 Type 22 type Pass Through STS 5 1 Pass Through VT 5 0 24G U Pass Through STS 11 0 Pass Through STS 3c 11 0 Pass Thr...

Page 469: ... 1 Dual 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 9 0 9 0 Dual 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 9 0 9 0 Dual 0x1 NR STS 11 0 Single 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 9 0 9 0 Single 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 9 0 9 0 Single 0x1 NR STS 11 0 Drop Continue STS 7 2 7 0 Drop Continue VT 7 2 7 0 Locked VT 9 0 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 NR STS 27 type Add Drop STS 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 13 0 11 1 Add Drop VT 9 0 9 0 9 0 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 9 0 9 0 Dual 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 9 ...

Page 470: ...VT 11 0 11 0 11 0 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 11 0 11 0 Dual 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 11 0 11 0 Dual 0x1 NR STS 11 0 Single 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 11 0 11 0 Single 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 11 0 11 0 Single 0x1 NR STS 11 0 Drop Continue STS 11 0 11 0 Drop Continue VT 11 0 11 0 Locked VT 11 0 13 0 11 1 Dual Locked STS From MAIN To FUNCTION UNIT Circuit Pack Cross Connect Type 22 type 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U DS3 STS1E M...

Page 471: ...a dual 0x1 configuration This table refers to only low speed STS 1 interfaces Only FN B and or FN C can be equipped with 22 type OLIUs in this release FN A FN B and or FN C can be equipped with 22 type OLIUs in this release This entry valid for DS3 circuit packs except the BBG19 front access pack This entry valid for the BBG19 front access DS3 circuit pack One of the pair of function unit slots wi...

Page 472: ...26G2 U Add Drop STS 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 Add Drop VT 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 Pass Through STS 13 0 11 1 Pass Through VT 13 0 11 1 Single 0x1 STS 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 Single 0x1 VT 13 0 11 1 13 0 11 1 27G2 U Add Drop STS 11 0 11 0 11 0 13 0 11 1 Add Drop VT 11 0 11 0 11 0 13 0 11 1 Dual 0x1 ...

Page 473: ...ssociated with the 26G2 U OLIUs The MXRVO functionality on the 26G2 U OLIUs is used Note that it is NOT possible to connect between a channe on an OC 1 ring terminating on a pair of 26G2 U OLIUs and a 26G2 U DS1 combination in a different function unit MXRVO functionality within the 26G2 U OLIU is NOT used Rather a separate pair of MXRVOs in a different FN group are used Cross connections from one...

Page 474: ... b c MXRVO STS1E DS3 MXRVO STS1E DS3 MXRVO STS1E DS3 ent crs sts1 m 1 a ent crs sts1 m 2 b ent crs sts1 m 3 c Note The STS1E circuit pack hardware switch must be set to low speed to support cross connections Whenever 24 type or 29 type OLIUs are installed in main the range of STS 1s will be from 1 to 12 Example m 1 12 Ring cross connection 27 type OLIU in main From To To CP Type CIT Command m 1 3 ...

Page 475: ... Ring cross connection 27 type OLIU in main From To To CP Type Note CIT Command m 1 3 m 1 3 m 1 3 a b c STS1E STS1E STS1E ent crs sts1 m 1 a cct dc ring m1 ent crs sts1 m 2 b cct dc ring m1 ent crs sts1 m 3 c cct dc ring m2 m 1 3 m 1 3 m 1 3 a 1 2 b 1 2 c 1 3 OLIU OLIU OLIU ent crs sts1 m 1 a 1 ent crs sts1 m 2 b 2 ent crs sts1 m 3 c 3 m 1 2 a b c STS1E ent crs sts1 m 1 a cct dc ring m1 m 1 2 m 1 ...

Page 476: ...ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 a 1 1 Note The STS1E circuit pack hardware switch must be set to low speed to support cross connections Whenever 24 type or 29 type OLIUs are installed in main the range of STS 1s will be from 1 to 12 Example m 1 12 Ring cross connection 27 type OLIU in main From To To CP Type CIT Command m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 a 1 2 1 7 1 4 b 1 2 1 7 1 4 c 1 3 1 7 1 4 OLIU O...

Page 477: ...s vt1 m 2 3 4 b 3 4 cct dc ring m1 ent crs vt1 m 3 3 3 c 3 3 cct dc ring m2 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 a 1 2 1 7 1 4 b 1 2 1 7 1 4 c 1 3 1 7 1 4 OLIU OLIU OLIU ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 cct dc ring m1 ent crs vt1 m 2 2 2 b 2 2 2 cct dc ring m1 ent crs vt1 m 3 3 3 c 3 3 3 cct dc ring m2 m 1 2 1 7 1 4 a b c 1 7 1 4 STS1E ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 a 1 1 cct dc ring m1 m 1 2 1 7 1 4 m 1 2 1...

Page 478: ...dress on the left side MUST BE identical to the address on the right side There is no interchange function for pass through signals Whenever 24 type or 29 type OLIUs are installed in main the range of STS 1s will be from 1 to 12 Example m 1 12 Ring cross connection 27G U OLIU in main From To To CP Type CIT Command m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 m 1 3 1 7 1 4 a 1 7 1 4 b 1 7 1 4 c 1 7 1 4 MXRVO MXRVO ...

Page 479: ...IU 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU c 1 2 1 7 1 4 a 1 2 1 7 1 4 b 1 2 1 7 1 4 c 1 2 1 7 1 4 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU 27G2 U OLIU ent crs vt1 a 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 ent crs vt1 b 1 1 ent crs vt1 c 1 1 a b 1 2 1 7 1 4 c 1 3 1 7 1 4 a b 1 2 1 7 1 4 22 type OLIU 22 type OLIU 22 type OLIU c 1 7 1 4 a b 1 7 1 4 c 1 3 1 7 1 4 STS1E MXRVO STS1E MXRVO 22 type OLIU ent crs vt1 a 1 1 ent crs v...

Page 480: ...ime slots in function units A and B cannot be cross connected to each other When function units A and B are equipped with OLIUs they can only carry two STS 1 or 56 VT1 5 signals They cannot be cross connected with main or function unit C to carry three STS 1 84 VT1 5 or an STS3C signal A cross connection cannot be made to a slot that is in the unequipped state Also a cross connection may not be ma...

Page 481: ...odes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections To do a cross connection successfully proper addressing of cross connect points is necessary Figure 8 2 shows example STS 1 addresses For a complete list of valid addresses refer to Table 8 5 through Table 8 17 Figure 8 2 Example of STS 1 Addresses M A I N STS 1 1 STS 1 2 OLIU m 1 m 2 Function Unit A MXRVO a Function Unit B DS3 b OLIU...

Page 482: ...hese are called drop connections For example the command ent crs vt1 m 2 6 4 a 1 3 connects the third low speed port associated with slot 1 of low speed group A to the fourth VT1 5 within the sixth VT group within the second STS 1 of both rings Similarly for STS 1 channels the command ent crs sts1 m 2 a connects the DS3 or EC 1 port of function group A to the second STS 1 of both rings At the inte...

Page 483: ...ts the node Nodes 1 and 5 and pass through cross connections are made at each intermediate node Nodes 2 3 4 and 6 The example is for DS1 services but can be used to STS 1 services if the function units are properly equipped with DS3 and or STS1E circuit packs The STS1E circuit pack can support 28 VT cross connections or one STS 1 cross connection Pass through cross connections should be establishe...

Page 484: ...intermediate nodes and enter ring pass through cross connections At each intermediate node of the network use the ent crs vt1 command to cross connect the VT1 5 DS1 channel time slots between main 1 and main 2 For example to cross connect the channel time slot associated with STS 1 1 in VT group 2 DS1 port 3 use the ent crs vt1 m 1 2 3 m 1 2 3 command NOTE Only one command is required to establish...

Page 485: ...d sw path vt1 m2 1 2 3 The rtrv state path and sw path vt1 commands use a slightly different VT1 5 ring channel designations from the cross connect designations because these commands need to identify which of the two paths around the ring is currently active If the ring path and selected VT1 5 channel are being received on main 1 the active ring channel designation for the rtrv state path and sw ...

Page 486: ...through connection MAIN 2 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 MAIN 1 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 A B C TSI Node 5 MAIN 2 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 MAIN 1 A B C TSI Node 4 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 IN OUT DS1 a 2 3 to m 1 2 3 where a 2 3 address of DS1 port 3 circuit pack 2 in group A m 1 2 3 address of STS 1 VTG 2 VT 3 m 1 2 3 to m 1 2 3 pass through connection MAIN 1 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 MAIN 2 A B C TSI Node 6 m...

Page 487: ...h BBF6 circuit pack can support 2 T1 extensions These can be mixed with DS1 BBF1 BBF1B BBF3 or BBF3B BBF8 HDSL or BBF9 BBF10 IMA LAN Low Speed circuit packs The Low Speed slot ls a b c 8 position is the protection slot for all other slots equipped with packs of a kind it can protect A shelf with BBF6s in every Low Speed slot of a certain group provides 14 T1 extensions Furthermore a BBF6 can only ...

Page 488: ...evice to prevent locally destined packets from traversing the network The selected MAC packets are mapped into ATM cells using either the AAL5 IETF RFC 1483 multi protocol encapsulation or VC multiplexed format one format will be pre configured for the initial release All user ATM cells have a single default provisioned VP VC address The ATM cells are round robin distributed over 1 to 8 DS1 channe...

Page 489: ...S Using a BBG2 MXRVO circuit pack in the corresponding Function Unit group Using a BBG2B Enhanced MXRVO circuit pack in the corresponding Function Unit group Any time T1EXT is used BBG2B MXRVO packs must be used DS1 T1EXT HDSL packs can be protected The above table is subject to change General DS1 BBF1 BBF1B BBF3 and BBF3B T1EXT BBF6 HDSL BBF8 LAN BBF9 BBF10 Cross Connection and Other Provisioning...

Page 490: ...ion addresses are different A mixed traffic ring of STS 1 and VT1 5 drop and continue services is supported Two nodes are defined to be drop and continue nodes in a ring subnetwork and are the exit points where two copies of the same service are available By making two copies of the same service available at two nodes the network is protected from failure of a node for example a CO that affects al...

Page 491: ... dc for drop and continue The parameter ring for the ent crs sts1 or ent crs vt1 command defines the direction of the continued signal The counterclockwise ring is called m2 because it is always connected to main 2 OLIU Similarly the clockwise ring is called m1 because it is always connected to main 1 OLIU At CO 1 the parameter for ring is m2 which means to continue the signal on Ring 2 toward CO ...

Page 492: ...ing 2 OUT IN OUT IN CO 4 CO 5 A B C OUT IN MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU OUT IN CO 1 A B C OUT IN MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU OUT IN CO 2 EC 1 EC 1 A B C OUT IN MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU Ring 1 Ring 2 OUT IN CO 3 DS1 or DS3 MAIN OLIU ent crs sts 1 m 1 b cct dc ring m1 ent crs sts 1 m 1 b cct dc ring m2 where dc type of cross connection drop and continue m2 ring transmitting to next dual ring interworking node...

Page 493: ...identification of Ring 1 clockwise and Ring 2 counterclockwise This identification is a key to correct provisioning and needs to be checked before cross connections are made 5 The work order will specify the low speed channel of the DS3 service the available high speed channel on the lower ring and the low speed channel assigned at the drop and continue nodes While it is not required by DDM 2000 t...

Page 494: ... connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 or DS3 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 b to m 1 ent crs sts1 b m 1 where b addres...

Page 495: ...must be provisioned as 0x1 Signals pass through the DDM 2000 OC 12 transport ring and exit to the DDM 2000 OC 3 ring OC 12 function unit slot FN x 1 is connected to OC 3 main 1 and OC 12 function unit slot FN x 2 is connected to OC 3 main 2 Switching is not done on the DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer on these lines or paths on these lines rather VT1 5 or STS 1 level path switching is done on the DDM 20...

Page 496: ...second STS in the OC 3 between RT2 and RT2 2 RT3 is an OC 3 shelf equipped with OC 12 optics The 24G U OLIUs provide the ability to drop up to any three of the 12 STS 1s at this node The remaining STS 1s continue on the OC 12 ring At RT4 mb 1 mb 1 mb 1 is passed through RT4 at the STS level These cross connections can be thought of as establishing one STS of an OC 3 ring embedded in the OC 12 syst...

Page 497: ...1 2 1 At RT2 2 m 2 2 1 m 2 2 1 At RT2 time slot mb 1 is dropped to the second STS going to RT2 2 m 2 The VT VTG assignment remains 2 1 A VT pass through cross connection is needed to enable future DS1s to be dropped at RT2 2 If drops will never be needed STS pass through cross connections can be used RT3 is an OC 3 shelf equipped with OC 12 optics The 24G U OLIUs provide the ability to drop up to ...

Page 498: ...ng RT4 mb 1 mb 1 OLIU IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU IN OUT MAIN B1 mb 1 c 2 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 1 Ring 1 OC 12 CO OC 12 RT1 RT2 OC 12 m 2 2 1 m 2 2 1 OUT IN OC 3 CO 1 OC 3 MAIN B1 OLIU MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU IN OUT A B C b 2 1 m 1 2 1 b 2 1 IN OUT B IN OUT C D mb 1 a 1 OUT IN OC 3 MAIN B1 OLIU MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU RT1 1 OC 3 A B D MAIN 1 OLIU IN OUT A B C OUT IN OC 3 MAIN 2 OL...

Page 499: ...e command ent crs vt1 m 1 6 4 a 1 3 connects the third low speed port associated with slot 1 of low speed group A to the fourth VT1 5 within the sixth VT group within the first and only STS 1 of both OC 1 rings At the intermediate nodes a pass through cross connection establishes a cross connect path on both rings Pass through cross connections are designated by using the same VT ring channel twic...

Page 500: ...dress of STS 1 VTG 2 VT 3 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT DS1 m 1 2 3 to m 1 2 3 pass through connection m 1 2 3 to m 1 2 3 pass through connection m 1 2 3 to m 1 2 3 pass through connection Ring 1 Ring 2 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Node 4 DDM 2000 FiberReach Node 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Node 5 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach Node 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 a 1 1 to m 1 2 3 where a...

Page 501: ...de in the network for each circuit being established Drop cross connections are made at the drop nodes where service enters or exits the node Nodes 1 and 4 and pass through cross connections are made at each intermediate node Nodes 2 3 and 5 It is recommended that pass through cross connections be entered first as shown below to avoid transient alarms during provisioning The following commands may...

Page 502: ... nodes of the new service The sw path vt1 command should be limited to the addresses that are being tested For the example the commands to be used at Node 1 and Node 4 are sw path vt1 m1 1 2 3 and sw path vt1 m2 1 2 3 Note that this same configuration could be set up using the second OC 1 interface on the 27G U OLIUs in the main slots of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf at Node 1 To do this using the same ...

Page 503: ... when reviewing this example Figure 8 8 Example Single Homed Path Switched Ring Configuration Cross Connections OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT Ring 2 Ring 1 OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT Ring 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FIBERREACH RT4 RT3 OC 3 RING Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 DS1s RT1 OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 RT2 ...

Page 504: ... from the OC 1 ring s are sent as two copies one clockwise the other counter clockwise on the OC 3 ring the OC 3 ring capacity is limited to the OC 3 line rate 84 VT1 5 signals So although one DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf can support up to six OC 1 rings the full capacity of all six OC 1 rings cannot be carried on the OC 3 ring The OC 1 lines between an OC 3 node and an OC 1 node behave like the OC 1 lines...

Page 505: ...ngle command establishes the following signal paths through the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf at RT3 from main 1 STS 1 1 VTG 2 VT1 5 3 to FN B 1 STS 1 1 VTG 5 VT1 5 4 from FN B 1 STS 1 1 VTG 5 VT1 5 4 to main 1 STS 1 1 VTG 2 VT1 5 3 from main 2 STS 1 1 VTG 2 VT1 5 3 to FN B 2 STS 1 1 VTG 5 VT1 5 4 from FN B 2 STS 1 1 VTG 5 VT1 5 4 to main 2 STS 1 1 VTG 2 VT1 5 3 1 At the CO ent crs vt1 m 1 2 3 b 7 4 cct two...

Page 506: ...3 ring can be either DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers or SLC 2000 Access Systems Figure 8 9 Example Dual Homed OC 3 OC 1 Path Switched Ring Configuration Cross Connections OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT Ring 2 Ring 1 OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT OLIU IN OUT Ring 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FIBERREACH RT4 RT3 OC 3 RING Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 MAIN 1 MAIN...

Page 507: ...5 signal is routed between a timeslot on the OC 3 ring and a timeslot on the OC 1 ring At the DDM 2000 FiberReach ent crs vt1 m 1 7 4 c 1 4 cct twoway At this site the signal is routed from a DS1 interface to the same timeslot on both rotations of the OC 1 ring In the other direction the VT1 5 signals received from both rotations of the OC 1 ring are monitored path protection switching is provided...

Page 508: ...ions an OC 12 node can assign the other STS 3cs to different time slots at different sites With 0x1 applications the OC 12 ring passes the contents of these STS 3c time slots between the low speed OC 3 IS 3 lines and the OC 12 high speed lines without terminating them or performing path protection switching Since the STS 3c traffic is received by the low speed interfaces and transmitted as two cop...

Page 509: ...vices Using DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer OC 12 OC 12 ATM Switch B DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3c OC 3c OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 m1 m2 m2 m2 m2 m1 m1 m1 Fn c 1 Fn c 1 Fn c 1 Fn c 2 Fn c 2 Fn c 1 Fn c 2 Fn c 2 ATM Switch A ATM Switch D ATM Switch C OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c OC 3c tpa851635 01 ...

Page 510: ...e SYSCTL rtrv ne DS1 reference format DS1 reference line coding Shelf timing mode SYNC Output LBO DS1 Output SF ESF AMI B8ZS free running external DS1 line timed 5 settings cable dependent MULT SYNC OUT TG TG TG TG TG rtrv sync rtrv sync rtrv sync rtrv sync DS1 line coding DS1 LBO AMI B8ZS 5 settings cable dependent DS1 DS1 rtrv t1 DS3 LBO 2 settings cable dependent DS3 STS1E LBO 2 settings cable ...

Page 511: ... clear delay Power minor almn level 0 30 sec 0 30 sec MN MJ 2 15 MN set attr alm set attr alm set attr alm OC 1 degrade threshold AIS alarm level of NSA OC 1 Line AIS 10 5 to 10 9 CR MJ MN NA 10 6 NA set oc1 set oc1 OC 3 degrade threshold Sync Messaging Concatenation mode AIS alarm level of NSA OC 3 Line AIS DCC Mode 10 5 to 10 9 K byte S byte disabled enabled disabled CR MJ MN NA identical distin...

Page 512: ...t vt1 set vt1 set vt1 set state vt1 DS3 VMR mode Clear channel DS3 AIS insertion DS3 sig failure alarm level DS3 failure threshold DS3 PM mode DS3 PM frame DS3 PM format DS3 port state VMR VM clear channel yes no CR MJ MN NA 10 3 10 6 BER off on m13 cbit pbit fmbit cpbit NMON AUTO VMR no CR 10 3 on m13 pbit AUTO set t3 set t3 set t3 set t3 set t3 set t3 set t3 set state t3 DS1 line coding DS1 alar...

Page 513: ...to 10 9 BER NMON AUTO CR 10 6 AUTO set ec1 set ec1 set state ec1 Feature package VT PM DS1 PM enabled disabled disabled set feat X 25 packet size 128 256 256 set x25 L3org Organization ID L3res Reserved L3rd Routing Domain L3area Area within routing domain L3lv2is Level 2 router Refer to command pages of ent ulsdcc l3 in Section 11 000000 0000 0000 0000 disable ent ulsdcc l3 ent ulsdcc l3 ent ulsd...

Page 514: ... Baudrate only if porttype is TL1 or asynch Echo only if pottype is TL1 or asynch cit TL1 asynch synch 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 enabled disabled cit synch 9600 enabled set secu set secu set secu set sync Address porttype cit 1 2 x 25 cit TL1 if address cit1 or cit2 synch asynch if address x 25 x 25t cit synch ent osacmap ent osacmap ent osacmap STS 3C cross connection two way two way ent crs sts3...

Page 515: ...Line specified It applies to linear 1 1 optical interfaces only This command is available to privileged users only When security is enabled this command is available to privileged users only default is disable Setting this parameter also affects DS1 output source and DS1 sync output mode See set sync command in Section 11 Commands and Reports Parameters can be set for each channel Ring releases Re...

Page 516: ...t TID may be changed using the set ne command to a unique user assigned value recognized by the OS CO RT The CO RT parameter for CO or RT identifies the system as having the characteristics of a CO or RT The default is RT The parameter controls the operation of the miscellaneous discretes and the external fan control NSAP The NSAP is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies each NE The NSA...

Page 517: ...tion and Provisioning Issue 3 June 2001 8 77 Performance Monitoring PM Parameters Provisionable via the CIT 8 For a list of PM parameters provisionable via the CIT see Table 10 19 in the Specifications chapter of this manual ...

Page 518: ...363 206 285 Administration and Provisioning 8 78 Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 519: ...oftware Compatibility 9 10 Maintenance Signaling 9 12 Non Ring Interfaces 9 14 Ring Applications 9 18 Fault Detection Isolation and Reporting 9 23 Detection 9 23 Isolation 9 23 Reporting 9 23 Protection Switching 9 24 Automatic Line Protection 9 24 Status of ACTIVE LED on OLIUs 9 24 APS Initiation Criteria 9 25 Path Protection Switching Path Switched Rings 9 27 Path Protection Scheme 9 29 Path Pro...

Page 520: ...0 VT Performance Monitoring 9 42 DS1 Performance Monitoring 9 42 DS3 Performance Monitoring 9 44 DS3 Path PM 9 44 DS3 Line 9 45 Optical Parameters 9 45 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9 45 Laser Bias Current 9 45 Optical Transmit Power 9 45 OC 3 Section Parameters 9 46 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9 46 Severely Errored Frame Seconds SEFS 9 46 OC 3 EC 1 Line Parameters 9 46 Performance Monitorin...

Page 521: ...erformance Monitoring Enabling 9 50 Errored Seconds ES 9 50 Severely Errored Second SES 9 51 Unavailable Seconds UAS 9 51 CV P Coding Violations 9 51 CV PFE Coding Violations 9 51 DS1 Line Parameters 9 51 ES L Errored Seconds 9 51 DS3 Parameters 9 52 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9 52 DS3 Performance Monitoring PM 9 53 DS3 Path 9 53 DS3 Line 9 55 OC 1 Section Parameters 9 55 Performance Monitori...

Page 522: ... STS Pointer Justification Count PJC 9 58 Performance Monitoring Data Storage and Reports 9 59 Performance Monitoring During Failed Conditions 9 59 Performance Parameter Thresholds 9 59 TCA Transmission to OS 9 60 Performance Monitoring Reports 9 60 TCA Summary Report 9 60 Performance Status Reports 9 60 Reports 9 61 Alarm and Status Report 9 61 Provisioning Reports 9 61 Database Change Transmissi...

Page 523: ...tier consists of light emitting diodes LEDs and pushbuttons on the user panel and circuit pack faceplates These allow routine tasks to be performed without a craft interface terminal CIT or any test equipment The user panel provides system level alarm and status information for the local terminal The circuit pack faceplate FAULT LEDs allow fast and easy fault isolation to a particular circuit pack...

Page 524: ... Telcordia s Network Monitoring and Analysis NMA The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer supports automated service provisioning with memory administration OSs such as Telcordia s Operations System Intelligent Network Element OPS INE and Lucent s ITM SNC The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer also supports remote recovery and control functions installation provisioning and security over the TL1 X 25 link As an alter...

Page 525: ...nual Controls Remote Provisioning Detailed Help Messages TIER 1 TIER 2 CIT Circuit Pack Fault and Active LEDs Automatic Turn up Tests Default Provisioning RS 232 Alarm Surveillance Performance Monitoring Remote Control Security Remote Operations Center Security TIER 3 Remote OS Access Remote Maintenance and Provisioning Automated Service Provisioning Software Download Graphical User Interface CPro...

Page 526: ...ingle DDM 2000 location This minimizes technician travel because most maintenance provisioning and administration can be performed on all DDM 2000 Multiplexers in a subnetwork by accessing any DDM 2000 Multiplexer in the subnetwork The SEO capability is provided by the DDM 2000 Multiplexers regardless of the subnetwork topology as long as DCC connectivity is available The SEO DCC capability can be...

Page 527: ...d Operations DDM 2000 DDM 2000 CIT Remote Operation Center DDM 2000 User Panel Multi Span DDM 2000 Local and Remote Operations CIT Access From CO and OS Via Data Network Legend SONET DCC enabled TL1 X 25 or VF Line Modem Alarm Status and Reports to OS Provisioning From OS OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 tpa 789902 02 ...

Page 528: ...DDM 2000 s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables DDM 2000 to operate in networks that include CMISE based NEs which may not support TARP propagation DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 and R15 support user provisioning of several OSI parameters to allow users to adjust their operations subnetwork if necessary For example to support subnetwork partitioning of large subnetworks DDM 2000 supports user provisioning o...

Page 529: ...can be identified as a separate Alarm Group as long as it does not exceed the 50 NE limitation Provisioning of one alarm gateway NE AGNE is required in order to support remote office alarms and summary alarm information of remote NEs in the local alarm report By default the subnetwork contains a single Alarm Group of all NEs At least one AGNE needs to be provisioned per subnetwork A second AGNE ca...

Page 530: ...fined as AGNE For performance considerations an NE defined as AGNE should not be defined as GNE If a Network Element cannot establish communication with the Alarm Gateway NE or the AGNE cannot establish communication with a Network Element in the same Alarm Group the alarm message AGNE communication failure will be created Alarm Groups without an AGNE have AGNE communication failure alarms An NE i...

Page 531: ...X 11 0 Ring NA NA NA NA NA X X X 13 0 Ring NA NA NA NA NA NA X X 15 0 Ring NA NA NA NA NA NA NA X Note All DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves in a ring should be using the same version of software When a node is upgraded to R13 0 it is isolated until all nodes have been upgraded to R13 0 Remote software downloads to R9 0 are not supported X Requires local or remote software download only to upgrade the system ...

Page 532: ...OLIU STS1E Supports OC 3 OC 12 interworking 0x1 interfaces and DRI 15 0 7 0 22 type 24G U OLIU 29 type OLIU STS1E Supports OC 3 OC 12 interworking 0x1 interfaces and DRI Note All DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers in a ring which may be part of a larger subnetwork must be running the same software In a subnetwork all NEs must be running compatible software according to the table 22 type OLIUs must be used...

Page 533: ...nations not listed are not supported See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi Vendor Operations Interworking Guide for more information on OI Table 9 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 FiberReach Software Compatibility Software Release Interconnecting Circuit Pack DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach 13 0 15 0 Ring 3 0 Ring 27G U 27G2 U 26G2 U OLIU 26G...

Page 534: ...d The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer also generates and detects the following signals which notify upstream equipment of a failure detected downstream Line far end receive failure FERF STS 1 path yellow and VT path yellow An STS 1 VT AIS signal is inserted on paths that are not cross connected however the user can provision a shelf to insert STS 1 VT unequipped instead of AIS on paths that are not cros...

Page 535: ...coming DS3 Signal Failure FE 4 6 5 Terminal DS1 DS3 Terminal DSX 3 2 Incoming OC 3 Failure LOS LOF LINE AIS LOP 2 3 2 3 fn a DS3 fn b DDM 2000 OC 3 System RT DDM 2000 OC 3 CO 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 END RT OLIU OLIU OLIU 10 10 10 Main Main Main FERF VT Path AIS DS3 Yellow STS 1 Path Yellow STS 1 Path AIS VT Path Yellow Local Indicator DS1 Yellow DS3 AIS 2 1 2 10 Uncross connected STS Path Uncross connect...

Page 536: ...2000 OC 3 Multiplexer indicate the signals generated by the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer in response to the indicated incoming signals or failure conditions The Xs indicate points of failure either within the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer or in upstream equipment Unlabeled arrows indicate normal transmission except for OC 3 line AIS maintenance signaling is in response to unprotected failures The DS1 DS3...

Page 537: ...DM 2000 X X X or DS1 AIS Line AIS DS1 CP Removal VT Path AIS Undefined OLIU CP Failure Line FERF VT Path Yellow STS Path Yellow Line FERF STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow Line AIS STS Path AIS STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow VT Path Yellow VT Path AIS Line FERF Line FERF STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow VT Path Yellow All 0s or Provisionable...

Page 538: ...ow Line FERF STS Path Yellow STS Path Yellow Line FERF STS Path Yellow Line FERF STS Path AIS DS3 CP Failure OLIU Failure Line AIS X DDM 2000 X DDM 2000 DS3 AIS STS LOP OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 DS3 AIS DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 LOS DDM 2000 Line AIS DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 LOF LOS OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC...

Page 539: ... FERF Line FERF STS LOP Line AIS Line FERF Line FERF STS Path Yellow STS Path Yellow STS Path Yellow STS Path AIS VT Path AIS STS Path AIS VT Path AIS STS Path AIS VT Path AIS STS Path AIS VT Path AIS STS Path Yellow OC 3 or EC 1 OC 3 or EC 1 OC 3 or EC 1 OC 3 or EC 1 OC 3 or EC 1 provisioned for the VT 1 5 cross connect mode VT Path AIS and STS Path Yellow are sent when shelf is equipped with 22F...

Page 540: ...th Yellow VT Path AIS VT Path Yellow VT Path AIS VT Path Yellow DDM 2000 VT Path AIS Ring 2 STS Path Yellow Ring 1 LOS LOF Line AIS DDM 2000 Ring 2 STS Path Yellow Ring 1 STS LOP STS Path AIS STS Sig Fail DDM 2000 Ring 2 Ring 1 DDM 2000 Ring 2 Ring 1 VT LOP FERF M A I N 1 M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 STS Path Yellow VT Path Yellow VT Path AIS VT Path AIS Li...

Page 541: ...M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 VT Path AIS DDM 2000 OC 3 STS Unequipped VT Path Yellow DS1 VT Path Yellow OC N EC 1 STS Unequipped DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 VT Unequipped VT Unequipped DDM 2000 OC 3 VT Unequipped VT Unequipped VT Unequipped OC N EC 1 These signals are sent only when the failed VT path is selected These signals are sent on pass through or continue paths OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N OC...

Page 542: ...S Line FERF VT Path Yellow VT Path AIS is sent on pass through or continue paths only VT Path Yellow on pass through or continue paths only DS1 VT paths selected from the failed ring Ring 1 STS Unequipped VT Unequipped VT Path AIS not sent for unequipped N is 1 or 3 VT Path Yellow DS1 AIS and VT Path AIS are only sent on OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N OC N VT Path AIS Ring 2 VT Path Yellow Rin...

Page 543: ...ing 2 Ring 1 FERF M A I N 1 M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 M A I N 1 M A I N 2 STS Path Yellow DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 AIS DS3 AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path Yellow EC 1 STS Path Yellow DS3 on whether the STS 1 path is a drop or pass through connection selected from the failed ring Ring 1 STS Path Yellow STS Path AIS and DS3 AIS are only sent on STS 1 paths STS Path Yellow FERF STS Path Yellow FERF...

Page 544: ... Yellow STS Unequipped STS Unequipped DS3 DDM 2000 OC 3 STS Yellow STS Unequipped DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 STS Unequipped STS Unequipped VT Unequipped VT Yellow DS1 VT Unequipped VT Unequipped DDM 2000 OC 3 VT Unequipped OC N EC 1 VT Unequipped These signals are sent on pass through or continue paths These signals are sent only when the failed STS path is selected OC N AIS OC N OC N Undefined N...

Page 545: ...fice alarm relays and through the TL1 X 25 interface The system stores a record of all fault conditions and reports them on demand through the CIT and the TL1 X 25 interface The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer also stores a history of the past 500 alarm and status conditions and CIT events and reports them on demand through the CIT or TL1 interface Each event is real time and date stamped If the diagnos...

Page 546: ...eports The switch line command is not applicable to OC 3 lines configured for path switched rings or to EC 1 interfaces For path switched rings path protection switching is used Refer to Path Protection Switching Path Switched Rings paragraphs in this section and the switch path vt1 or switch path sts1 commands in Section 11 Commands and Reports Automatic Line Protection 9 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multip...

Page 547: ...t This example illustrates the SONET standard of unidirectional APS Since each location sends APS information to the other end both ACTIVE LEDs on the OLIUs at location A are also lit After the cut service fiber is repaired location C does not switch back revert and select the service set as its active fiber OLIU set This example Figure 9 12 c illustrates the SONET standard of nonrevertive APS Fig...

Page 548: ... operational Both SERVICE fibers are Active Location C selects the PROTECTION fiber from A to C as Active fiber SERVICE fiber from C to A fails location A detects failure S P S P failure P P S S PROTECTION fiber from Location A selects the C to A as Active fiber A to C remains Active Location C detects failure Both PROTECTION fibers are Standby SERVICE fiber from A to C fails The PROTECTION fiber ...

Page 549: ...p 1 1 protected arrangement two transmit and two receive in each direction without providing the same level of protection that the ring provides The architecture of the ring is designed to protect against any single point of failure including a node failure single fiber cut or dual fiber cut Node failure or dual fiber failure in a linear network affects traffic to all downstream nodes A node failu...

Page 550: ...363 206 285 Maintenance Description 9 28 Issue 3 June 2001 Figure 9 13 Two Fiber Unidirectional Ring Primary Ring Secondary DDM 2000 Ring DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 ...

Page 551: ...ing the signal that has the highest quality based on LOS LOF path AIS LOP STS VT unequipped and STS VT path BER performance This function at the ring exit point is called a tail end switch Path switching is non revertive All detected hard failures LOS LOF LOP line AIS or STS 1 path AIS and in VT path switched rings an STS 1 path signal failure based on BER or an STS path unequipped results in path...

Page 552: ...SONET path signals to the switch selection point are of high quality and the signal can be selected from either ring A failure or a transmission degradation on one of the rings requires that the other ring path be selected and requirements specify that this path selection must occur within 60 milliseconds after a hard failure condition Figure 9 14 b shows how traffic is switched when a dual fiber ...

Page 553: ...ices Device A reroutes traffic between itself and Data Services Devices B and C Figure 9 15 Locked DS3 Cross Connect Path Protection Switching DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC N PATH SWITCHED RING DS3 DS3 DS3 DS3 STS 1 1 STS 1 1 STS 1 1 STS 1 1 DATA SERVICES DEVICE C LAN DATA SERVICES DEVICE A LAN Re routes traffic between Devices B and C Re routes traffic between Devices B and C DATA SERVICES DEVICE...

Page 554: ...d ring In the receive direction a DRI node that passes a signal between rings performs two steps 1 The VT1 5 and or STS 1 signals to be passed between rings are dropped and continued This means the signal is dropped at that node and simultaneously copied into the OC 3 signal in the outgoing direction of the same ring rotation 2 The VT1 5 and or STS 1 signal that was dropped in Step 1 and the corre...

Page 555: ...INTEROFFICE RING OC 3 LOOP RING RT RT Service Protection EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 Two Way Add Drop Cross Connection Two Way Add Drop Cross Connection Two Way Pass Through Cross Connection Two Way Pass Through Cross Connection Two Way Pass Through Cross Connection Two Way Pass Through Cross Connection Two Way Drop and Continue Cross Connection Two Way Drop and Continue Cross Connection ...

Page 556: ... interconnects with a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring host shelf through low speed OC 1 interfaces on the OC 3 ring shelf VT STS path protection switching is done on the DDM 2000 FiberReach shelf In single homing the DDM 2000 FiberReach ring interconnects through a pair of low speed OC 1 0x1 interfaces on the OC 3 shelf In dual homing the OC 1 ring interconnects through the low speed OC 1 0x1 interfaces on two...

Page 557: ...etermine the quality of the line timing references by reading the synchronization messages in the OC N transport overhead bytes If the quality is not adequate the TG will switch to holdover until manually switched to a good reference If automatic synchronization reconfiguration is enabled the TG will automatically select the highest quality reference See Synchronization Messaging in Section 5 and ...

Page 558: ...BBF1 B and BBF3 circuit packs Individual DS1 facility loopbacks are available with the BBF3B and the BBG20 TMUX circuit packs Active electronic loopbacks are noted by the user panel s abnormal ABN indicator and in the Alarm and Status report Refer to the opr lpbk and rls lpbk commands in Section 11 Commands and Reports Front access to the OLIU optical connectors allows an easy manual OC 3 or OC 1 ...

Page 559: ...the integrated test signal generators and detectors for a DS1 or DS3 low speed interface These signal tests can be run selectively in the multiplex or demultiplex direction Refer to the test trmsn commands in Section 11 Commands and Reports Automatic Turnup Tests 9 Automatic turnup tests are mechanisms that allow rapid turnup of DDM 2000 OC 3 systems without the use of external test equipment Auto...

Page 560: ...e cross connect or wiring that is established This assumes local equipment tests have been performed and any problems or failures have been corrected before this test is done In the test all low speed signals are looped back manual loopbacks at the STSX or DSX see Figure 9 18 Each of the tests described previously returns a good fail result If any circuit pack failures are detected during the test...

Page 561: ...sts 9 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer provides tests for LED indicators office alarms and the system controller Refer to the test led test alm and test sysctl commands in Section 11 Commands and Reports Low Speed CP OLIU or STS1E Internal Test Signal Monitor DDM 2000 External Fiber or EC 1 Loopback Monitor DDM 2000 Internal Test Signal STSX or DSX Local Wiring ...

Page 562: ...t failure Hard and soft failures result in reactive maintenance Proactive maintenance consists of monitoring performance parameters associated with the SONET sections lines and paths within the SONET network Table 9 5 lists the SONET performance parameters monitored by the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer These parameters are thresholded to indicate degraded performance When a PM threshold is crossed it ...

Page 563: ...received and decoded DS1 DS1 line for AMI or B8ZS coding is monitored and the errored second ES L data is displayed for the incoming signal from the DSX 1 DS3 DS3 line for B3ZS coding is monitored and the data is displayed in CV L ES L and SES L registers for the incoming signal from the DSX 3 Path A path is a framed digital stream between two points in a network and represents digital signal tran...

Page 564: ...ormance monitoring of the V5 byte for ES SES and UAS VT PM is a feature package option that requires feature package software licensed by Lucent and the use of the set feat command to enable the feature The counts are retrieved using the rtrv pm vt1 command by the message based OS or through the CIT to determine if the service is operating within tariffed limits DS1 Performance Monitoring 9 DS1 PM...

Page 565: ... channel service units CSUs At the A end the received error performance Z A is detected and written by the customer s CSU onto the outgoing A Z ESF data link as shown by the dashed lines as a performance report message PRM The DS1PM circuit pack interfacing the A end reads the incoming DS1 signal s PRM received from the customer s premises and reports the Z A performance Likewise the OC 3 system i...

Page 566: ...or disables the monitoring and reporting of DS3 path PM data see Table 9 5 P Bit 9 When provisioned for P bit the system calculates and provides counts of DS3 CV P ES P SES P and UAS P incoming from the fiber and DSX Quarter hour and current day registers are provided with provisionable TCAs on a per shelf basis SEFS are also monitored Because P bits can be corrected at nodes provisioned for VMR a...

Page 567: ...L DS3 line PM provides provisionable bit error ratios TCAs for all DS3 line parameters For CVL parameters bit errors can also be provisioned in ratios such as 10 7 10 8 and 10 9 Optical Parameters 9 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9 Collection of optical parameters are initiated when a slot is equipped with an OLIU circuit pack Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriat...

Page 568: ...ack Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the OLIU is removed and the update command or the UPD INIT button is pressed Collection of line parameters for an EC 1 high speed interface is initiated when the slot is equipped with an STS1E circuit pack set for high speed Collection of line parameters for EC 1 low speed interfaces are initiated when a slot is...

Page 569: ...OF or line AIS occurs A UAS is not counted as an SES SESs are counted and thresholded independently for the service and protection lines Unavailable Seconds UAS 9 An unavailable second is a second during which the OC 3 line is unavailable A line is considered unavailable from the beginning of X consecutive SESs until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds none of which is severely errored X is equ...

Page 570: ...ross connections monitoring is initiated only when the first VT1 5 cross connection associated with that STS 1 signal is made and the VT channel is in the IS state This applies to STS 1 paths on both OLIU and STS1E low speed circuit packs Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the last VT1 5 signal associated with that STS 1 cross connection is deleted E...

Page 571: ...ntil the beginning of Y consecutive seconds none of which is severely errored X is equal to 10 seconds or in the case of a failure the STS signal failure Y is equal to 10 seconds of no SES or STS signal failure If there is an unprotected STS 1 path terminating equipment failure STS1E MXRVO DS3 TMUX or OLIU UAS are counted from within 1 second of circuit pack failure to within 1 second of circuit p...

Page 572: ...ond of circuit pack recovery DS1 Path Parameters 9 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9 Collection of DS1 path parameters are initiated only when a slot is equipped with a DS1PM circuit pack assuming associated MXRVO or STS1E circuit packs are present the DS1 port is in the IS or NMON state and the DS1 port is provisioned for PM Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate ...

Page 573: ...DS1 pack failure then UAS are counted from within 1 second of circuit pack failure to within 1 second of circuit pack recovery UAS are counted and thresholded separately for each DS1 path monitored by the system For a DS1 path with ESF format the far end unavailable second performance is obtained from the PRM CV P Coding Violations 9 This indicates the number of DS1 near end path coding violations...

Page 574: ...TS 1 cross connection is present Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the input signal to the DS3 interface is removed and the update command or the UPD INIT button is pressed transitioning to the AUTO state Alternatively the DS3 path parameter can be disabled by setting the DS3 port to the clear channel mode CC using the set t3 command The PM mode par...

Page 575: ...rored Frame Seconds SEFS 9 SESF are a count of the number of seconds during which an OOF or AIS condition exists for a DS3 signal received from the fiber or the DSX 3 or during an unprotected DS3 circuit pack failure SEFSs are counted and thresholded independently for all DS3 interfaces provisioned in VM or VMR mode Errored Seconds ES P 9 An errored second is a second in which one or more DS3 P bi...

Page 576: ...d far end block errors PM data are monitored and displayed The system provides counts of DS3 C bit CV P ES P SES P and UAS P incoming from both the DSX 3 and the fiber The type of PM is provisioned per DS3 service by a CIT command For C bit PM the DS3 service can be provisioned in VM or VMR modes In VMR mode the C bit errors are not corrected as in the P bit option Quarter hour and day registers a...

Page 577: ...r OC 1 interfaces are initiated when a slot is equipped with a 27G U OLIU circuit pack Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the 27G U OLIU is removed and the update command or the UPD INIT button is pressed Severely Errored Frame Seconds SEFS 9 This parameter counts the number of seconds during which an OOF LOS or OLIU circuit pack failure occurred SEF...

Page 578: ... LOS LOF or line AIS occurs A UAS is not counted as a SES SES are counted and thresholded independently for each OC 1 line Unavailable Seconds UAS 9 A UAS is a second during which the OC 1 line is unavailable A line is considered unavailable from the beginning of X consecutive SES until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds none of which is severely errored X is equal to 10 seconds or in the case...

Page 579: ...f the three or 12 line B2 parity violation counters associated with the OC 3 and OC 12 line are added to form a composite B2 parity violation count CVs are not counted during seconds that contain a line AIS LOS LOF or during a UAS The B2 parity violations are counted and thresholded independently for the service and protection lines Errored Seconds ES 9 An errored second is a second in which one o...

Page 580: ...OC N lines in ring releases STS Pointer Justification Count PJC 9 This feature provides a TCA from a DDM 2000 shelf when the STS pointer justification count in a performance bin exceeds a user provisioned threshold value STS PJCs for each SONET line interface are accumulated in 15 minute and 24 hour performance monitoring bins The TCA is sent via a TL1 autonomous message to the OS and is available...

Page 581: ... Parameters that continue to provide useful information are accumulated during the trouble condition Performance Parameter Thresholds 9 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer provides performance thresholds to alert maintenance staff of degraded transmission Whenever the threshold for a parameter is exceeded the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer generates a TCA to alert the OS to the condition A summary of all TCA...

Page 582: ...iled view of those parameters See the rtrv pm tca command in Section 11 Commands and Reports Equivalent reporting information is available through TL1 X 25 commands Refer to 824 102 151 DDM 2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide Performance Status Reports 9 The system provides reports that contain a snapshot of all current and previous PM registers The time at which registers were ...

Page 583: ...rv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv fecom rtrv lgn rtrv link rtrv ne rtrv oc3 rtrv pmthres line rtrv pmthres sect rtrv pmthres sts1 rtrv pmthres t1 rtrv pmthres t3 rtrv pmthres vt rtrv secu rtrv passwd rtrv ec1 rtrv oc1 rtrv sts1 rtrv sync rtrv t1 rtrv t3 rtrv ulsdcc rtrv trace sts1 and rtrv vt1 commands in Section 11 Commands and Reports Database Change Transmission to OS 9 All provisioning changes are...

Page 584: ...Equipment Report 9 This report displays the equipage and version information for one or more slots Refer to the rtrv eqpt command in Section 11 Commands and Reports Neighbor Map Report 9 This report shows the Target Identifiers TID and Network Services Access Points NSAP of the NEs The neighbor report lists the TIDs and NSAPs of all NEs that are immediate DCC and or IAO LAN neighbors Refer to the ...

Page 585: ... Low Speed BBG4 4B 10 12 EC 1 High Speed and Low Speed BBG6 10 14 DS3 Data Services Interface BBG19 10 15 Transmultiplexer BBG20 10 16 Lightguide Jumpers 10 17 Intermediate Reach OC 3 Interface 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU 10 18 Long Reach OC 3 Interface 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 10 19 Long Reach OC 12 Interface 24G U 10 20 Long Reach OC 12 Interface 24H U 10 21 Intraoffice IS 3 OC 3 Rate Interface...

Page 586: ...nal CIT 10 58 Personal Computer PC Specifications for Software Download 10 59 Compatible Modems 10 60 CPro 2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool 10 61 User Panel 10 62 Equipment Indicators 10 62 Office Alarms 10 62 User Definable Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls 10 62 Order Wire 10 63 TL1 X 25 Interface 10 64 Physical Specifications 10 66 Shelf Physical Charac...

Page 587: ...ments 10 69 Shelf Fuses 10 69 Power Dissipation 10 70 DDM 2000 OC 3 Reliability 10 72 Summary 10 72 Transmission Availability 10 72 Operation System Interface Availability 10 73 Optical Module Maintenance Objective 10 73 Infant Mortality 10 74 DDM 2000 OC 3 System Reliability Predictions 10 75 ...

Page 588: ...10 iv Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 589: ...ndustry standards as listed in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Transmission Interface Standards Interface Standard Comments DS1 low speed CB 119 ANSI T1 102 1993 B8ZS AMI option TR 499 Iss 5 ANSI T1 403 1989 SF ESF DS3 low speed CB 119 ANSI T1 102 1993 VMR VM or clear channel TR 499 Iss 5 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 ANSI T1 106 88 ANSI T1 105 91 TR 253 Iss 2 TR 496 Iss 3 EC 1 ANSI T1 102 1993 TR 253 Iss 2 10 100 BaseT ...

Page 590: ...interface provides clear channel transport of any DSX 1 compatible signal There are no format constraints on this interface Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the DS1 interface Loss of signal LOS Line coding violations CV L Loopback Quad DS1 facility loopback The alarm level for each of the monitored parameters can be provisioned to critical CR major MJ minor MN or status...

Page 591: ...arameters are monitored at the DS1PM interface Loss of signal LOS Line coding violations CV L The alarm level for each of the monitored parameters can be provisioned to CR MJ MN or status B8ZS and AMI coding violation failure thresholds are user settable to 10 3 or 10 6 and in Release 8 0 and later releases 10 7 or 10 8 BER Loopback Quad DS1 facility loopback BBF3 Single DS1 facility loopback BBF3...

Page 592: ... following distances In a central office up to 3000 feet 1500 feet In an outside plant cabinet or wall DT up to 6 000 feet The 60 mA constant current regulator will support a simplex loop resistance of 221 ohms The T1EXT does not support fault locating using bipolar violations The T1EXT can interface with looping regulator type repeaters only The T1EXT does not have the capability to loop the simp...

Page 593: ...ering DDM 2000 T1 EXT Looping Type Repeater or CSU 14V 48V 60 MA 14V Looping Type Repeater or CSU Notes 1 The arrow indicates direc of simplex current flow w both loops are equipped looping type repeater or C 2 Each loop is powered wit 14V 60 MA source Lightning Protection Loop 1 Loop 2 ...

Page 594: ...g to the DSX 1 Far end T1EXT path parameters ES SES and UAS for ESF framed signals using performance report messages PRM incoming from the DSX 1 Coding violations CV for near end and far end T1EXT line PM monitoring and ES reporting LAN Interface BBF9 1 0 Electrical Specification The BBF9 LAN circuit pack provides a single 10 100BaseT IEEE 802 3 compliant interface The LAN port performs protocol t...

Page 595: ...ervation enable or disable ATM Virtual Path ID and Virtual Channel ID IMA group ID IMA Frame Length 32 64 128 256 ATM scrambler on off ATM polynomial on off The IMA link IDs are assigned automatically by the system in the range 0 to 7 The IMA protocol operates in symmetric configuration with common clock Alarms Local LAN port failures are detected by monitoring for the presence of either MAC frame...

Page 596: ...d slots and converts an optical signal to from one to 8 DS1 signals to provide native mode LAN transport through a SONET WAN LAN port 100BaseFX IEEE 802 3 compliant SC optical connector 1300 nm nominal center wavelength 62 5 micron multimode fiber Buffering 5 MByte for each direction See Table 10 2 for optical characteristics Format Specification The LAN interface converts incoming MAC frames to a...

Page 597: ... Loss of IMA frame Loss of IMA Delay Synchronization LODS Loss of Cell Delineation LCD and excessive AAL5 CRC errors The alarm level for a local LAN port failure is user provisionable Major Minor Not Alarmed Performance Monitoring In addition to DS1 path and VT1 5 path performance monitoring the BBF10 circuit pack supports performance monitoring of data flow in both directions The parameters suppo...

Page 598: ... 5 dB 33 0 dBm avg Signal Detect Deasserted PD 45 0 dBm avg Signal Detect Hysteresis PA PD 1 5 2 4 dB Signal Detect Assert Time off to on AS_Max 0 2 100 µs Signal Detect Deassert Time on to off ANS_Max 0 5 350 µs Transmitter Parameters Symbol Min Typical Max Unit Output Optical Power BOL 62 5 125 µm NA 0 275 Fiber EOL PO 19 0 20 0 15 7 14 0 dBm avg Output Optical Power BOL 50 125 µm NA 0 20 Fiber ...

Page 599: ...ble with PairGainä equipment Alarm reporting LOS A LOS is reported if either HDSL line experiences a synchronization failure Loopback DS1 terminal loopback for each HDSL interface Performance Monitoring PM Available through the HDSL link management port only User configurable alarm thresholds 15 minute 24 hour and 7 day performance histories Asynchronous serial interface for provisioning and PM Ma...

Page 600: ...tible signal M13 mode framed clear channel unframed clear channel Thus there are no format requirements on this interface Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the DS3 interface to the DSX 3 Loss of signal LOS Line coding violations CV L The alarm level for each of the monitored parameters can be provisioned to CR MJ MN or status B3ZS coding violation failure threshold is us...

Page 601: ...red Frame Seconds SEFS CV L Coding Violations Line Release 7 2 and later ES L Errored Seconds Release 7 2 and later SES L Severely Errored Seconds Line Release 7 2 and later Table 10 4 Enhanced DS3 Performance Monitoring Modes Monitor P Bits Correct P Bits VMR mode Yes Yes VM mode Yes No CC mode No No Mode PM Option Monitor P Bits Monitor F M Bits Monitor C Bits Correct P Bits Correct F M Bits Cor...

Page 602: ... 1 high speed interface provides both line and STS 1 path termination functions The EC 1 low speed interface provides clear channel transport of any STS 1 signal compatible with the electrical STS 1 interface specification in ANSI T1 102 The EC 1 low speed port can be provisioned to provide the path termination functions for a VT1 5 structured STS 1 with an asynchronous DS1 mapping Alarm Threshold...

Page 603: ...Thus there are no format requirements on this interface Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the DS3 interface to the DSX 3 LOS CV L The alarm level for each of the monitored parameters can be provisioned to CR MJ MN or status B3ZS coding violation failure threshold is user settable to 10 3 or 10 6 BER Performance Monitoring see Table 10 23 DS3 parity errors P Bits SEFS If ...

Page 604: ...rity formats Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the DS3 interface from the DSX 3 Loss of signal LOS Out Of Frame OOF AIS BER based on P bit or C bit parity The alarm level for each of the monitored parameters can be provisioned to CR MJ MN or status Coding violation failure threshold is user settable to 10 3 or 10 6 BER Loopback DS1 and DS3 terminal and facility loopback ...

Page 605: ...000 OC 3 Multiplexer When the outside plant lightguide is multimode a single mode or multimode jumper can be used between the LGX panel and the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer on the transmit OUT side Multimode must be used on the receive IN side of all OLIUs When the outside plant lightguide is single mode a single mode jumper must be used for the transmit side and either single mode or multimode jumpe...

Page 606: ...km single mode fiber and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10 8 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to Points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 7 Table 10 8 and Table 10 9 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 22F OLIU Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 3 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of p...

Page 607: ...and link budget information for the 22G U 22G2 U OLIU The 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU is a SONET compliant long reach OC 3 interface supporting span lengths up to 55 km assuming 0 45 dB km single mode fiber and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10 8 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to Points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 7 Table 10 8 and Table 10 9 provide detailed specifica...

Page 608: ...t and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 10 and Table 10 11 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 24G U OLIU Note that the 24G U OLIU is not specified to operate over multimode fiber Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 12 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Lin...

Page 609: ...t and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 10 and Table 10 11 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 24H U OLIU Note that the 24H U OLIU is not specified to operate over multimode fiber Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 12 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Lin...

Page 610: ...signal Table 10 5 Table 10 6 and Table 10 9 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 22D U OLIUs Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 3 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Line AIS B2 thresholding signal fail B2 thresholding signal degrade B2 signal degrade thresholds are user settable in the range from 10 5 t...

Page 611: ... outlined in Table 10 13 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to Points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 12 Table 10 13 and Table 10 14 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U OLIU Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 1 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Line AIS B2 threshol...

Page 612: ...t and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 15 and Table 10 16 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 29G U OLIU Note that the 29G U OLIU is not specified to operate over multimode fiber Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 12 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Lin...

Page 613: ...t and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Table 10 15 and Table 10 16 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 29H U OLIU Note that the 29H U OLIU is not specified to operate over multimode fiber Alarm Thresholding The following parameters are monitored at the OC 12 interface Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF Loss of pointer LOP Lin...

Page 614: ...Figure 10 2 Optical System Interfaces Points S and R OLIU Point S Transmitter Tx Transmitter Connector Assembly Station Cable Fiber Crossconnect Fiber Crossconnect Outside Plant Cable Connections OLIU Rx Assembly Station Cable Receiver Receiver Connector Point R ...

Page 615: ...Information Optical Device Temperature Controller FDA Classification Optical Source Class I InGaAsP Laser MLM Structure No TEC Class I LED Lucent ST UOC buildout assembly 22D U Multimode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Connector None InGaAsP PIN None InGaAsP PIN UOC buildout assembly 22D U Multimode A higher quality SLM laser may be use...

Page 616: ...ation for operating under controlled environmental conditions The number following the slash is the specification for uncontrolled environmental conditions If only one number is given it applies to both controlled and uncontrolled environmental conditions Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 The minimum system gain for the DDM 2000 already takes into...

Page 617: ...ersion is not a factor and all applications are attenuation limited For OC 12 systems the maximum distance could be either attenuation limited or dispersion limited The limits must be calculated based on both factors and the lesser of the two defines the actual maximum span length A rough rule of thumb for attenuation limited systems is 0 45 dB km This estimate includes typical cable loss 0 4 dB k...

Page 618: ... Classification Optical Source Faceplate Optical Connector No TEC Class I InGaAsP Laser MLM Structure Lucent ST Integral to transmitter Single Mode No TEC Class I InGaAsP Laser MLM Structure UOC buildout assembly Single Mode No TEC Class I InGaAsP Laser MLM Structure UOC buildout assembly Single Mode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Conn...

Page 619: ...km 51 km 51 km 55 km 55 km Note All terminology is consistent with TR 253 Issue 2 All specifications for the 22F OLIU meet or exceeds intermediate reach IR values described in TR 253 Issue 2 The 22G4 U OLIU is fully compliant with SONET long reach applications It is fully compatible with the 22F type 22G U 22G2 U and 22G3 U OLIUs and will replace them Transmit and receive powers are referenced to ...

Page 620: ...imited or dispersion limited The limits must be calculated based on both factors and the lesser of the two defines the actual maximum span length A rough rule of thumb for attenuation limited systems is 0 45 dB km This estimate includes typical cable loss 0 4 dB km and splice loss 0 2 dB per splice 11 total splices associated with single mode fiber Maximum span length can be calculated more precis...

Page 621: ...d to be 120 MHz or greater then the maximum link budget values see Notes 1 and 2 can be used to determine if the loss budget is sufficient for that fiber If planning a new fiber installation the values at the end of the table given for a number of commercially available fiber bandwidth distance products can be used Fiber distances are calculated using the 120 MHz exit bandwidth limit however actua...

Page 622: ...Temperature Controller FDA Classification Optical Source Faceplate Optical Connector None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Connector None InGaAs PIN UOC Buildout Assembly multi mode None InGaAs ...

Page 623: ...re worst case end of life 2 All specifications for the 24G U 24H U meet or exceed long reach LR values described in TR 253 Iss 2 Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 The minimum system gain for the DDM 2000 already takes into account aging temperature and manufacturing tolerances as these figures are built into the minimum transmitter power The DDM 2...

Page 624: ...typical cable loss 0 4 dB km and splice loss 0 2 dB per splice 11 total splices associated with single mode fiber in the 1310 nm range For the 24G U the maximum distance is not dispersion limited because single longitudinal mode laser is used Given the attenuation assumption the maximum span length for the 24G U is 51 km Attenuation can be the limiting factors in span length A rough rule of thumb ...

Page 625: ...pplicable Transmitter Information Optical Device Temperature Controller FDA Classification Optical Source Faceplate Optical Connector No TEC Class I InGaAsP Laser MLM Structure UOC buildout assemble Single Mode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Connector None InGaAsP PIN UOC buildout assemble Multimode A higher quality SLM laser may be us...

Page 626: ...19 8 dB Maximum Span Length 44 km Note All values are for both controlled and uncontrolled environmental conditions Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 Optical path penalty includes effects of dispersion reflection and jitter that occur on the optical path One connector 0 75 dB on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant The 26G...

Page 627: ...m link budget values can be used to determine if the loss budget is sufficient for that fiber 3 If planning a new fiber installation the values given in the table given for a number of commercially available fiber bandwidth distance products can be used Fiber distances are calculated using the 44 MHz exit bandwidth limit however actual exit bandwidths may be higher for these distances due to the e...

Page 628: ...Temperature Controller FDA Classification Optical Source Faceplate Optical Connector None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode None Class I InGaAsP Laser SLM Structure UOC Buildout Assembly single mode Receiver Information Optical Device Temperature Controller Optical Detector Faceplate Optical Connector None InGaAs PIN UOC Buildout Assembly multi mode None InGaAs ...

Page 629: ...ransmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 2 The minimum system gain for the DDM 2000 already takes into account aging temperature and manufacturing tolerances as these figures are built into the minimum transmitter power The DDM 2000 system gain can thus not be directly compared with the DDM 1000 system gain because the DDM 1000 system gain does not include ...

Page 630: ... per splice 11 total splices associated with single mode fiber in the 1310 nm range For the 29G U the maximum distance is not dispersion limited because single longitudinal mode laser is used Given the attenuation assumption the maximum span length for the 29G U is 51 km Attenuation can be the limiting factors in span length A rough rule of thumb for attenuation limited systems operating in the 15...

Page 631: ...r receiver pair The link must have at least this much attenuation either from fiber loss splice loss connector loss external attenuators or a combination of these or the receiver will be overdriven and the link will not operate properly The minimum link budget is not always symmetrical A transmitter receiver pair may have one minimum link budget in one direction and another in the opposite directi...

Page 632: ... budgets for each pairing of OC 3 rate OLIUs when operating on single mode SM fiber These numbers give the maximum attenuation acceptable for proper operation of each transmitter receiver pair The link must have no more than this much attenuation either from fiber loss splice loss connector loss external attenuators or a combination of these or the link will not operate properly The maximum link b...

Page 633: ...ion of each transmitter receiver pair The link must have no more than this much attenuation either from fiber loss splice loss connector loss external attenuators or a combination of these or the link will not operate properly The maximum link budgets for MM fiber were calculated using the following margins The first column of margins applies to any link where there is at least one OC 3 OLIU 22F o...

Page 634: ...9 OC 3 Rate OLIU Mixes Maximum Link Budgets for MM Fiber dB Transmitter Receiver 22F 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U 22D U Ctrld Env 22D U Unctrld Env 22G4 U 22 0 22 0 21 8 19 8 22F 12 0 12 0 11 8 9 8 22G U 22G2 U 20 0 20 0 19 8 17 8 22D U ctrld env 8 2 8 2 9 9 7 9 22D U unctrld env 5 2 5 2 6 9 4 9 The LAA10 FT 2000 OC 3 Optical Interface has the same optical loss budget as the 22G U and therefore shou...

Page 635: ...eady state failure rate is assumed Failure rates are based on the reliability prediction procedure RPP method described in TR TSY 000332 Issue 4 The spare availability objective SAO is 99 percent The SAO is the long term probability that a spare plug in is available when it is needed A no trouble found NTF factor of 1 67 is multiplied to the failure rate This accounts for replacements of plug ins ...

Page 636: ...BBF5 JUMPER BBF6 T1EXT 175 537 1024 1586 2223 2872 BBF8 HDSL 48 147 280 434 608 786 BBF9 LAN 122 376 717 1111 1557 2012 BBF10 LAN 110 337 642 994 1393 1800 BBG2 MXRVO 277 850 1620 2509 3517 4544 BBG2B MXRVO 304 935 1782 2760 3869 4999 BBG4 DS3 277 850 1620 2509 3517 4544 BBG4B DS3 236 726 1384 2143 3004 3882 BBG5 SYSCTL 47 145 277 428 600 776 BBG6 STS1E EC 1 114 349 666 1032 1447 1869 BBG7 OHCTL 7...

Page 637: ...25 1971 24H U OLIU 104 321 612 948 1328 1716 26G U OLIU 120 368 703 1088 1525 1971 26G2 U OLIU 99 303 579 896 1256 1623 27G U Dual OC 1 OLIU 78 241 460 712 998 1289 27G2 U Dual OC 1 OLIU 88 271 518 802 1124 1452 29G U OLIU 76 235 448 693 972 1256 29H U OLIU 82 251 479 742 1040 1344 Fan Shelf 25 78 148 229 321 415 Fan Pack 125 383 731 1132 1586 2049 Table 10 20 Sparing Guidelines Plug In Code Numbe...

Page 638: ... Optical Connector The 22G U OLIU needs a 10 dB attenuator for loopback testing The 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U OLIUs require a 15 dB attenuator for loopback testing A 0 dB SC type connector is shipped installed on each OLIU A 0 dB ST type connector is shipped loose in the packaging with each OLIU Optional SC ST or FC 0 dB or attenuated buildouts can be ordered separately as listed in Table 10 21 Table 10...

Page 639: ...406159 A3060F1 SC 15 dB buildout SM SM 15 107406167 A3070 ST â 0 dB buildout SM SM MM MM 0 106795354 A3070B1 ST 5 dB buildout SM SM 5 107406183 A3070D1 ST 10 dB buildout SM SM 10 107406191 A3070F1 ST 15 dB buildout SM SM 15 107406209 A3080 FC 0 dB buildout SM SM MM MM 0 106795404 A3080B1 FC 5 dB buildout SM SM 5 107406225 A3080D1 FC 10 dB buildout SM SM 10 107406233 A3080F1 FC 15 dB buildout SM SM...

Page 640: ...r SONET optical interfaces the maximum time interval error MTIE does not exceed 60 nanoseconds phase variation when timed with a wander free reference Jitter transfer tolerance and generation requirements are met as specified in TR 253 and TR 499 The SONET interfaces meet the T1 101 OC N output short term stability mask Signal Performance 1 0 The following specifications apply given the standard n...

Page 641: ...g term accuracy traceable to the OC N signal SONET synchronization messaging is used to output DS1 AIS when clock traceability is lost Release 5 and later Jitter on the DS1 output is less than 0 06 unit interval peak to peak BBF4 Synchronous Timing Generator 3 TG3 1 0 The TG3 Stratum 3 circuit pack meets the specifications of GR 253 CORE SONET Transport Systems Generic Criteria The TG3 circuit pac...

Page 642: ...responsible for selecting the signal that has the highest quality based on LOS path AIS and path BER performance On pass through paths all detected hard failures LOS LOF LOP line AIS STS 1 path AIS or STS 1 path signal failure based on BER result in VT AIS insertion in the outgoing signals This allows the terminating node to be aware of the failure and to switch to protection Protection switching ...

Page 643: ...rface will exhibit a 2 second error free transmission interval which begins within 5 seconds of the reapplication of a signal Delay 1 0 Table 10 22 lists the worst case measured one way transmission delay within a DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Table 10 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 1 Transmission Delay in Microseconds Mode High Speed Low Speed Interface OC 3 EC 1 STS 1 OC 3 EC 1 VT DS3 DS1 OC 1 STS OC 1 VT Term...

Page 644: ...ne B2 Coding Violations CV B2 Errored Seconds ES B2 Errored Seconds Type A ESA B2 Errored Seconds Type B ESB B2 Severely Errored Seconds SES B2 Unavailable Seconds UAS Line Protection Switch Counts PSC L STS Pointer Justification PJC 1 13841 1384 1 900 40 1 900 30 1 900 30 1 63 20 1 63 30 1 63 2 1 65535 60 1 1328736 132874 1 65535 900 1 65535 90 1 65535 90 1 4095 60 1 4095 90 1 255 4 1 9999999 576...

Page 645: ...5 1 63 4 1 1048575 3865 1 65535 250 1 4095 40 t3 t3 t3 VT1 5 Path V5 Errored Seconds ES V5 Severely Errored Seconds SES V5 Unavailable Seconds UAS 1 900 40 1 63 20 1 63 30 1 65535 900 1 4095 60 1 4095 90 vt1 vt1 vt1 DS1 Path ES P Errored Seconds SES P Severely Errored Seconds UAS P Unavailable Seconds ES PFE Errored Seconds SES PFE Severely Errored Seconds UAS PFE Unavailable Seconds CV P SF Codin...

Page 646: ...modem is required to connect an ASCII terminal to the DTE interface or a modem to the DCE interface The CIT interfaces provide data rates of 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19 200 baud Both CIT interfaces operate full duplex using 1 start bit 8 data bits and 1 stop bit Table 10 24 describes the pins supported on the CIT interfaces Table 10 24 CIT Interface Pin Connections EIA 232 D Pin Front Access CI...

Page 647: ...as convenient to use with the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer If the multishelf bus cables ED 8C724 20 G354 or G356 are connected between shelves in a bay a CIT may then be connected to the user panel CIT port on any shelf and may address any other shelf in that bay as well as the remote terminal shelves associated with that shelf in the bay Any terminal compatible with the ANSI 3 64 standard should be ...

Page 648: ...patible and 212A compatible modems are also suitable for use with the DDM 2000 system This is not an exhaustive list of compatible modems Paradyne 2224 CEO modem at 1200 and 2400 baud Paradyne 2224 modem at 1200 and 2400 baud Paradyne 4024 modem at 1200 and 2400 baud Paradyne 2296 modem at 4800 and 9600 baud Hayes V series Smartmodems Penril Alliance V 32 modem The NCR 3170 computer and the AT T S...

Page 649: ...s A minimum platform configuration is 486 DX IBM compatible desktop or laptop PC Disk drive one 1 44 Megabyte 3 5 inch Hard disk with at least 40 Megabytes of available space 16 Megabyte RAM MS DOS operating system version 5 0 or later Windows NT or Windows 95 Windows 98 Serial port EIA 232 D configured as COM1 or COM2 Mouse VGA color monitor CPro 2000 has been tested with AT T NCR IBM NEC and Gat...

Page 650: ... alarm relays are fail safe against unprotected power failures User Definable Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls 1 0 The user definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm and control interface allows the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer to monitor and control co located equipment at the remote site At the remote terminal RT site 21 alarm or status environmental inputs can mo...

Page 651: ... semiconductor CMOS or transistor transistor logic TTL compatible interface to an external order wire shelf to provide point to point voice communication between DDM 2000 OC 3 systems If the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is using R8 1 or R9 1 a proprietary MUX order wire capability is available for use in MegaStar 2000 The MUX order wire mode provides access to the E1 E2 and F1 SONET overhead bytes in...

Page 652: ...Table 10 25 The user may assign a maximum of nine VCs using any combination of PVCs and SVCs All VCs support command response messages except PVC 2 prior to Release 6 0 is limited to autonomous maintenance messages only The autonomous maintenance messages are all TL1 autonomous messages except REPT DBCHG Table 10 25 TL1 X 25 Interface Default VC Assignments PVC ID SVC ID Logical Group Logical Chan...

Page 653: ...of Step 1 mapping TL1 autonomous message types to OS types and Step 2 mapping OS types to VCs accomplishes the desired mapping of TL1 autonomous message types to VCs At the packet layer the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is configured as a passive DTE with the following parameters as shown in Table 10 26 At the link layer the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer uses the standard link access procedure B LAPB prot...

Page 654: ...duct Family Network Bay and Cabinet Mounting 1 0 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer can be mounted in both ED 8C500 and ED 8C501 network bay frames A maximum of six shelves may be mounted in a 7 foot bay In addition to bay mounting the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer can be packaged with other equipment in 80A 80D and 80E cabinets 51A cabinets 90 type business remote terminals controlled environment vaults C...

Page 655: ...and humidity of 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Forced convection cooling fans is required when the air inlet temperature is above 50 C The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer provides optional control and alarming of the 2 type fan units used in Lucent cabinets and alarming of the DDM 2000 fan shelf EMC Requirements 1 0 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a C...

Page 656: ...e DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer meets the fire resistance requirements of UL 1459 2nd Edition Underwriters Laboratories 1 0 The DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer is UL recognized for restricted access installations in business and customer premises applications installed in accordance with Articles 110 16 and 110 17 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA Number 70 87 Other installations exempt from the requi...

Page 657: ...ay be ordered through Lucent using COMCODE 405697442 or through Littlefuse Inc 800 East Northwest Highway Des Plaines IL 60016 or call 708 824 1188 Order Fuse 5 amp Part No 334005 Fuses and a fuse extraction tool for the Group 3 or Group 4 shelf may be ordered through Lucent using COMCODE 406203976 for fuses and COMCODE 406420273 for the extraction tool or through SAN O Industrial Corporation 91 3...

Page 658: ...DS1 add drop shelf with 16 DS1PM circuit packs 56 DS1s 87 1 8 2 2 OC 3 DS1 add drop shelf with 8 22F OLIU circuit packs 114 2 4 2 9 EC 1 electrical multiplexer shelf with 24 DS1 circuit packs 84 DS1s 66 1 4 1 7 EC 1 electrical multiplexer shelf with 24 DS1PM circuit packs 84 DS1s 73 1 5 1 8 OC 3 terminating shelf with 6 STS1E circuit packs 3 EC 1s 60 1 3 1 5 OC 3 DS1 self healing ring shelf with 2...

Page 659: ...f TR TSY 000499 CAUTION This information is for a typical application only Consult 801 525 168 DDM 2000 Floor Plan Data Sheets and T82046 30 Power Systems DC Distribution Circuit for Digital Transmission System for proper engineering of battery plant and feeders OC 3 self healing ring shelf with 2 OC 3 optical extensions 22G U 22G2 U and 8 DS1PM circuit packs 28 DS1s 102 2 1 2 5 OC 3 self healing ...

Page 660: ...bility predictions are described in the following paragraphs Each paragraph is devoted to one of the reliability parameters which must meet a Telcordia Technologies requirement or objective Transmission Availability 1 0 Telcordia Technologies requirements state that the probability of a hardware caused outage on a two way channel within a SONET multiplexer should be less than 1 75 minutes per year...

Page 661: ...ctive applies to the TBOS and TL1 X 25 interfaces This objective applies to circuitry needed to maintain communication from the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer to the CO s telemetry equipment for access by an OS Since the OS interface is used in the CO the reliability model assumes the mean time to repair is 2 hours and the environmental factor is 1 0 Table 10 30 lists the predicted outages for the TBOS...

Page 662: ...ess than 2 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer circuit packs are subjected to an environmental stress testing EST program The purpose of the program is to eliminate early life failures conduct failure mode analysis on defective circuit packs and use corrective action to make the product more reliable All new circuit pack codes in manufacturing are subjected to EST However based on field return data when t...

Page 663: ... Table 10 30 DDM 2000 OC 3 System Reliability Prediction Note 1 Application Environment Note 2 Telcordia Criteria Note 3 Prediction Outage min yr MTBF Years Note 4 Requirement Objective DS1 to OC 3 DS1 to OC 3 CO RT 1 75 5 25 0 25 0 75 0 0464 0 1395 2587 1716 DS3 to OC 3 DS3 to OC 3 CO RT 1 75 5 25 0 25 0 75 0 0219 0 0662 5474 3608 OC 3 to OC 3 OC 3 to OC 3 CO RT 1 75 5 25 0 25 0 75 0 00013 0 0011...

Page 664: ...1935 59 0 2903 39 3 BBF2C TGS 2345 48 68 3518 32 45 BBF3 DS1PM 1310 87 1 1965 58 1 BBF3B DS1PM 1235 92 4 1853 61 6 BBF4 TG3 2311 49 40 3467 32 93 BBF6 T1EXT 1427 80 0 2138 53 39 BBF9 IMA LAN 2037 56 04 3056 37 35 BBF10 IMA LAN 2277 50 13 3416 33 42 BBF8 HDSL 5216 21 9 7824 14 6 BBG2 MXRVO 570 200 1 855 133 4 BBG2B MXRVO 820 139 21 1230 92 81 BBG4 DS3 902 126 5 1353 84 3 BBG4B DS3 1056 108 0 1584 7...

Page 665: ...2 22F U OLIU 2519 45 3 3779 30 2 22F2 U OLIU 2033 56 1 3050 37 4 22G U OLIU 2439 46 8 3659 31 2 22G2 U OLIU 2197 51 9 3296 34 6 22G3 U OLIU 3533 32 8 5300 21 5 22G4 U OLIU 1426 80 05 2139 53 37 24G U OLIU 2080 54 8 3120 36 6 24H U OLIU 2388 47 80 3582 31 87 26G2 U OLIU 2575 44 3 3863 29 5 27G U Dual OC 1 OLIU 2857 39 9 4286 26 6 27G2 U Dual OC 1 OLIU 2823 40 4 4235 26 9 29G U OLIU 3264 34 9 4896 2...

Page 666: ...DDM 2000 Fan Shelf Steady State Failure Rates Based on Telcordia Technologies RPP Issue 6 Data DDM 2000 Fan Shelf Failures 109 hrs MTBF years RPP Prediction ED 8C733 30 G7 Fan Shelf 9879 11 56 ED 8C733 30 G6 Fan Unit 2000 57 08 Includes failure rates for individual fan units ...

Page 667: ...rite Locally Apply 11 34 Cross Connection Convert CNVT CRS 11 39 Program Copy CPY PROG 11 48 STS 1 Cross Connection Delete DLT CRS STS1 11 52 STS 3c Cross Connection Delete DLT CRS STS3c 11 55 VT1 5 Cross Connection Delete DLT CRS VT1 11 60 Map Context Application OS Delete DLT OSACMAP 11 63 4 Level DCC Section Layer Upper Delete DLT ULSDCC L4 11 66 STS 1 Cross Connection Enter ENT CRS STS1 11 82 ...

Page 668: ...tribute Retrieve RTRV ATTR ENV 11 177 STS 1 Cross Connection Retrieve RTRV CRS STS1 11 180 STS 3c Cross Connection Retrieve RTRV CRS STS3c 11 182 VT1 5 Cross Connection Retrieve RTRV CRS VT1 11 185 EC 1 Retrieve RTRV EC1 11 187 Equipment Retrieve RTRV EQPT 11 191 Feature Retrieve RTRV FEAT 11 192 Communications End Far Retrieve RTRV FECOM 11 194 History Retrieve RTRV HSTY 11 195 Parameters Interna...

Page 669: ...1 State Retrieve RTRV STATE STS1 11 304 VT1 5 State Retrieve RTRV STATE VT1 11 307 STS 1 Retrieve RTRV STS1 11 310 Synchronization Retrieve RTRV SYNC 11 321 Map Message TL1 Retrieve RTRV TL1MSGMAP 11 323 Characteristics Trace Path STS 1 Retrieve RTRV TRACE STS1 11 326 T1 Retrieve RTRV T1 11 330 T3 Retrieve RTRV T3 11 336 3 Level DCC Section Layer Upper Retrieve RTRV ULSDCC L3 11 339 4 Level DCC Se...

Page 670: ...S 1 Set SET STS1 11 457 Synchronization Set SET SYNC 11 465 T1 Set SET T1 11 471 T3 Set SET T3 11 478 Trace Path STS1 Set SET TRACE STS1 11 481 VT1 5 Set SET VT1 11 485 Link X 25 Set SET X25 11 487 Unit Function Switch Protection SWITCH FN 11 489 Line Switch Protection SWITCH LINE 11 491 Speed Low Switch Protection SWITCH LS 11 495 STS 1 Path Switch SWITCH PATH STS1 11 499 VT1 5 Path Switch SWITCH...

Page 671: ...tion Protocol TARP which provides for multi vendor interworking For additional information on TARP please refer to the About This Document sections The following new commands are available in OC 3 Release 15 rtrv lan rtrv pm lan set lan Please note that the 29G U OLIU circuit pack must be present in the Main slots of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves for these new commands to properly execute Please refer...

Page 672: ...have a common input format command name Address parameters Address identifies a slot channel or operations interface within the shelf In commands which require an address it must appear immediately after the command name Parameters identifies a variable name assigned to some provisionable attribute of the command The value of the parameter is defined on each command page Parameters are separated w...

Page 673: ...values are main m fn ls tg sysctl auxctl tsi userpanel and all group Possible values are m a b c and all Note carefully in Table 11 1 when this value is followed by a dash and when it is not slot within a group abbreviated as slot Possible values are 1 8 and all line Possible values are 1 2 and all This identifies a line within a slot For optical interfaces it is only used to identify OC 1 lines o...

Page 674: ...lot auxctl auxctl OC 3 line pair all main fn a b c all all main 1 OC 3 line all main 1 2 all fn a b c all 1 2 all fn all all main 1 fn c 2 fn all Lines OC 1 line pair 27 type OLIU all main all main 1 2 all fn all fn a b c 1 2 all all main all main 2 fn all fn a all fn b 2 OC 1 line 27 type OLIU all main all main 1 2 1 2 fn all fn a b c all fn a b c 1 2 1 2 all main all main 2 2 fn all fn b all fn ...

Page 675: ...OLIUs all m a b c 1 2 1 2 all all m2 2 STS 1 channel for DS3 MXRVO STS1E TMUX a b c all a STS 3c channel within OC 12 using 24G U or 29G U OLIUs in Main m 1 2 1 4 7 10 all Rings m1 1 Channels VT1 5 channel within OC 3 m c all 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all a b all 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all m 1 2 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all RingsOnly c 1 2 1 b 2 7 4 m1 3 2 3 VT1 5 channel within OC 12 using 24G U OLIUs m 1 2 1 ...

Page 676: ...OLIU a b c 1 2 b 2 Function unit DS3 STS1E MXRVO or TMUX a b c b Main port m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all m 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all For 27 type OLIUs m 1 12 all 1 7 all 1 4 all For 24G U 29G U OLIU m 3 4 4 m 2 4 4 m 1 2 1 VT1 5 Cross DS1 low speed port including TMUX a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all b 2 4 connections Function unit OC 3 OLIU a b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all b 1 1 4 c 3 7 1 Fun...

Page 677: ...ty only dcc m1 m2 a b c all OC 3 Rings only fecom dcc all OC 1 rings security only dcc m a b c all 1 2 1 2 OC 1 interfaces fecom using 27 type OLIUs TBOS tbos 1 tbos 1 Parallel Telemetry partlm partlm X 25 link x25 x25 IAO LAN interface lan lan Environmental Alarm Input env 1 21 all env 2 Environmental Control Input cont 1 4 all cont 1 Other Faceplate Connector on 24G U or 29G U OLIUs fac main fca...

Page 678: ...t Mode 1 1 There are two entry modes command mode no prompts and prompt mode In the command mode the default the command line and any user responses are terminated by the semicolon or carriage return cr The prompt mode is designed for users that are not familiar with DDM 2000 To enter the prompt mode terminate any line with a carriage return or key or question mark Prompts generally appear in the ...

Page 679: ...prompt mode at any time Comma is used to separate parameters from each other Equal sign is used to separate parameter names from parameter values Control T T is the toggle command See the toggle command page for additional details Carriage return or key or exclamation point are used to end a line of input Semicolon is used to end a command The system will use default values for all optional parame...

Page 680: ...t prints the system prompt If there is an active alarm or status condition the level of the highest level active alarm in the system is printed before the For example the system prompt is MN when a minor alarm condition exists in the system Security 1 1 The option of system security is provided for DDM 2000 systems Three privileged user logins and a maximum of 100 nonprivileged user logins consist...

Page 681: ...program dlt osacmap delete OS application context ID map entry ent osacmap enter OC application context ID map entry ent ulsdcc enter upper layer section DCC ent tl1msgmap enter TL1 message map for Operations Systems init pm initialize performance montoring ins prog install program reset reset system software set date set date set ne set network element set x25 set X 25 link When security is enabl...

Page 682: ...eneral Maintenance Reports only state oc1 Privileged General Maintenance Reports only eqpt Privileged General Maintenance Reports only CONFIGURATION rtv feat Privileged General Maintenance Reports only fecom Privileged General Maintenance Reports only hsty Privileged General Maintenance Reports only lan Privileged General Maintenance Reports only oc1 Privileged General Maintenance Reports only oc3...

Page 683: ...enance Reports only CONFIGURATION Continued rtv ow Privileged General Maintenance Reports only crs sts1 Privileged General Maintenance Reports only crs sts3c Privileged General Maintenance Reports only crs vt1 Privileged General Maintenance Reports only ulsdcc Privileged General Maintenance Reports only sts1 Privileged General Maintenance Reports only sts3c Privileged General Maintenance Reports o...

Page 684: ...rity disabled ow Privileged General Maintenance lan Privileged General state t1 Privileged General state t3 Privileged General state ec1 Privileged General state oc1 Privileged General CONFIGURATION state oc3 Privileged General Continued state sts1 Privileged General state vt1 Privileged General fecom Privileged feat Privileged sts1 Privileged General sts3c Privileged General trace sts1 Privileged...

Page 685: ...IGURATION trmsn t1 Privileged General Mainenance Continued trmsn t3 Privileged General Mainenance alm Privileged General Mainenance led Privileged General Mainenance sysctl Privileged General Mainenance ins prog Privileged only if Security enabled Privileged General if Security disabled ent crs sts1 Privileged General crs sts3c Privileged General crs vt1 Privileged General usldcc Privileged only i...

Page 686: ...Reports Only hsty Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only opr aco Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only reset Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only rtrv pm tca Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pm sect Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only PERFORMANCE pm lan Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pm line Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pm t1 Privileged Gen...

Page 687: ... Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only state path Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only PERFORMANCE Continued eqpt Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only hsty Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only set pmthres sect Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pmthres line Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pmthres sts1 Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only pmthres vt1 ...

Page 688: ...neral Mainenance Reports Only SECURITY passwd Privileged set lgn Privileged secu Privileged passwd Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only rstr passwd Privileged apply Privileged help Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only MISCELLANEOUS logout Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only rlgn Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only toggle Privileged General Mainenance Reports Only ...

Page 689: ...al CIT access to DDM 2000 as well as a mouse driven graphical user interface GUI The user may issue commands to DDM 2000 by using the mouse to select items from a menu and or objects from the graphics display CPro 2000 Release 3 0 and later supports DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach Multiplexers as well as FT 2000 OC 48 Systems For complete information on CPro 2000 refer to the CPro 2000 User Man...

Page 690: ...363 206 285 Commands and Reports 11 20 Issue 2 February 2000 ...

Page 691: ...Network the copy to used is command this while system program CAUTION apply an while reset shelf causes that command any attempt not Do progress in is command user the by issued be also can command this 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting generic software LAN IMA an of copy dormant a of installation the initiate to currently the replacing therefore memory flash element s network the in stored pack s c...

Page 692: ...cutive Low Speed slots the following guidelines should be used The IMA LAN pack address is the address of either slot number of the two occupied by the pack For example if the IMA LAN circuit pack is inserted in Low Speed slots a 1 and a 2 the Address used in this case can be either ls a 1 or ls a 2 The same rules apply if the pack is inserted in other Low Speed slots When using Low Speed addresse...

Page 693: ...utes the expresses from range values allowed the 00 to 59 required zeros leading with SS are values allowed the and seconds the expresses NULL a or from ranging value 00 to 59 required zeros leading with if for prompted not is parameter This pgmtype of value the has lansw LAN IMA for action be to command this of execution the enables parameter action The are values allowed The canceled or confirme...

Page 694: ... apply outstanding an is of values entered newly the with request old the replace will date and time denial following the user non privileged a by entered is command this If displayed is message C C I P e d o C d n a m m o C l a g e l l I d e g e l i v i r P displayed be will message following the correct is syntax command the If y p o c m a r g o r p E N r o f g n i t s e T correct is syntax comm...

Page 695: ...ered with invalid syntax the user will be reprompted to enter a valid time value If an apply command is issued to schedule install or NULL a software installation but date is entered with invalid syntax the user will be reprompted to enter a valid date value If the time specified is unknown to the local system the following denial message will be displayed If the date specified is unknown to the l...

Page 696: ... l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C c i r e n e g n n n t a r e i f i t n e d I t e g r a T h t i w t i e c a l p e r d n a c i r e n e g m m m n o i t e l p m o c o t r o i r p s l i a f s i h t f I e l b a r e p o n i e m o c e b y l e k i l l l i w m e t s y s l o r t n o c e h t l u f s s e c c u s s i t p m e t t a m a r g o r p l l a t s n i r e h t o n a l i t...

Page 697: ... o c e h t l u f s s e c c u s s i t p m e t t a m a r g o r p l l a t s n i r e h t o n a l i t n u s n o i s s e s 1 L T d n a T I C e v i t c a y n a e t a n i m r e t l l i w d n a m m o c s i h T k c e h C m a r g o r p w e n e h t l l a t s n i o t e m i t e k a t l l i w d n a m m o c s i h T s e t a m i t s e e m i t e h t r o f n o i t p i r c s e D e s a e l e R e r a w t f o S e h t s r...

Page 698: ... u s s e t e l p m o c d a o l n w o d s i h t f I n e h t c i r e n e g N A L A M I w e n e h t o t t o o b e r o t s t r a t s N A L A M I d e t c e f f a e b y a m s n o i t a r e p o N A L A M I k c e h C m a r g o r p w e n e h t l l a t s n i o t e m i t e k a t l l i w d n a m m o c s i h T s e t a m i t s e e m i t e h t r o f n o i t p i r c s e D e s a e l e R e r a w t f o S e h t s r e...

Page 699: ... i t e h t r o f n o i t p i r c s e D e s a e l e R e r a w t f o S e h t k c e h C s e s s c i r e n e g o w t e s e h t n e e w t e b t s i x e s e g n a h c r o j a M n o i t u a C h c u m a r g o r p d n a S P O T e h t k c e h C e l b i t a p m o c e b t o n y a m y e h t t a h t a r o n o i t a m r o f n i l a n o i t i d d a r o f n o i t a m r o f n i y t i l i b i t a p m o c s n o i t c...

Page 700: ... a r g o r p n e h w t e s e R l l i w s k c a P message above the displaying after immediately begins apply program LAN IMA Low addressed the if address specific a to software LAN IMA applying When following the pack LAN non IMA a with equipped or equipped not is slot Speed displayed is denial Q E N E d e p p i u Q E t o N e g a p i u q E d e p p i u q e t o n s i t o l s d e e p S w o L d e s s ...

Page 701: ...to equal action with issued is command this If cancel following the displayed be will message confirmation u d e h c s e h t l e c n a c l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C d e l t a n o i t a l l a t s n i e r a w t f o s r e i f i t n e d I t e g r a T r e t e m a r a p s i h t h t i w d n a m m o c y l p p a e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y n o i t c a l e c n a...

Page 702: ...eric LAN IMA for apply an If install and to equal action an then cancel message confirmation following the issued is displayed be will u d e h c s e h t l e c n a c l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C d e l s e s s e r d d A d e t s i l e h t t a n o i t a l l a t s n i e r a w t f o s N A L A M I s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c y l p p a e h t d e...

Page 703: ... m a r g o r P confirmation the to response positive a gives user the when LAN IMA For displayed is message following the message d e l e c n a c g n i e b s i n o i t a l l a t s n i m a r g o r P N A L A M I displayed is message following the canceled is installation program the Once D L P M O C COMMANDS RELATED cpy prog ins prog rtrv ne OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 33 ...

Page 704: ... takes conversion the after and before multiplexers DDM 2000 downstream to networks STS 1 existing of upgrade easy an enables conversion This place hardware all reconfigure will command This networks DS1 releases ring For releases ring and linear OC 3 with available is command This all of CrsType the defined is CrsType type cross connection the where the of CrsType the as same the be will cross co...

Page 705: ...nections VT1 5 28 the of each delete must dlt crs vt1 using cross connection STS 1 the enter then and command the ent crs sts1 command the by set mode cross connect the if systems linear In set ne has command following the with denied be will command this of execution default of value a message denial S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c t l u a f e d r...

Page 706: ...nnection convert the If the with agree not does cross connection STS 1 the of identification ring the and and drop VT1 5 first the by defined cross connections VT1 5 for value assigned message following the with denied is request the connection continue S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S u l a v g n i r e b o t d e n o i s i v o r p y d a e r l a n o i t a c i f i t n e d I g n i R ...

Page 707: ...f types following the of any convert to attempt An denied unit function a in pass through STS 1 0x1 unit function to unit function STS 1 unit function a from drop local path protection switched STS 1 DS3 0x1 STS 1 locked dual STS 1 follows as is message denial The S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e t r e v n o c e b t o n n a c t c e n n o c s s o r C OLIU incompatible of mix a ...

Page 708: ...s connections 28 than the rtrv crs vt1 report e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E N O I T U A C i t c e n n o c s s o r c 1 S T S g n i t s i x e n a t r e v n o c l l i w d n a m m o c s i h T o t n i n o I T U A C E M E R T X E h t i w d e e c o r P s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c 5 1 T V w e n 8 2 N O r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c s r ...

Page 709: ...apply a with generic executing currently the overwrite to later used is command software dormant the in included generic the of copy the either copy to used be will command this 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting one from generic software LAN IMA the or generic software Element s Network copy to command this executing When another to Element Network DDM 2000 the copy always will Element Network local...

Page 710: ...and the If y p o c m a r g o r p r o f g n i t s e T correct is syntax command the if generic software LAN IMA the copying When displayed be will message following the y p o c m a r g o r p N A L A M I r o f g n i t s e T the but generic software LAN IMA for command cpy prog a issues user the If is message denial following the generic software NE contains area dormant displayed F O R S d e l i a F...

Page 711: ...age above The NEs elements network target and local the does that element network a to program LAN IMA an copy to attempts user a If shelf OC 3 an into SW LAN IMA the copy example for feature this support not displayed is message denial following the 13 0 Release running P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S e r u t a e f s i h t t r o p p u s t o n s e o d E N t e g r a T that eleme...

Page 712: ... l i a f n o i t a c i n u m m o C a determine to unable is but command this receives NE Element Network a If this found be not could TID TID entered the for translation TID NSAP displayed message following the and denied be will command S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s e t o m e R d n u o f t o n s i d e r e t n e D I T matched ...

Page 713: ...an from program copy to attempt not should user A files compressed sending or storing receiving of capable release a later or 9 1 not is that release a earlier or 9 0 Release using shelf OC 3 remote a into generic software executing currently The files compressed receiving of capable different a has it because element network destination the to copied be cannot the and denied be will request copy ...

Page 714: ...will message confirmation following the 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting entered is command this when displayed r u c e h t e t i r w r e v o l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C t n e r t a y n a f i c i r e n e g t n a m r o d r e i f i t n e d I t e g r a T r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c g o r p y p c e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s D I T d I...

Page 715: ...e b t s i x e s e g n a h c r o j a M n o i t u a C h c u m a r g o r p d n a S P O T e h t k c e h C e l b i t a p m o c e b t o n y a m y e h t t a h t a r o n o i t a m r o f n i l a n o i t i d d a r o f n o i t a m r o f n i y t i l i b i t a p m o c s n o i t c d e d e e n t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E manual this of 2 Volume section TOP the in Program Generic New...

Page 716: ... h t k c e h c y p o c r e h t o n a g n i t p m e t t a e r o f e B s n o i t u l o s r i e h t d n a s m e l b o r p e l b i s s o p f o t s i l a w e i v e r o t be will message failure following the fails copy program LAN IMA the If displayed P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S o t d e l i a f y p o c m a r g o r P N A L A M I r e i f i t n e d I t e g r a T l a u n a M s r e s...

Page 717: ...n n m a r g o r p c i r e n e G N A L A M I network target the at problems space memory experiences command this If memory flash in allocated space the in fit not will software the is that element overwritten be will generic software executing currently the it for reserved COMMANDS RELATED rtrv map network rtrv ne ins prog OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 47 ...

Page 718: ...ough applications ring In deleted be for address same the using by deleted Address1 and Address2 Addresses STS 1 OC 3 Valid a b 1 2 a b c m c 1 3 the units Main its in OLIUs 24 type with equipped is shelf the If are Addresses STS 1 valid a b 1 2 a b c c 1 3 m 1 12 the units Main its in OLIUs 29 type with equipped is shelf the If are Addresses STS 1 valid m 1 12 a b 1 2 a b c c 1 3 cct is parameter...

Page 719: ... only are connections continue and Drop applications the with equipped is address unit function the if allowed packs circuit low speed OLIU 22 type or STS1E NOTE The cct cross the if parameter optional an is parameter is deleted be to type connection twoway The cct values CrsType other for required is parameter Address1 Address2 and CrsType cross STS 1 existing an match must following the with com...

Page 720: ... will request the Main in exists packs OLIU message S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S k c a p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s 24G U a through cross connect pass through STS 1 an delete not may Users cross connect pass through the remove To traffic VT1 5 traffic containing OLIU ring the at cross connect STS 3 or VT1 5 assoc...

Page 721: ...i t u c e x E n o i t u a C m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 s t s s r c t l d e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e 1 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a 2 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a e p y T s r C e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED ent crs sts1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv ne set ne OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 51 ...

Page 722: ...r mapping Mapping STS 3c s STS 1 Internal Address Interface 1 2 3 m 1 4 5 6 m 4 7 8 9 m 7 Main 10 11 12 m 10 Main in 29 type 1 2 3 c 1 FN C OLIU 24 type with equipped is it if shelf OC 3 an in used be can command This this for type cross connect valid only The slots unit Main its in packs circuit is equipage Twoway OC 3 with Starting cross connections pass through for Main its in packs circuit OLI...

Page 723: ...dress2 and Address1 signals through pass For slot time identical cct valid The two way is cross connection the whether specifies CrsType are values twoway 0X1 to applicable OC 3 in add drop to applies Two way cross connections through pass and only application value default the is Twoway The cct the if parameter optional an is parameter is deleted be to type cross connection twoway Address1 Addres...

Page 724: ...s n i a m h t o B s is message confirmation following the command this entering After displayed e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c c 3 s t s s r c t l d e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m 1 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a 2 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a e p y T s r C e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L ...

Page 725: ... within DS1 internal or DS1 one and channel VT1 5 port later and 13 0 Release OC 3 in pack circuit TMUX BBG20 ring In deleted be to are cross connections existing where the using by deleted are connections pass through applications for address same Address1 and Address2 Addresses Linear Valid m c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all a b 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses Ring Valid m 1 3 all 1...

Page 726: ...ater and value the includes address the If all for value the cct the of range the within cross connection every to applies addresses The Address1 Address2 and CrsType existing an match must parameters the with complete will command the of execution or cross connection VT1 5 message following t s i x e t o n s e o d n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c 5 1 T V d e i f i c e p s e h T d e t e l e d e b t o...

Page 727: ...o r p t o n s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c g n i w o l l o f e h T s s e r d d a t n e r e f f i d h t i w s t s i x e t c e n n o c s s o r C 2 s s e r d d A 1 s s e r d d A 2 s s e r d d A 1 s s e r d d A When CrsType more or one with entered is command the and used is of address an or processed be cannot that addresses all be cannot that be will message following the but complete will command ...

Page 728: ... r c t l d e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t 1 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a 2 s s e r d d A s s e r d d a e p y T s r C e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E with entered is command this If all following the address the of part as displayed is message confirmation e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C d e t ...

Page 729: ...DLT CRS VT1 5 of 5 Page DLT CRS VT1 COMMANDS RELATED ent crs vt1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv ne set ne OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 59 ...

Page 730: ...ommand 1 NOTE data or CIT terminal interface craft any on enabled is security If is command this then shelf a on port DCC channel communication shelf the on ports DCC or CIT all for only users privileged to available 2 NOTE subnetwork the in elements network all at allowed is command this While active is node GNE element network gateway active the at table the only are parameters input The vc be m...

Page 731: ... l l a p o r d l l i w n o i t c a s i h T t e s e r e b o t C V C V d e t c e f f a e h t n o s n i g o l e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c p a m c a s o t l d e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e p y T C V x A P N S x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E GNE active an not is that element network a at entered is command this When displayed be will message c...

Page 732: ...DLT OSACMAP 3 of 3 Page DLT OSACMAP COMMANDS RELATED ent tl1msgmap rtrv tl1msgmap ent osacmap rtrv osacmap 11 62 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 733: ...This Manually TARP the are buffers These stack OSI the of 4 Layer in parameters TDC Cache Data TARP the and buffer NE Adjacent NOTE users privileged to available is command this then enabled is security If shelf the on ports DCC or CIT all for only are parameters input The L4ajsys the of field Identifier System NSAP the specifies parameter This Adjacency Manual TARP the from deleted be to NE adjac...

Page 734: ...ete the identify to sufficient is NSAP the of L4tdctid which for Element Network the of TID the specifies parameter This TDC the from deleted be to is data of row the entering While L4ajsys specific a for entered is digits of number incorrect an if reprompted is user the and issued is message following the parameter y r t n e a t a d d i l a v n I r e b m u n l a m i c e d a x e h t i g i d m u n ...

Page 735: ...n y e t u c e x E the in specified TID Identifier Target the match TDC the in entries no If L4tdctid is message denial following the and taken is action no then displayed V N D I d i l a V t o N a t a D t u p n I d e r e t n e s a w e u l a v d i t c d t 4 L d i l a v n I the in specified ID SYS the match table Adjacency Manual the in entries no If L4ajsys displayed is message denial following the...

Page 736: ...cuit OLIU 26G2 U or 27G2 U The 0x1 OC 1 and unit function a within cross connections pass through OC 1 cross drop local hairpin OC 1 and units function between cross connections later and 13 0 Release in support hairpin OLIU 26G2 U and connections to used be may packs circuit OLIU 21D or 21G 22 type applications linear In cross applications linear in Additionally cross connections STS 1 establish ...

Page 737: ...S3 28 DS1 MXRVO or 1 DS3 DS3 28 DS1 MXRVO or 1 DS3 DS3 28 DS1 MXRVO or 1 DS3 DS3 or 1 EC 1 STS1E b to m 2 STS 1 Terminating 11 1 Figure M A I N STS 1 1 STS 1 2 m 1 m 2 m 3 OLIU c 1 c 2 c 3 STS 1 3 Function Unit C a 1 a 2 b 1 b 2 Function Unit A OLIU Function Unit B OLIU 2 STS 1 2 STS 1 3 STS 1 a 1 to m 3 Application Hub 11 2 Figure OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 67 ...

Page 738: ... DS1 MXRVO or 1 DS3 DS3 28 DS1 MXRVO or 1 DS3 DS3 3 STS 1 OLIU c 1 c 2 c 3 b to c 2 a to m 2 Application Add Drop Linear 11 3 Figure M A I N STS1 2 m 1 m 2 m 3 STS1 3 a b c Function Unit A Function Unit B Function Unit C STS1 1 MXRVO DS1 or DS3 or EC1 or OLIU EC1 or DS3 or OLIU c to b Application Hairpin Ring 11 4 Figure 11 68 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 739: ...2 Ring 1 Ring 2 STS1 1 STS1 1 b 1 to m 1 Application Single Homed Configuration Ring 0x1 11 5 Figure M A I N STS1 2 STS1 3 a b c 1 M A I N STS1 2 STS1 3 2 Function Unit A fn a 1 fn a 2 Function Unit B fn b 1 fn b 2 Function Unit C fn c 1 fn c 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 STS1 1 STS1 1 a 1 to m 2 Application Dual Homed Configuration Ring 0x1 11 6 Figure OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 69 ...

Page 740: ...ed for with starting Also addresses valid corresponding and within cross connections pass through 9 1 Release be may OLIUs 27G2 U with equipped units function established cross drop local hairpin 11 0 Release with Starting traffic path protected drop to used be may connections OLIU 27G2 U of pair a on terminating ring OC 1 an from STS 1 to or ports DS1 to unit function a in packs circuit of pair T...

Page 741: ... entered is pass through a indicate addresses the when line command the not is CrsType the If rejected is request the cross connection locked or dc in displayed not is and requested not is RingId the not is CrsType the If messages confirmation locked or dc and RingId for entered value any ignore will system the entered is RingId ring ring the is RingId releases ring all with available is parameter...

Page 742: ...near Default a to m 1 or STS1E DS3 with equipped is A group function when Default packs circuit MXRVO b to m 2 or STS1E DS3 with equipped is B group function when Default packs circuit MXRVO c to m 3 or STS1E DS3 with equipped is C group function when Default packs circuit MXRVO a 1 to m 1 circuit OLIU with equipped is A group function when Default packs b 2 to m 2 circuit OLIU with equipped is B ...

Page 743: ... function when Allowed packs manual always is mode cross connect the releases ring OC 3 DDM 2000 In crs manual items Where below listed are cross connections manual Valid form to used be may items these of one only and one any braces in appear address the Addresses Cross Connect Release Ring a b c to m 1 3 circuit OLIU 22 type with equipped are slots Main when Allowed equipped are C and or B and o...

Page 744: ...oups function and packs earlier or shelves 4 Group packs circuit type c 1 3 to m 1 3 circuit 22 type with equipped are slots Main when Allowed circuit 22 type with equipped is C group function and packs packs m 1 3 to m 1 3 slots Main when signals pass through cross connect to Allowed packs circuit 22 type with equipped are Address1 and Address2 slot time identical the be must m 1 2 to m 1 2 slots...

Page 745: ...26 type with a b c 1 to m 1 12 29 type or 24 type with equipped are slots Main when Allowed are C and or B and or A groups function and packs circuit OLIU packs circuit OLIU 26 type with equipped a b c 1 to m 1 2 circuit OLIU 27 type with equipped are slots Main when Allowed equipped are C and or B and or A groups function and packs packs circuit OLIU 26 type with a b 1 2 to m 1 2 circuit OLIU 27 ...

Page 746: ...addressed the when allowed 11 0 Release with Starting MXRVO with equipped are B or A groups function in port speed and packs circuit low speed STS1E or 13 0 release in TMUX circuit OLIU 27G2 U with equipped is C group function when packs c 1 3 to a b 1 low addressed the when allowed 13 0 Release with Starting 26G2 U with equipped is B or A groups function in port speed with equipped is C group fun...

Page 747: ...annel STS 1 1 than more no and C and A C and B groups function between c to a b A groups function when allowed 13 0 Release with Starting function when and STS1E DS3 with equipped are B and or packs circuit STS1E with equipped is C group c to a b 1 2 B or A groups function when allowed 13 0 Release with Starting function and packs circuit OLIU 22 type with equipped are packs circuit STS1E or DS3 w...

Page 748: ...i s i t r o p d e s s e r d d a e h T not is slots Main the of one and issued is command this if systems ring In displayed be will message denial following the equipped S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B drop local hairpin path protected a up setting when 11 0 Release with Starting is ring OC 1 the which to unit function the of s...

Page 749: ...2 G 7 2 h t i w d e p p i u q e is CrsType the and cross connection pass through a indicate addresses the If not twoway message following the with denied is request the S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S t s e u q e r n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c d i l a v n I default to set is mode cross connect the if systems linear In crs default as the by provisioned set ne the with denied be w...

Page 750: ...sage S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S k c a p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s displayed is message confirmation following the command this entering After The RingId the if only message confirmation the in displayed is parameter CrsType to set is parameter dc or locked s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s n o i t c e n n o ...

Page 751: ...ENT CRS STS1 16 of 16 Page ENT CRS STS1 COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs sts1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv ne set ne OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 81 ...

Page 752: ...icense special a requires that the via enabled be first must set feat cross the before command place takes request connection 2 NOTE equipped is shelf the if ONLY shelf OC 3 an in used be can command This only The units Main its in packs circuit OLIU 29 type or 24 type with are types cross connect allowed Twoway only the Main in OLIU 24 type the using When Twoway allowed cross connect only the Mai...

Page 753: ...these of one only and one any braces in appear items Where address the form to used be may items m 1 4 7 10 to m 1 4 7 10 pass through Twoway cross connect to Allowed or 24 type with equipped is shelf OC 3 the if signals and Address1 slots unit Main its in OLIUs 29 type time slot identical the be must Address2 c 1 to m 1 4 7 10 Main in 29G U with earlier or shelf 4 Group ONLY application 0X1 STS 3...

Page 754: ...s STS 3c active where addresses using invoked is command this If address STS 3c the within cross connections STS 1 active or connections displayed be will message denial following the exist already C C A S d e t c e n n o C s s o r C y d a e r l A s u t a t S t a h t s e r i u q e r s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c w e n g n i h s i l b a t s E e s e h t h t i w d e t a i c o s s a s n o i t c e n ...

Page 755: ... a V n i t o N s u t a t S k c a p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s displayed is message confirmation following the command this entering After s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c k r o w t e N n o i t u a C d n a m m o c a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c c 3 s t s s r c t n e e h t d e t c e l e s e v a...

Page 756: ...ENT CRS STS3c 5 of 5 Page ENT CRS STS3c COMMANDS RELATED set feat rtrv feat set oc3 rtrv oc3 dlt crs sts3c rtrv crs sts3c rtrv crs sts1 11 86 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 757: ... releases ring later and software 15 0 Release OC 3 with available 1 NOTE be to STS 1s three to up allow will pack circuit interface OC 12 24G U The to have will any if channels STS 1 remaining the cross connected VT cross connects pass through ring STS 1 as continue 2 NOTE for selected be can interface OC 12 29 type the on STS 1s 12 the of Any cross Pass Through for or Units Function to connectio...

Page 758: ...RVO BBG2B the with equipped equipped is Unit Function associated the if group Speed Low a in allowed pack MXRVO BBG2 a with pack circuit this that combinations slot Speed Low different the lists following The use can 2 ls a b c 1 3 ls a b c 2 4 ls a b c 3 6 ls a b c 5 7 ls a b c 6 allowed is packs Speed Low other with pack circuit LAN IMA the of Mixing LAN IMA the with used be can 29 type or 24 22...

Page 759: ...C STS 1 3 Function Unit B Function Unit A STS 1 2 STS 1 1 N I A Signals VT1 5 with Shelf DDM 2000 11 7 Figure signals STS 1 three contains signal OC 3 each 11 8 Figure in highlighted As Group VT Each signals of Groups VT seven contains signal STS 1 Each individual an to corresponds signal VT1 5 each and signals VT1 5 four contains port T1 or DS1 signal STS 1 1 contains signals OC 1 two the of each...

Page 760: ... unit intra function and unit unit to function for pages following the See interconnections combinations equipage allowed of listings detailed addresses valid corresponding and cross pass through 9 1 Release with Starting with equipped units function within connections established be may packs circuit OLIU 27G2 U cross drop local hairpin 11 0 Release with Starting protection path drop to used be m...

Page 761: ...ts Fn 0X1 with interface s OC 3 the provisioning the using type application set oc3 command dc from only allowed are connections continue and Drop connections continue and Drop unit function to Main continue and Drop applications ring dual support unit function the if allowed only are connections OLIU OC 3 or STS1E the with equipped is address interface low speed locked nonpath switched support cr...

Page 762: ...ingId the enter to continue continue and drop first the by set value the with agree must value the is CrsType the If connection locked is and for prompted always is RingId the not is CrsType the If messages confirmation in displayed dc or locked the If messages confirmation in displayed not is it and for prompted not is RingId not is CrsType the dc or locked value the anyway entered is RingId and ...

Page 763: ... addressed the when Allowed circuit TMUX or low speed STS1E or DS1 a with equipped OLIU 27 type with equipped are slots Main the and pack packs circuit a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all to m 1 12 1 7 all 1 4 all is port LS low speed addressed the when Allowed circuit TMUX or low speed STS1E or DS1 a with equipped 29 or 24 type with equipped are slots Main the and pack packs circuit OLIU type a b c 1 2 1 7 all...

Page 764: ...l 1 4 all to m 1 3 1 7 all 1 4 all 22 type with equipped is B group function when Allowed packs circuit OLIU a b 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all to m 1 12 1 7 all 1 4 all with equipped is B and or A groups function when Allowed with equipped are slots Main and packs circuit OLIU 22 type OLIUs 29 type or 24 type c 1 3 1 7 all 1 4 all to m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all 22 type with equipped is C group function when A...

Page 765: ...U 27G2 U with equipped is C group function when and unit function to unit function situation this In pack circuit established are cross connections 0x1 OC 1 c 1 3 1 7 all 1 4 all to a b 1 7 all 1 4 all function in port low speed addressed the when Allowed low STS1E or MXRVO with equipped are B or A groups is C group function when and packs circuit TMUX or speed pack circuit OLIU 22 type with equip...

Page 766: ...ed are B or A groups function in port low speed and packs circuit TMUX or low speed STS1E MXRVO circuit OLIU 26G2 U with equipped is C group function when packs a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all to a b c 1 1 7 all 1 4 all addressed the when allowed 13 0 Release with Starting with equipped is C or B A group function in port from corresponding the when and packs circuit OLIU 26G2 U circuit DS1PM or DS1 with equ...

Page 767: ...s port only BBF6 a on ports addressing When ports Specifying all only 2 and 1 ports selects port invalid type pack circuit invalid an includes request cross connection the If the system the by supported not cross connection a specifies or address displayed be will message denial following S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S t s e u q e r n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c d i l a v n I in...

Page 768: ... this if systems ring In displayed be will message denial following the equipped S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B slots both cross connection drop local hairpin path protected a up setting When with equipped be must terminated is ring OC 1 the which to unit function the of be will message denial following the Otherwise packs ci...

Page 769: ...ctions active where addresses using invoked is command this If displayed be will message denial following the exist already C C A S d e t c e n n o C s s o r C y d a e r l A s u t a t S t s i x e t a h t s e r i u q e r s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c w e n g n i h s i l b a t s E g n i t s u m s e s s e r d d a e s e h t h t i w d e t a i c o s s a s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c t s r i f d e t ...

Page 770: ...s connections existing previously of d e s s e c o r p t o n s n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c g n i w o l l o f e h T s s e r d d a t n e r e f f i d h t i w s t s i x e t c e n n o c s s o r C 2 s s e r d d A 1 s s e r d d A 2 s s e r d d A 1 s s e r d d A an when example for addresses several with entered is command the When of address all cross already is addresses these of more or one but used ...

Page 771: ...e r l a n o i t a c i f i t n e d I g n i R e the and slots Main both in packs OLIU 24G U with equipped is shelf the If STS 1s 3 is that reached been already has STS 1s of number maximum VT 1 5 provision to attempts user the when cross connects VT have already the with denied be will request the STS 1 additional an within connects cross message following S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t...

Page 772: ... q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E parameter the with entered is command this If all the address the of part as not is CrsType If displayed is message confirmation following dc or locked message confirmation the in displayed not is RingId e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C d e t c e f f a e b y a m s n o i t c e n n o c s s o...

Page 773: ...ENT CRS VT1 17 of 17 Page ENT CRS VT1 COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs vt1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv ne set ne OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 103 ...

Page 774: ...o Asynchronous as provisioned when port X 25 the or TL1 for provisioned contexts application OS systems operations 1 NOTE this then shelf a on port DCC or CIT any on enabled is security If on ports DCC or CIT all for only users privileged to available is command shelf the 2 NOTE subnetwork the in elements network all at allowed is command this While active is node GNE active the at table the only ...

Page 775: ...subnetwork X 25 the is SNPA if 9 or 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LCN number channel logical either is It is VCType PVC calling DTE Equipment Terminal Data the is it or is VCType if digits 15 to 1 is which address SVC VCs nine to Up PVCs is that SVCs and PVCs of combination any to mapped be can SVCs by replaced and removed be could NOTE is Type Port if for prompted not is parameter This or tl1 asynch acid the i...

Page 776: ...isioned is port CIT a If to equal is Type Port Asynchronous as used is asynch or tl1 is event this in ACID default the tl1PeerComm of Type port CIT A cit the causes value default to ACID of provisioning tl1PeerComm well as when address calling LCN DTE SNPA additional an enter to attempts user a If will message denial following the exists already number supported maximum the appear M E L S m u m i ...

Page 777: ... E login active any value ACID the changing in results command this executing If terminated be will port specified the on session of Address an for value ACID an assign to entered is command this When cit 1 2 or tl1 of type port a with x25 the type port asynchronous an with displayed be will message confirmation following e f f a s E N e h t s e s u a c d n a m m o c s i h t d e t u c e x e n e h ...

Page 778: ...i t c a n a t a n o i t a m r o f n i e h t y l n O e v i t c a t o n e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c p a m c a s o t n e e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t s s e r d d A s s e r d d a e p y t t r o P e p y t t r o p e p y T C V x A P N S x D I C A x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E 1 NOTE table the in once than more appear can ACID same The 2 NOTE is ...

Page 779: ...orted ACIDs the for exist that classes message default are There by supported mappings default the shows table following The DDM 2000 defined as mappings these use to able be should users Most DDM 2000 Users command this using by mapping default the change may users However the using by provisioning current the check may rtrv tl1msgmap command mappings default the displays table following The p a ...

Page 780: ...led are they unless are types message supported ALM requires that event an of occurrence the report To sent is Report OS the at craft the by attention immediate the via ALM REPT message ENV the to alarm environmental an of occurrence the report To the via sent is Report OS ENV ALM REPT message CON network the at conditions status active the report To the via sent is Report element COND REPT messag...

Page 781: ... o m o n o t u A s m e t s y S s n o i t a r e p O n o i t u a C s i d n a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c p a m g s m 1 l t t n e e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m x D I C A x e p y T e g a s s e M x n o i t c A t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED ent osacmap dlt osacmap rtrv osacmap rtrv tl1msgmap OC...

Page 782: ...tion Standards International the by specified Layer of fields the of one least at of value the change to used is command this If the of all erase will action this reset to NE the cause will it address NSAP 3 will NE the possible If file history the and data monitoring performance default assume will time and date the Otherwise time and date the reinitialize values OSI the of 3 Layers in fields use...

Page 783: ...isionable user Service Network the identifies that field byte three a is field ID Organization The used not currently is field Reserved The ANSI the by assigned is and Provider fields Area and Domain Routing The 0000 hex of value default a has and there where applications in used is area digits hex 4 bytes 2 are which of each areas different the identify to areas Level 1 multiple are six This fact...

Page 784: ... RoutingDomain where RoutingDomain Domain Routing NSAP hex 4 digit byte 2 the is 0000 is parameter this for value original The NE local the of field L3area the which to domain routing the within area the identifies field This belongs address NSAP is parameter this of format The L3area RoutingArea where RoutingArea local the of field Area NSAP hex 4 digit byte 2 the is 0000 is parameter this for va...

Page 785: ...u a f e d e m u s s a l l i w e m i t d n a e t a d e h t e s i w r e h t O a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 l c c d s l u t n e e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m g r o 3 L d I n o i t a z i n a g r O s e r 3 L d e v r e s e R d r 3 L n i a m o D g n i t u o R a e r a 3 L a e r A g n i t u o R s i 2 v l 3 L r e t u o R 2 l e v e L t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y ...

Page 786: ...fers stack This stack protocol 7 layer OSI interconnection model This operations network for structure logical a is which model reference as elements network between protocol communication standard a defines ISO Organization Standards International the by specified OSI the of 4 Layer in fields user settable the provision to used is command This provide to OSI by required address 20 byte a is addre...

Page 787: ...00 0000 0000 000000 80 F 840 39 Default Value hex not user not provisionable provisionable provisionable provisionable user not are fields Identifier Format DSP DSI and IDI AFI The to respectively hex 80 and hex F hex 840 hex 39 to set always are They used be shall syntax DCC ISO the that indicate are fields Area and RD Domain Routing RES Reserved ID Organization The when and NSAP Adjacency Manual...

Page 788: ... This NE adjacent TARP the of parameter this for assumed is value default No NE adjacent TARP NOTE field Id System NSAP The L4ajsys each for unique is which manual a enter to required is that parameter only the is NE adjacency settable user other the of any then specified is parameter this If fields NSAP and specified not are that parameters field NSAP are fields SEL and DFI IDP user the by settab...

Page 789: ...4t4tm starts T4 T4 Timer TARP the provision to used is parameter This may parameter This recovery error for used is It expires T2 when is value default Its seconds 3600 to 1 from range the in value a have seconds 20 L4lftm Buffer Detection Loop TARP the provision to used is parameter This Loop TARP the flushing for period time the sets It Timer Flush from range the in value a have may parameter Th...

Page 790: ...ntry Cache Data TARP of portion TID It TDC Cache Data TARP the into data entering TDC the with associated NE the of TID the indicates This specified are that parameters address NSAP no has it and characters 20 of maximum a has parameter value default been also have must L4tdcsys then specified is L4tdctid If Cache Data TARP in made be to entry the for specified to required is parameter this NSAP T...

Page 791: ...Routing NSAP hex 4 digit byte 2 a is This TDC The TDC the into entered manually be to NE the of field Routing NSAP s the is parameter this for value default NE local of field Domain L4tdcarea of field Area NSAP the provision to used is parameter This identifies It TDC the into entered manually be to NE the NSAP the which to Domain Routing the within Area the Area NSAP hex 4 digit byte 2 a is This ...

Page 792: ...4 L d i l a v n I invalid an If L4t1tm L4t2tm L4t3tm L4t4tm or L4lftm entered is value displayed is message following the 0 than less or to equal value a example for reprompted is user the and y r t n e a t a d d i l a v n I invalid an If L4TDCTID no or value L4TDCTID following the entered is value reprompted is user the and displayed is message y r t n e a t a d d i l a v n I d e r e t n e e u l ...

Page 793: ... t 4 L 3 T r e m i T m t 4 t 4 L 4 T r e m i T m t f l 4 L r e m i T h s u l F B D L c d t e 4 L c d t e 4 L s y s c d t 4 L d I m e t s y S c d t 4 L d i t c d t 4 L d i t c d t 4 L g r o c d t 4 L d I n o i t a z i n a g r O c d t 4 L s e r c d t 4 L d e v r e s e R c d t 4 L d r c d t 4 L n i a m o D g n i t u o R c d t 4 L a e r a c d t 4 L a e r A g n i t u o R c d t 4 L t i u q o t e t e L E...

Page 794: ... craft a within help provides any at requested be also can and entered is input invalid an when automatically typing by time The another displays then and message help a displays prompt a or entry required the of format of description a either is message help The choices of menu 11 124 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 795: ...revious quarter hours are not affected NOTE If security is enabled on any CIT or DCC port on a shelf then this command is available to privileged users only for all CIT or DCC ports on the shelf The input parameter is RELATED COMMANDS rtrv pm line rtrv pm sect rtrv pm sts1 rtrv pm t3 rtrv pm tca rtrv pm t1 rtrv pm vt1 reg Register is the class of registers to be initialized and may be one of the f...

Page 796: ... sys sysctl used be only should the problem system a clear To replaced is SYSCTL a after reset command the changing without software system the resets it since used be should in parameter page the for except parameters provisioned set link is which case this in value default to reset NOTE only users privileged to available is command This is parameter input The Address are parameters controller sy...

Page 797: ...tm L4t2tm L4t1tm L4etdc ent ulsdcc l3 ent ulsdcc l4 Security set lgn set passwd set secu configuration link CIT set link Switching Protection manual lockout forced inhibit switch fn switch line switch ls switch sync thresholds monitoring Performance set pmthres sect set pmthres line set pmthres t3 set pmthres sts1 set pmthres t1 set pmthres vt1 levels alarm and names alarm Environmental set attr e...

Page 798: ... parameter AGNE and Group Alarm the set ne therefore and parameters provisioning command this by affected be not will Alarm almgrp the 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting will Status NE Remote RneStat and AGNE Group valid be set ne be will therefore and parameters command this by affected SNPA VCType ACID ent osacmap ent tl1msgmap 11 128 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 799: ...nd only users privileged under listed parameters the all initializes parameter This sysctl following the PLUS Loopbacks opr lpbk ec1 opr lpbk t1 opr lpbk t3 Cross connections dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1 ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 threshold degrade signal OC 3 set oc3 set ec1 set sts1 releases rings all set vt1 releases rings all set oc1 releases rings all set ne thresholds failure Signal set ec1 set st...

Page 800: ...itions this by affected not are parameters date and Time redeclared be will command an Executing init sys sysctl the set will equipped packs TGS no with values default to parameters following Options Feature and 13 0 Release OC 3 In DSNE Element Network Services Directory the of part be not will parameter DSNE the releases TARP later set ne this by affected be not will therefore and parameters pro...

Page 801: ... y a m s i h T g n i t u c e x e e r o f e b l a u n a M e c i v r e S r e s U 0 0 0 2 M D D e h t o t r e f e R d n a m m o c s i h t o t E N e h t s e s u a c d n a m m o c s i h t d e t u c e x e n e h W n o i t u a C f o l l a e s a r e l l i w n o i t c a s i h T m a r g o r p e h t t r a t s e r e l i f y r o t s i h e h t d n a a t a d g n i r o t i n o m e c n a m r o f r e p e h t d n e r...

Page 802: ...e t n i s n o i t a r e p o s m e t s y s s i h t o t E N e h t s e s u a c d n a m m o c s i h t d e t u c e x e n e h W n o i t u a C f o l l a e s a r e l l i w n o i t c a s i h T m a r g o r p e h t t r a t s e r e l i f y r o t s i h e h t d n a a t a d g n i r o t i n o m e c n a m r o f r e p e h t d n e r a f e h t h t i w e m i t d n a e t a d e h t e z i l a i t i n i e r d n a m e t s ...

Page 803: ...c the of copy a with the either install to used be will command this 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting When generic software LAN IMA the or generic software Element s Network installed the generic software LAN s IMA the install to command this executing copy dormant non executing a be always will software The apply LAN IMA executing currently the overwrite to later used is command in included generi...

Page 804: ...be will message following the correct is syntax command the If n o i t a l l a t s n i m a r g o r p r o f g n i t s e T correct is syntax command the if generic software LAN IMA the installing When displayed be will message following the n o i t a l l a t s n i m a r g o r p N A L A M I r o f g n i t s e T PC the but generic software LAN IMA for command ins prog a issues user the If displayed is ...

Page 805: ... T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n d l u o c k n i l n o i t a c i n u m m o c C P i a g a t r a t s d n a d e l l a t s n i e b o t m a r g o r p h t i w C P t c e n n o c e s a e l P n the while type product certain a for program a install to used is command this If different a identifies loaded be will program the which into shelf the of TID OC 3 DDM 2000 for is ...

Page 806: ... t u c e x e s u t a t S d e l u d e h c s r o P I r e h t i e s i d n a m m o c y l p p A E N t e g r a T n i remotely to attempts user the if also applicable is message denial above The Apply an either has that element network Target a into program NE an install scheduled already is Apply or progress in command network Target a into program LAN IMA an install remotely to attempts user a If a has...

Page 807: ...o compatible running be must system target the and to connects PC the local the and PC the PC a from installation program local support To programs If programs compatible running be must to connects PC the that system target displayed be will message denial following the compatible not are programs the P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S e r u l i a f l o c o t o r p n o i t a c i ...

Page 808: ... e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s e t o m e R D I T t n e t s i s n o c n I P A S N X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X NSAP NE s remote the represents NSAP message above the In TID NSAP a determine to able is and command this receives NE an If must NSAP but same the kept is TID unreachable is NSAP the but translation message following the and denied be wil...

Page 809: ...f or system OC 3 DDM 2000 a into software OC 12 DDM 2000 example for the controllers BBG8 BBG9 with equipped shelves OC 3 for type controller displayed be will message denial following N S C S e C n e u q e S d n a m m o C d i l a v n i s u t a t S e r a w t f o S e l b i t a p m o c n I displayed be will message confirmation following the software upgrading When installation program for testing a...

Page 810: ...ently software NE the from different significantly is downloaded displayed is message confirmation following the system local the r u c e h t e t i r w r e v o l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C t n e r t a y n a f i c i r e n e g t n a m r o d r e i f i t n e d I t e g r a T s s c i r e n e g o w t e s e h t n e e w t e b t s i x e s e g n a h c r o j a M n o i t u ...

Page 811: ...obtained be also may version program CIT terminal interface craft a with system the into logged when line header panel user the on available also is version program current The line header a print also will system the entered is return carriage a time Each version program and TID the containing remote the to installed been successfully has program LAN IMA the When displayed is message following th...

Page 812: ...nates command This sessions all terminate will it session local a during entered is command this If will command this session remote a during entered If user the by established session local the to user the return and session remote the terminate COMMANDS RELATED rlgn toggle 11 142 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 813: ... the pushing to equivalent is command This ACO telemetry parallel the activating or point control ACO TBOS the activating input DDM 2000 co located has that network a in shelf Multiplexer DDM 2000 any For same shelves site will actions following the of one any settings parameter site same the at shelves all on alarms office audible silence button ACO the Pressing the Executing opr aco command inpu...

Page 814: ...ace STS1E low speed a on loopback a executes command This 11 8 Figure in shown as facility DSX or terminal fiber optical the The time same the at set be can loopback facility and terminal the Both the by released is it until place in remains loopback rls lpbk ec1 command EC 1 Terminal Facility DDM 2000 DDM 2000 EC 1 STS1E 3STS1E CP D S X D S X Loopback EC1 11 8 Figure 11 144 2000 February 2 Issue ...

Page 815: ...s lpbk ec1 Address Address of EC 1 port s to be looped back Valid EC 1 Port Address a b c all lpbktype loopbacktype specifies whether the loopback is terminal or facility terminal Terminal loopback directed towards the high speed facility This is a default value facility Facility loopback directed towards the DSX Address not equipped for STS1E Enter low speed EC 1 port address a b c all SYSCTL fai...

Page 816: ...d this later and 13 0 Release the or terminal fiber optical the towards pack circuit TMUX BBG20 a within port in remains loopback The 11 10 and 11 9 Figures in shown as facility DSX the by released until place rls lpbk t1 command Only terminal pack circuit LAN IMA the to applied if allowed are loopbacks type Terminal Facility DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DSX or T1 Carrier Interface DS1 DS1PM T1EXT CP DS1 T1 ...

Page 817: ...alid loopback terminal a For a b c 1 7 1 4 all a b c all all are addresses valid loopback facility a For a b c 1 7 all a b c all all or a b c 1 7 1 4 all a b c all all pack circuit BBF3B or TMUX BBG20 the For two supports 15 0 Release OC 3 pack circuit BBF6 T1EXT The 1 number ports only BBF6 a on ports addressing When ports T1 Specifying valid are 2 and all only 2 and 1 ports selects OC 3 DDM 2000...

Page 818: ...s only BBF6 all only 2 and 1 ports selects facility DS1 individual later and 13 0 Release In DS1 28 the of one each for supported is loopback each for or pack circuit TMUX BBG20 the on signals pack circuit DS1PM BBF3B a on DS1 four the of denial following the address the with consistent not is type loopback the If displayed is message S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S s s e r d d a...

Page 819: ...xists already loopback terminal a when requested is loopback facility a if is displayed be will message denial following the address same the for versa vice S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S q e r l a n i m r e t y t i l i c a f e p y t k c a b p o o l w e n g n i h s i l b a t s E t a h t s e r i u i w d e t a i c o s s a y t i l i c a f l a n i m r e t e p y t k c a b p o o l g n...

Page 820: ...d d a s s e r d d A t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E following the cause will command this loopback facility a for input When displayed be to message confirmation V d n a 1 S D e h t t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C T e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a a t a d g n i r o t i n o m e c n a m r o f r e p e m a r a p e s e h t h t ...

Page 821: ...k a executes command This 13 0 Release OC 3 For 11 11 Figure in shown as facility DSX or terminal 11 12 Figure in shown as available also is loopback TMUX a later and loopback The time same the at set be cannot loopbacks facility and terminal The the by released until place in remains rls lpbk t3 command DS3 DS3 3DS3 CP Terminal Facility DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DS3 D S X D S X Loopback DS3 11 11 Figure ...

Page 822: ... DS3 of Address TMUX BBG20 BBG4B BBG4 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c all BBG19 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c 1 2 all all lpbktype facility or terminal is loopback the whether specifies loopbacktype terminal high speed the towards directed loopback terminal value default a is This facility facility DSX the towards directed loopback facility 11 152 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 823: ...e is displayed If the command cannot be completed due to hardware problems on the SYSCTL the following message is displayed If it is determined that a slot has the wrong pack type for the command one of the following messages will be printed on the CIT Where address is a slot AID Address CPname CP failed Slot is in AUTO state or Address is not equipped no loopback established Enter DS3 port Addres...

Page 824: ...r e b t s u m s s e r d d a NOTE circuit TMUX BBG20 the to applicable not is message denial above The on address DS3 same the on active be can loopbacks of types Both pack simultaneously pack this following the cause will command this loopback terminal for input When displayed be to message confirmation 3 S D e h t t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C e c i v...

Page 825: ... E n o i t u a C e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a a t a d g n i r o t i n o m e c n a m r o f r e p e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 t k b p l r p o e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e p y t k c a b p o o L e p y t k c a b p o o l s s e r d d a s s e r d d A t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rls lpbk t3 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 Februar...

Page 826: ...local the of interface main the to connected shelf remote the from time and recovered is data time and date the applications ring In applications linear in shelf local the main 1 to connected shelf remote the from 1 NOTE name command this of version abbreviated an commands other Unlike name command complete the type must user The entered be not may denied be will request command the or command thi...

Page 827: ...i w e m i t d n a e t a d e h t e z i l a i t i n i e r l l i w t i e l b i s s o p f I m e t s y s d n e r a f e h t d n a m m o c t e s e r e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E is who user the initialization other or reset after start up system During the RETURN presses user the When in log cannot port CIT a to connected issued is message ...

Page 828: ...D shelf remote desired the of name system identifier target the is TID will user the enabled is security and completed successfully is command the If session login local a to similar password and login for prompted be NOTE user a if unexpectedly terminated be may session login remote A DCC the disables or enables network the in elsewhere is session remote another where shelf remote a to login to a...

Page 829: ...o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e y d a e r l a n o i s s e s e t o m e R d e w o l l a t o n s i n o i s s e s e t o m e r d n o c e s A support not does type product whose system a into log to attempts user the If displayed be will message denial following the NE local the from logins remote S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s...

Page 830: ... V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s e t o m e R d n u o f t o n s i d e r e t n e D I T matched NSAP the only TID NE s remote the match not does TID entered the If displayed message following the and denied be will command this case this in S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s e t o m e R D I ...

Page 831: ...enied be will command this reachable S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h s i l b a t s e e b t o n n a c n o i s s e s e t o m e R e r u l i a f p u t e s n o i t a i c o s s A P A S N X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X TID NSAP the in found one the represents NSAP message above the In translation COMMANDS RELATED logout toggle rtrv ...

Page 832: ...high the towards directed loopback terminal value default a is This facility facility DSX the towards directed loopback facility a release to attempts user the If facility address valid a at type loopback a only when terminal to attempts or established been has type loopback a release terminal a only when address valid a at type loopback facility following the and denied be will attempt the establ...

Page 833: ...es valid Loopback facility a For a b c 1 7 all a b c all all valid later and R13 0 in BBF3B the on loopback facility a For are addresses a b c 1 7 1 4 all a b c all all than other packs DS1 on ports DS1 for lookback facility a For are addresses valid BBF3B a b c 1 7 all a b c all all valid later 13 0 Release OC 13 in pack TMUX BBG20 the For are addresses a b c 1 7 1 4 all a b c all all two support...

Page 834: ...address facility the established been has type loopback displayed be will message denial following the and denied be will attempt F O R S d e l i a F n o i t a r e p O d e t s e u q e R s u t a t S t s i x e t o n s e o d k c a b p o o l d e i f i c e p S loopback specified the for address incorrect an with issued is command the If displayed is message denial following the S V N S e t a t S d i l ...

Page 835: ...ed be to is loopback a where port s DS3 of Address BBG4B BBG4 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c all BBG20 and BBG4B BBG4 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c all BBG19 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c 1 2 all all lpbktype facility or terminal is loopback the whether specifies Loopbacktype pack circuit TMUX BBG20 the to applicable only is parameter This For releases later and R13 0 OC 3 DDM 2000 in a at loopb...

Page 836: ...tempts or established been terminal valid a at type loopback a only when address facility the established been has type loopback displayed be will message denial following the and denied be will attempt F O R S d e l i a F n o i t a r e p O d e t s e u q e R s u t a t S t s i x e t o n s e o d k c a b p o o l d e i f i c e p S COMMANDS RELATED opr lpbk t3 11 166 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000...

Page 837: ...efore NE the on administrator rtrv passwd was command executed passwd by selected password encoded and encrypted current the is This the before login the of owner the rtrv passwd was command executed user_type security the by login this to assigned class access user the is This the before administrator rtrv passwd executed was command values following the of one have may parameter This privileged ...

Page 838: ...ied being user the in result will data parameter s invalid input to Attempts displayed is message denial following The command this of execution V N D I d e r e t n e a t a d d i l a v n i d i l a V t o N a t a D t u p n I login valid the match not does login a either that indicates parameter invalid An encrypted into it decoding after password encrypted the of length the definition a invalid is f...

Page 839: ...aintenance or reports only following the and denied is attempt this displayed is message C N D S t n e t s i s n o C t o N a t a D s u t a t S s a d e r o t s e r e b t o n n a c s n i g o l r e s u d e g e l i v i r P y l n o s t r o p e R r o e c n a n e t n i a m l a r e n e G a with information login password user s a restore to made is attempt an If user_type either of maintenance general or ...

Page 840: ... a is parameter input The alm have may parameter This desired is report a which for AlarmLevel values following the of one default all cr mj mn pmn conditions status ne acty abnormal other newer level severity a Within severity least to greatest from listed are Alarms first listed are alarms NOTE report RTRV ALM the reported conditions of number large the to Due reference easier for section this o...

Page 841: ... This failures equipment and signal 30 through 0 of range a Delay Clear equipment for seconds in delay clear alarm the shows This through 0 of range a with integer an is parameter This failures 30 PMN minor power a during raised be to level alarm office the is PMN or major MJ values the has parameter This condition alarm level alarm the indicating minor MN NOTE the to subject are signals FERF and ...

Page 842: ...RTRV ATTR ALM 2 of 2 Page RTRV ATTR ALM COMMANDS RELATED set attr alm 11 172 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 843: ...nt control environmental the of Address cont all Addresses Valid cont 1 4 all follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P t n i o P l o r t n o C n o i t p i r c s e D s s e r d d A r o t a r e n e G t r a t S 1 t n o c p m u P t r a t S 2 t n o c 3 l o r t n o c 3 t n o c 4 l o r t n o c 4 t n o c are parameters output The Address point control the of address the is T...

Page 844: ...wing The setting switch the determine to command displayed be will message I R N E a m r o f n I d e i f i c e p s g n i v e i r t e R r o f d e p p i u q e t o N e g a p i u q E n o i t t s y s T R n i y l n o d e n o i s i v o r p e b n a c s l o r t n o c l a t n e m n o r i v n E s m e COMMANDS RELATED rtrv attr env rtrv ne set attr cont set attr env 11 174 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 845: ...onmental the of address The Addresses Valid env 1 21 env all default follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P m r a l A l a t n e m n o r i v n E n o i t p i r c s e D e p y T m r a l A m r a l A s s e r d d A e r i F C S I M R C 1 v n e r o o D n e p O r e w o P A N 2 v n e 3 t n e m n o r i v n e 7 e d o c N M 3 v n e r o n i M l a n r e t x e c s i M N M 5 1 v n ...

Page 846: ...ion Provisioned NOTE SYSCTL whose system a in entered is it if denied be will command This the via CO to set is parameter CO RT set ne the Use command rtrv ne denial following The setting switch the determine to command displayed be will message I R N E a m r o f n I d e i f i c e p s g n i v e i r t e R r o f d e p p i u q e t o N e g a p i u q E n o i t m e t s y s T R n i y l n o d e n o i s i ...

Page 847: ...tional an are cross connections STS 3c for Provisioning and Administration 8 Chapter See Technologies Lucent from information additional cross VT1 5 A exist cross connections VT1 5 any if indicates also report This the using by obtained report map connection rtrv crs vt1 will command cross connections VT1 5 specific the show is parameter input The Address cross which for channels STS 1 more or one...

Page 848: ...s connection each 13 0 Release OC 3 with Starting direction each in once not once applicable if connections cross STS 3c and STS 1 both lists report above The that order an in channels the shows report output The sections separate in are slots high speed the example for system the of layout physical the reflects unit function the with associated those by followed first shown slots unit main the if...

Page 849: ...g 0X1 and DS3 0x1 hairpin to refer types cross connection mentioned the on information ent crs sts1 page command Id Ring column This releases ring all with available is parameter This specifying connections continue and drop for ring the identifies network the at dropped as well as continued be will ring which are values valid The element m1 and m2 VT1 5 A exist cross connections STS 3c or VT1 5 a...

Page 850: ...rough supports which equipage shelf s the on depending 0X1 for add drop or NOTE during example for types pack different with equipped are 2 and 1 Slots If time the at considered is what for data include will report this upgrade an type pack system valid the as is parameter input The Address cross which for channels STS 3c more or one of address The is address default The reported be to are connect...

Page 851: ... shown are slots high speed the example for system the of layout physical The etc B unit function A unit function with associated those by followed separate a in applicable if channels STS 1 the shows also report output the for described as order same the in listed are channels STS 1 The section channels STS 3c are parameters output The 1 Address channel STS 3c an of address the is 1 Address 2 Add...

Page 852: ...ut The Address addresses valid of list the is Following Addresses Linear Valid m c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all a b 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses Ring Valid m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all a 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all supports 15 0 Release OC 3 pack circuit BBF6 T1EXT The port only BBF6 a on ports addressing When por...

Page 853: ...onnection cross the specifies parameter This and drop two way is cross connection the whether specifies continue dc add drop to applies Two way locked or configurations linear In configurations ring 0x1 and hairpin and point to point add drop hubbing to applies Twoway cross connections pass through Id Ring and continue and drop for ring the identifies column This connections locked When NE the in ...

Page 854: ...RTRV CRS VT1 3 of 3 Page RTRV CRS VT1 COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs vt1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv state path 11 184 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 855: ...llows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P t r o P 1 C E e t a t S e d a r g e D l a n g i S m r a l A n o i s s i m s n a r T P C t r o P d l o h s e r h T l e v e L w h e d o M s s e r d d A e t a t s n n m r a l a e d o m s s e r d d a e t a t s n n m r a l a e d o m s s e r d d a are parameters output The Address Port ports EC 1 more or one of address the lists colu...

Page 856: ...hows column This The 10 base the to logarithm a of terms in BER a as port 5 through 9 from ranging integer an be may value State the of state administrative memory the shows column This for set is mode the When port Speed High is state the always is for set is mode the When in service Low Speed values following the of one be may state the is In service auto Automatic nmon Monitored Not COMMANDS RE...

Page 857: ...e displays command This NE element network a on slots more is parameter input The Address is default The slot s more or one identifies Address all slots Addresses Slot Valid fn all main 1 2 all all tg 1 2 all ls all fn a b c 1 2 all shelf auxctl sysctl ls a b c 1 8 all page following the on appears report output sample A OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 187 ...

Page 858: ... X M 2 b n f 7 9 9 5 6 0 1 1 V M 0 9 8 3 9 3 6 6 A A A B B B L C N S 1 1 S 4 G B B 3 S D 1 c n f 1 8 6 C A A B B B L C N S 3 S D 2 c n f 8 5 3 8 7 5 9 0 V M 2 9 1 9 8 2 8 6 B A A 1 A A L C N S 4 3 S B 1 F B B 1 S D 1 a s l 8 5 3 8 7 5 9 0 V M 2 9 1 9 8 2 8 6 B A A 1 A A L C N S 4 3 S B 1 F B B 1 S D 2 a s l 6 3 1 8 4 6 7 0 V M 2 9 1 9 8 2 8 6 B A A 1 A A L C N S 4 3 S B 1 F B B 1 S D 3 a s l 4 a s...

Page 859: ... type general OLIU named all are Units Interface Line Optical example SYSCTL named are ConTroLlers SYStem Code Apparatus function specific the identifies uniquely code Apparatus different with packs Circuit pack circuit a by provided they if even interchangeable not are codes apparatus name same the have Number Series circuit among interchangeability indicate to used is This apparatus and name pac...

Page 860: ... an example for unknown is information the that indicate marks Question version read to unable is system the because pack circuit unrecognized state AUTO the in slot a into inserted pack circuit a from information expected the show will report the slot a in inserted is pack circuit incorrect an If not does pack circuit current the that indicate and slot that for name pack circuit inventory match t...

Page 861: ... appears report output The t r o p e R d e l b a n E s n o i t p O e r u t a e F n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t p O e r u t a e F n o i t p i r c s e d e r u t a e f n o i t p i r c s e d e r u t a e f are parameters output The Option Feature enabled currently feature the of name the is This Description feature the of Description COMMANDS RELATED set feat OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 191 ...

Page 862: ...tenance and communications end to end for used NEs between information status and control is parameter input The Address value default The LAN IAO or DCC the of address the is Address is dcc all Addresses Linear Valid dcc m a b c all releases ring later or R15 0 OC 3 to apply also addresses These DCC identical the for provisioned is interface ring main the when mode Addresses Ring Valid dcc m1 m2 ...

Page 863: ... parameter DccMode are report this for parameters output The Address DCC LAN LAN IAO or DCC a of address the displays column This Communication DCC the over communication whether shows column This disabled or enabled is LAN IAO or NS US DCC settings parameter NS US side side user network DCC the identify to controller BBG8 the with available are element network the in DCC the of end each of settin...

Page 864: ... will report This events system recent most time stamped and date are and order first out last in in listed are NOTE report RTRV HSTY the reported conditions of number large the to Due reference easier for section this of end the at located been have pages complete a for 11 4 Table table RTRV HSTY the to refer Please outputs report of description COMMANDS RELATED rtrv alm 11 194 2000 February 2 Is...

Page 865: ...the is Address pack circuit Addresses Valid all a b c 1 7 all NOTE occupies pack LAN IMA the that Since consecutive two Speed Low used be should guidelines following slots slot either from derived be can address pack LAN IMA The IMA the if example For pack the by occupied two the of number slots Speed Low in inserted is pack circuit LAN a 1 and a 2 the either be can case this in used address a 1 o...

Page 866: ... e l i c v i p v 5 l a a d i p r g s s e r d d a t s t e n o s t s x s d e d o m m p m l a e s a e l e R _ N A L A M I e s a e l e r _ w s e s a e l e R _ N A L A M I e s a e l e r _ w s e s a e l e R _ N A L A M I e s a e l e r _ w s n o i t c A y l p p A n o i t c a s s e r d d A x n o i t c A y l p p A n o i t c a s s e r d d A x n o i t c A y l p p A n o i t c a s s e r d d A x are parameters ...

Page 867: ...his Identifier Group IMA between ranges integer This DS1s 8 to 1 of Group IMA 0 and 255 0 value default the is aal5 or encapsulating of method a is This 5 Layer Adaptation ATM have can parameter This format ATM in packets LAN adapting values following the of one llc value Default vcmux vp_id an assign to used is parameter This Identifier Path Virtual ATM for group IMA the in cells ATM the to ident...

Page 868: ...ck circuit stripped are bytes FCS the disabled is preservation sequence for format cell ATM to conversion to prior frame MAC the from opposite the In connection LAN IMA the over transmission MAC the to back added and recalculated is FCS the direction is value Default interface LAN the to forewarding before frame enable almlvl incoming an for level alarm the sets parameter This Level Alarm followin...

Page 869: ...y stored currently is generic software LAN the and element network apply issued is command with installation program for Action install NOTE apply an if reported not is parameter This been has address specific a to command In are that commands apply Only completed commands apply and running still Progress report this in listed are execution for queued NOT is parameter this pack circuit LAN IMA eac...

Page 870: ...enial following the otherwise slots Speed Low addressed the in packs circuit displayed is message T W Q E e p y T g n o r W e g a p i u Q E a w d r a h r e p o r p h t i w d e p p i u q e t o n e r a s t o l s D I A d e i f i c e p S e r COMMANDS RELATED set lan 11 200 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 871: ... e R g n i n o i s i v o r P n i g o L e p y T r e s U n i g o L e m a n d e g e l i v i r p e m a n d e g e l i v i r p e m a n d e g e l i v i r p e m a n l a r e n e g e m a n e c n a n e t n i a m e m a n y l n o s t r o p e r logins general by followed report the in first listed are logins Privileged is logins of category Each logins reports only then and logins maintenance hyphens of row a b...

Page 872: ...es login the lists column This Type User is user each authorization of type the indicates column This are values valid The assigned privileged general maintenance and reports only COMMANDS RELATED set lgn set secu rtrv secu 11 202 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 873: ...t The Link was command the which from link CIT the identifies Link values following the have may and executed cit 1 port front access the indicates This cit 2 port rear access The dcc x access remote for used port DCC SONET A dcc m dcc a dcc b or dcc c PageLength report a of page one in displayed lines of number the is This be will page one than greater lines of number a with Reports paged Baud BB...

Page 874: ...RTRV LINK its set automatically to system the allow to aa or AA or return to attached workstation or terminal the of rate the to rate baud port the COMMANDS RELATED set link rtrv ne 11 204 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 875: ...hboring default the other in included ISs neighboring 2 Level other as well as Area same the within Areas 1 NOTE only The report the in indicated be will this IS 2 Level a is NE local the If IS 2 Level default the is report the in identified be can that IS 2 Level other IS 2 Level default the not is NE local if 2 NOTE Manual TARP through neighbors as provisioned Elements Network can information Th...

Page 876: ...t provisioned been have Addresses Area Multiple If is NE remote a for translation NSAP to TID TARP a and area NE s local information the list only will report this completed successfully NE s remote A NE remote the of NSAP primary the to corresponding successfully responds NE remote the which for NSAP the is NSAP primary query TARP NSAP to TID an to 2 NOTE NE s local the in NE an for used are Addr...

Page 877: ...0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 2 n i a m 1 E N 3 e t i S 0 0 2 7 3 0 a 3 e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 reported other the as line same the of part is value NSAP the that Note width screen 80 column an on based around wrapped is it but information are parameters report output The TID direct its and NE local the of TID the contains column This neighbors LAN IAO a...

Page 878: ...e DCC Release OC 3 with starting available is parameter output This communication DCC whether indicate to used is it and 13 1 two in elements network neighboring two between This not or functional is areas 1 Level neighboring that indicating NO values two of either have can parameter blank A functional really not is communications DCC properly functioning is communications DCC that indicates NOTE ...

Page 879: ...lication ring 0X1 dual homed a in used be FiberReach DDM 2000 different a to host local connect to used being is packs from report the respectively fn b 2 2 and fn a 1 2 through node shelf wideband follows as appear will NE host OC 1 the r o f p a M r o b h g i e N 1 E N S I 2 l e v e L e p y T t c u d o r P u r h T d e t c e n n o C D I T P A S N 3 C O 0 0 0 2 M D D 1 E N 0 0 e 6 0 d a l a 6 0 0 ...

Page 880: ...Technologies Lucent Releases TARP for Guide Interworking Operations is parameter input The level2 Level 13 0 Release OC 3 from starting available is parameter This NEs reachable all list should report the whether indicates 2 a within areas multiple across ISs 2 Level as provisioned default a with N or Y either are values Possible subnetwork is NE local the if supported only is parameter This N of ...

Page 881: ...0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 7 R 0 0 2 3 7 0 a 3 e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 Y 1 E N 3 e t i S 0 0 2 7 3 0 a 3 e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 1 E N 7 e t i S 0 0 f 6 0 d a l a 6 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 F 0 4 8 9 3 is but information other the as line same the of part is value NSAP the that Note width screen...

Page 882: ...e 0000 0000 0000 000000 80 F 840 39 Default Value hex not user not provisionable provisionable provisionable the to refer fields individual NSAP s the on information more For ent ulsdcc page command by separated address NSAP the up make that fields different the lists report The space single a they subnetwork same the in found were TIDs duplicate have that NEs some If report the in reported be bot...

Page 883: ...nd area NE s local the in NE other any at provisioned the of each list will report this successful were queries NSAP to TID Area multiple the of one to corresponding NSAP each NSAPs possible TID the in displayed a with along NE remote the for Addresses column COMMANDS RELATED rtrv map neighbor OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 213 ...

Page 884: ...nd follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P m e t s y S D I T e m a n _ m e t s y s E N G e v i t c a t o n e v i t c a e d o M s r C l a u n a m t l u a f e d E L D I d e p p i u q e n u s i a f l e h S r e b m u n r o t c e l e S T R O C n o i t a c o l t c u d o r P e u l a v w h e s a e l e R _ t n a m r o D e s a e l e r _ t n a m r o d n o i t c A y l p p A n ...

Page 885: ... on switches are parameters output The TID 20 to up of string a by indicated name system the is This for value default The characters alphanumeric TID LT is The DDM 2000 TID a in element each for unique be must subnetwork GNE the is system this whether identify to used is field GNE The It interface TL1 providing GNE element network gateway either of value a has active or active not with Starting p...

Page 886: ...n be can group alarm the of member Any status panel in position their of because preferred be may some but AGNE Other center maintenance a near location or subnetwork the backup as provisioned be may group alarm same the of NEs must group alarm each in NE one least At required if AGNEs an as designated be agne would AGNE an without NEs NE Remote if alarms failure communication AGNE raise enabled i...

Page 887: ...cess 2000 the for checked also software The network ARM OC 3 is product the that determined and OHCTL BBG10 or BBG9 FiberReach DDM 2000 The network FiberReach a of part is shelf The shelf the of part a not is OHCTL 2000 MegaStar a of part is shelf The MegaStar The network 2000 and OHCTL the for checked also software BBG10 OC 3 is product the that determined Dormant_Release If 11 0 Release OC 3 wit...

Page 888: ...currently is generic software dormant a If the and element network the apply is command with scheduled Action cancel is blank a blank report will time and Date Action for reported Time Date example also values IMA dormant a if 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting the by stored currently is generic software LAN event this in element network Action IMALAN and Date 000000 and Time 00 00 00 The digit 6 the...

Page 889: ...arameter this LAN IMA For LAN IMA to NA is it because value 00 00 00 macaddress and 13 0 Release OC 3 only to applicable is parameter This Control Access Media the is This releases TARP OC 3 later stored is address This LAN IAO the of address MAC factory the by EEPROM pack s circuit OHCTL the on burned unique is it and 12 as displayed are address MAC the of bytes 6 The MAC a of example an is follo...

Page 890: ...the identifies Address all OLIU 27 type for Addresses OC 1 Valid main all all fn a b c 1 2 1 2 fn all main 1 2 1 2 fn a b c all OLIU 26G2 U for Addresses OC 1 Valid fn fn all fn a b c all a b c 1 2 1 follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P e n i L 1 C O S I A e d a r g e D l a n g i S e n i L m r a l A d l o h s e r h T s s e r d d A m l a n s s e r d d a m l a n s...

Page 891: ...ase the to logarithm n a with integer an is 10 of BERs to corresponding 9 through 5 of range 5 10 through 9 respectively aisalm of level alarm provisioned the the indicates parameter This values following the has and AIS line OC 1 NSA the cr alarm Critical mj alarm Major mn alarm Minor na default reported but alarmed Not COMMANDS RELATED set oc1 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 221 ...

Page 892: ... s OC 3 the identifies Address all Addresses Valid main 1 2 all all fn all fn a b c 1 2 all follows as appears report output the shelves OC 3 For t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P e n i L 3 C O S I A c n y S l a c i t p O e d a r g e D l a n g i S e n i L m r a l A e g a s s e M w h r e w o P d l o h s e r h T s s e r d d A m l a e g a s s e m x n s s e r d d a m l a e g a s s e m x n s s e r d ...

Page 893: ...e R g n i n o i s i v o r P e n i L 3 C O S I A t a c n o C e t y b K l a c i t p O e d a r g e D l a n g i S e n i L o i d a R m r a l A e d o M e g a s s e M w h r e w o P d l o h s e r h T s s e r d d A 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 s e y m l a e d o m e g a s s e m x n s s e r d d a o n m l a e d o m e g a s s e ...

Page 894: ...tical Low settable not is power optical that indicates hyphen A pack circuit OLIU the on switches by Message Kbyte are parameter this for values valid The enabled indicating and used are messages Sync proprietary that disabled used not are messages Sync proprietary that indicating SONET the in byte K2 the use messages Sync The These quality synchronization determine to overhead the by set are valu...

Page 895: ... an through Application Release with starting OC 3 in available is parameter This behavior additional defines parameter report This 15 0 to set is parameter this If unit function this to assigned 0x1 a in packs the between switching protection no is there or pair unit function 1 1 optical an is unit function the protection automatic The ring switched path a of extension optical for rules the follo...

Page 896: ...n the OC 3 1 1 a to interconnect to interface ring OC 3 the to set be should DccMode the far end the at interface identical is channel DCC same the configuration this In are K bytes the and lines OC 3 both on transmitted far the prevent to mode protection 1 1 the for configured DccMode The alarm channel APS an initiating from end in interface OC 3 Main the to applicable only is parameter always pa...

Page 897: ...ring example for types pack different with equipped are 2 and 1 slot If time the at considered is what for data include will report this upgrade an type pack system valid the as as appears report output The releases ring later and 11 0 Release OC 3 For follows t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P e n i L 2 1 C O C C D S I A c n y S e d a r g e D l a n g i S e n i L e d o M m r a l A e g a s s e M d...

Page 898: ...rameter This values valid The condition failure AIS line OC 12 affecting are cr alarm Critical mj alarm Major mn alarm Minor na default reported but alarmed Not DccMode is interface OC 12 the whether specifies parameter This There application 1 1 or ring a with interwork to configured parameter this for values valid two are distinct default or identical for configured When distinct a head over emb...

Page 899: ...RTRV OC12 3 of 3 Page RTRV OC12 COMMANDS RELATED set oc3 set oc12 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 229 ...

Page 900: ...lowed is command this While active is node GNE a at table the only follows as appears report output The t r o p e R p a M t x e t n o C n o i t a c i l p p A S O D I C A s s e r d d A A P N S e p y T C V t x e t n o c _ n o i t a c i l p p a _ 1 l t 1 c v p t x e t n o c _ n o i t a c i l p p a _ 1 l t 2 c v p t x e t n o c _ n o i t a c i l p p a _ 1 l t 3 c v p t x e t n o c _ n o i t a c i l p ...

Page 901: ...and Type VC the by sorted first is report the of section top The lists report the of section lower The parameters Type VC the within SNPA along address X 25 Asynchronous the by followed addresses CIT the first information ACID the with are parameters output The Type VC valid The Type Channel Virtual SubNetwork X 25 the is VCType are values PVC Circuit Virtual Permanent SVC Circuit Virtual Switched...

Page 902: ...lid x25 cit 1 2 NOTE in column separate a as listed not is parameter Address The its by followed Address string the as rather but report this value an not and GNE active an not is that node a at entered is command this When active limited will message caution following the 15 0 Release OC 3 GNE printed is report the before displayed be t c a t o n s i t r o p e R p a M t x e t n o C n o i t a c i ...

Page 903: ...RTRV OSACMAP 4 of 4 Page RTRV OSACMAP COMMANDS RELATED ent tl1msgmap rtrv tl1msgmap ent osacmap dlt osacmap OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 233 ...

Page 904: ...This follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P d r o w s s a P e p y T r e s U d r o w s s a P n i g o L d e g e l i v i r p g t d s f d s 8 0 1 0 T T A d e g e l i v i r p g 1 8 7 6 8 0 2 0 T T A d e g e l i v i r p g 1 8 s 7 5 8 0 3 0 T T A l a r e n e g 5 m s d k 7 0 0 0 0 2 M D D e c n a n e t n i a m 1 Q b 6 c o V R 9 0 e g r o e g y l n o s t r o p e r B b 8 u ...

Page 905: ...RTRV PASSWD 2 of 2 Page RTRV PASSWD COMMANDS RELATED rstr passwd rtrv lgn set lgn set passwd OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 235 ...

Page 906: ...therwise slots Speed Low the in packs circuit displayed T W Q E e p y T g n o r W e g a p i u Q E e r a w d r a h r e p o r p h t i w d e p p i u q e t o n s t o l s d e e p S w o L is parameter input The Address pack LAN IMA the on port LAN the of Address Addresses Valid a b c 1 7 all NOTE occupies pack LAN IMA the that Since consecutive two Low used be should guidelines following slots Speed slo...

Page 907: ...n n n n n n n l a t o t _ l l e c _ m t a n a l n n n n n n n n n n n n e l d i _ l l e c _ m t a n a l n n n n n n n n n n n n d r a c s i D _ t k P _ c a m t e n o s n n n n n n n n n n n n d r a w r o F _ t k P _ c a m t e n o s n n n n n n n n n n n n l a t o t _ l l e c _ m t a t e n o s n n n n n n n n n n n n e l d i _ l l e c _ m t a t e n o s are parameters output The Address pack LAN IMA...

Page 908: ...or DS1 faulty by caused packets in operating is LAN the when overflow buffer from mode half duplex mac_Pkt_Forward the indicates parameter this direction transmit the In that LAN the from packets MAC incoming of number receive the In WAN the to forwarded been have MAC of number the indicates parameter this direction and SONET from WAN the from received packets LAN the to forwarded atm_cell_total t...

Page 909: ...lowing symbol greater than A maximum register the is count indicated the that and overflowed a to due available not is parameter that for count the that indicates hyphen A condition trouble apply not does field report the that indicates blank A for data includes count the that indicates count a following mark question A a if occur may This interval counting full the than less reset or set date or ...

Page 910: ...include will command this for report output the upgrade an during type pack system valid the as time the at considered is what are parameters input The Address lines EC 1 or OC 12 OC 3 OC 1 the of Address Addresses Line OC 3 Valid main 1 2 all all fn a b c all 1 2 all Addresses Line EC 1 Valid a b c all OLIU 27 type for Addresses Line OC 1 Valid main all all fn a b c all fn all main 1 2 1 2 fn a b...

Page 911: ...2 the for violations coding of number the shows parameter This the in reported time the at started that interval collection data column previous ES B2 the in seconds errored of number the shows parameter This interval collection data SES B2 errored severely of number the shows parameter This seconds ESA B2 seconds errored A Type of number the shows parameter This a is second errored A Type A inter...

Page 912: ...except printed not are zeros all are that Rows printed always are which quarter current has register the that indicates count a following symbol greater than A maximum register the is count indicated the that and overflowed a to due available not is parameter that for count the that indicates hyphen A condition trouble apply not does field report the that indicates blank A for data includes count ...

Page 913: ...RTRV PM LINE 4 of 4 Page RTRV PM LINE COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm sect rtrv pm tca rtrv pmthres line set pmthres line OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 243 ...

Page 914: ...quipped are 2 and 1 slots If time the at considered is what for data include will report the upgrade an type pack system valid the as is parameter input The Address 24 with equipped is shelf if OC 12 or OC 3 or OC 1 the of Address address The line s slots unit Main in OLIUs 29 type or type all information performance monitoring all retrieve to used be may Addresses Line OC 3 Valid main 1 2 all all...

Page 915: ... both in OLIUs Time Start the when clock system the on time the indicates This started collection data 1dB Power Transmit power transmit dB 1 a whether shows column This data the in occurred has crossing threshold the in reported time the at starting interval collection the to only applies parameter This column previous of value a has and pack circuit OLIU 21G yes or no 2dB Power Transmit power tr...

Page 916: ...condition trouble apply not does field report the that indicates blank A for data includes count the that indicates count a following mark question A a if occur may This interval counting full the than less reset or set date or inserted is pack circuit OLIU the if or system the into entered is command greater than the only incomplete and overflowed both is count the If removed appears symbol thres...

Page 917: ...cross connected STS non terminated all 13 0 Release with Starting and monitored be will interfaces EC 1 and OLIU non ring OLIU ring both both on reported and collected is data interfaces OLIU ring the For reported and collected is data interfaces EC 1 and OLIU non ring the For paths ring cross connections STS 1 terminated For only interface active the on reported interfaces ring standby and active...

Page 918: ...ith equipped is shelf the If are addresses valid the slots unit m1 m2 1 12 all all applicable Also cross connects VT1 5 with Main in OC 12 to cross connects DS3 Locked with slots Unit Function in packs BBG19 the to m 1 12 all all cross connects STS 1 with MXRVO or DS3 from Main in OC 12 to slots unit Main the in OLIUs 27 type with equipped is shelf the If are addresses valid the m1 m2 1 2 the slot...

Page 919: ...ystem the on time the indicates column This started collection data CV B3 violations coding of number the shows column This ES B3 seconds errored of number the shows column This A Type ES B3 seconds errored A Type of number the shows column This error single a with second a is second errored A Type A B Type ES B3 seconds errored B Type of number the shows column This one than more with second a is...

Page 920: ...ld report the that indicates blank A data includes count the that indicates count a following mark question A a if occur may This interval counting full the than less for reset or set date OLIU EC1 DS3 the if or system the into entered is command both is count the If removed or inserted is pack circuit TMUX or MXRVO appears symbol greater than the only incomplete and overflowed threshold a that in...

Page 921: ...erformance path DS1 path DS1 the to applies also command this 15 0 Release OC 3 with pack circuit LAN IMA and T1EXT the on monitoring performance addressed are LAN IMA the by occupied slots Speed Low consecutive two The them in inserted packs circuit LAN IMA Quad DS1 separate two had they if as the ls a 2 and ls a 1 slot into inserted is pack circuit LAN IMA an if instance For a 2 1 4 all a 1 1 4 ...

Page 922: ...s s e r d d a n n n n n n n n t e n o s e m i t s s e r d d a n n n n are parameters output The Address signal DS1 the of address the shows This Time Start data the when clock system the on time the indicates This started collection Direction 15 0 Release OC 3 with starting applicable is parameter This received is signal the which from direction the indicates This dsx or sonet is value the If dsx ...

Page 923: ...ted CV PFE CV violations coding path far end of number the indicates This time the at started that interval collection data the during PFE column second the in reported ES PFE ES far end path second errored of number the indicates This at started that interval collection data the the during counts PFE column second the in reported time the SES PFE far path second errored severely of number the ind...

Page 924: ... DS1 the if or system the into entered is command only incomplete and overflowed both is count the If removed or inserted is pack appears symbol greater than the threshold a that indicates parameter a for count a following asterisk An parameter that for occurred has crossing the if used be only may command This ds1pm the via enabled is feature set feat denial following the enabled not is feature t...

Page 925: ...RTRV PM T1 5 of 5 Page RTRV PM T1 COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv feat rtrv pmthres vt1 set feat OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 255 ...

Page 926: ...ode of type what of regardless cc channel clear line DS3 the display will report the selected is mode data PM path DS3 all of directions both for lines dash and data PM NOTE the show will report this pack circuit BBG19 or BBG4B the using When monitoring performance path DS3 with associated TCAs of number total associated TCAs The DSX 3 the and fiber the from incoming parameters the for also report...

Page 927: ...ction Type and far end path path line data PM the of type the shows This fiber or dsx 3 received is signal the which from direction the and 13 0 release OC 3 in pack circuit BBG20 TMUX the For applicable be will direction dsx 3 the only later Time Start data the when clock system the on time the indicates This a as reported are parameters The started collection are they which from direction and ty...

Page 928: ...d been has that service DS3 framed C bit a for far end the using format cpbit and frame cbit for set t3 command the or DSX 3 the from incoming signal DS3 a to applies This fiber ES PFE C a for seconds errored path far end of number the shows This frame cbit for provisioned been has that service DS3 framed bit the using format cpbit and set t3 a to applies This command fiber the or DSX 3 the from i...

Page 929: ...l counting full the than less reset or set date is pack circuit TMUX and or DS3 the if or system the into entered is command the For established is loopback facility a or terminal a or removed or inserted the of collection the interrupt not will loopback facility DS3 a establishing TMUX only incomplete and overflowed both is count the If data PMON path and line appears symbol greater than the thre...

Page 930: ...NOTE during example for types pack different with equipped are 2 and 1 slots If is what for data include will command this for report output the upgrade an type pack system valid the as time the at considered follows as appears report output The t r o p e R y r a m m u S g n i r o t i n o M e c n a m r o f r e P A C T 3 S D 3 S D 1 S T S e n i L n o i t c e S s c i t p O s s e r d d A e n i L h t ...

Page 931: ... d A t n u o C s s e r d d A t n u o c s s e r d d a t n u o c s s e r d d a t n u o c s s e r d d a t n u o c s s e r d d a generating are that parameters of type and address the shows report output The for apply not does parameter output the that indicate report the in Blanks TCAs address specified the are parameters output The Address of address the be can This signal monitored the of Address R...

Page 932: ...tal the shows This DS3 path errored severely parameters monitoring performance CV P parity C bit or bit F M adjusted P bit seconds frame DSX 3 the and fiber the from incoming UAS P SES P ES P for TCAs of number total the show also will report The DS3 line SES ES L CV L parameters monitoring performance L NOTE will parameter this pack circuit BBG4B the using When DS3 with associated TCAs of number ...

Page 933: ...3 with Starting TMUX the to applicable are DSX 3 the from incoming signal packs circuit BBG20 Address DS1 signal DS1 the of address the shows column This Address VT1 5 signal VT1 5 the of address the shows column This Count TCA associated TCAs of number total the indicates column This signal addressed the with COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm line rtrv pm sect rtrv pm t3 set pmthres line set pmthr...

Page 934: ... output the upgrade an type pack system valid the as time the at considered is parameter input The Address channels VT1 5 of address the is Address Addresses Valid all m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all slots main in OLIUs 22 type For a b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all slots FN b or FN a in OLIUs 22 type For c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all slot FN c in OLIUs 22 type For m 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all slots MAIN in OLIUs 27 ...

Page 935: ...n previous the in reported UAS V5 UAS seconds unavailable VT1 5 of number the indicates This reported time the at started that interval collection data the during column previous the in NOTE current and day current for except printed not are zeros all are that Rows printed always are which quarter has register the that indicates count a following symbol greater than A maximum register the is count...

Page 936: ...nabled not is feature this If command displayed be will message P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S d e l b a s i d e r u t a e f e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C of release a with loaded system DDM 2000 a on entered is command this If denial following the feature this support currently not does that software displayed be will message P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s ...

Page 937: ... 2 B 1 C O s n o i t a l o i V g n i d o C 2 B n n 1 C E V C 2 B 1 C E s n o i t a l o i V g n i d o C 2 B n n S E 2 B s d n o c e S d e r o r r E 2 B n n A S E 2 B A e p y T s d n o c e S d e r o r r E 2 B n n B S E 2 B B e p y T s d n o c e S d e r o r r E 2 B n n S E S 2 B s d n o c e S d e r o r r E y l e r e v e S 2 B n n S A U 2 B s d n o c e S e l b a l i a v a n U 2 B n n L C S P s t n u o...

Page 938: ...er This B2ESB the for values threshold count Seconds Errored Severely B2 the displays parameter This B2SES the for values threshold count Seconds Unavailable B2 the displays parameter This B2UAS the for values threshold count Count Switch Protection Line the displays parameter This line the for values threshold count switch protection Count Justification Pointer STS the displays parameter This poi...

Page 939: ...RTRV PMTHRES LINE 3 of 3 Page RTRV PMTHRES LINE COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm line rtrv pm tca set pmthres line OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 269 ...

Page 940: ... s e r h T r e t e m a r a P y a D r e t r a u Q r u o H S F E S s d n o c e S e m a r F d e r o r r E y l e r e v e S n n are parameters output three first the for Values enabled and disabled The are parameters output 1dB Power Transmit This setting threshold power transmit OLIU circuit OLIU 21G the to only applies parameter pack 2dB Power Transmit This setting threshold power transmit OLIU circu...

Page 941: ...RTRV PMTHRES SECT 2 of 2 Page RTRV PMTHRES SECT COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm sect rtrv pm tca set pmthres sect OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 271 ...

Page 942: ...B s d n o c e S e l b a l i a v a n U 3 B performance path the of names the contains report the of column first The quarter hour the contain columns third and second The parameters monitoring are parameters output The parameter each for thresholds day and Hour Quarter each for thresholds quarter hour the contains column This parameter monitoring performance Day each for thresholds day the contains...

Page 943: ...rely of number the for threshold the shows parameter This seconds errored B3UAS of seconds unavailable for threshold the shows parameter This service COMMANDS RELATED init pm set pmthres sts1 rtrv pm sts1 rtrv pm tca OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 273 ...

Page 944: ... s e r h T g n i r o t i n o M e c n a m r o f r e P h t a P 1 S D s d l o h s e r h T r e t e m a r a P y a D r e t r a u Q r u o H L S E e n i L s d n o c e S d e r o r r E n n F S P V C F S h t a P s n o i t a l o i V e d o C n n F S E P V C F S E h t a P s n o i t a l o i V e d o C n n P S E h t a P s d n o c e S d e r o r r E n n P S E S h t a P s d n o c e S d e r o r r E y l e r e v e S n n...

Page 945: ...t equivalent n ESF Violations Path Code DS1 for threshold daily the shows parameter This This paths encoded ESF for violations code path threshold quarter hour the show also will parameter the that indicates value threshold negative A value an of terms in specified is threshold violation coding 10 of BER ratio error bit equivalent n Seconds Path Errored DS1 for threshold daily the shows parameter ...

Page 946: ...is This end far the at seconds errored severely path threshold quarter hour the show also will parameter value End Far Seconds Path Unavailable DS1 for threshold daily the shows parameter This This end far the at seconds unavailable path threshold quarter hour the show also will parameter value disabled is thresholding that indicates zero of threshold A is threshold violation coding the that indic...

Page 947: ... If denial following the feature this support currently not does that software displayed be will message P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S e s a e l e r s i h t n i e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C COMMANDS RELATED rtrv feat set feat set pmthres t1 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 277 ...

Page 948: ...eters the for also reported are parameters monitoring performance line DS3 with the for reported are End Far or End Near for parity C bit Finally BBG4B well as BBG4B total the show will command this pack circuit BBG4 the using When monitoring performance path DS3 with associated TCAs of number only fiber the from incoming parameters follows as appears report output The NOTE path other all and pari...

Page 949: ... o i t a l o i V g n i d o C t i b C n n E F P S E d n E r a F h t a P s d n o c e S d e r o r r E n n E F P S E S d n E r a F h t a P s d n o c e S d e r o r r E y l e r e v e S n n E F P S A U d n E r a F h t a P s d n o c e S e l b a l i a v a n U n n disabled is thresholding that indicates zero of threshold A are parameters output The CVL violations coding the for threshold the display paramet...

Page 950: ...DS3 the for threshold the display parameters These parameter path a is This counts seconds errored C bit or bit F M the and DSX 3 the both from signal DS3 incoming the to applies that fiber SESP adjusted P bit DS3 the for threshold the display parameters These path a is This counts seconds errored severely C bit or bit F M the both from signal DS3 incoming the to applies that parameter fiber the a...

Page 951: ...shold the display parameters These that parameter path a is This counts seconds errored severely fiber the and DSX 3 the both from signal DS3 incoming the to applies UASPFE C bit far end DS3 the for threshold the display parameters These to applies that parameter path a is This counts seconds unavailable fiber the and DSX 3 the both from signal DS3 incoming the COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm t3 ...

Page 952: ...e S d e r o r r E 5 V n n n n n n n S E S 5 V s d n o c e S d e r o r r E y l e r e v e S 5 V n n n n n n n S A U 5 V s d n o c e S e l b a l i a v a n U 5 V n n n n n n n A disabled is thresholding that indicates zero of threshold a report the In specified is threshold violation coding the that indicates value threshold negative 10 of BER ratio error bit equivalent an of terms in n are parameters...

Page 953: ... t a t S d e l b a s i d e r u t a e f e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C software of release a with loaded DDM 2000 a on entered is command this If be will message denial following the feature this support currently not does that displayed P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S e s a e l e r s i h t n i e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C COMMANDS RELATED rtrv feat set feat set ...

Page 954: ...ase OC 3 with Starting porttype of X 25 the Also access CIT or TL1 for used whether port CIT addressed the porttype Synchronous or Asynchronous an as used whether reported be will port baudrate and 3echo as reported are disabled or enabled whether well follows as appears report output the 13 0 Release OC 3 For t r o p e R n o i t a r u g i f n o C y t i r u c e S t r o P e v i t c A t u o e m i T ...

Page 955: ...dotted a by separated are information SVC PVC X 25 and or DCC section bottom the in X 25 PVC SVC for listed is data no report above the In as listed is Link Access because x25 is Type Port and asynch is Link Access because information X 25 PVC SVC shows below report The as listed x25 is Type Port and synch t r o p e R n o i t a r u g i f n o C y t i r u c e S t r o P t u o e m i T y t i r u c e S ...

Page 956: ...rmation dcc well as included be might information is Type Port under reported value the If asynch the then section second the in reported be might that information only TL1 for is report the of dcc No porttype the when reported is value parameter is Link Access dcc blank a by designated be will this baudrate 15 0 Release OC 3 with starting available is parameter This are messages TL1 which in baud...

Page 957: ...s there then 0 zero is timeout If interface TL1 13 0 Release OC 3 with starting available is section This the to in logged users the list will report the of section This SVCs and or PVCs X 25 the via NE NE local if only GNE a is the first dcc TL1 by sorted is it and dcc TL1 or X 25 This SNPA by then and SVC then and PVC type VC TL1 and DCC CIT the after displayed is report the of section informati...

Page 958: ...VCs of combination any to mapped be can SVCs NOTE this 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting but column own its have not will parameter Access the of part as listed be will it rather OC 3 the in mentioned as address Link report R15 0 User Active OC 3 with starting available is parameter This id login the reports parameter This 13 0 Release via NE the into logged currently is that user a for the by ident...

Page 959: ...the upgrade an type pack system valid the as the of instead used be should and releases ring all with used is command This rtrv state releases linear later all with command is parameter input The Address is default The slots more or one identifies Address all all for system the in slots Addresses OC 3 Valid main 1 2 all all ls all fn a b c 1 2 all fn all tg 1 2 all ls a b c 1 8 all the packs circu...

Page 960: ...and pack LAN IMA the with equipped is shelf the If the lists report this slots Speed Low consecutive two occupies pack lines consecutive 2 in pack LAN pack circuit LAN IMA the For LAN column this in printed be will State s Port EC 1 or DS 3 LAN DS 1 for DSX the from signal the of state The reported is signals State Port p values following the of one have or blank be may i the and failures for moni...

Page 961: ...s ring received the of all or Some be can This active be may OLIU this from the using determined rtrv state path command ring transmitted the of all or Some system this on active be also may fiber the to outgoing channels the using by determined be can This rtrv state path on command all systems remote cross connections pass through of addition the With drop local hairpin path protected and units ...

Page 962: ...s will state switch the applications ring 0x1 or OLIUs both Priority Switch Only request switch protection active currently the is priority Switch protection a cause can request switch protection priority higher a this in priority switch the applications ring For done be to switch to main the of switching equipment the to only applies report the See signals unit function rtrv state path for comman...

Page 963: ...in x in occurred has switching protection Automatic least at was there where Fn x in failure a of because Fn y and Fn x between cross connect drop local one case this in fail not did Main x NOTE or failing of result the be may priority switch This a a where Fn X 1 2 in OLIU 27G2 U a removing is cross connect Add Drop Hairpin local For Fn Y and Fn X between established cross connect 0X1 a had Main ...

Page 964: ... b s l e v i t c a i i i i 1 S D 1 c s l e v i t c a a a a a 1 S D 2 c s l e v i t c a a i i a 1 S D 3 c s l e v i t c a a a a a 1 S D 4 c s l e v i t c a i n a i 1 S D 5 c s l e v i t c a i i i i 1 S D 6 c s l 7 c s l y b d n a t s 1 S D 8 c s l Low shelf s the that assumes example above The the with equipped are b 2 and b 1 slots Speed are ports DS1 the of some and pack circuit LAN IMA Service I...

Page 965: ...e See rtrv state path protection path for command information switching one with slots protection for blank always is priority switch The a have may slot protected the slots protected 1xn For exception of priority switch protection of lockout the in reported is reference timing the of state The rtrv sync command COMMANDS RELATED rtrv alm only Rings rtrv state path rtrv sync set state t1 set state ...

Page 966: ...e reported all addresses valid Other lines OC 1 are fn a b c all main 1 2 1 2 main all fn a b c 1 2 1 2 fn all OLIUs 27 type For fn a b c 1 2 1 fn all fn a b c all OLIUs 26G2 U For be will cross connected are that lines Only follows as appears report output The report output the in displayed t r o p e R e t a t S e n i L 1 C O e t a t S e n i L s s e r d d A s i 1 1 n i a m s i 1 2 n i a m n o m n...

Page 967: ...rm monitored is line The In service normally reported are conditions nmon monitored being not is line The Monitored Not for reported not are conditions status and Alarm for done not is monitoring Performance line this the until state this in remain will line The line the the with changed is state set state oc1 involving cross connection the until or command deleted is line this COMMANDS RELATED se...

Page 968: ...hat for data include will report the upgrade an type pack system valid the as reported is protected path is that application Any is parameter input The Address The address The path STS 1 or VT1 5 connected any is is default all system the in paths all for Addresses VT1 5 OC 3 Valid m1 m2 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all all OLIUs OC 3 for Addresses STS 1 Valid m1 m2 1 3 all all OLIUs 27 type for Addresses ...

Page 969: ...d n o c x s s e r d d a are parameters output The Address The address slots Main if STS3c STS 1 an be could path VT1 5 or OLIUs 29G U or 24G U with equipped are 2 Ring and 1 Ring the both displays always report The addresses Act path 1 Ring associated the whether indicates column This fn main 1or local into receive main 1 local into receive receive path 2 Ring or later and 11 0 Release a b c 1 or ...

Page 970: ...iority lower a is it because and allowed The report the in appear will requests APS only requests that condition the while active remain will conditions APS the clears failure that When exists still switch the caused APS other no if blank to changed is condition APS exist requests NOTE actually is path STS 1 the made is cross connection VT1 5 a Whenever not does command this entered is address STS...

Page 971: ...input The Address be to is state whose channels STS 1 the of address the is Address is default The reported all valid Other channels STS 1 are addresses a b c a b 1 2 all m c 1 3 all EC 1s For m a b c 1 2 all OLIUs 27 type For a b c 1 OLIUs 26G2 U For OC 3 with starting 29 type or 24 type with equipped is shelf the If addresses valid the slots unit Main both in OLIUs 15 0 Release are m 1 12 all cr...

Page 972: ...tomatic pointer of loss STS 1 or AIS STS 1 channel status or Alarm present be may condition LOP not are channel this with associated conditions for done not is monitoring Performance reported this on detected is signal good a If channel the the in put be will channel the then channel in service automatically state is and Alarm monitored is channel The In service normally reported are conditions st...

Page 973: ...RTRV STATE STS1 3 of 3 Page RTRV STATE STS1 COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs sts1 ent crs sts1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv state vt1 set state sts1 upd OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 303 ...

Page 974: ...4 all are OLIUs 27 type for addresses channel s VT1 5 Valid m 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all m 1 2 all m all all a b c 1 2 all a b c all a b c 1 2 1 7 1 4 all later and 11 0 Release OLIUs 27G2 U Requires are OLIUs 26G2 U for addresses channel s VT1 5 Valid all a b c 1 all a b c all a b c 1 1 7 1 4 all later and 13 0 Release OC 3 with starting 29 type or 24 type with equipped is shelf the If channel VT1 5 val...

Page 975: ... or Alarm present be may condition not are channel this with associated conditions not is monitoring performance Also reported this on detected is signal good a If reported the in put be will channel the then channel in service automatically state is and Alarm monitored is channel The In service normally reported are conditions status nmon being not is channel The Monitored Not not are conditions ...

Page 976: ...STATE VT1 3 of 3 Page RTRV STATE VT1 COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1 ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv state sts1 set state vt1 upd 11 306 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 977: ... data include will report this upgrade an type pack system valid the as is parameter input The Address parameters whose channels STS 1 the of address the is Address is default The reported be to are all channels STS 1 are addresses valid Other a b 1 2 all m c 1 3 all a b c addresses EC 1 m a b c 1 2 all addresses OLIU 27 type a b c 1 addresses OLIU 26G2 U OC 3 with starting 29 type or 24 type with...

Page 978: ...A S I A m r a l A S I A s s e r d d A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S a s n a s s s e r d d a a s n a s s s e r d d a but anything is address the If all follows as appears report the then t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P l e n n a h C 1 S T S m r a l A S I A m r a l A S I A s s e r d d A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S ...

Page 979: ...old failure signal the is This address channel provisioned the of address the is This Alarm AIS alarm AIS the show will information of columns more or One affecting non service and SA affecting service for values following the of one have may alarms SA alarms NSA values cr channels ring for default alarm Critical mn default only channels non ring alarm Minor na reported but alarmed Not nr only cha...

Page 980: ...of either with combination in used be not can pack pack circuit BBF4 The element network same the in BBF2 BBF2B packs a that ensure to taken be must Care application BBF2B any in used be can sync its receive not will packs circuit BBF4 new these with equipped system either with equipped is that system another from line timing for source packs TGS BBF2B or BBF2 the explain and command this for repo...

Page 981: ...t a t S t u p t u O 1 S D e t a t s 2 t u o f e r e t a t s e c n e r e f e R e v i t c A f e r n o i t a m r o f n I e g a s s e M c n y S e p y T e g a s s e M t u p t u O e g a s s e M t u p n I e n i L N C O e p y T e g a s s e M e g a s s e M s s e r d d a e p y T e g a s s e M e g a s s e M s s e r d d a e p y T e g a s s e M e g a s s e M s s e r d d a n o i t a r u g i f n o c e r o t u A ...

Page 982: ... Timing dash DS1 without External or FreeRunning be outputs sync mult by followed are dash the except Source Sync for choices The messages these of one only Shelf for shelf LineTimed for set is Source Sync Outputs DS1 and Shelf for LineTimed for set is Source Sync Out shelf Sync only Outputs DS1 for shelf External for set is Source Sync Out timing Sync Code Format Line DS1 DS1 the of coding line a...

Page 983: ...ain in packs circuit Mode Timing Active of mode synchronization timing active the is mode timing Active listed values the of any be may value The system the in previously Mode Provisioned following the of one or Holdover holdover in operating is generator Timing are references provisioned the because mode been has system the because or available not mode holdover to switched manually Timing No rem...

Page 984: ...ode Provisioned When reported not LineTimed Active values following the has Line main 1 main 2 fn c 1 fn c 2 NA active is reference timing Neither is mode timing active the When Holdover Active provide will that reference timing the is Reference Line mode holdover of out switches system the if timing is Mode Provisioned the When FreeRunning Active reported not are Line Active and Reference Switchi...

Page 985: ...s clock is Mode Provisioned External Outputs DS1 be can and outputs timing DS1 the is Outputs DS1 If pack circuit the on switches hardware by provisioned is Mode Provisioned only then mult are outputs DS1 the section this for reported Mode Provisioned mult the In External the mode timing mult used is other to reference DS1 incoming the distribute to bay the in shelves out sync a from derived is ti...

Page 986: ... is command disabled word the then disabled of value provisioned the with reported be will following the of one to set be may It parameter this options level5 S1 Clock Internal K2 value default disabled or Clk SONET Traceable level4 Stratum Traceable S1 3 Stratum K2 disabled or 3 level3 Stratum Traceable S1 2 Stratum K2 disabled or 2 level2 Sync S1 Unknown Quality Sync K2 disabled or Unknown Trace...

Page 987: ...o used messages output and input listed are quality source the of any if only available is report the of section this for provisioned been has interfaces optical kbyte or default Sbyte the using messaging sync set oc3 the or command set oc3 set oc12 has Main when OLIUs 29 type or 24 type Line OC N optical of addresses the identifies parameter This messages sync carry can that interfaces Message In...

Page 988: ...om or is that packs circuit BBF4 TG3 with running free or holdover in either 2 Stratum a from timing receiving is interface The 3 Level Quality source clock 2 Stratum Unknown Quality Sync a from timing receiving is interface This Level Quality source clock quality good 2 1 Stratum a from timing receiving is interface The 1 Level Quality source clock 1 Stratum to provisioned be can messaging sync o...

Page 989: ... The 4 Level Quality source clock 3 Stratum equipped system DDM 2000 a from or is that packs circuit BBF4 TG3 with This running free or holdover in either to equivalent is message 3 Stratum in messaging Kbyte 2 Stratum Traceable a from timing receiving is interface The 3 Level Quality source clock 2 Stratum to equivalent is message This Stratum 2 messaging Kbyte in Unknown Trace Sync a from timing...

Page 990: ...espectively Type the messaging sync of type the identifies column This the using for provisioned was interface optical set oc3 and or set oc12 are values valid The command Kbyte Sbyte disabled NOTE display only will column this interfaces OC 1 For Kbyte Autoreconfiguration Sync best the choose to system the allows capability This timing line for provisioned is it when use to source timing are valu...

Page 991: ... TL1 to ACID Identifier destination OS proper the to messages direct to element network follows as appears report output The p a M e g a s s e M s u o m o n o t u A 1 L T W S M P T V E B D N O C V N E M L A D I C A x x x x x x e c n a n e t n i a M 1 l t x n o i t a r t s i n i m d A y r o m e M 1 l t t s e T 1 l t m m o C r e e P 1 l t x x x x x x 1 r e h t O 1 l t 2 r e h t O 1 l t d e l b a n e...

Page 992: ...orted DDM 2000 by supported ACIDs tl1Maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration tl1Other1 tl1Test tl1PeerComm tl1Other2 msgtype messages TL1 of classes supported the of one is MessageType to sent not are types message These generates system the that The ACID an to associated and enabled are they unless OS the are types message supported ALM ALM REPT ENV ENV ALM REPT CON COND REPT DB DBCHG REPT EVT EVT RE...

Page 993: ...of status the and trace path receive NOTE path STS the to applicable only is feature this OC 12 and OC 3 For pack circuit BBG4B a to terminated is parameter input The Address terminating path SONET the of address channel STS 1 a is This assigned is trace path the which for signal OC 3 within Addresses Valid a b 1 2 m c all 1 3 all Addresses Only Rings Valid m 1 3 all Addresses OLIU 27 type Valid m...

Page 994: ...j i h g f e d c b a z y x w v u t s r q p o n m l e v i e c e R 2 D I A C R T z y x w v 3 m H C T A M S I M s u t a t S C R T C N I r q p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a z y x w v u t s r q p o n m t i m s n a r T 2 D I A C R T P X E z y x w v u t s u t s r q p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a z y x w v u t s r q p o n m l e v i e c e R 2 D I A C R T 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 z y x w v are parameters output ...

Page 995: ... TRC trace path the identifies This message trace Path Outgoing transmitted be to message the which for channel STS 1 the If rtrv trace sts1 is issued was command message following the with denied be will request the available not S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S l e n n a h c t n e t s i x e n o n a o t s t n i o p s s e r d d A COMMANDS RELATED set pthtrc sts1 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000...

Page 996: ...d 15 0 Release OC 3 in used is command this When all for displayed be will dashes pack circuit LAN IMA an with associated is and Mode PM State Port Level Alarm Address Port the except parameters Format is parameter input The Address TMUX the within DS1 internal or DS1 the identifies Address be may ports more or One port s pack circuit BBG20 is address default The specified all Addresses Valid a b ...

Page 997: ...this set has command these of either setting switch pack circuit the overrides string the with followed be will values override string the by followed be will it Otherwise hw to by determined is port the for coding line the that indicate switches hardware the circuit LAN IMA the to apply not does column This will column this pack this on ports DS1 the For packs display Level Alarm incoming an for ...

Page 998: ... of BERs to corresponding 3 or 8 10 7 10 6 and 10 3 respectively circuit LAN IMA the to apply not does column This will column this pack this on ports DS1 the For packs display BPVtoLOS signal DS1 incoming an whether indicates column This the by set threshold the above ratio error bit a failure an into translated be will parameter threshold failure are values The end far the at signal all zeros ou...

Page 999: ...e of format PM the indicates column This values following the of one be may and interface none to due port this on possible PM DS1 No always Mode PM equipage off sf Superframe esf far end and near end superframe Extended the on interfaces DS1 the of format PM The value the has always pack circuit LAN IMA of esf esfn only near end superframe Extended COMMANDS RELATED set state t1 set t1 OC 3 DDM 20...

Page 1000: ... address default The specified all BBG20 and BBG4B BBG4 for Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c all BBG19 for Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c 1 2 all all follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P t r o P 3 T M P M P M P e t a t S e r u l i a F m r a l A S I A e d o M t r o P t a m r o F e m a r F e d o M d l o h s e r h T l e v e L s s e r d d A t m f e m a r f d m m p e t...

Page 1001: ...wing the of vmr P bit DS3 remove and Monitor value default errors vm DS3 remove not do but Monitor errors P bit cc monitor not Do channel Clear errors P bit DS3 remove or apply not does parameter This circuit TMUX BBG20 the to pack AIS alarm DS3 a not or whether indicates AIS inserted be should AIS signal indication be may value The yes or no This BBG20 the to applicable not is parameter dash a th...

Page 1002: ... 13 0 Release OC 3 in packs the for level alarm the to refers parameter DSX from DS3 incoming following and BER Failure Signal LOS alarms Level Alarm AIS BBG20 the to applicable only is This 13 0 Release OC 3 in packs circuit TMUX for level alarm the describes It later and has and AIS DSX from DS3 incoming an values following the CR alarm Critical MJ alarm Major MN alarm Minor NA level alarm No no...

Page 1003: ...ff port this on disabled PM DS3 or monitored not is data PM reported PM path DS3 no Indicates because cc for selected was Mode will report PM DS3 The and data PM line the display both for lines dash PM path DS3 the of directions BBG19 or BBG4B a when data a in in service active is pack slot unit function Frame PM of type the indicates parameter This from signal DS3 incoming the for framing the For...

Page 1004: ...this pack the of one have may parameter This values following pbit selected is value this When display will report PM DS3 the DS3 as well as SEFS of counts UAS and SES ES CV P bit value default fmbit selected is value this When display will report PM DS3 the DS3 as well as SEFS of counts SES ES CV bit F M adjusted UAS and cpbit selected is value this When display will report PM DS3 the DS3 as well...

Page 1005: ... It later and DS3 DSX towards outgoing the in X bits the if only valid is parameter This signal value The m13 to set been has Frame or zero default one be may when for been has pack circuit TMUX the other any or framing cbit for provisioned ports DS3 non TMUX COMMANDS RELATED set state t3 set t3 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 335 ...

Page 1006: ...te a is NSAP The user settable are address this of portions certain Only element network follows as appears report output The t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P C C D n o i t c e S r e y a L r e p p U s s e r d d a P A S N 3 L s i 2 v l l e s s y s a e r a d r s e r g r o i f d p d i d e x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x are parameters output The Addr...

Page 1007: ...l 4 digit the indicates xxxx Where NSAP NE s local the of value field Reserved not has currently address NSAP the of part This the by purpose specific a assigned been standards SONET rd hexadecimal 4 digit the indicates xxxx Where NE s local the of value field Domain Routing provisionable user is field This NSAP is field this of use standard the until However be not should parameter this defined d...

Page 1008: ...is it usage its to according PDU a in set IT CLNP over run is TARP when hex in AF over run is TP4 when hex in 1D of value a has other for hex in 00 to set be may IT CLNP will it displayed and retrieved When uses hex in 00 as shown be always lv2is is NE local the if indicates parameter This Possible Router Level2 IS IS an as enabled either are values e or enable for d disable for COMMANDS RELATED d...

Page 1009: ...cies Manual TARP the and parameters provisioned enabled is retrieval its if retrieved be may information Cache Data TARP the through tdc_rpt is parameter input The parameter tdc_rpt the enables parameter This reporting Cache Data TARP parameter this Specifying Cache Data TARP of retrieval protocol the and address NSAP the TID the in result will in entry every for output and retrieved be to type ad...

Page 1010: ...x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x e l b a n e c d t e 4 L a t a d C D T 4 L 0 0 0 2 M D D T L d i t c d t 4 L x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 0 0 2 M D D T L d i t c d t 4 L x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 0 0 2 M D D T L d i t ...

Page 1011: ...tes parameter This to response for waiting time maximum the is T2 of outside search PDU request 2 Type TARP value a have may parameter This area 1 level default Its seconds 3600 to 1 from range the in seconds 25 is value L4t3tm T3 Timer TARP the indicates parameter This to response for waiting time maximum the is T3 example 5 type request resolution Address is address NSAP the when TID the request...

Page 1012: ...ing NE Adjacent ajarea hexadecimal 4 digit the indicates xxxx Where NE Adjacent Manually the of value field Area ajsys 12 digit the indicates xxxxxxxxxxxx Where the of value field ID System hexadecimal NE Adjacent Manually ajsel hexadecimal 2 digit the indicates xx Where Adjacent Manually the of value field Selector 00 as reported currently is which NE data L4TDC following the string this under an...

Page 1013: ...r NE tdcrd hexadecimal 4 digit the indicates xxxx Where NE the of value field Domain Routing NSAP s Data TARP the into entered manually was that NSAP hex 4 digit byte 2 a is This Cache manually be to NE the of field Domain Routing this for value default The TDC the into entered field Domain Routing NSAP s the is parameter NE local of tdcarea hexadecimal 4 digit the indicates xxxx Where that NE the...

Page 1014: ...indicates xx Where that NE the of value field Id Selector NSAP s Data TARP the into entered manually was being currently is parameter This Cache 00 as reported COMMANDS RELATED ent ulsdcc l4 ent ulsdcc l3 dlt ulsdcc l3 dlt ulsdcc l4 11 344 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1015: ...Address be to is state whose channels VT1 5 of address the is Address is default The reported all and ring valid Other addresses are addresses linear m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all all a b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses EC 1 Valid all a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses OLIU 27 type Valid all m a b c 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses OLIU 26G2 U Valid all a b c 1 1 7 all 1 4 al...

Page 1016: ... s e r d d a a s n a s s s e r d d a be cannot 0 zero of value degrade signal a later and 9 1 Release For report the in appear not will thus and provisioned are parameters AIS affecting non service and parameter degrade signal the If report the then application non ring a example for application the for valid not follows as appears t r o p e R g n i n o i s i v o r P l e n n a h C 5 1 T V m r a l ...

Page 1017: ...and SA affecting service for values alarm the of one have may alarms SA alarms NSA affecting values following mj channels ring for default alarm Major mn default only channels non ring alarm Minor na reported but alarmed Not nr only channels non ring reported not and alarmed not values following the of one have may alarms NSA mn default alarm Minor nr reported not and alarmed not COMMANDS RELATED ...

Page 1018: ...system the is This for value default The characters alphanumeric TID by set that is form the of string a is and values NE and site the SitemNEn The TID subnetwork a in element each for unique be must GNE gateway a is system this whether indicates parameter This value a has It interface TL1 a providing GNE element network of active or active not this to added is value new a parameter limited an is ...

Page 1019: ...D e t a t S y t i t n E 6 0 p u c v p 1 n c l 5 2 X 6 0 p u c v p 2 n c l 5 2 X 6 0 p u c v p 3 n c l 5 2 X 6 0 4 3 2 1 0 9 6 8 0 5 p u c v s 6 1 n c l 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d c v s 7 1 n c l 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d c v s 8 1 n c l 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d c v s 9 1 n c l 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d c v s 0 2 n c l 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d c v s 1 2 n c l 5 2 X 1 0 n w o d e c a f r e t n i 5 2 X 0 0 n w o d b p a l 0 0 n w o d e n ...

Page 1020: ...KET that means This packet RESTART_CONFRM or pvc the establish to ready and active is 3 layer channel communication svc lapb is channel communication this When up 2 layer a receive or send to ready and active is RESTART_PACKET line physical the if only up is line physical X 25 This lapb is A up down necessarily not does line physical a example for connection physical the that mean equipment interf...

Page 1021: ...c l 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 f 1 3 0 0 1 M R F N O C _ T E S E R v c r 3 n c l 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 b 1 1 0 0 1 D N I _ Q E R _ T E S E R t m x 1 n c l 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 b 1 2 0 0 1 D N I _ Q E R _ T E S E R t m x 2 n c l 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 are report this for parameters output The Date occurred event X 25 the date the shows column This Time occurred event X 25 the time the shows colu...

Page 1022: ...rface OC 3 an suppose example 10 of threshold degrade signal a and seconds 6 signal a has a for interval recovery the Since seconds 10 of failure degrade 10 6 the of length total the seconds 15 is threshold rate error of seconds 15 plus failure of seconds 10 condition alarm 20 of delay alarm provisioned the exceed will recovery declared be will alarm an and seconds clrdel be to declared be can ala...

Page 1023: ... l o h s e r h t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c m l a r t t a t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e y a l e D m r a l A n n y a l e D r a e l C n n N M P n n t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv attr alm OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 353 ...

Page 1024: ... the for name descriptive a is Description and upper string alphanumeric an be may description Symbolic long characters 26 to up spaces no with lower case the of name descriptive the in included be may characters point control either meanings special have characters symbolic following The be cannot and interface TL1 X 25 the for or interface CIT the for description the in included semicolon mark q...

Page 1025: ... ne denial following The command displayed be will message I S N E o i t a m r o f n I d e i f i c e p s g n i t t e S r o f d e p p i u q e t o N e g a p i u q E n t s y s T R n i y l n o d e n o i s i v o r p e b n a c s l o r t n o c l a t n e m n o r i v n E s m e COMMANDS RELATED rtrv attr cont OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 355 ...

Page 1026: ...v 1 21 env all NOTE address The env all when only allowed is alm the is address The command this for used parameter only env all the when allowed not is almtype and or desc used are parameters alm and input environmental the of level alarm provisioned the is Alarm values following the has cr alarm Critical mj alarm Major mn default alarm Minor na reported but alarmed Not almtype alarm of type the ...

Page 1027: ...cannot keys special and characters control All NOTE is parameter lO RT the has that system a in entered if denied be will command This the via CO to set set ne be will message denial following The command displayed I S N E o i t a m r o f n I d e i f i c e p s g n i t t e S r o f d e p p i u q e t o N e g a p i u q E n m e t s y s T R n i y l n o d e n o i s i v o r p e b n a c s m r a l a l a t n...

Page 1028: ...tallation is completed and the system is reset NOTE If security is enabled on any CIT or DCC port on a shelf then this command is available to privileged users only for all CIT or DCC ports on the shelf NOTE In both linear and ring applications if the automatic recovery fails both date and time are set to default 70 01 01 for date and 00 00 00 for time The input parameters are date Date is entered...

Page 1029: ...he following denial message will be displayed RELATED COMMANDS apply Caution Execution of this command will corrupt the current quarterhour and current day performance monitoring data You have selected the set date command with these parameters Date YYMMDD Time HHMMSS Execute y n or CANcel DELete to quit M set date DENY PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code You are not authorized to execute this com...

Page 1030: ...lid a b c all alm signal EC 1 incoming an for level alarm the describes AlarmLevel values following the has and failure cr value default alarm Critical mj alarm Major mn alarm Minor na alarmed Not dgr threshold BER rate error bit the specifies SignalDegradeThreshold integer an as 10 base the to logarithm a of terms in port EC 1 the for is threshold this When 6 of default a with 5 to 9 from values ...

Page 1031: ...e x E n o i t u a C s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 c e t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s e r d d A s s e r d d a l e v e L m r a l A l e v e l m r a l a e d a r g e D l a n g i S d l o h s e r h t e d a r g e d l a n g i s t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv ec1 OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 361 ...

Page 1032: ...rted be to feature this support to slots FN C and Main the in vtpm cross of performance monitoring provides feature This services VT1 5 connected ds1pm cross of performance monitoring provides feature This systems ring in services DS1 dropped connected act feature listed the on perform to wants user the action the is Action values following the of one have may it and enabled also will action This ...

Page 1033: ... r a s t o l s g n i m i t h t o b g n i n o i s i v o r p n i e g n a h c o N d e cause will feature a Enabling feature banner the to applicable not is case This displayed be to message confirmation following the S I H T F O E S U D N A O T S S E C C A e r u t a e f D E T T I M R E P S I E R U T A E F E H T R E D N U D E Z I R O H T U A Y L S S E R P X E D N A Y L L A C I F I C E P S F I Y L N O ...

Page 1034: ...t a e F n o i t c a n o i t c A t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E be to message confirmation following the cause will feature a Disabling displayed e h t f o l l a e l b a s i d l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C e h t h t i w d e t a i c o s s a s e i t i l i b a p a c m e t s y s e r u t a e f e r u t a e f r e g n o l o n l l i w e r u t a ...

Page 1035: ...ddresses These DCC identical the for provisioned is interface ring main the when mode Addresses DCC Ring Valid dcc m1 m2 a b c all OLIU 27 type for Addresses DCC OC 1 Valid dcc all dcc m a b c 1 2 1 2 Address LAN IAO Valid lan later and 13 0 Release com specified a over communication whether indicates parameter This TARP later and 13 0 Release OC 3 for interface LAN IAO or DCC are values valid The...

Page 1036: ...on either networks DDM 2000 For site is termination other the as long as value this be can DCC page following the on listed are values Default different parameter NS US the for settings default shows chart following The dcc c dcc b dcc a dcc m Linear Appl ns ns ns us 21 type 22 type 24 29 type OLIUs dcc c dcc b dcc a dcc m2 dcc m1 Rings Appl ns ns ns ns us OC 3 OC 12 OLIUs dcc dcc dcc dcc dcc dcc ...

Page 1037: ...isrupt will interface LAN IAO an Resetting over receiving or transmitting example for progress in are LAN be will message confirmation following the input is command this When displayed a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a s i s s e c c a t n e m e l e k r o w t e N n o i t u a C d n e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c m o c e f t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r s s e r d ...

Page 1038: ... set is lan displayed be will message confirmation following the a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a s i s s e c c a t n e m e l e k r o w t e N n o i t u a C d n n o i t c a s n a r t e h t t p u r s i d l l i w e c a f r e t n i N A L O A I n a g n i t t e s e R s A L r e v o g n i v i e c e r r o g n i t t i m s n a r t e i s s e r g o r p n i e r a t a h t N e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w...

Page 1039: ...t c e f f a s i s s e c c a t n e m e l e k r o w t e N n o i t u a C n o i t c a s n a r t e h t t p u r s i d l l i w e c a f r e t n i N A L O A I n a g n i t t e s e R s A L r e v o g n i v i e c e r r o g n i t t i m s n a r t e i s s e r g o r p n i e r a t a h t N e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c m o c e f t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r s s e r d d A n a l s n ...

Page 1040: ...all NOTE occupies pack LAN IMA the that Since consecutive two Low used be should guidelines following slots Speed slot either from derived be can address pack LAN IMA The the if example For pack the by occupied two the of number slots Speed Low in inserted is pack circuit LAN IMA a 1 and a 2 either be can case this in used address the a 1 or a 2 Speed Low other in inserted is pack the if apply rul...

Page 1041: ... length LAN IMA the unless changed be cannot down is link scrambler values two of one either have can parameter This Scrambler ATM on default ON is scrambler ATM off OFF is scrambler ATM polynom the activate disactivate to used is parameter This Polynomial ATM parameter This cells ATM the on check error header for checksum values two following the of one either have can on ON is polynomial ATM off...

Page 1042: ...s e h t t c e f f a l l i w d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C f o s g o e c i v r e s t c e f f a l l i w d n a k c a p t i u c r i c N A L A M I d e s s e r d d a e h t n k n i l N A L A M I e h t s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c n a l t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s e r d d A x d i p u o r g a m i x t m f 5 l a a x d i h t a p l a u t r i ...

Page 1043: ...i f i c e p S e r of value The grpid and or length LAN IMA the unless changed be cannot value the change to attempts user the If cross connects active no down is link of grpid and or length will command the active is link LAN IMA the while displayed messages following the of both or either with complete d e g n a h c t o n s a w d i p r g a m i d I p u o r G A M I d e g n a h c t o n s a w h t g n...

Page 1044: ...matically security is logins user reports only and maintenance general 100 of maximum A are users of types four following the enabled is security When supported password and login valid a with system the access to permitted user privileged commands any execute may user privileged The commands restricted including user general are that commands any execute may user general The users privileged to r...

Page 1045: ...characters ten of maximum a and six and characters numeric two least at include must password character non numeric and non alphabetic symbolic one meanings special have characters symbolic following The interface TL1 X 25 the for or Interface User the for either password a in included be cannot and space semicolon sign at mark question slash back point exclamation colon sign equal quote double co...

Page 1046: ...red are they when displayed be not will Passwords login a edit to dialog the shows screen following The t i d e t c a n g l t e s d e g n a h c e b o t n i g o l e h t r e t n e n i g o l _ d l o n i g o l w e n e h t r e t n e n i g o l _ w e n n i g o l w e n r o f d r o w s s a p r e t n e d r o w s s a p _ w e n n i g o l w e n r o f d r o w s s a p r e t n e e r d r o w s s a p _ w e n n i g ...

Page 1047: ... E definition login valid the match not does value login the If appear will message following the incorrect syntactically s n i g o l r o f s e l u r w o l l o f t o n s e o d y r t n E r e b m u n r o d n a s r e t c a r a h c c i t e b a h p l a 0 1 o t 5 e b t s u m s n i g o L s 9 0 r o d n a z a Z A e r a d e w o l l a s r e t c a r a h c a enters user the If login a enter to again once try m...

Page 1048: ... enters user the If password a enter to again once try may user The the definition password valid the match not does that password a displayed be will message denial following I E D I d i l a v n I y r t n E a t a D t u p n I s n i g o l d n a s d r o w s s a p r o f s e l u r w o l l o f t o n s e o d y r t n E name login the change to edited be can logins user Privileged If deleted be cannot log...

Page 1049: ...n edit or delete the but login a for option displayed be will message following the exist not does entered login S U I I r e i f i t n e d i r e S U d i l a v n I t u p n I n w o n k n u s i e u l a v n i g o l with command this invokes user a If Action enter the and but correct syntactically definition login the matches login entered also be will attempt the login valid existing already an matche...

Page 1050: ...ollowing the exists already logins supported appear M E L S m u m i x a M s d e e c x E t s i L s u t a t S s t s i x e y d a e r l a s n i g o l f o r e b m u n m u m i x a M n i g o l r e h t o n a r e t n e t o n n a C COMMANDS RELATED rtrv lgn set passwd set secu 11 380 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1051: ...T is parameter input The pg value The lines in page displayed the of size vertical the is PageLength page the If 24 of default a with 150 and 3 between integer an be may to directly sent is output system and used is pager no zero to set is length new a time each value default the to set is length page The screen the started is session CIT COMMANDS RELATED rtrv link OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Is...

Page 1052: ...led is security If on ports DCC or CIT all for only users privileged to available is command shelf the are parameters input The tid and upper include may and characters 20 to up of string a is TID characters following the and numbers letters lowercase is value initial the command this of use first the to Prior LT DDM 2000 The TID the of beginning the at printed be will OS TL1 X 25 of operation pro...

Page 1053: ...r value default The no is AGNE one least At message the support to group alarm each for needed alarms office activity FE features Status NE for communications Any status panel user FE and ACO local discretes miscellaneous be may some but AGNE an be can group alarm the of member near location or subnetwork the in position their of because preferred be may group alarm same the of NEs Other center ma...

Page 1054: ...or values The RT an or CO a of characteristics are co and rt with rt The value default the as the of operation the controls CO RT of value control fan external the and discretes miscellaneous NOTE the optimize to enabled is fearture Status NE Remote the When stronly is it provisioning simplify and network your of performance followed are guidelines rules following the that recommended be should Gr...

Page 1055: ...s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y D I T 0 0 0 2 M D D T L E L D I d e p p i u q e n u s i a f l e h S f l e h s e l d i d e p p i u q e n u s i a T R O C t r o c t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E the and entered is command this when 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting rnestat is feature enabled be will message confirmation following the displayed a m m o c s i h t y b d e t...

Page 1056: ...o i t u a C f o l l a e s a r e l l i w n o i t c a s i h T m a r g o r p e h t t r a t s e r e l i f y r o t s i h e h t d n a a t a d g n i r o t i n o m e c n a m r o f r e p e h t h t i w e m i t d n a e t a d e h t e z i l a i t i n i e r l l i w t i e l b i s s o p f I e h t e s i w r e h t O C C D e h t a i v d n e r a f e h t s e u l a v t l u a f e d e m u s s a l l i w e m i t d n a e t ...

Page 1057: ...shold degrade signal the specifies SignalDegradeThreshold threshold this When 10 base the to logarithm a of terms in BER a has parameter this of value The raised be will alarm an crossed is 6 is value default The 5 to 9 of range a NOTE OC 1 each of addresses both for value degrade signal The pair line must signal to change any Therefore same the be the to made be automatically will address one for...

Page 1058: ... u a C d n a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 c o t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s e r d d A x d l o h s e r h T e d a r g e D l a n g i S n s i A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv oc1 11 388 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1059: ... b c all main Addresses Ring OC 3 Valid main 1 2 all all fn a b c all later and 15 0 Release for valid not NOTE with starting 29G U or 24 type with equipped is shelf the If its of slots both in packs circuit OLIU 15 0 Release OC 3 to belong will addresses valid OC 3 only the unit Main units function dgr as threshold degrade signal the specifies SignalDegradeThreshold threshold this When 10 base th...

Page 1060: ...yword a is Application be cannot parameter This networks complex in unit function the slot function this to exists cross connection any if changed following the of one is value Parameter 0x1 STS STS 3c OC 12 an of part is unit function The 0x1 STS 1 VT1 5 OC 3 or application ring 0X1 1 VT1 5 and switching protection automatic The application ring single homed or dual the for rules the follow will ...

Page 1061: ...a DCC that configuration the is This pair the in line OC 3 each to to interface OC 3 the allow To interworking ring supports DccMode the far end the at interface OC 3 1 1 a to interconnect to set be should identical DCC transmit the mode this In K bytes the and lines OC 3 both on bridged or copied are bytes direction receive the In mode protection 1 1 the for configured are This processed are line...

Page 1062: ...cation the if unit function addressed message following the with denied be will request the cross connected S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e g n a h c e b t o n n a c n o i t a c i l p p A s t s i x e n o i t c e n n o c s s o r C incompatible of mix a when command this execute to made is attempt an If following the with denied be will request the Main in exists packs OLIU mes...

Page 1063: ... h r e p o r p h t i w d e p p i u q e t o n e r a s t o l s D I A d e i f i c e p s e r OLIUs 21 type when only allowed is function concat the enabling parameter The is message following the violated is this If FN C and Main both in installed are output T W Q E e p y T g n o r W e g a p i u Q E e r a w d r a h r e p o r p h t i w d e p p i u q e t o n s i s s e r d d a Application the and address...

Page 1064: ...d A x d l o h s e r h T e d a r g e D l a n g i S n g n i g a s s e M n o i t a z i n o r h c n y S e u l a v S I A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N e u l a v e d o M c c D e u l a v n o i t a c i l p p A e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E The DccMode and Application ring later and R15 0 in appear parameters releases The DccMode the and slots Main to applies o...

Page 1065: ... shelf s made be also will address one to change Any same the be must software the by other the to automatically syncmsg a in reconfigured be to timing allows messaging Synchronization the of one is value Parameter failure fiber or node a upon network following Kbyte selected is option this When value default the is This transmitted are messages sync byte S1 and K2 both sync for interpreted and re...

Page 1066: ...ing ring supports DccMode the far end the at interface OC 12 1 1 a to interconnect to set be should identical DCC transmit the mode this In K bytes the and lines OC 12 both on bridged or copied are bytes direction receive the In mode protection 1 1 the for configured are This processed are line active the from bytes DCC the only R15 0 in interface OC 12 Main the to applicable only is parameter lat...

Page 1067: ... a m m o c 2 1 c o t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s s e r d d A x d l o h s e r h T e d a r g e D l a n g i S n g n i g a s s e M n o i t a z i n o r h c n y S x S I A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N e u l a v e d o M c c D e u l a v t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E The DccMode releases ring later and R15 0 in appear parameter COMMANDS RELATED rtrv oc12 ...

Page 1068: ...he In password a change to dialog the shows screen following The type bold in shown is input user NOTE entered are they when displayed be not will Passwords d w s s a p t e s d r o w s s a p d l o r u o y r e t n e d r o w s s a p _ d l o d r o w s s a p w e n r u o y r e t n e d r o w s s a p _ w e n d r o w s s a p w e n r u o y r e t n e e r d r o w s s a p _ w e n passwords new and old the for...

Page 1069: ...e CANNOT keys special and characters control following the Additionally password a in included CR return carriage tab key tab bksp key backspace esc key escape del key delete definition password valid the match not does value password entered the If displayed be will message following the incorrect syntactically passwords for rules follow not does Entry non 2 least at with characters 10 to 6 be mu...

Page 1070: ... I P d r o W s s a P l a g e l l I e g e l i v i r P t c e f f e n i s n i a m e r d r o w s s a p d l o e h T the meets password a changing when enters user a that password new the If on match not does but correct syntactically requirements definition password entries two its password new your enter new your reenter password displayed be will message following the h c t a m t o n d i d d r o w s ...

Page 1071: ...SET PASSWD 4 of 4 Page SET PASSWD COMMANDS RELATED rtrv lgn set lgn set secu OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 401 ...

Page 1072: ... in entered be may DESCRIPTION of thresholds parameter performance the sets command This lines OC 1 lines OC 3 Main in OLIUs 29 type or 24 with equipped is shelf the When lines OC 12 slots unit crossings threshold of processing the deactivates and activates command This parameters performance for that for thresholding disable will parameter a for 0 zero of value a Entering parameter are parameters...

Page 1073: ... of BERs 10 10 through 7 0 of range integer an and A 132874 is value default The 1328736 through count parity the sets parameter this of value negative a as expressed BER equivalent an of terms in threshold 10 base the to logarithm QHB2CVOC1 coding OC 1 the for threshold the sets parameter This parameter This basis quarter hourly a on count violations of BERs to corresponding 7 through 10 of range...

Page 1074: ...lt and 900 through 0 range with DayB2ESB count B type ES the for threshold the sets parameter This 0 range with integer an is parameter This basis daily a on 90 of value default and 65535 through QHB2SES a on count SES the for threshold the sets parameter This with integer an is parameter This basis quarter hourly 20 of value default and 63 through 0 range DayB2SES a on count SES the for threshold...

Page 1075: ...ue default and 9999999 through 0 range with integer 5760 thresholds BER different to equivalent counts error the show tables following The justification pointer STS and EC 1 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 for Errors Line OC12 B2 Threshold Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHB2CVOC12 DayB2CVOC12 5315052 55364 7 531505 5537 8 53151 554 9 5315 55 10 Errors Line OC3 B2 Threshold Day Equivalent...

Page 1076: ...hold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHB2CVOC1 DayB2CVOC1 442848 4613 7 44285 461 8 4428 46 9 443 5 10 Errors Line EC1 B2 Threshold Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHB2CVEC1 DayB2CVEC1 442848 4613 7 44285 461 8 4428 46 9 443 5 10 11 406 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1077: ...ting Count PJC Threshold Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Frequency ppm Error QHPJCL DayPJCL 5412 56 01 10824 112 02 16236 169 03 21648 225 04 27060 281 05 32472 338 06 37884 394 07 43296 451 08 48708 507 09 54120 563 1 108241 1127 2 162362 1691 3 216483 2255 4 270604 2818 5 324725 3382 6 378846 3946 7 432967 4510 8 487088 5073 9 541209 5637 1 1082419 11275 2 1623628 16912 3 2164838 2255...

Page 1078: ... dB 2 the enables disables parameter This are values valid The power transmit enabled value default and disabled OLIU 21G the to only applies parameter This pack circuit LaserBias The threshold bias laser the enables disables parameter This are values valid enabled and value default disabled This pack circuit OLIU 21G the to only applies parameter Qhsefs quarter hourly a on SEFS for threshold the ...

Page 1079: ...SET PMTHRES SECT 2 of 2 Page SET PMTHRES SECT COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm sect rtrv pm tca rtrv pmthres sect OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 409 ...

Page 1080: ... quarter hourly a on count specified is threshold count parity the that indicates parameter the to logarithm a as expressed BER equivalent an of terms in 7 through 10 of range a has parameter This 10 base 10 of BERs to corresponding 10 10 through 7 integer an and 451 is value default The 4510 through 0 of range DayB3CV violations coding the for threshold the sets parameter This parameter this of v...

Page 1081: ... for threshold the sets parameter This one than more with second a is ES B type A basis daily a errored severely a in errors of number the than less but error through 0 of range integer an has parameter This second 90 of value default a and 65535 QHB3SES frame errored severely the for threshold the sets parameter This has parameter This basis quarter hourly a on count seconds 20 of value default a...

Page 1082: ...hows table following The thresholds Errors Path STS 1 B3 Threshold Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHB3CV DayB3CV 432960 4510 7 43296 451 8 4330 45 9 433 5 10 COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pmthres sts1 rtrv pm sts1 rtrv pm tca 11 412 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1083: ...s letters lower case or upper either in entered be may DESCRIPTION is and thresholds monitoring performance line and path DS1 sets command This and enables also command This pack circuit BBF3 BBF3B the with available these for TCAs alerts crossing threshold of processing the disables parameters PM path DS1 the set also will command this releases later and R13 0 OC 3 In pack circuit TMUX BBG20 the ...

Page 1084: ... is threshold count violation code the that indicates parameter a as expressed BER equivalent an of terms in specified 8 of range a has parameter This 10 base the to logarithm 10 of BERs to corresponding 5 through 8 10 through 5 an and 691 is value default The 1048575 through 0 of range integer QHCVPESF path violations code the for threshold the sets parameter This negative A basis quarter hourly ...

Page 1085: ...ts parameter This negative A basis quarter hourly a on count CVPFE far end count violation code the that indicates parameter this of value expressed BER equivalent an of terms in specified is threshold 8 of range a has parameter This 10 base the to logarithm a as 10 of BERs to corresponding 5 through 8 10 through 5 an and 13296 is value default The 16383 through 0 of range integer DayCVPFE path vi...

Page 1086: ...SPFE second unavailable the for threshold the sets parameter This This basis quarter hourly a on count UASPFE far end path a and 63 through 0 of range a with integer an is parameter 10 of value default DayUASPFE second unavailable the for threshold the sets parameter This parameter This basis daily a on count UASPFE far end path value default a and 4095 through 0 of range a with integer an is 10 o...

Page 1087: ...If command displayed be will message P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S d e l b a s i d e r u t a e f e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C software of release a with loaded DDM 2000 a on entered is command this If be will message denial following the feature this support currently not does that displayed P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S e s a e l e r s i h t n ...

Page 1088: ...ot unit where nnn parameter the in given range the in value numerical a is below listed description NOTE Parameters readability for letters upper case in shown are Parameters letters lower case or upper either in entered be may DESCRIPTION as signal DS3 a of thresholds parameter performance the sets command This error for crossings threshold of processing the deactivating and activating as well wi...

Page 1089: ...threshold the sets parameter This than greater with line DS3 the for basis daily a on count seconds range integer an has parameter This violations coding B3ZS 44 40 of value default a with 4095 through 0 of QHSEFS frame errored severely the for threshold the sets parameter This path a is This basis quarter hourly a on count seconds the both from signal DS3 incoming the to applies that parameter 0 ...

Page 1090: ...t of type the using selected set t3 parameter path a is This command and DSX 3 the both from signal DS3 incoming the to applies that the that indicates parameter this of value negative A fiber the BER equivalent an of terms in specified is threshold count parity a has parameter This 10 base the to logarithm a as expressed 10 of BERs to corresponding 7 through 10 of range 10 through 10 7 default Th...

Page 1091: ...he to applies that parameter path a is This command parameter This fiber the and DSX 3 the both from signal DS3 4 of value default a with 63 through 0 of range integer an has DaySESP errored severely the for threshold the sets parameter This for basis daily a on count seconds pbit fmbit and cpbit the using selected is type The formats of type set t3 incoming the to applies that parameter path a is...

Page 1092: ...m signal DS3 incoming the to applies that parameter indicates parameter this of value negative A fiber the and DSX 3 an of terms in specified is threshold count parity the that This 10 base the to logarithm a as expressed BER equivalent BERs to corresponding 7 through 10 of range a has parameter 10 of 10 10 through 7 16383 through 0 of range integer an and 40 is value default The DayCPFE count vio...

Page 1093: ... for basis daily a on count seconds cpbit of type the using selected is type The format set t3 is This command from signal DS3 incoming the to applies that parameter path a integer an has parameter This fiber the and DSX 3 the both 40 of value default a with 4095 through 0 of range QHUASPFE seconds unavailable the for threshold the sets parameter This far end the for basis quarter hourly a on coun...

Page 1094: ...d Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHCV DayCV 381972 3979 7 38197 398 8 3820 40 9 382 4 10 Violations Coding Line DS3 Threshold Day Equivalent Threshold Min 15 Equivalent Threshold BER QHCVL DayCVL 386519 4026 7 38651 402 8 3865 40 9 386 4 10 COMMANDS RELATED init pm rtrv pm t3 rtrv pm tca rtrv pmthres t3 set t3 11 424 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1095: ...able will parameter a for 0 zero of value a Entering command parameter that for thresholding are parameters input The QHV5ES ES second errored the for threshold the sets parameter This with integer an is parameter This basis quarter hourly a on count 40 of value default a and 900 through 0 of range a DayV5ES ES second errored the for threshold the sets parameter This range a with integer an is par...

Page 1096: ...y command This vtpm the via enabled is feature set feat denial following the enabled not is feature this If command displayed be will message P T S S d e p P o T S n o i t u c e x e s u t a t S d e l b a s i d e r u t a e f e l b a l i a v a t o n d n a m m o C software of release a with loaded DDM 2000 a on entered is command this If be will message denial following the feature this support curre...

Page 1097: ...users privileged to available is command This are parameters input The address ports DCC and or CIT more or one of address the is Address address default no is There Addresses Valid cit 1 2 all dcc all interfaces OC 1 Addresses Valid dcc all is interface X 25 for Address Valid x25 later and 15 0 Release in porttype Address provisioned the whether Specifies cit 1 port DCE or access front cit 2 for ...

Page 1098: ...baudrate are messages TL1 which in baudrate the Specifies are parameter this for values The received transmitted 1200 2400 4800 9600 and Default 19200 if only for prompted is parameter This porttype has parameter either of value the tl1 or asynch NOTE the command this executing of result a as If baudrate the on session login active any changes value parameter s out logged user s the and terminated...

Page 1099: ...ivileged by initiated sessions login to set is security if dropped not is that affected lockout 2 NOTE to equal is parameter Address the If cit 1 or cit 2 and to equal is Porttype tl1 to equal is Address or x25 is Security enabled this result a As automatically the in show not will and for prompted not is parameter message confirmation to session inactive an before minutes in time the specifies Ti...

Page 1100: ...mmands also become restricted to privileged users only when security is enabled on a system cpy prog copy program ent ulsdcc enter upper layer section DCC init pm initialize performance monitoring ins prog install program privileged The privileged user may execute any commands including restricted commands general The general user may execute any commands not restricted to privileged users mainten...

Page 1101: ... set secu the Entering sec specified a on displayed be to message confirmation following the cause will Address a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a s i s s e c c a t n e m e l E k r o w t e N n o i t u a C d n r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c u c e s t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s s e r d d A s s e r d d a y t i r u c e S y t i r u c e s t u o e m i T n t i u q o ...

Page 1102: ...t u o e m i T n t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E of value the change to command this Entering porttype from tl1 to cit will displayed be to message confirmation following the cause a m m o c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a s i s s e c c a t n e m e l E k r o w t e N n o i t u a C d n d e t a n i m r e t e b l l i w t r o p d e t c e f f a e h t n o s n o i s s e s e v i t c a ...

Page 1103: ...r security and timeout parameters only If the CIT 1 or CIT 2 port is already provisioned to run TL1 porttype tl1 then the CIT 1 or CIT 1 security value cannot be changed to disabled If a user enters a command and does not have valid permissions for that command the following denial message will be displayed RELATED COMMANDS rtrv lgn rtrv secu set fecom set lgn SNVS Status Not in Valid State Only o...

Page 1104: ... be to state Set port specified nmon monitored not to state memory Set NOTE the in is port a If nmon the to returned be must it state auto using state be can port that with associated packs circuit any before command this the by list equipment the from removed upd command the into put be to is that port EC 1 an If nmon STS 1 is state the packs circuit MXRVO with equipped unit function a to cross c...

Page 1105: ...ng d e s s e c o r p t o n s l e n n a h c 1 S T S g n i w o l l o F s s e r d d a S T S n i h t i w s t s i x e n o i t c e n n o c s s o r c T V s s e r d d a s s e r d d a these of more or one and addresses several with entered is command this If displayed be will message following the equipped properly not is addresses s s e r d d A d e g n a h c n u g n i n o i s i v o r p y l r e p o r p d e...

Page 1106: ...i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 c e e t a t s t e s d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e s s e r d d A x e t a t S y r a m i r P x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv ec1 rtrv state rtrv state eqpt rtrv state vt1 set state vt1 11 436 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1107: ...imaryState values nmon alarm report not Do monitored not to state line the Set line and Section line the for conditions status or stopped be will collection data monitoring performance if in service to state line the change not Do state this in this in remain will line The detected is signal good a this with again changed is state the until state command NOTE data the NMON to set is state line the...

Page 1108: ...is addresses displayed d e s s e c o r p t o n s e n i l 1 C O g n i w o l l o F s U I L O e p y t 7 2 h t i w d e p p i u q e t o n e r a y e h T s s e r d d a s s e r d d a these of more or one and addresses several with entered is command this If following the OLIUs 26G2 U or 27 type a with equipped not is addresses displayed be will message d e s s e c o r p t o n s e n i l 1 C O g n i w o l l...

Page 1109: ...g the entry command after displayed be will message confirmation s e n i L s s e r d d A e t a t s s i h t n i d e m r a l a r o d e r o t i n o m e b t o n l l i w t a c i n u m m o c C C D e h t e l b a s i d y l l a c i t a m o t u a l l i w d n a m m o c s i h T n o i r o f s s e r d d A c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s d l o h s e r h t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o a...

Page 1110: ... Set line and Section line the for conditions status or stopped be will collection data monitoring performance if in service to state line the change not Do state this in this in remain will line The detected is signal good a this with again changed is state the until state in reported and monitored still is status DCC command the DCC disable To state this set fecom command used is is the at signa...

Page 1111: ... t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 c o e t a t s t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m s s e r d d A x e t a t S y r a m i r P x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv state eqpt rtrv state oc3 upd set fecom OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 441 ...

Page 1112: ...C 3 OC 1 within channels STS 1 unit Main in OLIUs 29G U or 24G U with equipped is shelf or ELAN DS3 to cross connected are that interfaces slots interfaces DS1 ring OC 1 an from dropped are that channels STS 1 interface DS1 or EC 1 ELAN OC 3 an to interface or OC 1 OC 3 an from dropped are that channels STS 1 unit Main the in 29 type or 24 type interface ring OC 12 interface DS3 or DS1 ELAN EC 1 O...

Page 1113: ... or auto command this using state the in put also are channel STS 1 specified the within channels VT1 5 the nmon or auto which for channels VT1 5 to only applies This state cross are that channels VT1 5 example for defined are states channel ring a from dropped or interfaces DS1 to connected of state primary a If nmon displayed be will message following the entered is s l e n n a h C s s e r d d a...

Page 1114: ...t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E OLIU incompatible of mix a when command this execute to made is attempt an If message following the with denied be will request the Main in exists packs S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S k c a p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s NOTE of address STS 1 an If all silently skip wil...

Page 1115: ...SET STATE STS1 4 of 4 Page SET STATE STS1 COMMANDS RELATED ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv state sts1 set state vt1 upd OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 445 ...

Page 1116: ...1 the identifies Address Addresses Valid a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all all two supports 15 0 Release OC 3 pack circuit BBF6 T1EXT The 1 numbers port only BBF6 a on ports addressing When ports T1 Specifying valid are 2 and all only 2 and 1 ports selects ps following the of one have may which state port the is PrimaryState values auto the at signal good for monitored be to state Set port specified nmon moni...

Page 1117: ... l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 t e t a t s t e s d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r s s e r d d A x e t a t S y r a m i r P x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E NOTE of address STS 1 an If all ly silent skip will command this provisioned is cross are that channels STS 1 those within VTs or channels STS 1 all cross not even or ...

Page 1118: ...sses Port DS3 Valid a b c 1 2 all all ps following the of one have may which state port the is PrimaryState values auto the at signal good for monitored be to state Set port specified nmon not alarmed to state memory Set NOTE the in is port a If nmon the to returned be must it state auto using state be can port that with associated packs circuit any before command this the by list equipment the fr...

Page 1119: ...h s e r h t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 t e t a t s t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e s s e r d d A x e t a t S y r a m i r P x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv state eqpt rtrv t3 upd OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 449 ...

Page 1120: ...g OC 1 or OC 12 OC 3 an from dropped are that channels interface EC 1 are parameters input The Address both for addresses Valid channel s VT1 5 the identifies Address are ring and linear m a b c all m c 1 3 all a b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all m c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all are EC 1 within addresses Valid a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all are OLIU 27 type OC 1 within addresses Valid m 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all m 1 2 all m ...

Page 1121: ... the until state this in remain will channel The detected the until or command this with again changed is state deleted is channel this involving cross connection of state primary a If nmon displayed be will message following the entered is s l e n n a h C s s e r d d a r o d e r o t i n o m e b t o n l l i w e t a t s s i h t n i d e m r a l a entry command the after displayed be will message con...

Page 1122: ...p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s NOTE of address STS 1 an If all silently skip will command this provisioned is cross are that channels STS 1 those within VTs or channels STS 1 all cross not even or terminated not dropped passthrough as connected all at connected COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs vt1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv state vt1 set st...

Page 1123: ...nd later function degrade signal provisionable Threshold Alarm Fail Signal are values Possible channels ring for provisioned only is parameter This 10 3 10 and 6 10 of value default a with 3 Condition AIS Path STS SA NSA for Level Alarm be can condition AIS path SA affecting service a for level alarm The a for level alarm The channels non ring and ring both for provisioned for provisioned be only ...

Page 1124: ...ing Path_Switched VT path VT a causing subsequently and insertion AIS VT a in resulting ring Path Switched STS an in Furthermore switching protection path STS and alarm an causes threshold this exceeding or meeting only The place take will insertion AIS no but switching protection is parameter SignalFailure the for address valid all parameter This values following the of one have can 3 VT a in ins...

Page 1125: ... r a p l i a f r e t n e r e t e m a r a p e d a r g e d l a n g i s e h t t e s o T 1 s t s t e s l l a r g d e u l a v VT one least at or STS 1 an either that requires parameters AIS the provision To not will command the or range address specified the in exist cross connection displayed be will message following the and execute S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e t c e n n o c ...

Page 1126: ...q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E after displayed be will message confirmation following the releases linear In entry command c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s d l o h s e r h t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o r e t e m a r a p s i h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 s t s t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y e u l a v S I A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S t i ...

Page 1127: ... the is provisioning Synchronization its in packs circuit OLIU 29G U or 24G U OC 12 or OC 3 with equipped slots unit Main 2 NOTE is slots main in packs circuit OLIU 27 type on 1 line OC 1 from timing Line supported modes timing these of one to provisioned be can DDM 2000 Each oscillator internal an from running Free is reference timing This interface optical incoming an from Line timed the protect...

Page 1128: ...ers reference synchronization specific rings or linear is application the whether TIMED LINE SYSTEMS RING set sync mdsw ModeSwitching src SynchronizationSource omd OutputMode auto SyncAutoreconfiguration type pack BBF2B set sync mdsw ModeSwitching src SynchronizationSource omd OutputMode aisthres AISThreshold auto SyncAutoreconfiguration ONLY type pack BBF2B later and R13 0 OC 3 in pack BBF4 and l...

Page 1129: ...r provisioned hardware SynchronizationSource optical the select to used also is parameter output DS1 for line are parameters input The mdsw values following the of one have may ModeSwitching revertive value default switching mode Revertive to due mode timing holdover to switches system the If automatically will it references timing the of failure a mode timing provisioned the to back switch Extern...

Page 1130: ...ck circuit BBF4 and BBF2B the to applicable is It AISThreshold message synchronization incoming the sets parameter This types is signal AIS which of receiving upon reference active the of level quality circuit TG3 BBF4 or TGS BBF2B the of output DS1 the on transmitted than greater or at is number level quality incoming the as long As packs in listed is parameter This transmitted be will AIS level ...

Page 1131: ...tion mode timing FreeRunning for set are switches provisioning hardware If message following the with denied be will command this of execution S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S g n i n n u r e e r f r o f d e n o i s i v o r p m e t s y S the by set as active are messages sync When set oc3 and or set oc12 source LineTime a to source timing the set to requests user a and command be ...

Page 1132: ...l a V n i t o N s u t a t S reason message d e l b a n e e b t o n n a c n o i t a r u g i f n o c e r o t u A c n y S following the include reasons message Valid disabled messages byte K disabled messages Sync timed line not Shelf lock to set mode output Sync packs circuit BBF2 type with equipped are slots TGS the if application ring a In on enabled is autoreconfiguration or source timing the as ...

Page 1133: ... I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s message confirmation following the available is SyncAutoreconfiguration When entry command after displayed be will k r o w t e n y f i d o m y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C e c i v r e s t c e f f a d n a n o i t a z i n o r h c n y s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a ...

Page 1134: ...SET SYNC 8 of 8 Page SET SYNC COMMANDS RELATED rtrv sync set oc3 set oc12 switch sync 11 464 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1135: ...Release OC 3 In TMUX the with associated signals DS1 internal the for parameters Format packs circuit BBG20 this packs circuit LAN IMA the using when 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting is Format PM Format PM and Mode PM Levels Alarm the sets command to set always esf NOTE the all with provisioned automatically is pack circuit protection DS1 The the for except protects it pack service the as options u...

Page 1136: ...ack circuit the on LED fault the and illuminated be will panel user circuit LAN IMA the to apply not does LEDs of flashing flash will report status and alarm the in reported be will condition The packs activity near end a as fth logarithm a of terms in threshold failure the sets FailureThreshold to corresponding 3 or 6 7 8 be may value The 10 base the to 10 of BERs 8 10 7 10 6 10 and 3 value defau...

Page 1137: ...pplicable not is parameter This packs circuit LAN pmmd DS1 the by supported ports for mode the sets parameter This pack circuit performance monitoring Pmmd for used only is the affect not does parameter this Setting performance monitoring this later and 13 0 Release OC 3 In signal received or transmitted pack circuit BBG20 TMUX the to applicable be also will parameter DSX from incoming the within ...

Page 1138: ... user the packs circuit LAN IMA the using When parameter this for prompted esf format PM valid only the is provisioned automatically is it and packs these for values following the of one be may parameter This sf Superframe esf default far end and near end superframe Extended packs circuit LAN IMA the using When esf only the is entered be can that Format PM valid esfn only near end superframe Exten...

Page 1139: ...ar Al x it qu to e et EL D el Nc CA or n y e ut ec Ex entry command the after displayed be will message confirmation following The a addressing if or capability performance monitoring with packs addressing when using packs of group all address the in e ic rv se ct fe af y ma d an mm co is th of n io ut ec Ex n io ut Ca rs te me ra pa e es th th wi d an mm co t1 t se e th ed ct le se ve ha u Yo s e...

Page 1140: ...ressing when e ic rv se ct fe af y ma d an mm co is th of n io ut ec Ex n io ut Ca rs te me ra pa e es th th wi d an mm co t1 t se e th ed ct le se ve ha u Yo s es dr Ad x el ev mL ar Al x de Mo PM x it qu to e et EL D el Nc CA or n y e ut ec Ex slc COMMANDS RELATED rtrv t1 set state t1 11 470 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1141: ... the in slot each for ports independent have packs circuit DS3 function the for provisioned parameters howerever group function ports both to applied are group Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c all md signal DS3 the of mode removal monitor violation the is Mode pack circuit TMUX BBG20 the to applicable not is parameter This have may parameter This releases later and 13 0 Release OC 3 values following...

Page 1142: ...value vmr or vm to set is it and cc AIS the to defaults always off value alm Failure Signal DS3 incoming an for level alarm the sets AlarmLevel following the of one be may and cr Alarm Critical mj Alarm Major mn Alarm Minor na Alarm No for provisioned is system the If critical is level alarm default The LED ACTY NE the condition loss of signal a is there and alarm no the on LED fault the and illum...

Page 1143: ...ns parity c bit or p bit on based is pack circuit TMUX the 10 of threshold failure 4 This alarm fail signal BER a cause will values following the of one be may parameter on value default the is This on turned PM DS3 off nor collected neither is data PM off turned PM DS3 mode this in reported frame the on PM performance monitoring for used only is Frame Setting packs circuit BBG19 or BBG11 BBG11B B...

Page 1144: ... SES ES for ONLY valid is option This data cbit of type frame xbit pack circuit TMUX BBG20 the to applicable only is parameter This if only prompted be will It later and 13 0 Release OC 3 m13 has for selected been frame the in X bits both of value the sets It a have may parameter This DSX towards signal DS3 outgoing zero or default one of value for entry command after displayed be will message con...

Page 1145: ...d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 t t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s s e r d d A x e d o M x l a n g i S n o i t a c i d n I m r a l A x l e v e L m r a l A x d l o h s e r h T e r u l i a F x e d o M M P x e m a r F x t a m r o F x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E NOTE if AIS signal i...

Page 1146: ... s e v a h u o Y s s e r d d A x l e v e L m r a l A x l e v e L m r a l A S I A x d l o h s e r h T e r u l i a F x e d o M M P x e m a r F x t a m r o F x t i b X x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E the if later and 13 0 Release OC 3 In cbit and frame xbit both have options following the provisioning mode expert during example for selected been displayed be will message d...

Page 1147: ...a l A x l e v e L m r a l A S I A x d l o h s e r h T e r u l i a F x e d o M M P x e m a r F x t a m r o F x t i b X x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E printed be will message caution following the specified are addresses multiple If message request confirmation the before immediately out n i h t i w s t c e j b o e l p i t l u m s e s s e r d d a d n a m m o c s i h T n ...

Page 1148: ...phen pipe bracket square close bracket square open bracket close bracket open accent grave apostrophe slash period than greater than less NOTE circuit BBG4B a to terminating paths STS to applicable only is feature This pack are parameters input The Address terminating path SONET the of address channel STS 1 a is This assigned is trace path the which for signal OC 3 within Addresses Valid m c 1 3 a...

Page 1149: ...e not is issued was command this which for channel STS 1 the If message following the with denied be will request S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S l e n n a h c t n e t s i x e n o n a o t s t n i o p s s e r d d A one the than other path STS an for trace path the set to made is attempt an If the with denied be will request the pack circuit BBG4B DS3 a to terminated message follow...

Page 1150: ...t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s be to request confirmation following the cause will command this input When displayed e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c c r t h t p t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m a r a p s s e r d d A s s e r d d a C R T P X E e g a s s e m C R T e g a s s e m t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELAT...

Page 1151: ...n ring and ring both for provisioned ring for provisioned be only can condition AIS path affecting non service releases are parameters input The Address channels VT1 5 the identifies Address Addresses Linear and Ring Valid all m 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all c 1 3 all 1 7 all 1 4 all a b 1 2 all 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses EC 1 Valid all a b c 1 7 all 1 4 all Addresses OLIU 27 type Valid all m a b c 1 2 a...

Page 1152: ...larm Minor na reported but alarmed Not nr only channels non ring reported not and alarmed not value any is used address the and entered is parameter degrade signal the If than other all message following the with denied be will command the s i r e t e m a r a p e d a r g e d l a n g i s e h t r o f s s e r d d a d i l a v y l n o e h T l l a r e t n e r e t e m a r a p e d a r g e d l a n g i s e ...

Page 1153: ... e f f A e c i v r e S e u l a v S I A g n i t c e f f A e c i v r e S n o N t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E after displayed be will message confirmation following the releases linear In entry command c s i h t y b d e t c e f f a e r a s d l o h s e r h t t n i a m r o m r a l A n o i t u a C d n a m m o s r e t e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 t v t e s e h...

Page 1154: ...t o N s u t a t S k c a p U I L O e l b i t a p m o c h t i w d e p p i u q e e b t s u m s t o l s n i a m h t o B s NOTE of address STS 1 an If all silently skip will command this provisioned is cross are that channels STS 1 those within VTs or channels STS 1 all cross not even or terminated not drop passthrough as connected all at connected COMMANDS RELATED rtrv vt1 11 484 2000 February 2 Issue...

Page 1155: ...shed all addition In dropped automatically be reestablished be to need will link X 25 at are activities network when time installation at used be should command This disabled be can link X 25 the when or level minimum their 1 NOTE enabled is security if only users privileged to available is command This 2 NOTE the in elements network all at executed be may command this While GNE the at active be o...

Page 1156: ...f f a s i n o i t a c i n u m m o c e v i t c a l l a t e s e r e b o t k n i l 5 2 x E N G e h t s e s u a c d n a m m o c s i h t d e r a e l c e b o t s C V S l l a d n a d e p p o r d e b o t s n i g o l 1 L T r e t e m a r a p s i h t h t i w d n a m m o c 5 2 x t e s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y T K P 6 5 2 8 2 1 t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELAT...

Page 1157: ...DS3 or TMUX pack are command this for parameters input The Address pair slot unit function the of Address Addresses Valid fn a b c pri and request switching protection the of priority the indicates Priority values following the has reset requests switch external active Clear inhibit or manual automatic switches further Prevent reset is switch the until forced forced or good is it whether slot stan...

Page 1158: ...h t i w d n a m m o c n f h c t i w s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r s s e r d d A x y t i r o i r P i r p t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E priority with executed is command this If inhibit or forced automatic then with again executed is command this until disabled be will switching protection priority reset COMMANDS RELATED rtrv state switch line 11 488 2000 Febr...

Page 1159: ...equest switching protection the of priority the indicates Priority values following the has reset requests switch external existing Removes inhibit so mechanism switching protection the Freezes selected remains line active current the that failures subsequent the of regardless lockout the If line protection the of selection Prevents end near the at selected currently is line protection the to swit...

Page 1160: ... u q E displayed is message confirmation following the entry On l a n o i t c e r i d i n u s i t s e u q e r g n i h c t i w s n o i t c e t o r p e n i l e h T d n e r a f e h t t a e n i l h c t i w s a m r o f r e p o t y r a s s e c e n e b y a m t I e n i l e m a s e h t o t e v i e c e r d n a t i m s n a r t h t o b h c t i w s o t e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o ...

Page 1161: ...ervice Low Speed Valid reset and lockout ls a b c 1 7 all for Addresses Slot Protection Low Speed Valid reset and lockout ls a b c 8 only slot Protection pri and request switching protection the of priority the indicates Priority values following the has reset requests switch external active Clear lockout forced or manual the on traffic any return and slot service the to slot protection lockout th...

Page 1162: ...t single lockout forced a or pack circuit 15 0 Release OC 3 request switch manual a preempt will request reset or a to condition switching protection the changes request switch protection the If switching protection pre existing the of priority the to equal or lower condition denial following the with denied be will command this of execution condition message P S P S y t i r o i r P h c t i w S n ...

Page 1163: ... u p n I t o l s n o i t c e t o r p r o f d e w o l l a t o n h c t i w s l a u n a M of priority a with used is address slot protection a If forced be will request the message denial following the with denied C N D I t n e t s i s n o C t o N a t a D t u p n I t o l s n o i t c e t o r p r o f d e w o l l a t o n h c t i w s d e c r o F circuit a holding currently slot a onto service place would...

Page 1164: ...n a m m o c s l h c t i w s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r s s e r d d A x y t i r o i r P x t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E priority with executed is command this If lockout or forced automatic then with again executed is command this until disabled be will switching protection priority reset COMMANDS RELATED rtrv state rtrv state eqpt 11 494 2000 February 2 Iss...

Page 1165: ...he on path other be cannot DS3 0x1 or ring 0x1 as provisioned Connections switched Addresses OC 3 Valid m 1 2 1 3 all OLIU OC 3 Addresses OC 1 Valid m 1 2 1 2 Main in OLIU 27 type a b c 1 2 1 2 FN in OLIU 27G2 U a b c 1 2 1 OLIU 26G2 U later and 13 0 Release Addresses OC 12 Valid m 1 2 1 12 all later and 15 0 Release Main in OLIU 29G U or 24G U pri request switch protection the of priority the ind...

Page 1166: ... with cross connected STS 3c an of part is that channel STS 1 an is command message following the with denied be will command the channel S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e t c e n n o c s s o r c y l r e p o r p t o n s i h t a p d e i f i c e p s e h T type of connection a with associated is path addressed the If pass through ring 0x1 DS3 0x1 locked dual message following the ...

Page 1167: ...tions these address sts1 s t s i x e h c t i w s y t i r o i r p r e h g i h r o l a u q e address sts1 t s i x e s l a n g i s d e t c e n n o c s s o r c t v If all cross not equipped not is path the and address the in appears or connection locked dual connection ring 0x1 pass through a is or connected skipped silently be will path the connection DS3 0x1 the receive will user the unidirectional ...

Page 1168: ... o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 s t s h t a p w s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e s s e r d d A y t i r o i r P t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 rtrv state eqpt e rtrv state path 11 498 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1169: ...all 1 4 all slots Main in OLIU OC 3 m 1 2 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all slots Main in OLIU 27 type a b c 1 2 1 2 1 7 all 1 4 all slots FN in OLIU 27G2 U a b c 1 2 1 1 7 all 1 4 all later and 13 0 Release slots FN in OLIU 26G2 U m 1 2 1 12 all 1 7 all 1 4 all later and 15 0 Release slots Main in OLIU 29 type or 24 type as provisioned Connections ring 0x1 or locked be cannot switched NOTE a to dropped simulta...

Page 1170: ... message following the with denied be will command S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e h c t i w s e b t o n n a c h t a p d e i f i c e p s e h T NOTE OC N the to receiver OC N the from directly passes path pass through A node this at dropped not is path this with carried service The transmitter the path locked a or ring 0x1 a is command the in specified address path the If mess...

Page 1171: ...s e r d d a t v s t s i x e l a n g i s d e t c e n n o c s s o r c s t s the receive will user the unidirectional is switching path DDM 2000 Since request confirmation and message notification following l a n o i t c e r i d i n u s i t s e u q e r g n i h c t i w s n o i t c e t o r p h t a p e h T n e r a f e h t t a 1 t v h t a p h c t i w s a m r o f r e p o t y r a s s e c e n e b y a m t I ...

Page 1172: ...ction Selects for provisioned is system the if External or DS1 LineTimed circuitpack packs circuit timing of switching protection Selects src and or line timing shelf which from line optical the Selects This derived be will output synchronization DS1 the This releases ring OC 3 with available is parameter is SyncAutoreconfiguration if applicable only is parameter the using enabled set sync The com...

Page 1173: ...r never will switch source synchonization manual a Thus source synchronization OLIU OC 1 an with slot a select when source synchronization valid a is OLIU 27 type a 9 1 Release with Starting source synchronization the as used is 1 line OC 1 FN C not but slot Main a in case a such in of equippage the to due completed be can switch source synchronization no If message following the with denied be wi...

Page 1174: ... t i w s e c r u o s r o f d e w o l l a t o n t e s e R or C N D I t n e t s i s n o C t o N a t a D t u p n I g n i h c t i w s e c r u o s r o f d e w o l l a t o n t i b i h n I of value SyncFunction the for issued is request switch the If src and the with denied be will command the enabled not is SyncAutoreconfiguration message following S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i t o N s u t a t S d e l...

Page 1175: ...mation following the command this entering After e c i v r e s t c e f f a y a m d n a m m o c s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C e m a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c c n y s h c t i w s e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t n o i t c n u F c n y S s y t i r o i r P i r p t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED rtrv state eqpt rtrv sync set ...

Page 1176: ...0 4 1 off off off ON 4 8 2 off off ON off 8 12 3 off 12 16 4 off off ON 16 20 5 off off off executing is test this while normally functions button ACO cutoff alarm The alarms office audible silences ACO Depressing are parameters Input md the takes It performed be to test alarm office the identifies Mode values following all default alarms office all of test General cr alarm critical of test Specif...

Page 1177: ...due performed be cannot test the if output be will message denial following The system the in activity other to Y N E D m l a t s e t B R S S y s u B e c r u o s e R m e t s y S s u t a t S OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 507 ...

Page 1178: ...with of value all Addresses Valid main 1 2 all all fn a b c all 1 2 all tg 1 2 all ls a b c all 1 8 all userpanel auxctl sysctl r be should test the that times of number the specifies Repeat range the with integer an is It repeated 1 through 10 a and of value default 1 or CANcel the pressing by aborted be can command This progress in is command the while key DELete following the progress in is tes...

Page 1179: ...ler test transmission test trmsn t1 or test trmsn t3 the progress in is displayed be will message denial following B R S S y s u B s e c r u o s e R m e t s y S s u t a t S displayed be will messages following the of one test the of end the At displayed be will message following the passes test the If D L P M O C l t c s y s t s e t t r o p e R t s e T c i t s o n g a i D r e l l o r t n o C D E S...

Page 1180: ... l l o r t n o C T E N O S D E S S A P t s e T be may messages following the of one fails test the If circuit controller both or one that indicating displayed failed have packs D L P M O C l t c s y s t s e t t r o p e R t s e T c i t s o n g a i D r e l l o r t n o C D E L I A F P C L T C S Y S D L P M O C l t c s y s t s e t t r o p e R t s e T c i t s o n g a i D r e l l o r t n o C D E L I A F...

Page 1181: ... 2000 be may messages following the of one fails test the if and Subsystem failed have packs circuit controller both or one that indicating displayed D L P M O C l t c s y s t s e t t r o p e R t s e T c i t s o n g a i D r e l l o r t n o C T E N O S D E L I A F P C L T C S Y S D L P M O C l t c s y s t s e t t r o p e R t s e T c i t s o n g a i D r e l l o r t n o C T E N O S D E L I A F P C L ...

Page 1182: ...D r e l l o r t n o C T E N O S D E L I A F P C L T C S Y S D E L I A F P C L T C H O the on LED Fault the message failure a to addition In user the on LED alarm Major the and pack s circuit failed be will alarm office MJ the and illuminated be will panel activated 11 512 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1183: ...ltiple time each tested is channel one Only be must signal the executed is command this Before simultaneously loopback a of presence the for checks DDM 2000 back looped appropriately warning a return will system the exists loopback no If test the beginning before test the peforming before message maintenance for and equipment new of installation for used is command This are parameters input The Ad...

Page 1184: ...n alarm switches DCC inconsistent the disable may user the alarm this avoid To testing loopback the during test this performing to prior DCC Multiplexing Direction Loopback can be Multiplexing Direction Demultiplexing Direction Fiber Loopback Demultiplexing Direction Internal Loopback FAR END External Loopback OLIU fiber loopback internal loopback Test Signal OLIU Internal Monitor NEAR END DSX T1 ...

Page 1185: ...l test signal Multiplexing Direction Loopback can be Demultiplexing Direction fiber loopback internal loopback Monitor External Loopback External Loopback DSX T1 DSX T1 DSX or T1 Carrier DSX or T1 Carrier DSX or T1 Carrier external loopback Direction DEMUX in Signal DS1 of Test Transmission Automated 11 14 Figure OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 515 ...

Page 1186: ...psed seconds in test the of time Elapsed Seconds Errored seconds errored of number Total the in character rightmost the as mark question A Seconds Errored indicates test the during switch protection a of because data uncertain displayed is message following the test during detected is failure equipment an If d e t r o b A t s e T d e l i a f e r a w d r a H loopback a If test the of beginning the ...

Page 1187: ...a i r p o r p p a f i n o i t u c e x e t s e t o t r o i r p e c i v r e s t p u r r e t n i y a m t s e t s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 1 t n s m r t t s e t e h t d e t c e l e s e v a h u o Y s r e t e m s s e r d d A x n o i t c e r i D n r i d n o i t a r u D r u d t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E T1EXT the using ...

Page 1188: ...re simultaneously back looped appropriately In maintenance for and equipment new of installation for used is command This back looped appropriately be must signal the case either at established is loopback external an and direction MUX the in run is test the If mode CC channel clear for provisioned be must end far the then end far the loopback external an If path transmission entire the test to or...

Page 1189: ...face fiber proper the on return to are parameters input The Address port DS3 the of Address TMUX BBG20 BBG4B BBG4 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c BBG19 Addresses Port DS3 Valid a b c 1 2 dirn following the has parameter This test transmission the of Direction values mux the and direction MUX the in inserted is signal test The default direction MUX the from monitored is signal received to applicable...

Page 1190: ...LIU fiber loopback internal loopback Test Signal OLIU Internal Monitor NEAR END DSX T1 DSX DSX or T1 carrier external loopback Direction MUX in Signal DS3 of Test Transmission Automated 11 15 Figure DSX NEAR END Loop DSX Multiplexing Direction Test Signal Internal Demultiplexing Direction Monitor Direction DEMUX in Signal DS3 of Test Transmission Automated 11 16 Figure 11 520 2000 February 2 Issue...

Page 1191: ...ignal TMUX of Test Transmission Automated 11 17 Figure report output following the displays command This t r o p e R t s e T n o i s s i m s n a r T 3 S D t r o P 3 S D r d d a n o i t c e r i D n r i d n o i t a r u D r u d s e t u n i m d e r o r r E d e s p a l E s d n o c e S c e s e m i T n n e m a r F f O t u O OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 521 ...

Page 1192: ...ondition out of frame an if report the in appears Frame Of Out message The test the during displayed is message following the test the during detected is failure equipment an If d e t r o b A t s e T d e l i a F e r a w d r a H a If test the of beginning the at loopback a of presence the for checks system The and before appears message following the and continues test the exist not does loopback r...

Page 1193: ...e r i d s i h T displayed is message confirmation following the entered is command this When c i n o r t c e l e r o l a u n a m s k c a b p o o l e t a i r p o r p p a h s i l b a t s E e t a i r p o r p p a f i n o i t u c e x e t s e t o t r o i r p e c i v r e s t p u r r e t n i y a m t s e t s i h t f o n o i t u c e x E n o i t u a C a r a p e s e h t h t i w d n a m m o c 3 t n s m r t t s...

Page 1194: ...prompt parameter a to response a as entered If prompt system the at displayed be will message entered When message completion typical a display not does command This This time and date the by followed displayed is to switched NE the for TID the system that from prompt a by followed is line performed be cannot toggle the if output be will message denial following The S V N S e t a t S d i l a V n i...

Page 1195: ... Ctl T TOGGLE 2 of 2 Page Ctl T TOGGLE COMMANDS RELATED logout rlgn OC 3 DDM 2000 2000 February 2 Issue 11 525 ...

Page 1196: ...l the that note should user The system a for button Update Initialize the pressing after flash to continue will Do reset not after flashing stop will light LED The command this reenter seconds 10 and supported be will pack circuit LAN IMA the 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting shelf OC 3 the of slots Speed Low the in allowed to goes port LAN the pack circuit LAN IMA the of insertion Upon auto VT a If...

Page 1197: ...witch following activated be 21G 15 0 Release OC 3 T1EXT BBF6 or STS1E BBG6 DS1PM BBF3 new the enters command This packs circuit TGS BBF2 BBF2B or OLIU CP unexpected an cause will update to Failure system the into settings settings switch new the since alarm type CP unexpected or switches system the in recorded already settings switch the with agree not do new the make and alarm this clear will fu...

Page 1198: ...eplaced and removed is pack circuit type old the pairs new for alarm the clear will function update the Activating pack circuit active settings pack circuit new the make and type pack the force will OC 3 IS 3 an to STS1E 1x1 a from Upgrading Note 1 1 to application RESTRICTIONS ALARM the issuing or button UPD the Pressing update will command not change the correct to have will user The exist alarm...

Page 1199: ...ircuit the then removed updated exists cross connection Manual an when system the into entered is cross connection manual A various support to and desired is default the than other arrangement applications Action Corrective removal pack circuit a recognize not will system The deleted is pack circuit addressed the to cross connection manual the until the See dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1 rtrv crs vt1 an...

Page 1200: ...g timing line support not does OLIU 27 type available is OLIUs 27 type from line timing removed Source Timing the and LineTimed be to provisioned is source timing sync the When change not will state slot the timing for selected is pack circuit addressed to auto Action Corrective timing the supports that pack circuit OLIU an Insert source timing the change or selected Selected Autoreconfiguration S...

Page 1201: ... e x E n o i t u a C n o t s e u q e r h c t i w s n o i t c e t o r p e v i t c a n a f o e s u a c e b e c i v r e s d n a t s i l t n e m p i u q e e h t s e t a d p u o s l a t I t o l s y t p m e n a s t o l s y t p m e h t i w d e t a i c o s s a s r e t e m a r a p L L A s e z i l a i t i n i t i u q o t e t e L E D l e c N A C r o n y e t u c e x E COMMANDS RELATED dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1...

Page 1202: ... explanations with commands an includes command Each FORMAT INPUT the for syntax the providing part a and command DESCRIPTION command the of details the providing part the Following parameters output and input DESCRIPTION listing table a is part each of description a and command each with associated messages output the message 11 532 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1203: ...ress source the includes report The element network service is condition the not or whether alarm the of time and date the as condition the of description short a and affecting is parameter input The alm have may parameter This desired is report a which for AlarmLevel values following the of one all cr mj mn pmn other newer level severity a Within severity least to greatest from listed are Alarms ...

Page 1204: ...or alarm the is level Alarm panel user no is there if status named is condition status A the is condition alarm An condition that for illuminated LED is that panel user the on LED topmost the of name conditions following the of one be may and illuminated CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR MINOR PWR LED status abnormal LED status ne acty LED status fe acty LED no status Address Source event An event the of addre...

Page 1205: ...ules same The slots Speed Low other in the 7 and 4 addresses Speed Low using When combinations Address allowed the are following 4 and ls a b c 3 allowed is 7 and ls a b c 6 allowed is addresses source other for 11 1 Table to Refer Detected Date event the of DD day and MM Month Detected Time occurrence event of Seconds Minute Hours Time Srv or affecting service is condition the whether indicates S...

Page 1206: ...ee suppressed being are system opr aco command failure communication AGNE with communication establish cannot element network A the or AGNE element network gateway alarm the network a with communication establish cannot AGNE the Use group alarm same the in element rtrv map network both if determine to command OC 3 In group alarm same the in are elements network AGNE releases TARP later and 13 0 9 ...

Page 1207: ...h equipped the application this In unit function a in packs circuit between information status transmit to required is BBF5 packs circuit BBG21 standby and working the LS 8 in required BBF5 earlier or 3 group a from missing is pack circuit BBF5 A function a in packs circuit OLIU 27 type two with shelf DCC proper allow to required is BBF5 The unit the with OLIUs 27 type associated the of operation ...

Page 1208: ...ection message this cause will slots LS across or 7 8 slot the equipping shelf 4 Group a in T1EXT for Also will packs BBG2 with Units Function corresponding message this cause allowed timing not CP pack circuit current the slot TG a with associated When timing synchronization the support not do settings switch pack circuit the change should user The provisioned synchronization settable the change ...

Page 1209: ...1 and rls lpbk t1 commands IP test trmsn DS1 signal test internal the using test transmission A T1 specified the on progress in is monitor and generator the See port test trmsn t1 command failed CP DS1PM CP DS1PM specified the of failure equipment Internal failed CP DS3 _ CP DS3 specified the of failure equipment Internal loopback DS3 fiber optical the toward loopback A T port T3 specified the on ...

Page 1210: ...fiber optical the toward loopback A the See port EC1 specified opr lpbk ec1 and rls lpbk ec1 information more for commands Fiber to loopback EC1 the on active is fiber optical the toward loopback A the See port EC1 specified opr lpbk ec1 and rls lpbk ec1 information more for commands DSX to loopback EC1 specified the on active is DSX the toward loopback A the See port EC1 opr lpbk ec1 and rls lpbk...

Page 1211: ...elf power the to failed has cabinet terminal remote a in fan cooling the and alarm the in appears that message actual The is this provisioned be can condition this for report status the See message default the rtrv attr env and set attr env commands failed relay control fan the that indicates SYSCTL the on thermostat The control fan the and on turned be should fan cooling fan the or operate to fai...

Page 1212: ...ic an and line The done be not will line receiving active the this make protection the until effect in remain will switch forced is request switch inhibit or lockout a or reset is switch one unidirectional is switching that Note received be still might line specified the this of Because way to line specified the selecting is end far the if active to free be still might end far the and traffic rece...

Page 1213: ...4 circuit OLIU or line optical the and operation an indicating message a or failed has pack on received been has problem clock upstream See line optical the of bits message sync the the rtrv sync command message sync for provisioned is system The 5 which from system upstream the but signaling sync for provisioned been not has line times it be can condition The signaling message the systems both pr...

Page 1214: ...signal DS1 incoming equipment DS1 upstream of failure Hard cause Likely LOF DS1 A equipment DS1 local the of failure a or DS1 a although failure facility a from result also could an is there if reported normally is condition AIS DS1 the affecting failure facility upstream AIS DS1 fiber from inc has system The only CP LAN IMA the to Applicable from incoming signal indication alarm DS1 a detected tr...

Page 1215: ...Failure causes Likely the of failure or reference timing DS1 the provides supply timing the to connection OOL ref sync DS1 inc is signal reference synchronization DS1 incoming The providing clock the of frequency The OOL lock of out specification of out is signal reference DS1 the that supply timing office the of Failure causes Likely reference timing DS1 the provides AIS DS3 fiber from inc signal...

Page 1216: ...licable to incoming signal DS3 out of frame An cause Likely end far the at DSX 3 the fail sig DS3 DSX from inc signal DS3 incoming the in BER ratio error bit The 10 threshold failure provisioned the exceeds 3 10 or 6 or equipment upstream the of Failure causes Likely wiring office in talk cross DSX 3 the towards facility CP DS3 of failure unprotected FERF EC1 inc receive far end EC 1 the detected ...

Page 1217: ... in talk cross cable incoming the of failure end near the the from signal incoming the of failure or wiring office STSX 1 BER fail sig EC1 inc signal EC 1 received the in BER ratio error bit The 10 of threshold fixed the exceeds 3 end near the at CP STS1E the of Failure causes Likely wiring office in talk cross cable incoming the of failure STSX 1 the from signal incoming the of failure or FERF OC...

Page 1218: ...rror hard the below is but 3 end near the at CP OLIU the of Failure causes Likely the of failure end far the at CP OLIU the of failure it when used being is attenuator optical or fiber receive be should it when used being not is or be not should BER failed sig OC12 inc signal OC 12 received the in BER ratio error bit The 10 exceeds 3 end near the at CP OLIU the of Failure causes Likely at CP OLIU ...

Page 1219: ...kely the lines OC 3 both this If end far the at CP DS3 or MXRVO a of failure cause likely the line OC 3 one on only occurs condition end far or end near the at CP OLIU the of failure is LOS OC3 inc condition LOS loss of signal detected has system The line OC 3 the on end near at CP OLIU the of Failure causes Likely receive the of failure or end far at CP OLIU the of failure fiber AIS line OC3 inc ...

Page 1220: ...rns framing STS 1 errored milliseconds end near the at CP OLIU the of Failure causes Likely the of failure or end far the at CP OLIU the of failure fiber receive LOS OC1 inc condition LOS loss of signal detected has system The line OC 1 the on end near at CP OLIU the of Failure causes Likely receive the of failure or end far at CP OLIU the of failure fiber AIS line OC1 inc indication alarm line OC...

Page 1221: ...be not could pointer STS 1 valid A condition signal STS 1 identified the in frames consecutive eight on STS 1 the on occurs condition this If causes Likely unprotected an is cause likely the lines OC 1 both If end far the at CP OLIU an or MXRVO an of failure likely the line OC 1 one only on occurs condition this far or end near the at CP OLIU the of failure is cause end OC12 LOP STS1 inc x LOP los...

Page 1222: ...t some at pack circuit unequipped STS1 inc SONET code unequipped the detected has system The in service an on byte 0 label code signal overhead path channel STS 1 has cross connect STS 1 upstream An cause Likely deleted been BER failed sig STS1 inc the of BER ratio error bit the applications ring For threshold fail signal the exceeds signal STS 1 specified 10 3 10 or 6 the rings path switched VT1 ...

Page 1223: ...XT DS1 a of failure Unprotected causes Likely a of failure unprotected end near the at CP LAN IMA the at CP BBG20 TMUX or LAN IMA or T1EXT DS1 the at CP MXRVO an of failure unprotected end far the at CP OC1 an of failure unprotected end far or near end far BER degrade sig VT inc a detected has system the ring switched path VT a In of threshold provisioned the exceeds that rate error VT 10 5 10 to ...

Page 1224: ...itch switch line command or slot timing slot unit function a with associated When identified the that means message this reference timing protection and active not is reference or equipment not will reference or equipment identified the to switches the See reset is switch protection the until done be switch fn and switch sync commands messages OS auto inhibit alarm autonomous TL1 when occurs messa...

Page 1225: ...IMA 11 1 Table fiber_lan from fail LAN inc the from disconnect cable indicates message This the If CP LAN IMA the of interface fiber 10 100BaseF LAN IMA the that indicates alarm this connected is cable from pulses test link valid receiving not is pack circuit following The equipment terminating LAN other LAN IMA If case this in AIDs for used are guidelines fails interface LAN the and ls a 2 and ls...

Page 1226: ...m failure IMA the of failure a from result may condition LIF pack circuit LAN IMA far end or local the in function address source a have may message This the to assigned ports DS1 more or one to corresponding be always should and a 1 1 e g CP LAN IMA alarm sonet from fail LAN inc an by accompanied the of failure a is cause likely most The Causes Likely or SONET Upstream pack circuit IMA far end or...

Page 1227: ...nding the on LOF DS1 AIS DS1 Misconnect failure remote a sending is and links IMA incoming message This signal trasmitted its on RFI indication or one to corresponding address source a have may a 1 e g CP LAN IMA the to assigned ports DS1 more 1 sonet from Err MAC inc circuit LAN IMA the that indicates message status This protocol layer MAC more or one discarded has pack message This side SONET th...

Page 1228: ... mutually achieve to change provisioning a need may parameters configuration acceptable NE Startup Fail Grp IMA inc IMA near end the that indicates message status This This state Startup Group IMA the in stuck is pack circuit if or failure pack circuit IMA near end a from result could the acknowledge not does pack circuit IMA far end the message This State Startup the to transition near ends a 1 e...

Page 1229: ...o selecting is it line the switch to free be still might end the until effect in remain will lockout The traffic receive switch protection a until or reset is switch protection the See entered is request inhibit switch line command this slot protection low speed a with associated When low entire the in slot service no that means message The protection to switch to allowed be will group speed is sw...

Page 1230: ... local a during failure hardware pack circuit OHCTL cause Likely failed CP OLIU CP OLIU specified the of failure equipment Internal NOTE alarm this if 11 0 Release OC 3 with Starting and exists OLIU 27G2 U a where Fn X on exists event is cross connect Add Drop Hairpin local one least at automatic an Fn Y and Fn X between established done is CPs packs circuit Main the on switch protection circuit a...

Page 1231: ...r fail boot standby SYSCTL pack circuit SYSCTL the of failure equipment Internal download software remote or local a during failure hardware pack circuit SYSCTL cause Likely compatible partially gen SYSCTL IMA IMA and SYSCTL the update by alarm clearable compatible partially are generic a as generics SW SYSCTL Rebooting cause Likely or command system downgrade upgrade of result in result will pres...

Page 1232: ...CP the on selected it slots OLIU For position prescribed the in not are CP OLIU the on switch power optical the that indicates was CP OLIU the before was it what from different was message this slots T1EXT or DS1 or DS3 For replaced was setting switch pack circuit a in change a that means message this slot TG a with associated When made means or TGS the on settings switch mode timing The 1 CP late...

Page 1233: ...dition status a as issued is message This 22 type a for provisioned slot main a in inserted is OLIU ring OC3 an of upgrade an during occur will This OLIU shelf OC3 an on interface ring OC12 an to interface 29 type a if condition status a as issued is message This 22 type a for provisioned slot main a in inserted is OLIU or OC3 an of upgrade an during occur will This OLIU an on interface ring OC12 ...

Page 1234: ... a l a S S M M H H D D M M are parameters output The Date event the of DD day and MM Month Time occurrence event of seconds minute hours Time made is entry the time the reflect stamps Time any BEFORE report history the to added are Entries applicable any AFTER and delays holdoff applicable delays clear Level Alarm System at level alarm system the to corresponds level Alarm Alarm occurred event the...

Page 1235: ...ecurity If interface at 11 1 Table and Commands to Refer name login a lines of addresses the for section this of beginning the interfaces operations and channels ports slots LAN IMA an when 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting the indicate will Source completed or started is apply the with equipped slot s Speed Low the of address Addresses Valid pack LAN IMA ls a b c 1 7 all NOTE two occupies pack LAN ...

Page 1236: ... the of any here listed messages the to addition In report status and alarm the in appear that messages of onset the record to report history the in appear can conditions status and alarm provisioning system the of state the affect that commands TL1 and CIT all Also alarm transmission loopbacks commands switching protection commands report the in appear will tests telemetry and NOTE the in appear ...

Page 1237: ...P APS the because done was switch protection automatic An failure pack circuit a detected system failure Fn APS Hairpin local one least at exists there that means This and Fn X between established cross connect Add Drop pack circuit OLIU 27G2 U a contains Fn X where Fn Y packs circuit Main the on switch protection automatic An circuit a detected system the because done was CPs which Fn X 1 2 in 27...

Page 1238: ... the clears done be to enabled is switching mode automatic if the See set sync and rtrv sync commands clrd LS 4 in required BBF5 low speed into inserted been has pack jumper BBF5 A 27G2 U of pair a has that group function a of 4 slot slots unit function corresponding the in installed OLIUs cross coupling transmission for required is BBF5 The earlier and 3 group in OLIUs 27G2 U the between the with...

Page 1239: ...MA the that of Address source the with show will message This pack LAN IMA affected each compl cancel apply lan indicates message this 15 0 Release OC 3 with Starting been has procedure apply software LAN IMA the that source the with show will message This canceled pack LAN IMA affected each of Address disconnect disconnected been has terminal interface craft The compl dlt ulsdcc TARP later and 13...

Page 1240: ...it inserted CP ELAN the in shelf the into inserted was pack circuit ELAN An slot specified messages OS auto enable enabled been has reporting message OS Autonomous command TL1 the with alw msg environmentn rlsd alarm environment discrete miscellaneous specified The an that indicating released been has point input cleared has condition status or alarm environmental Any terminal remote a in only app...

Page 1241: ...ped are slots unit Function the if applicable packs circuit DS3 clrd FERF EC1 inc end far EC 1 an detecting longer no is system The signal FERF failure signal receive good EC1 inc cleared been has signal EC 1 the of failure A clrd AIS DS3 DSX from inc alarm AIS DS3 detecting longer no is system The coming is that direction MUX the in signal indication TMUX the to applicable is This DSX 3 the from ...

Page 1242: ... LOP clrd degrade sig OC3 inc OC 3 cleared has signal OC 3 specified the of failure A be still may conditions FERF line OC 3 and or AIS line LOP OC 3 The line OC 3 specified the on present the of more or one for present be still may condition line OC 3 the in signals STS 1 clrd AIS line OC3 inc alarm OC 3 the detecting longer no is system The line OC 3 specified the on AIS signal indication clrd F...

Page 1243: ...d loss of pointer a detecting longer no is system The signal STS 1 specified the on condition LOP clrd degrade sig STS1 inc cleared has signal STS 1 specified the of failure A clrd failed sig STS1 inc cleared has signal STS 1 specified the of failure A clrd unequipped STS1 inc cleared has signal STS 1 specified the of failure A clrd yellow STS1 inc received being longer no is signal yellow STS 1 T...

Page 1244: ...ted is from pulses test link valid receiving not is pack circuit following The equipment ing terminat LAN other LAN IMA If case this in AIDs for used are guidelines fails interface LAN the and ls a 2 and ls a 1 in is pack address port first the ONLY and created is alarm this a 1 channels cross connected multiple if even used is the for addresses Port LAN pack the on exist already 11 1 Table in are...

Page 1245: ...e always should and 1 alarm sonet from fail the of failure a is cause likely most The Causes Likely or SONET Upstream pack rcuit ci IMA far end or local message this mask normally would failures facility DS1 upstream an of Failure alarm LOF or AIS DS1 a with this produce also could path the in switch ATM message clrd LOCD Link LAN inc condition LOCD delineation cell of loss incoming The cleared ha...

Page 1246: ...ould and a 1 1 e g alarm sonet from fail LAN inc clrd LODS Link IMA inc to LODS synchronization delay of loss incoming The cleared has pack circuit IMA the Misconnect Link IMA inc from failure link IMA an indicates message status This misconnect The CP LAN IMA the into side SONET the not does question in link the that indicates condition may message This ID Group IMA correct the have more or one t...

Page 1247: ...ayer MAC more of address source the has message This side SONET a 1 e g port LAN IMA an in operating is LAN BaseX 10 100 the If Causes Likely from result may message this mode half duplex is LAN the If network area local the on congestion may message this mode full duplex the in operating failure CP IMA far end or local a from result clrd sonet from Err MAC inc the from condition Error MAC LAN inc...

Page 1248: ...that indicates message status This This state Startup Group IMA the in stuck is pack circuit if or failure pack circuit IMA near end a from result could the acknowledge not does pack circuit IMA far end the message This State Startup the to transition near ends a 1 e g port LAN IMA an of address source the has FE Startup Fail Grp IMA inc IMA far end the that indicates message status This This stat...

Page 1249: ...entification login user s a with session login A port CIT specified the on started been login DENY login_id an of because denied but attempted was session login A in was system the or pair password and login invalid state Lockout logout login_id has identification login user s a with session login A port CIT specified the on ended logout DISCONNECT login_id has identification login user s a with s...

Page 1250: ...t NE reset reset been has program software system The rlgn DENY login_id denied but attempted was session login remote A the or pair password and login invalid an of because Lockout in was system remote the connecting DCC state good channel DCC section communications data section SONET the of failure The cleared has LAN IAO or channel service in channel STS1 This state in service the in put was ch...

Page 1251: ...ed backup using recovery and restart during occurred used was SYSCTL on data state channel The failed also copies states port sysctl occurred base data state port the of failure read A initialized failed also copies backup using recovery the and restart during used was SYSCTL on data state port The good CP T1EXT cleared has pack circuit specified the of failure The inserted CP T1EXT shelf the into...

Page 1252: ...11 582 2000 February 2 Issue OC 3 DDM 2000 ...

Page 1253: ... Overhead A 6 Line Overhead A 7 Path Overhead A 8 STS 1 Path Overhead A 8 VT Path Overhead A 9 SONET Multiplexing Procedure A 10 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A 12 SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes A 14 Asynchronous Multiplexing A 14 Synchronous Multiplexing A 15 Virtual Tributary Signals A 15 Concatenated Mode A 16 SONET Interface A 18 SONET Payloads A 19 Higher Rate Transport A 20 Conclusion A...

Page 1254: ...A ii Issue 3 June 2001 Table of Contents ...

Page 1255: ...stem standardization to T1X1 The proposal suggested a hierarchical family of signals whose rates would be integer multiples of a basic modular signal The proposal further suggested a synchronous multiplexing technique leading to the coining of the term Synchronous Optical NETwork SONET The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee CCITT first showed interest in 1986 Conferences ...

Page 1256: ...2 and DS3 into SONET payload signals ANSI T1 105 1991 Criteria for optical line automatic protection switch APS ANSI T1 105 1991 Overhead channels to support standard operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM P functions ANSI T1 105 1991 Technical Overview 1 0 SONET Signal Hierarchy 1 0 The SONET signal hierarchy is based on a basic building block frame called the synchronous trans...

Page 1257: ...the frame columns 4 through 90 is reserved for payload signals for example DS1 DS3 and path overhead and is referred to as the STS 1 synchronous payload envelope STS 1 SPE The optical counterpart of the STS 1 is the optical carrier level 1 signal OC 1 which is the result of a direct optical conversion The electrical counterpart of the STS 1 is the electrical carrier level 1 signal EC 1 Figure A 4 ...

Page 1258: ...t the transmission span between terminating equipment STS 1 cross connections that provides line performance monitoring If there are no intervening repeaters the line terminating equipment also functions as section terminating equipment STS 1 and VT Path and Path Terminating Equipment the transmission span for an end to end tributary DS1 or DS3 signal that provides functions including signal label...

Page 1259: ...als are demultiplexed VTN N 1 5 2 3 or 6 path overhead remains with the VTN until its asynchronous signal is extracted Figure A 6 SONET Frame Format Data Com D9 Data Com D6 H3 APS K2 D3 F3 Multiframe H4 User F2 Channel Signal Label C2 Data Com Path Status G1 J0 Data Com Orderwire E2 K3 Data Com Data Com D12 Data Com Pointer Orderwire User F1 Data Com N1 BIP 8 B3 Action STS 1 STS 1 ID D11 APS Frami...

Page 1260: ... section Section Bit Interleaved Parity BIP 8 B1 Provides SECTION performance monitoring and is calculated over all bits of the previous STS N frame Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Section Orderwire E1 Provides a local orderwire for voice communication channel between section terminating network elements such as repeaters Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Section User Channel...

Page 1261: ...ng APS K1 K2 Two bytes used for APS signaling between line level entities In addition bits 6 7 and 8 of K2 are used for line alarm indication signal AIS and line far end receive failure FERF Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Line Data Communications Channel D4 D12 Is a 576 kb s message based channel Synch Status S1 In STS 1 1 the S1 byte is for synchronization status messages and only bi...

Page 1262: ... byte is calculated over all bits of the previous STS 1 SPE before scrambling STS 1 Path Signal Labels C2 Indicates the construction of the STS 1 SPE A value of 00000000 indicates an unequipped STS 1 SPE Values for various payload mappings are defined in TR NWT 000253 Issue 2 STS 1 Path Status G1 Conveys the STS 1 path terminating status far end block errors FEBE and yellow alarm signal conditions...

Page 1263: ...e VT path overhead are specified in the following list and are illustrated in Figure A 7 Bits 1 and 2 are used for error performance monitoring BIP 2 Bit 3 is a VT path far end block error FEBE indication that is sent back toward an originating VT PTE when errors are detected by the BIP 2 Bit 4 and Bit 8 are used for remote defect indication RDI Bits 5 through 7 provide a VT signal label Figure A ...

Page 1264: ...r channel input since no framing is needed Each VT1 5 carries a single DS1 payload Four VT1 5s are bundled into a VT group VT G Seven VT Gs are byte interleaved into an STS 1 frame The VT G to STS 1 multiplex is a simple byte interleaving process so individual VT signals are easily observable within the STS 1 Thus cross connections and add drop can be accomplished without the back to back multiple...

Page 1265: ...er 1 2 3 4 1 VT1 5 to VTG Byte Interleaver DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 7 DS3 to STS 1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame Multiplexer into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame VTG to STS 1 Maps 7 VTGs DS3 to STS 1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame STS 1 3 STS 1 to OC 3 S...

Page 1266: ...the VT pointer accurately locate the DS1 SPE Finally desynchronization of the DS1 SPE provides a standard DS1 signal to the asynchronous network Figure A 9 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure VTG to VT1 5 Disinterleaver VTG to DS1 Demultiplexer 3 Time Slots Process VT Path OH DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS3 1 Nine Time Slots Nine Time Slots 7 VTG VTG VTG to DS1 Demultiplexer STS 1 3 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 Maps STS 1 SPE ...

Page 1267: ...een the clocks of the two systems that may occur if the systems are independently timed plesiochronous timing The SPE can also drift across the 125 µs frame boundary SONET STS pointers are used to locate the SPE relative to the transport overhead Figure A 10 STS 1 Synchronous Payload Envelope in Interior of STS 1 Frame 125 s STS 1 Synchronous Payload Envelope 125 s Pointer info Transport Overhead ...

Page 1268: ...nals into a DS3 The DS3 rate is not a direct multiple of the DS1 or the DS2 rates due to the bit stuffing synchronization technique used in asynchronous multiplexing Identification of DS0s contained in any DS N signal except DS1 is complex and DS0s cannot be directly extracted Thus an asynchronous DS3 signal must be demultiplexed down to the DS1 level to access and cross connect DS0 and DS1 signal...

Page 1269: ...signals DS1 DS1C DS2 and E1 are byte interleaved into a digital signal called a virtual tributary VT The VT is a structure designed for the transport and switching of sub DS3 payloads Like the STS 1 signal the VT signal has a floating pointer that allows each VT SPE to move within the VT structure There are four sizes of virtual tributaries VT1 5 VT2 VT3 VT6 Higher rate payloads are transported as...

Page 1270: ...el line signal The STS N signal is multiplexed switched and transported through the network as a single entity A concatenation indicator used to show that the STS 1s of the STS Nc signal are linked together is contained in the STS 1 payload pointer of all but the first STS 1 The line and section overhead is sent on the first STS 1 and the payload pointer for the first STS 1 is applied to all STS 1...

Page 1271: ...Concatenated Payload J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 H1 C C H2 C C H3 H3 H3 PayLoad Pointer Transport Overhead 3 x 87 Columns STS 3c Payload STS 3c POH STS 1 Time Path OverHead Byte PayLoad Byte Concatenation Byte Pointer Byte Stuff Byte C H1 H2 H3 125 s ...

Page 1272: ...are and software that processes one or more layers of the SONET signal Figure A 14 SONET Interface SONET Network Element Digital Tributaries SONET Interface Standard optical interconnect at SONET interface Family of standard rates at N X 51 84 Mb s Synchronous Transport Signal STS 1 Overhead channels defined for interoffice operations and maintenance functions SONET Network Element Digital Tributa...

Page 1273: ...her are also important Other payloads may be defined for specific applications Table A 33 SONET Payloads Input Tributary Equivalent Channels Rate SONET Signal Rate DS1 24 DS0s 1 544 Mb s VT1 5 1 728 Mb s E1 CEPT 32 DS0s 2 048 Mb s VT2 2 304 Mb s DS1C 48 DS0s 3 152 Mb s VT3 3 456 Mb s DS2 96 DS0s 6 312 Mb s VT6 6 912 Mb s DS3 672 DS0s 44 736 Mb s STS 1 51 840 Mb s DS4NA 2016 DS0s 139 624 Mb s STS 3...

Page 1274: ...Conclusion 1 The intent of this section is to present a short overview of SONET More detailed expositions can be found in various literature An excellent description of SONET can be found in Reference 3 Table A 34 SONET Transport Rates OC Level Line Rate Mb s Capacity OC 1 51 84 28 DS1s or 1 DS3 OC 3 155 52 84 DS1s or 3 DS3s OC 9 466 56 252 DS1s or 9 DS3s OC 12 622 08 336 DS1s or 12 DS3s OC 18 933...

Page 1275: ... 1991 American National Standard for Telecommunications Digital Hierarchy Optical Rates and Formats Specification 2 CCITT Recommendations G 707 G 708 G 709 3 R Ballert and Y C Ching SONET Now It s the Standard Optical Network IEEE Communications Magazine Vol 27 No 3 March 1989 8 15 4 ANSI T1 102 1993 Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications Digital Hierarchy Electrical Interface Spe...

Page 1276: ...363 206 285 A SONET Overview A 22 Issue 3 June 2001 ...

Page 1277: ...1xN protection switching pertains to circuit pack protection that provides a redundant signal path through the DDM 2000 it does not cover protection switching of an optical facility see 1 1 In 1xN switching a group of N service circuit packs share a single spare protection circuit pack 1x1 is a special case of 1xN with N 1 In 1x1 only one is active at a time A ABN Abnormal status condition ACO Ala...

Page 1278: ...hronous Transfer Mode Auto Automatic One possible state of a DS1 or DS3 port In this state the port will automatically be put in service if a good signal is detected coming from the DSX panel Automatic Protection Switch A protection switch that occurs automatically in response to an automatically detected fault condition Automatic Synchronization Reconfiguration A feature that allows another synch...

Page 1279: ...lding Integrated Timing Supply A single clock that provides all the DS1 and DS0 synchronization references required by clocks in a building BRI Basic Rate Interface Broadband Any communications channel with greater bandwidth than a voice channel sometimes used synonymously with wideband C CC Clear Channel A provisionable mode for the DS3 output that causes parity violations not to be monitored or ...

Page 1280: ...ting multiple states automatic in service and not monitored for VT1 5 and STS 1 channels See Port State Provisioning CIT Craft Interface Terminal CLF Carrier Line Failure Status CLK Clock CMISE Common Management Information Service Element CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CO Central Office COACH A system of on line support tools aimed at providing product news and bulletins diagnostic ...

Page 1281: ...ta Communications Equipment In a data station the equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment DTE and the line The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the DTE or of intermediate equipment A DCE may perform other functions usually performed at the network end of the line DDM 1000 Lucent s Dual DS3 Multiplexer A digital multiplexer th...

Page 1282: ...fice failures DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 1 544 M bs DS1 Circuit Pack The DS1 interface circuit pack interfaces to the DSX 1 panel DS3 Digital Signal Level 3 44 736 M bs DS3 Circuit Pack The DS3 circuit pack interfaces to the DSX 3 panel DSn Digital Signal Rate n One of the possible digital signal rates at DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 interfaces DS1 1 544 Mb s or DS3 44 736 Mb s DSX Digital Cross Connec...

Page 1283: ...g is interconnected between the two separate hosts Two SLC 2000 Access Systems serving as DDM 2000 FiberReach hosts can support up to four OC 1 rings See Single Homing E EC 1 EC n Electrical Carrier The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51 840 Mb s for an EC 1 signal and a rate of n times 51 840 Mb s for an EC n signal An EC 1 signal can be built in two ways A DS1 can be mapped in...

Page 1284: ... maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or working on Also called remote FE ACTY Far End Activity An LED on the user panel FEBE Far End Block Error An indication returned to near end transmitting node that an errored block has been detected at the far end FE ID Far End Identification The 7 segment display on the faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack FEPROM Flash EPROM A new techno...

Page 1285: ...lso be a DSNE GR Telcordia General Requirement Group The eight slots that may be equipped GTP General Telemetry Processor GUI Graphical User Interface H Hairpin Routing A cross connection between function units inter function unit For example function unit C to function units A or B Also a cross connection within the same function unit intra function unit Cross connections go through main but no b...

Page 1286: ...used to describe distances of from 15 to 40 km between optical transmitter and receiver without regeneration See long reach IS In Service One possible state of a DS1 DS3 or EC 1 port Other possible states are auto automatic and nmon not monitored ISCI Intershelf Control Interface ISI Intershelf Interface ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network IS 3 An intraoffice short reach proprietary interface...

Page 1287: ...to show the alarm and status condition of the system Line Timing The capability to directly derive clock timing from an incoming OC N signal while providing the user the capability to provision whether switching to an alternate OC N from a different source as opposed to entering holdover will occur if the OC N currently used as the timing reference for that NE becomes unsuitable as a reference For...

Page 1288: ...nces of 40 km or more between optical transmitter and receiver without regeneration See intermediate reach LS Low Speed M Main Slots on the DDM 2000 shelf in which the OLIU circuit packs are installed Midspan Meet The capability to interface between two lightwave terminals of different vendors This applies to high speed optical interfaces MD Mediation Device MJ Major Alarm MM Multimode MML huMan M...

Page 1289: ...r is at or working on Also called local NE Network Element The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunication network that meets SONET standards Typical internal attributes of a network element include one or more high and low speed transmission ports built in intelligence synchronization and timing capability access interfaces for use by technicians and or opera...

Page 1290: ...the OSI protocol NTF No Trouble Found O OAM P Operations Administration Maintenance and Provisioning OC OC n Optical Carrier The optical signal that results from an optical conversion of an STS signal that is OC 1 from STS 1 and OC n from STS n OC 1 Optical Carrier Level 1 Signal 51 84 Mb s OC 3 Optical Carrier Level 3 Signal 155 Mb s OC 3c STS 3c Optical Carrier Level 3 Concatenated Signal Low sp...

Page 1291: ...nnection Referring to the OSI reference model a logical structure for network operations standardized by the International Standards Organization ISO OSGNE Operations System Gateway Network Element An OSGNE serves as a single interface to the OS for NEs in the same subnetwork using X 25 interfaces OSMINE Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of Network Elements OSP Outside Plant P P...

Page 1292: ...2 See Channel Port State Provisioning A feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during provisioning by supporting multiple states automatic in service and not monitored for low speed ports See Channel State Provisioning POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Proactive Maintenance Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initia...

Page 1293: ...re reset See Non Revertive Ring A configuration of nodes comprised of network elements connected in a circular fashion Under normal conditions each node is interconnected with its neighbor and includes capacity for transmission in either direction between adjacent nodes Path switched rings use a head end bridge and tail end switch Line switched rings actively reroute traffic over a protection line...

Page 1294: ...ystems from a single location over the DCC Service Line On a DDM 2000 system a service or working line is a pair of fibers one transmit and one receive that terminate on an OLIU circuit pack in the main 1 or fn a 1 or fn b 1 or fn c 1 slot As defined by the SONET standard the SONET APS channel is not defined on a service or working line See Protection Line SES Severely Errored Seconds This perform...

Page 1295: ...ettable parameter with values of from 1 to 8 Displayed on SYSCTL circuit pack to indicate to which site the user panel alarms and LEDs apply SLIM Subscriber Loop Interface Module SM Single Mode SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork SPE Synchronous Payload Envelope SQU Sync Quality Unknown Used in synchronization messaging SRD Software Release Description Standby Standby identifies a 1 1 protected OC N...

Page 1296: ...ion Circuit Pack T1X1 and T1M1 The ANSI committees responsible for telecommunications standards TA Telcordia Technical Advisory TARP Target ID Address Resolution Protocol TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A condition set when a performance monitoring counter exceeds a user selected threshold A TCA does not generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT and is shown by TBOS and causes a me...

Page 1297: ...irectional A protection switching mode in which the system at each end of an optical span monitors both service and protection lines and independently chooses the best signal unless overridden by an equipment failure or by an external request such as a forced switch or lockout In a system that uses unidirectional line switching both the service and protection lines may be active simultaneously wit...

Page 1298: ... parity violations on the DS3 signal received from the fiber VONU Virtual Optical Network Unit VT Virtual Tributary A structure designed for transport and switching of a sub DS3 payload VT1 5 A 1 728 Mb s virtual tributary VT G Virtual Tributary Group A 9 row by 12 column SONET structure 108 bytes that carries one or more VTs of the same size Seven VT groups 756 bytes are byte interleaved within t...

Page 1299: ...wer Minor 4 5 Alarm Indication Signal 9 12 Alarms Office 6 13 Reports 9 61 Status 9 61 Applications Broadband Business Access 2 53 DS1 Performance Monitoring for Tariff Verification 2 66 Gateway Between SONET and Asynchronous Interfaces 2 59 Intelligent Vehicle Highway System 2 64 Interoffice Transport 2 52 LAN WAN Data Networking NMLI Services 2 55 Locked STS 3c Broadband Services 2 60 8 67 Loop ...

Page 1300: ...ack 7 43 BBG2 MXRVO 7 61 BBG4B DS3 7 66 7 84 BBG6 STS1E 7 74 BBG8 SYSCTL 7 3 BBG9 OHCTL 7 10 Control 7 2 DS1 7 25 7 53 DS1PM 7 33 Faceplate Indicators 6 8 OHCTL 7 2 Universal Optical Connector 7 99 CIT Local Access 6 4 Modem Access 6 6 Modem Port 6 2 PC as a CIT 6 6 Remote Access Using DCC 6 7 Terminals 6 2 CIT Interfaces 6 4 Clear Delay 6 13 CLEI 8 1 Comments Document lvi Configurations 2000 Prod...

Page 1301: ...urations Dual Ring Interworking 2 27 Confiurations Dual Homing with Dual Ring Interworking 2 33 Connectors Universal Optical 3 1 Courses Training xlvii CPro 2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool 6 8 10 61 Craft Interface Terminals 6 2 Cross Connect Tests 9 38 Cross Connection Provisioning 8 22 Cross Connections Hairpin 8 24 Locked 8 23 Cross connections Ring Drop and Continue Cross C...

Page 1302: ...everely Errored Seconds 9 55 DS3 Path Path Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Frame Seconds SEFS 9 53 DS3 Path Performance Monitoring CV P Coding Violations 9 53 Errored Seconds ES P 9 53 Severely Errored Seconds SES P 9 53 Unavailable Seconds UAS P 9 54 DS3 Performance Monitoring 9 44 C Bit 9 44 F M Bit 9 44 P Bit 9 44 DSX Test 9 38 Dual Homing 5 16 Dual Ring Interworking Path Protection Sch...

Page 1303: ...Signals 9 12 Filters Fan 3 27 Fire Resistance 10 68 Fuses 4 2 Shelf 10 69 G Gateway Network Elements GNEs Multiple 8 21 Grounding Jacks xxxviii H Hairpin Cross Connections 8 24 Hardened Uncontrolled Environments 10 67 Heat Baffles 10 67 Holdoff Delay 6 13 Holdover 5 29 7 19 Holdover Timing Mode 9 35 I Identifiers AGNE 8 76 DSNE 8 76 GNE 8 76 Network Element ID 8 76 NSAP 8 76 Shelf ID 8 76 Site ID ...

Page 1304: ...de Jumpers 10 17 Lightwave Safety Guidelines xxxiii Lightwave Safety Precautions xxxv Line Protection Switching 9 24 Line Timing 5 28 Local Tests 9 38 Locked Cross Connection 8 23 Loopbacks 9 36 DS1 and DS3 9 36 Optical 9 36 Lucent 2000 Product Family 1 1 M Maintenance Automatic Diagnostics 9 23 Fault Detection Isolation and Reporting 9 23 History Reports 9 61 Loopbacks and Testing 9 36 Proactive ...

Page 1305: ...Network Monitoring and Analysis 6 14 NMA 6 14 NSAP 8 16 O OC 1 and OC 3 VT1 5 Single Homed Path Switched Ring 8 63 OC 12 VT1 5 Path Switched Ring 0x1 8 55 OC 3 Section Parameters Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Frame Seconds SEFS 9 46 OC 3 EC 1 Line Parameters Performance Monitoring Errored Seconds 9 47 Line Coding Violations B2 Parity 9 46 Line Protection Switch Counts 9 47 Severely Error...

Page 1306: ...9 42 DS1 Line Parameters 9 51 DS1 Path Parameters 9 50 DS1 DS3 Line and Path and DS3 Path 9 41 DS3 9 44 DS3 Line 9 45 9 55 DS3 Parameters 9 52 DS3 Path 9 53 DS3 Performance Monitoring 9 53 During Failed Conditions 9 59 OC 1 Line Parameters 9 55 OC 1 Section Parameters 9 55 OC 3 Section Parameters 9 46 OC 3 EC 1 Line Parameters 9 46 Optical Parameters 9 45 Parameter Thresholds 9 59 Performance Stat...

Page 1307: ...34 Line 9 24 Linear Networks 10 54 Ring Networks 10 54 Synchronization Reference 9 35 Provisioning 8 15 AIS or Unequipped Provisioning 8 21 Automatic Provisioning on Circuit Pack Replacement 8 15 Channel State 8 20 Cross Connection 8 22 Cross Connection Types 8 23 DCC 8 16 Default Provisioning 8 15 Feature Package 8 16 Line State Provisioning 8 21 Manual Cross Connections 8 26 OC 1 and OC 3 VT1 5 ...

Page 1308: ...9 61 State Reports 9 62 TCA Summary Report 9 60 Requirements Earthquake 10 68 EMC 10 67 Power 10 69 Restart Power Loss 10 55 Retainer Card 177A Retainer 7 29 7 37 7 41 RIDES 6 14 Rings ACTIVE LED on 9 34 Cross Connection Provisioning 8 42 8 59 DRI Path Protection Scheme 9 32 Drop and Continue Cross Connection Provisioning 8 50 Dual Ring Interworking 9 32 Maintenance Signals 9 18 OC 1 and OC 3 VT1 ...

Page 1309: ...lots 3 6 OC 3 DDM 2000 FiberReach Host 3 18 OC 3 Dual Homing 3 17 OC 3 Dual Ring Interworking 3 13 OC 3 FiberReach Host Shelf Enhanced Routing 3 20 OC 3 Front Access 3 1 OC 3 Front Panel 3 6 OC 3 Multiplexer 3 1 OC 3 Rear Access 3 1 OC 3 Ring 3 12 OC 3 Ring with Optical Extension 3 14 OC 3 VT Hairpin 3 15 Signaling Maintenance 9 12 Signals AIS 9 12 Alarm Indication 9 12 FERF 9 12 Yellow 9 12 Singl...

Page 1310: ...4G U 10 20 Long Reach OC 12 Interface 24H U 10 21 Long Reach OC 12 Interface 29G U 10 24 10 25 Order Wire 10 63 Personal Computer for Software Download 10 59 Physical 10 66 Protection Switching 10 54 Signal Performance 10 52 Synchronization 10 53 Synchronization Messaging 10 53 Timing Modes 10 53 STS 1 Path Parameters Performance Monitoring Errored Seconds 9 49 Severely Errored Seconds 9 49 STS 1 ...

Page 1311: ...ng 5 34 Synchronization Messaging 5 34 9 35 10 53 Synchronization Reconfiguration Using an Externally Timed Access Ring 5 43 Synchronization Reference Protection 9 35 T Tests Auto Turnup 9 38 Automated Installation 9 37 Cross Connect 9 38 DSX 9 38 Installation 9 38 Local 9 38 Loopbacks 9 36 Manual 9 37 Test Signal Generators 9 37 Transmission 9 37 Threshold Crossing Alert TCA 9 59 TIDs 9 62 Timing...

Page 1312: ...0 Universal Optical Connectors 3 1 UPD INIT Pushbutton 6 11 Upgrades Inservice 9 9 Software 8 4 9 9 User Panel 6 8 LEDs 6 10 User Panel and Faceplate Interfaces 6 8 User Panel Indicators 10 62 User Definable Miscellaneous Discretes 10 62 V Version Recognition Administration 8 1 VT1 5 Path Parameters Performance Monitoring Errored Seconds 9 50 Severely Errored Seconds 9 50 Unavailable Seconds 9 50 ...

Page 1313: ...363 206 285 Issue 3 June 2001 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual TOP Volume II ...

Page 1314: ...he user will be required to correct the interference at the users own expense Security Statement In rare instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features In such event applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not ...

Page 1315: ...ne thing about this information product what would it be ________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Please write any other comments about this information product ____________________________________________________________________________________...

Page 1316: ......

Page 1317: ... an end to end system after all shelves have been equipped c Establishing initial end to end DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3c TMUX DS3 to DS1 HDSL T1 or LAN service d Adding converting or discontinuing DS1 DS3 EC 1 TMUX DS3 HDSL T1 or LAN service to an in service system e Adding new shelves or spans to existing configurations f Upgrading software to a new release g Converting or upgrading an OC 3 system to an O...

Page 1318: ...OC 3 or DDM 2000 OC 12 Rings t Upgrading DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 dual ring interworking from EC 1 to OC 3 IS 3 u Upgrading DDM 2000 OC 3 ring network to OC 12 ring network to OC 12 ring network using OC 3 shelves v Upgrading DDM 2000 OC 3 ring network to OC 12 ring network to OC 12 ring network using OC 3 OC 12 shelves w Upgrading DDM 2000 OC 12 ring by removing OC 12 shelf and replacing with existing...

Page 1319: ... tab and go to the referenced procedure Or you may use the Master Task Index IXL 001 in this introduction 2 Turn to the indicated director level detail level or trouble clearing procedure listed under the GO TO column for the task being performed 3 Perform all the items in the director level procedure in the indicated order unless it sends you to another director level procedure When you complete ...

Page 1320: ...s 1 800 225 RTAC Circuit packs being returned for repair should be sent to the following address Lucent Technologies Returned Goods Dept Dept JC0221310 1600 Osgood Street North Andover Massachusetts 01845 Telephone 1 508 960 5179 FAX 1 508 960 1705 Screen Display and Panel Stamping Fonts The procedures in this manual use a monospace font to identify actual text on a screen or a response displayed ...

Page 1321: ...transmitters that emit light at wavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600 nanometers The emitted light is above the red end of the visible spectrum which is normally not visible to the human eye Although radiant energy at near infrared wavelengths is officially designated invisible some people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude be...

Page 1322: ...lations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser product as belonging to one of four major Classes Class I II IIa IIIa IIIb or IV Lasers are classified according to the accessibly emission limits and their potential for causing injury Lightwave systems are generally classified as Class I because under normal operation conditions all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are termin...

Page 1323: ...lowing precautions should be observed 1 Because of the potential for eye damage technicians should neither disconnect any lightwave cable nor splice and stare into the optical connectors terminating the cables 2 Under no circumstances shall lightwave lightguide operations be performed by a technician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course 3 Since viewing lightwave emission di...

Page 1324: ... instruments or magnifying lenses Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such as a FIND R SCOPE are not considered magnifying lenses or optical instruments 2 Only authorized trained personnel shall use the lightwave test equipment during installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers Some examples of lightguide test equipment are OTDR s Hand Held Loss Test Set...

Page 1325: ...at is used be sure that it is clean Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Observe warning labels on bags and cartons Whenever possible do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots If possible open all circuit packs at a static safe work posit...

Page 1326: ...363 206 285 Page 10 of 12 Issue 3 June 2001 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 2 Static Control Wrist Strap ...

Page 1327: ...roduct should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label For information on proper electrical distribution and power requirements refer to the Power and Technical Specifications sections of the appropriate user service manual 6 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that...

Page 1328: ...tion as applicable 4 For information on proper mounting instructions consult 363 206 204 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Installation Manual 363 206 208 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer Installation Manual or 363 206 310 DDM 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Installation Manual 5 Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm 6 Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations 7 Never to...

Page 1329: ... Initial End to End Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 Service Add New DS3 Group In Service Circuit Order NTP 007 DS3 Service Convert to DS1 MXRVO Group Service Circuit Order NTP 010 DS3 Service Discontinue Circuit Order NTP 012 DS3 Service Establish Initial End to End Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 Service Add New STS1E Group System In Servic...

Page 1330: ...up Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 020 FAULT LED Indication Flashing Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 110 LEDs Test Detailed Level Procedure DLP 509 NE ACTY Alarm Only Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 117 SYSCTL Install BBG8 BBG8B New Shelf Only BBG9 OHCTL Installed Detailed Level Procedure DLP 549 SYSCTL Replace BBG8 BBG8B BBG5 In Service Detailed Level Procedure DLP 501 Accept DDM 2000 OC 3 Mu...

Page 1331: ...l CR Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 101 Alarm Major MJ Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 102 Alarm Minor MN Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 112 Alarm NE ACTY Only Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 117 Alarm Power Minor PMN Clear Trouble Clearing TAP 104 Convert DS1 Group Service to DS3 Group Service Circuit Order NTP 009 Convert DS1 Group Service to EC 1 Group Service Circuit Order NTP 038 Convert DS3 Group Service to D...

Page 1332: ...C 12 Backbone Ring System Turnup NTP 054 Establish Dual Homed Release 15 OC 3 or OC 12 Access via WaveStar TDM 2 5G OC 48 Backbone Ring System Turnup NTP 061 Establish EC 1 Dual Ring Interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 to OC 12 or FT 2000 OC 3 Optical Fiber Spans Circuit Order NTP 013 Establish End to End DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 System OC 3 or OC 12 Optical Fiber Spans Path Switched Ring Network System Turn...

Page 1333: ...r Extension via WaveStar TDM 2 5G OC 48 Backbone Ring System Turnup NTP 059 Establish OC 3 Optical Span Extension Between DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Ring System Turnup NTP 018 Establish OC 3c STS 3c Service System Turnup NTP 002 Establish Remote Login Detailed Level Procedure DLP 522 Establish Single Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring System Turnup NTP 043 Establish Sing...

Page 1334: ...eneric Program In Service System Local Shelf Download Detailed Level Procedure DLP 525 Install Software Generic Program Network Element Software New Shelf Installation Only BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL and BBG9 OHCTL Installed Detailed Level Procedure DLP 561 Install New Software Generic Program Network Element Software Remote Shelf Download In Service System Detailed Level Procedure DLP 562 Install New IMA ...

Page 1335: ...tablish Initial End to End EC 1 Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 034 Service Establish Initial End to End DS1 Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 004 Service Establish Initial End to End DS3 Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 005 Service Establish Initial End to End DS3 to DS1 TMUX Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 020 Service E...

Page 1336: ...ll In Service System Remote Shelf Download Detailed Level Procedure DLP 528 Software Version ID Retrieve Detailed Level Procedure DLP 531 Span Add New Optical Span to DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Circuit Order NTP 015 Span OC 3 Optical Discontinue Circuit Order NTP 019 Sync Messaging Change Kbyte to Sbyte Detailed Level Procedure DLP 565 System Backup and Restore CPro 2000 Operation NTP 002 System Establish...

Page 1337: ...ing Network from EC 1 to OC 3 In Service Circuit Order NTP 042 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Dual Ring Interworking Network from EC 1 to OC 3 IS 3 In Service Circuit Order NTP 051 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Network to OC 12 Ring Network Using OC 3 Shelves In Service Circuit Order NTP 023 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Network to OC 12 Ring Network Using OC 3 OC 12 Shelves In Service Circuit Order NTP 02...

Page 1338: ...t Not In Service NTP 006 Add New DS1 Service Group Already In Service NTP 007 Add New DS3 Group for DS3 Service System In Service NTP 008 Add New MXRVO Group for DS1 Service System In Service NTP 009 Convert DS1 Group Service to DS3 Group Service NTP 010 Convert DS3 Group Service to DS1 MXRVO Group Service NTP 011 Discontinue End to End DS1 Service NTP 012 Discontinue End to End DS3 Service NTP 01...

Page 1339: ...Path Switched Ring Network NTP 028 Establish Initial End to End LAN Service Group Equipped But Not In Service NTP 029 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Path Switched Ring In Service NTP 030 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Path Switched Ring Out of Service NTP 031 Add New LAN Service Group Already In Service NTP 032 Discontinue End to End LAN Service NTP 033 Establish Initial End to E...

Page 1340: ...n FT 2000 Ring and DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Ring NTP 050 Establish Dual Homed OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring NTP 051 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Dual Ring Interworking Network from EC 1 to OC 3 IS 3 In Service NTP 052 Discontinue End to End T1 Service NTP 053 Establish Single Homed OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf Release 15 OC 12 Backbone Ring NTP 054 Establish Dual Homed OC 3 Acce...

Page 1341: ...ng Craft Interface Terminal CIT TAP 108 Clear Obscure Failure Condition TAP 109 Clear Abnormal ABN Indication TAP 110 Clear Flashing FAULT LED Indication TAP 111 Clear OLIU or Fiber Trouble Linear Extensions TAP 112 Clear Minor MN Alarm TAP 113 Clear Obscure Minor MN Alarm TAP 114 Clear External Minor Alarm at RT TAP 115 Clear LED Test Trouble TAP 116 Clear Trouble During Network Element Program U...

Page 1342: ...DLP 517 Install T1EXT Circuit Packs DLP 518 Install IMA LAN Circuit Packs DLP 519 Test Protection Switching Function DLP 520 Condition DS1 DS1PM Circuit Pack Port for New DS1 Service DLP 521 Connect CIT and Establish Session DLP 522 Establish Remote Login DLP 523 Replace Circuit Pack DLP 524 Check 48 V DC Office Battery DLP 525 Install New IMA LAN Software Generic Program In Service System Local S...

Page 1343: ...Cross Connections Using CIT Single OC 3 or OC 12 Ring Configuration DLP 547 DDM 2000 Receiver Sensitivity Test DLP 548 Replace Defective Fan Pack DLP 549 Install BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL New Shelf Only BBG9 OHCTL Installed DLP 550 Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Dual Ring Interworking Configuration DLP 551 Replace DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf User Panel Out of Service DLP 552 Install Remove...

Page 1344: ...oftware New Shelf Installation Only BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL and BBG9 OHCTL Installed DLP 562 Install New Software Generic Program Network Element Software Remote Shelf Download In Service System DLP 563 Provision STS 1 Path Trace DLP 564 Install BBF8 HDSL Circuit Packs DLP 565 Sync Messaging Change Kbyte to Sbyte DLP 566 Obtain Equipment Check Software Prepare and Connect PC for Software Download Table ...

Page 1345: ...ple drop and continue paths at DRI nodes Obtain and display graphical images of the subnetwork configuration equipment and cross connections Perform an analysis of the subnetwork to detect provisioning errors Retrieve and store data about a selected NE Backup and restore provisioning information including cross connections DS1 port options DS3 port options EC 1 port options and OC 3 line options I...

Page 1346: ...ides a cut through capability allowing the ITM SNC user to access an NE through its native command set ITM SNC operates as an enchanced graphical tool and as a general configuration management aid It provides NE port cross connection and path provisioning as well as flowthrough from provisioning operations systems OSs to NEs ITM SNC also provides fault management through subnetwork alarm and event...

Page 1347: ...d end to end They are not intended to be used for initial system turnup or in establishing an end to end system System Turnup procedures are found in this manual under the System Turnup Circuit Order tab Test Accept DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Equipped Overview Acceptance NTP 002 Test Accept DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer shelf Looped Back Acceptance NTP 003 Test Accept End to End DDM 2000 OC 3 System Ne...

Page 1348: ...363 206 285 Acceptance IXL 001 Issue 3 June 2001 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1349: ... in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is an overview of acceptance procedures that may be performed on the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer It assumes that the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf or system has been installed and equipped with circuit packs It also assumes that the system is being tested accepted by an organization that did not install it This procedure is for reference only It contains a list...

Page 1350: ... Configuration DLP 510 C Single Dual Homing Configuraiton 6 If required perform DS3 transmission tests on each DS3 port DLP 511 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 553 B Dual Ring DRI Configuration DLP 511 C Single Dual Homing Configuration DLP 544 7 If required perform OC 3c transmission tests 8 Verify set option settings using rtrv ne set ne commands DLP 512 9 Verify set option settings using rtrv s...

Page 1351: ...100 NOTE This test is to be performed if the DDM 2000 is being tested or accepted by an organization that did not install it NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 is installed powered equipped and free of alarms If it was not left in that condition notify the organization that installed the DDM 2000 that they have not completed the installation or use Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE If the DDM 2000 f...

Page 1352: ...ed NOTE The proper release of software must be installed for this test to work If software has not been installed the letter P will be displayed in the 7 segment FE ID display If the software in the SYSCTL is incompatible with the software in the OHCTL or with the shelf configuration the letter d or C will be displayed in the 7 segment FE ID display If the proper release of software has not been i...

Page 1353: ... to reset all provisionable parameters and cross connections to default values NOTE An inconsistent DCC values alarm will occur when the init sys all command is executed To clear the alarm use the set fecom address com disable command to disable the DCC If required use the command init sys all to reset provisionable parameters to default values 6 NOTE These procedures assume that the DDM 2000 has ...

Page 1354: ...t interface terminal CIT is required to access the optional features of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Refer to the Commands and Reports section and use the rtrv commands to determine the existing options DLP 512 Activate optional features that you require at this time 9 After each shelf in the network has been tested the DDM 2000 will be ready for end to end testing Acceptance NTP 004 DLP 539 DLP ...

Page 1355: ...hich can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This test is to be performed if the DDM 2000 is being tested or accepted by an organization that did not install it NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 is installed and running in an end to end network c...

Page 1356: ...should be deleted before the system is placed in service The init sys all command will reset all provisionable parameters and cross connections to default values If parameters have already been set to their proper values and you are sure they are set correctly you may not want to perform this step Some parameters will have to be reset later before service is established NOTE An inconsistent DCC va...

Page 1357: ...ircuit pack is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational mode of the system If the mode is Holdover instead of External check that the incoming timing references are connected Also check Mode Switching revertive or nonrevertive and the external DS1 Line Code Format switch settings Use rtrv sync command at each node to verify proper timing options At least one node i...

Page 1358: ...te Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the at any node in a system it must be enabled at all nodes of the system NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configuration of OC 3 lines See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 comman...

Page 1359: ...sable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 9 NOTE The section data communication channel DCC used for far end communications must be enabled at each network element shelf for the end to end line test to work Default condition for the DCC channel is enabled If it has been disabled use the set fecom command at each shelf to enable far end communications NOTE The rlgn command can be use...

Page 1360: ...rection DLP 553 B DS3 Dual Ring DRI Test in Mux Direction DLP 511 C DS3 Single Dual Homing Test in Mux Direction DLP 544 12 Perform end to end OC 3c STS 3c transmission test in the mux direction if required DLP 516 13 Check local office alarm interface as required DLP 519 14 Test protection switching function if required 15 The system is ready for service to be established DLP 512 16 Activate rema...

Page 1361: ...s for looping shelf OLIUs Initial Shelf Turnup and Establishing End to End System NOTE These procedures are used to equip DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves establish end to end OC 3 systems and establish initial end to end DS1 DS3 service after all necessary bay shelf and cable installation has been done Equip DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf Looped Back System Turnup NTP 016 System Establish End to End NOTE Figures 1 35 ...

Page 1362: ...nd to End DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 System OC 3 or OC 12 Optical Fiber Spans Path Switched Ring Network System Turnup NTP 022 Establish OC 3 IS 3 Dual Ring Interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 to OC 12 or FT 2000 Ring OC 3 Optical Fiber Spans System Turnup NTP 041 Establish OC 3 Linear Extension via DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 OC 3 Backbone Ring System Turnup NTP 055 Establish Release 15 OC 3 Linear Extension via...

Page 1363: ...Initial End to End DS1 Service Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 004 Establish Initial Low Speed EC 1 Interface Group Equipped With STS1E Not In Service System Turnup NTP 034 Service Establish Initial DS3 Establish Initial End to End DS3 Service Group Equipped But Not In Service System Turnup NTP 005 Establish Initial Low Speed EC 1 Interface Group Equipped With STS1E Not In Serv...

Page 1364: ...elves and optical spans and upgrade system configurations Shelf Span Adding New Add DDM 2000 OC 3 Node Shelf To Path Switched Ring Shelf Added in Middle of Optical Span Circuit Order NTP 026 Add DDM 2000 OC 3 Optical Span Span Added as Extension to DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Circuit Order NTP 015 Add DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf and Optical Span Shelf Added as Extension to DDM 2000 OC 12 Circuit Order NTP 018 Add ...

Page 1365: ...Service Group Already In Service Circuit Order NTP 014 Service Adding New LAN Add New LAN Service Group Already In Service Circuit Order NTP 031 Service Adding New T1 Add New T1 Service Group Already In Service Circuit Order NTP 037 EC 1 Interface Adding Add New STS1E Group for EC 1 Interface System In Service Circuit Order NTP 035 Conversions Change Kbyte Sync Messaging to Sbyte Sync Messaging De...

Page 1366: ...scontinue LAN Interface Discontinue End to End LAN Service Circuit Order NTP 032 Service Discontinue T1 Interface Discontinue End to End T1 Service Circuit Order NTP 052 Shelf Node Discontinue Discontinue an OC 3 or OC 12 Shelf Node From Path Switched Ring Circuit Order NTP 027 Span Discontinue OC 3 Optical Discontinue an OC 3 Optical Span Extension From DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Circuit Order NTP 019 Te...

Page 1367: ... Network Using 24 Type OLIUs to OC 12 Ring Network Using 29 Type OLIUs In Service Circuit Order NTP 058 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 System Linear Add Drop to Path Switched Ring In Service Circuit Order NTP 039 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 System Point to Point to Path Switched Ring In Service Circuit Order NTP 029 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 System Point to Point to Path Switched Ring Out of Service Circuit Order NT...

Page 1368: ...med OC 3 or OC 12 Access via FT 2000 Backbone Ring Figure 4 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Path Switched Ring Figure 6 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations Single Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring Figure 8 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations OC 3 Optical Span Linear Extension Between FT 2000 and DDM 2000 OC 3 R...

Page 1369: ...FT 2000 Large Network Configurations Dual Homed OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring Figure 30 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations Dual Homed OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring Figure 32 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations OC 3 Optical Span Extension via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring Figure 34 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations OC 3 Optical Span Exte...

Page 1370: ...er Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 ...

Page 1371: ...3 or OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring See Figure 3 Establish Single Homed OC 3 or OC 12 via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP System Turnup NTP 047 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 L...

Page 1372: ... 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM ...

Page 1373: ... 3 or OC 12 System Path Switched Ring See Figure 5 Establish End to End DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 System Path Switch Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP System Turnup NTP 022 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Tur...

Page 1374: ...Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 1...

Page 1375: ... Network Configurations Single Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring Establish Single Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring See Figure 7 Establish Single Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP System Turnup NTP 043 ...

Page 1376: ...C 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC ...

Page 1377: ...ee Figure 9 and DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Establish OC 3 Optical Span Linear Extension Extension Added Between FT 2000 and DDM 2000 OC 3 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP SystemTurnup NTP 049 Note Assumes FT 2000 ring and OC 3 Ring are already established Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 SystemTurnup NTP 004 DS3 SystemTurnup NTP ...

Page 1378: ...OC 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC...

Page 1379: ...h OC 3 Optical Span Linear Extension to DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring See Figure 11 Establish OC 3 Linear Extension to DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP System Turnup NTP 055 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN Sy...

Page 1380: ...OC 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC...

Page 1381: ...rge Network Configurations Dual Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring Establish Dual Homed FiberReach Access DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring See Figure 13 via Establish Dual Homed FiberReach Access via DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Backbone Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP System Turnup NTP 044 ...

Page 1382: ...C 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC ...

Page 1383: ...XL 001 Issue 3 June 2001 Page 23 of 44 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 14 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations DDM 2000 OC 12 Path Switched Ring Establish End to End DDM 2000 OC 12 System OC 12 Shelves Path Switch Ring See Figure 15 ...

Page 1384: ...er Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 O...

Page 1385: ...n DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring and DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Establish OC 3 Optical Span Extension Between DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring and DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring See Figure 17 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 ...

Page 1386: ...ng OC 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000...

Page 1387: ...0 OC 12 Ring See Figure 19 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 Establish OC 3 Optical Span Extension Extension Added Between FT 2000 and DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring 363 206 285 User Service Man...

Page 1388: ...48 OC 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000...

Page 1389: ...working Between DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring and FT 2000 OC 48 Establish OC 3 IS Dual Ring Interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 to FT 2000 Ring See Figure 21 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 ...

Page 1390: ...48 OC 3 OC 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000...

Page 1391: ...85 System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 Issue 3 June 2001 Page 31 of 44 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 22 DDM 2000 FT 2000 Large Network Configurations Single Homed OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring ...

Page 1392: ... 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM ...

Page 1393: ...OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring Establish Single Homed OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring See Figure 25 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 ...

Page 1394: ... 3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM ...

Page 1395: ... OC 3 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring Establish Dual Homed OC 3 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring See Figure 27 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 ...

Page 1396: ... Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 20...

Page 1397: ...000 Large Network Configurations Dual Homed OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring Establish Dual Homed OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring See Figure 29 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 295 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS3 System Turnup NTP 018 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 024 NTP 018 NTP 024 ...

Page 1398: ...3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2...

Page 1399: ...OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring Establish Dual Homed OC 3 Access via DDM 2000 OC 12 Backbone Ring See Figure 31 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 System Turnup NTP 004 DS3 System Turnup NTP 005 EC 1 System Turnup NTP 034 HDSL System Turnup NTP 003 LAN System Turnup NTP 028 T1 System Turnup NTP 033 ...

Page 1400: ...3 Fiber Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2...

Page 1401: ... 3 Optical Span Linear Extension via DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring See Figure 33 Establish OC 3 Linear Extension to DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP SystemTurnup NTP 056 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 SystemTurnup NTP 004 DS3 SystemTurnup NTP 005 EC 1 SystemTurnup NTP 034 HDSL SystemTurnup NTP 003 LAN SystemTu...

Page 1402: ...Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM...

Page 1403: ...C 3 Optical Span Linear Extension via FT 2000 OC 48 Ring See Figure 35 Establish OC 3 Linear Extension to FT 2000 OC 48 Ring 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP SystemTurnup NTP 057 Establish Initial End to End Service as required 363 206 285 User Service Manual Volume 2 TOP DS1 SystemTurnup NTP 004 DS3 SystemTurnup NTP 005 EC 1 SystemTurnup NTP 034 HDSL SystemTurnup NTP 003 LAN SystemTur...

Page 1404: ...Fiber Reach Reach Fiber Fiber Reach Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 Fiber Reach Fiber Reach OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM...

Page 1405: ...atic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 has been properly equipped and has passed the looped transmission test s System Turnup NTP 016 It is also assumed that the end to end OC 12 optical spans have been established System Turnup NTP 022 NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 OC 12 3 shelf is colocated with the broadband terminal equipment which...

Page 1406: ...he ent crs sts3c command at each shelf to make the following STS 3c cross connections m 1 to c 1 For example ent crs sts3c m 1 c 1 4 Determine the optical loss of the OC 3c span from the DDM 2000 to the broadband terminating equipment 5 Remove optical loops from OLIUs in FUNCTION UNITS C slots and the broadband terminating equipment 6 Connect the optical cables from the DDM 2000 OC 3 FUNCTION UNIT...

Page 1407: ...lled refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to equip the DDM 2000 shelves and establish the system NOTE If the DS1 terminating end s are in a DDM 2000 OC 3 this procedure assumes that MXRVO circuit packs have already been installed during initial shelf turnup and either MXRVO or STS1E circuit packs have been installed during initial shelf turnup at the other DDM 2000 OC 3 term...

Page 1408: ...slots See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv eqpt command format At each DDM 2000 OC 3 terminating end use the rtrv eqpt command to obtain the Equipage and Version Report and verify that the proper service and protection if required MXRVO STS1E circuit packs have been installed in FUNCTION UNITS group s A B or C being put into service 3 At the HDSL termin...

Page 1409: ...he set t1 command to set the characteristics of the DS1 port of the circuit being established 7 At each HDSL terminating node make the appropriate cable connection s to the HDSL cross connect point s or equivalent connection point s for the circuit being added 8 Verify that no LEDs or alarms are activated If any LEDs or alarms are activated refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 and follow the appropri...

Page 1410: ...ctions OC 3 ring Releases 7 0 and earlier do not support the command cnvt crs for converting an STS 1 to a VT1 5 cross connect Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connect...

Page 1411: ...g put into service as required DLP 510 A Ring Configuration DLP 554 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 510 C OC 3 FiberReach Configuration 13 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 14 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i ...

Page 1412: ...NTP 003 System Turnup 363 206 285 Page 6 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1413: ...sh the system NOTE If the DS1 terminating end s are in a DDM 2000 OC 3 this procedure assumes that MXRVO circuit packs have already been installed during initial shelf turnup and either MXRVO or STS1E circuit packs have been installed during initial shelf turnup at the other DDM 2000 OC 3 terminating end s of the circuit If the terminating end is in another system it is assumed that the appropriat...

Page 1414: ...proper service and protection if required MXRVO STS1E circuit packs have been installed in FUNCTION UNITS group s A B or C being put into service 3 At the DS1 terminating node s of the circuit being established determine which DS1 port s is to be put into service and what options are to be selected 4 NOTE The rtrv t1 command retrieves the T1 Port Provisioning Report This report lists information a...

Page 1415: ...hod may be used resulting in 100 ohms across the TIP and RING of the DS1 circuit output while in an idle state Failure to terminate DS1 outputs may result in violation of FCC Part 15 emission requirements and possibly interfere with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service NOTE If DS1 protection is re...

Page 1416: ...lot locations from the DDM 2000 s internal protection bus Install 177A Retainer Cards into all unused service DS1 slots in groups equipped with MXRVO and protection DS1 DS1PM circuit packs 7 At each DS1 terminating node use the set t1 command to set the characteristics of the DS1 port of the circuit being established 8 At each DS1 terminating node make the appropriate cable connection s to the DS1...

Page 1417: ...ll drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future yo...

Page 1418: ... 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 F Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 13 NOTE For a DS1 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path address command must be used at the terminating...

Page 1419: ...state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 16 If BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are inst...

Page 1420: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 004 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1421: ...em Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to equip the DDM 2000 shelves and to establish a system NOTE This procedure assumes that DS3 circuit packs have already been installed during the initial shelf turnup at the DS3 terminating end s of the circuit and either DS3 or STS1E circuit packs have been installed during initial shelf turnup at the other terminating end of the circuit If the appro...

Page 1422: ...cludes attributes set by the set t3 command See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv t3 command format Use the rtrv t3 command to obtain the T3 Port Provisioning Report and verify the software option settings 4 NOTE DS1 circuit packs cannot be installed in a group that is equipped with DS3 circuit packs DLP 513 Verify the line build out LBO option jumpers a...

Page 1423: ...r STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid...

Page 1424: ...onal DLP 511 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 553 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 511 C Single Dual Homing Ring Configuration 11 Use the set t3 command to set the characteristics of the DS3 port of the circuit being established 12 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the DS3 port of the circuit being established 13 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the s...

Page 1425: ...DS1 DS1PM circuit pack is being added to a group that is already in service and equipped with MXRVO circuit packs at the DS1 terminating end s It also assumes that STS1E circuit packs have been installed if the other end is an EC 1 interface If proper circuit packs have not been installed and the system is in service on other groups refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to ad...

Page 1426: ...er Any alternative method may be used resulting in 100 ohms across the TIP and RING of the DS1 circuit output while in an idle state Failure to terminate DS1 outputs may result in violation of FCC Part 15 emission requirements and possibly interfere with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service NOTE I...

Page 1427: ...n a DS1 DS1PM circuit pack is switched to protection removal of any other DS1 DS1PM circuit pack or 177A Retainer Card in the same group will result in a loss of service to the protection DS1 DS1PM circuit pack and the removed DS1 DS1PM circuit pack CAUTION No service DS1 LOW SPEED slots should be left empty in a group equipped with MXRVO and protection DS1 DS1PM circuit packs DLP 520 Condition DS...

Page 1428: ...ules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate drop...

Page 1429: ...LP 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 F Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 9 NOTE For a DS1 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path vt1 address command must be used at the termin...

Page 1430: ...te In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 12 If BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are install...

Page 1431: ...rcuit packs have been installed if the other end is an EC 1 interface If it has not been installed refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add a new STS1E group NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Determine which FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is being equipped 2 Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms lock...

Page 1432: ...des NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as eithe...

Page 1433: ...k DLP 546 A Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 559 C Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 D Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 9 NOTE For a DS3 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path sts1 address command must be used at the terminating nodes and dual ring interworking DRI nodes in a DRI ring network to switch the active STS 1 DS3 path ...

Page 1434: ...omatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t3 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t3 command to set the port state of th...

Page 1435: ...cuit packs refer to Circuit Order NTP 006 This procedure also assumes that STS1E circuit packs have been installed if the other end is an EC 1 interface If proper circuit packs have not been installed at the EC 1 interface refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add new STS1E group NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 00...

Page 1436: ...with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service DLP 508 Option and install required service DS1 DS1PM circuit packs 5 NOTE If DS1 protection is required and service DS1PM circuit packs are installed a DS1PM circuit pack must be installed in the protection 8 P slot DLP 508 Install protection DS1 DS1PM ci...

Page 1437: ...odes and pass through cross connections are made at intermediate nodes NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path ...

Page 1438: ...P 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 F Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 12 NOTE For a DS1 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path vt1 address command must be used at the termin...

Page 1439: ...te In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 15 If BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are install...

Page 1440: ...NTP 008 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 6 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1441: ... being changed to a DS3 group for DS3 service NOTE If at any point in this procedure the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner you should refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Determine which FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is being converted 2 Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 3 At the DSX 1 remove the DS1 signals associated with the DS1 g...

Page 1442: ...ng rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate ...

Page 1443: ...DS1 DS1PM circuit packs being removed 6 Remove the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs from group being converted to DS3 7 Remove the MXRVO circuit packs from group being converted to DS3 8 Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL to update the DDM 2000 internal equipment list 9 Verify that all alarms are off 10 NOTE DS1 DS1PM circuit packs cannot be installed in a group that is equipped with DS3...

Page 1444: ... 511 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 553 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 511 C Single Dual Homing Configuration 16 Use the set t3 command to set the characteristics of the DS3 port 17 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the DS3 port s of the circuit being established 18 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port w...

Page 1445: ...rap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Determine which DS3 group is to be converted 2 NOTE The following operation will activate the office major critical alarm The audible alarm may be suppressed by depressing the ACO button Remove service signal from the DS3 group being discontinued FAULT LED flashes on DS3 DS3PM ci...

Page 1446: ...g rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate d...

Page 1447: ...5 CAUTION Removal of the wrong cross connect may interrupt service NOTE DS3 slots cannot be unequipped without an alarm until all cross connections are removed The cross connections must be removed first before removing circuit packs In ring configurations remove the cross connections from the terminating nodes first then remove the pass through cross connections at the non terminating nodes if re...

Page 1448: ...S1 outputs may result in violation of FCC Part 15 emission requirements and possibly interfere with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service NOTE If the group is to be equipped with any BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs both service and protection MXRVO circuit packs must be installed DLP 506 Install MXR...

Page 1449: ... disconnect the cross connect wiring associated with unused service DS1 slot locations from the DDM 2000 s internal protection bus Install 177A Retainer Cards into all unequipped service DS1 slots in groups equipped with MXRVO and protection DS1 DS1PM circuit packs 14 Make appropriate cable connection s to DSX 1 cross connect point s or equivalent connection point s for DS1 ports s being added 15 ...

Page 1450: ...ing rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate...

Page 1451: ...r or circuit order 17 If required use the ent crs command s at each shelf to make necessary STS 1 and or DS1 VT1 5 cross connections DLP 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 F Single Dual OC 3 OC...

Page 1452: ...te In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 21 If BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are install...

Page 1453: ...NOTE Standard DS1 transmitter sources are designed to terminate in a nominal 100 ohm impedance This termination is usually provided by the receiving equipment When not connected to receiving equipment that is idle or unterminated DS1 transmitter equipment should terminate in a 100 ohm load When connecting through DSX equipment this can be accomplished with terminating plugs available from the DSX ...

Page 1454: ... DS1PM circuit pack with signals removed 3 NOTE The UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL is recessed to prevent its accidental operation You will need a small pointed object such as a ball point pen to operate it Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL at the DS1 terminating nodes or use the upd command to update the equipment list Flashing FAULT LEDs go off 4 If a craft interface termi...

Page 1455: ...TE In ring configurations the following rules are used in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass thr...

Page 1456: ... packs In order to remove an individual DS1 the cnvt crs may have to be used to convert the STS1 cross connection to 28 individual VT1 5 cross connections If the entire group is being discontinued the STS1 cross connection may be removed if required Use the dlt crs vt1 command to delete the terminating drop node cross connections for all DS1 service being removed if required 7 Use the dlt crs vt1 ...

Page 1457: ... 12 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be remov...

Page 1458: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 011 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1459: ...One of the terminating drop nodes for the DS3 service may be equipped with STS1E circuit packs to provide an EC 1 interface for the DS3 service At the DSX 3 STSX cable cross connect point at the terminating drop nodes remove the DS3 EC 1 service signal from the DS3 group being discontinued FAULT LED flashes on DS3 DS3PM STS1E circuit packs with signal removed 3 NOTE The UPD INIT pushbutton on the ...

Page 1460: ...node is deleted and clear when the other terminating cross connection is deleted NOTE In ring configurations the following rules are used in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 p...

Page 1461: ...ions at each non terminating node for the DS3 service being removed if required 8 Remove the DS3 DS3PM STS1E circuit packs associated with the group s being discontinued if required 9 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the...

Page 1462: ...NTP 012 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1463: ...TAD 100 NOTE This procedure treats the DRI EC 1 configuration as separate components which use the cross connections to integrate the components into the DRI configuration The EC 1 Dual Ring Interworking DRI configuration is established by first equipping the proper nodes with the EC 1 interfaces and then establishing DS1 DS3 service through the network The procedures for establishing service refe...

Page 1464: ...NTP 013 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1465: ...ating end s It also assumes that STS1E circuit packs have been installed if the other end is an EC 1 interface If proper circuit packs have not been installed and the system is in service on other groups refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add a new group MXRVO or STS1E NOTE A maximum of three BBF8 HDSL circuit packs including a protection circuit pack can be installed i...

Page 1466: ...ot already performed 5 At each HDSL terminating node make the appropriate cable connection s to the cross connect point s or equivalent connection point s for the circuit s being added 6 Verify that no LEDs or alarms are activated If any LEDs or alarms are activated refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 and follow the appropriate trouble clearing procedure 7 NOTE Ring releases support only manual VT1 ...

Page 1467: ... should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted cnvt crs to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections NOTE The following commands may be used to convert...

Page 1468: ...eing put into service DLP 510 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 554 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 510 C OC 3 FiberReach Configuration 10 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 11 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i st...

Page 1469: ...ostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that the DDM 2000 is in service and a new optical span are being added See Figure 1 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Use rtrv alm command to verify...

Page 1470: ...re 1 Adding New Optical Span Extension Between OC 3 Rings Existing OC 3 Ring MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C FN A FN B FN C FN A FN B FN C Existing OC 3 Ring MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C FN A FN B FN C FN A FN B FN C MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C New OC 3 Optical Span ...

Page 1471: ...d 4 NOTE 22G U OLIUs require a 10 dB LBO 22G2 U 22G3 U and 22G4 U OLIUs require no attenuation when they are looped back DLP 505 At existing RT connect optical loops to the new OLIUs 5 After new OLIU alarm LEDs go off remove OLIU optical loops at both existing and new RTs 6 Determine the optical loss of the optical facility from office records or by making the required measurements 7 NOTE The Netw...

Page 1472: ...mmunications fecom is enabled 9 NOTE If option switch setting is changed an update must be performed by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the OLIU is reinstalled DLP 514 Reinstall OLIUs if removed and connect each OLIU to the new optical facility 10 NOTE Two or more shelves in the same network cannot have the same system name or TID set by the set ne command Verify no ...

Page 1473: ...command may have been set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 13 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be se...

Page 1474: ... the TGS TG3 circuit pack is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational mode of the system If the mode is Holdover instead of External check that the incoming timing references are connected DLP 513 Set timing mode on TGS TG3 to the timing mode specified in work order or office records DLP 515 15 Perform automatic end to end OC 3 line test at new or existing RT for r...

Page 1475: ... circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that all hardwired installation and testing of the unequipped DDM 2000 shelf has been done It also assumes that power is applied to the shelf PWR ON LED s lighted on User Panel NOTE Some of the circuit packs have option switches which must be set before they are installed DLP 524 Check...

Page 1476: ...0 OC 3 shelf NOTE To avoid timing alarms before the end to end OC 3 system has been established the TGS TG3 option switches must be temporarily set to free running if either of the following is true DS1 external timing is specified but the DS1 timing reference is not yet available Line timing mode is specified but the OLIUs will be optically looped back at the shelf When the DS1 external timing re...

Page 1477: ...ION UNIT groups that have both slots equipped with 27G2 U OLIUs The BBF5 JMPR circuit pack is not needed in Group 4 shelves in any application Install BBF5 JMPR jumper circuit pack if required 6 NOTE OC 3 ring configurations require 22 Type OLIUs DDM 2000 FiberReach host OC 1 applications require 26G2 U 27G U or 27G2 U OLIUs DDM 2000 OC 12 applications require 24 Type 29 Type OLIUs DLP 504 Install...

Page 1478: ...rm during a fiber loopback use the set fecom address com disable command to disable the DCC DLP 505 Install OLIU optical loops 8 NOTE BBG2 BBG2B MXRVO circuit packs must be installed in both FUNCTION UNIT slots 1 and 2 P if BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are going to be installed DLP 506 Install BBG2 BBG2B MXRVO circuit packs if required DLP 507 9 Install BBG4 BBG4B BBG19 DS3 circuit packs if requ...

Page 1479: ... across the TIP and RING of the DS1 circuit output while in an idle state Failure to terminate DS1 outputs may result in violation of FCC Part 15 emission requirements and possibly interfere with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service NOTE 177A Retainer Cards must be installed in all empty DS1 slots...

Page 1480: ...ircuit pack s if required DLP 518 15 Install BBF9 BBF10 IMA LAN circuit packs if required 16 CAUTION The command init sys all may affect service It should never be used on an in service system It should be used only after a shelf has been equipped to reset all provisionable parameters and cross connections to their default values NOTE An inconsistent DCC values alarm will occur when the init sys a...

Page 1481: ... B DS3 EC 1 transmission test DLP 547 20 Perform DDM 2000 OC 3 receiver sensitivity test if required Optional test DLP 516 21 Check office alarm interface as required DLP 519 22 Test protection switching function if required 23 CAUTION The command init sys all may affect service It should never be used on an in service system It should be used only after a shelf has been equipped to reset all prov...

Page 1482: ...onnect OC 3 IS 3 EC 1 spans for example establishing dual ring interworking adding new spans or shelves etc After all shelves in the network have been tested you can establish the end to end DDM 2000 OC 3 subnetwork NTP 022 A DDM 2000 Path Switched Rings NTP 041 B OC 3 IS 3 Dual Ring Interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 to OC 12 or FT 2000 Ring NTP 013 C EC 1 Dual Ring Interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 to OC 12 or...

Page 1483: ...ng Hub Network NTP 047 K Single Homed OC 3 or OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring NTP 060 L Single Homed Release 15 OC 3 or OC 12 Access via WaveStar TDM 2 5G OC 48 Backbone Ring NTP 048 M Dual Homed OC 3 or OC 12 Access via FT 2000 OC 48 Backbone Ring NTP 061 N Dual Homed OC 3 or OC 12 Access via WaveStar TDM 2 5G OC 48 Backbone Ring NTP 045 NTP 047 NTP 060 NTP 048 NTP 061 ...

Page 1484: ...NTP 016 System Turnup 363 206 285 Page 10 of 10 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1485: ...connect point for the HDSL terminating nodes remove the HDSL signals associated with the port s being discontinued FAULT LEDs begin flashing on HDSL circuit pack with signals removed 3 NOTE The UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL is recessed to prevent its accidental operation You will need a small pointed object such as a ball point pen to operate it Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the S...

Page 1486: ...TE In ring configurations the following rules are used in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass thr...

Page 1487: ...elete the pass through cross connections at each nonterminating node for all DS1 HDSL service being removed if required 8 If both HDSL ports on the HDSL circuit pack are being discontinued you may remove the HDSL circuit pack if required 9 If all HDSL circuit packs in a group are removed you may remove the group function unit MXRVO circuit packs and the protection HDSL circuit pack if required 10 ...

Page 1488: ...ate the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command If circuit packs have been removed momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL or use the upd command to update the DDM 2000 internal equipment list If circu...

Page 1489: ...us radiation exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that the DDM 2000 OC 12 ring is in service and an OC 3 1 1 optical span is being added betw...

Page 1490: ...ust be used to verify that the span length can be supported At OC 12 node verify install OLIU circuit packs in FUNCTION UNITS slots FN A FN B FN C or FN D being used for the new OC 3 extension OC 12 Reference 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II DLP 503 4 NOTE 21G 21G U OLIU circuit packs are used in the OC 12 shelf the HIGH LOW POWER switch must ...

Page 1491: ...et the applications parameter to 1 1 For example set oc3 fn a b c d all app 1 1 6 NOTE DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves must be connected through the MAIN or FUNCTION UNITS C slots if the shelf or network is deriving timing from the OC 3 optical links to the OC 12 network See description of the src parameter in set sync command in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service M...

Page 1492: ...ptical facility 13 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configuration of OC 3 lines See the Commands and Reports se...

Page 1493: ...nual Volume I and 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 15 NOTE Two or more shelves...

Page 1494: ...w shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 18 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 36...

Page 1495: ...ssion test for each low speed group if required DLP 511 21 Perform end to end DS3 transmission test for each low speed group if required 22 The network is ready for service to be established Use procedures from both 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual TOP Volume II and 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volu...

Page 1496: ...S BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 1 Adding New OC 3 Optical Span Extension OC 3 Ring to OC 12 Ring Existing OC 12 Ring MAIN B1 MAIN B2 FN A FN B FN C FN D MAIN B1 MAIN B2 FN A FN B FN C FN D Existing OC 3 Ring MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C New OC 3 Optical Span ...

Page 1497: ...P 018 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 9 of 10 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 2 Adding New OC 3 Optical Span Extension to OC 12 Ring ...

Page 1498: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 018 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 10 of 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1499: ...n the DDM 2000 OC 3 system Determine which optical span s is being discontinued 2 Ensure service signals has been removed from the DS1 DS3 EC 1 groups in the span s being discontinued NTP 011 DS1 NTP 012 DS3 and or NTP 036 EC 1 3 NOTE The set ne command also designates a shelf as an alarm gateway network element AGNE Shelves may be assigned an alarm group number default alarm number is 255 At leas...

Page 1500: ...tton Remove optical fiber connections from all OLIUs associated with optical span s being discontinued 5 Remove OLIU s associated with optical span being discontinued if required 6 NOTE The UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL is recessed to prevent its accidental operation You will need a small pointed object such as a ball point pen to operate it If OLIU circuit pack s was removed momentarily depre...

Page 1501: ...shed before continuing with this procedure If all the nodes of the network have not been equipped and installed refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to equip the DDM 2000 shelves and to establish a system NOTE This procedure assumes that TMUX circuit packs have already been installed during the initial shelf turnup at the DS3 terminating end s of the circuit and either DS1 o...

Page 1502: ...Verify that no LEDs or alarms are activated If any LEDs or alarms are activated refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 and follow the appropriate trouble clearing procedure 2 At the DS3 terminating node s of the circuit being established determine which DS3 port is to be put into service and what options are to be selected 3 NOTE The rtrv eqpt command retrieves the Equipage and Version Report This repo...

Page 1503: ...13 Verify the line build out LBO option jumpers are installed as required and reinstall TMUX circuit pack s 6 Make the appropriate cable connection s to the DS3 cross connect point s or equivalent connection point s for the circuit being added 7 At the DS1 terminating node s of the circuit being established determine which DS1 port s is to be put into service and what options are to be selected 8 ...

Page 1504: ...hod may be used resulting in 100 ohms across the TIP and RING of the DS1 circuit output while in an idle state Failure to terminate DS1 outputs may result in violation of FCC Part 15 emission requirements and possibly interfere with other electronic equipment Also AIS should be turned off using the set t1 address ais no command on any DS1 circuit that is not in service NOTE If DS1 protection is re...

Page 1505: ...ocations from the DDM 2000 s internal protection bus Install 177A Retainer Cards into all unused service DS1 slots in groups equipped with MXRVO and protection DS1 DS1PM circuit packs 11 At each DS1 terminating node use the set t1 command to set the characteristics of the DS1 port of the circuit being established 12 At each DS1 terminating node make the appropriate cable connection s to the DS1 cr...

Page 1506: ... crs vt1 ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 and rtrv crs vt1 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of commands Determine the necessary VT1 5 STS 1 cross connections for each node from the work order or circuit order 16 Make necessary VT1 5 STS 1 cross connections for each node in the network 17 NOTE For a DS3 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path ...

Page 1507: ...t the characteristics of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 22 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the DS1 port s of the circuit being established 23 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon sta...

Page 1508: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 020 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1509: ...rcuit packs have been installed if the other end is an DS1 or EC 1 interface If it has not been installed refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add a new DS1 or STS1E group NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Determine which FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is being equipped 2 Use the rtrv alm command to verify that ...

Page 1510: ... delete enter and retrieve STS 1 cross connections dlt crs sts1 ent crs sts1 and rtrv crs sts1 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of commands See Cross Connection Provisioning in the Administration and Provisioning section of this manual for more information on cross connection provisioning Determine the necessary STS 1 cross connections for each node from the wo...

Page 1511: ... signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t3 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command...

Page 1512: ...NTP 021 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1513: ...sure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000s in...

Page 1514: ...e must be set on the TGS TG3 circuit packs NOTE If the option switch setting is changed an update must be done by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the TGS TG3 circuit packs are reinstalled NOTE If external timing is selected and the NE ACTY LED remains lighted after the TGS TG3 circuit pack is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational m...

Page 1515: ...ine Provisioning Report and verify if Kbyte Sbyte is enabled or disabled Use the set oc3 or set oc12 command to enable or disable the Kbyte Sbyte parameter as required 5 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled Kbyte Sbyte must also be enabled NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled at any line timed node in a ring it must be enabled at all line timed nodes of a ring NOTE The rtrv sync comm...

Page 1516: ...8 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 9 8 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE ...

Page 1517: ... OLIU for example MAIN 2 P associated with the optical span being established At the other end remove the optical loop from the associated OLIU for example MAIN 1 in the optical span being established 10 NOTE The section data communication channel DCC used for far end communications must be enabled at each network element shelf optical interface being tested in order for the end to end line tests ...

Page 1518: ...n of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning Use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing as required 13 NOTE The rtrv pm line command in the following procedure displays performance monitoring data associated with the STS 3 lines terminated on the system DLP 515 Perform end to end OC 3 or OC 12 line test 14 Repeat this procedure from Item 2 for...

Page 1519: ...N 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 Node 1 Node 6 Node 3 A A A B B B C C C MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 5 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 3 OC 3 2 P A A 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us 22 Type OLIUs MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 dcc m1 dcc m2 NS NS NS 27 Type OLIUs US NS dcc m1 1 dcc m2 1 dcc m...

Page 1520: ...DM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us 24 29 Type OLIUs MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 dcc m1 dcc m2 NS NS NS 27 Type OLIUs US NS dcc m1 1 dcc m2 1 dcc m1 2 dcc m2 2 dcc a1 1 dcc a2 1 dcc a1 2 dcc a2 2 dcc b1 1 dcc b2 1 dcc b1 2 dcc b2 2 dcc c1 1 dcc c2 1 dcc c1 2 dcc c2 2 NS US NS US NS US dcc a dcc ...

Page 1521: ...ing network using 24 29 Type OLIUs in DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves only If an OC 12 shelf is being added to the ring fibers to support single homing the original OC 3 shelf at the CO use the procedures of NTP 024 instead of this procedure It is assumed that the fiber being used in the current OC 3 ring network will be used to build the new OC 12 ring NOTE This procedure uses a 4 node OC 3 ring as an exam...

Page 1522: ... Lucent Technologies to provide this in service upgrade Experienced Lucent Technologies installers will help you plan and execute the network upgrade For more information contact your Lucent Technologies Account Representative Use the rtrv alm command at the OC 3 ring to verify that no alarms locks or switches are present Figure 1 Example of OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1523: ...cted 5 Upgrade all nodes to OC 3 TARP Release 13 or later software DLP 532 A In Service Local Software Download DLP 562 B In Service Remote Software Download 6 CAUTION Sync autoconfiguration must be enabled at each line timed node in the network At each line timed node in the network use set oc3 syncmsg Kbyte Sbyte command to set Kbyte or Sbyte sync messages Use set sync auto enabled command to en...

Page 1524: ... the unexpected CP type status is still present at this Node and an inc OC 12 LOF alarm will occur An inc OC 3 LOF alarm will occur at the connecting Node At the starting Node install a 24 29 Type OLIU into MAIN 2 P OLIU slot and reconnect optical fibers 13 NOTE A CP removed alarm will occur in this step when the MAIN 1 OLIU is removed A inc OC 12 LOS alarm will occur at the connecting Node with t...

Page 1525: ...ine timing from MAIN 2 P 19 NOTE A CP removed alarm will occur and an inc OC 3 LOS alarm will occur at the connecting Node when the MAIN 2 P OLIU is removed from this Node Other nodes will receive inc VT and STS AIS alarms Lift the faceplate latch and remove optical fibers from MAIN 2 P OLIU for next span being established then remove MAIN 2 P OLIU 20 NOTE When the 24 29 Type OLIU is installed an ...

Page 1526: ...3 Repeat Steps 15 through 22 for all Nodes until you arrive back at the starting Node Last Span Optical Upgrade 24 NOTE A CP removed alarm will occur when the MAIN 1 OLIU is removed from the starting Node At the starting Node Node 1 remove optical fibers from MAIN 1 OLIU then remove MAIN 1 OLIU 25 NOTE When the 24 29 Type OLIU is installed an unexpected CP type status and OC12 connector failed ala...

Page 1527: ...ED FOR DETAILS GO TO 27 Momentarily depress the UPD button on the SYSCTL or execute the update upd command at the starting Node 28 If an OC 12 shelf is to be added to this new ring configuration Use the procedures of NTP 021 in 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II NTP 021 ...

Page 1528: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 023 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1529: ...ade Figure 1 This procedure also adds an OC 12 shelf at the CO and single homes the existing OC 3 shelf to the OC 12 shelf If only the OC 3 optics are being upgraded to OC 12 optics use the procedures of NTP 023 This upgrade starts at the Node adjacent to the CO connected to MAIN 2 P of the existing CO OC 3 shelf and proceeds clockwise Local procedures will have to be written using the concepts of...

Page 1530: ...ftware Download DLP 562 B In Service Remote Software Download 6 Install and equip the OC 12 shelf at the CO using procedures of NTP 002 in 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II Install OLIUs in OC 12 FUNCTION UNITS FN slots that are going to be used for connecting the existing CO OC 3 shelf 7 CAUTION Sync autoconfiguration must be enabled at each l...

Page 1531: ...AIN 1 OLIU is removed A inc OC 12 LOS alarm will occur at the connecting Node with the 24 29 Type OLIU installed At the other end of the OC 12 optical span being established remove optical fibers from MAIN 1 OLIU then remove MAIN 1 OLIU 11 NOTE When the 24 29 Type OLIU is installed an unexpected CP type status alarm will occur The inc OC 12 LOS alarm clears at both ends of the span The inc VT and ...

Page 1532: ...node the inc OC 12 LOF alarm remains until the 24 29 Type OLIU is installed at the connecting Node Momentarily depress the UPD button on the SYSCTL or execute the update UPD command at the Node with both 24 29 Type OLIUs installed 16 Repeat Steps 9 through 15 for all Nodes until you have equipped all nodes outside the CO with 24 29 Type OLIUs except for MAIN 1 at starting Node 1 it will be done at...

Page 1533: ...ar the alarm during a fiber loopback use the set fecom address com disable command to disable the DCC DLP 504 Connect optical loops for FUNCTION UNITS OLIUs just installed in the OC 12 shelf if not already connected 19 NOTE The Network Side NS User Side US parameters of the set fecom command must be set opposite at each end of the optical spans Use the rtrv fecom set fecom command to verify set Ne...

Page 1534: ...v oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configuration of OC 3 lines See the Commands and Reports section of 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv oc3 command format Use the ...

Page 1535: ...n of 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or di...

Page 1536: ...signated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on separate nodes The AGNE parameter of the set ne command may have been set to yes on each new shelf du...

Page 1537: ...e reserved in both directions around the ring to the far end Therefore if a DS3 EC 1 OC 3 STS 3c is terminated cross connected to a function group on a near end and far end terminating shelf it must also be pass through cross connected in every shelf in the network See Cross Connection Provisioning in the Administration and Provisioning section of this manual for more information on cross connecti...

Page 1538: ...optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to the beam CAUTION An automatic protection switch service hit may occur when the correct optical fibers are cut Cutting the wrong fiber lines will cause a service interruption At the point where the new DDM 2000 OC 12 shelf will be added use local procedures to cut the two fiber lines connecting the existing OC 3 shelf at the CO with the adjacent OC 3 she...

Page 1539: ... LED remains lighted after the TGS TG3 circuit pack is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational mode of the system If the mode is Holdover instead of External check that the incoming timing references are connected Also check Mode Switching revertive or nonrevertive and the external DS1 Line Code Format switch settings DLP 510 Set timing mode on TGS TG3 circuit pac...

Page 1540: ...the OC 3 shelf connects to FN 2 P OLIU on the host OC 12 shelf At the near end remove the optical loop from the OC 12 shelf OLIU in FN 1 slot being used 35 At CO OC 3 shelf connect optical fibers from CO OC 3 shelf MAIN 1 slots to OC 12 FN 1 slot being used for CO OC 3 extension Ensure that the fibers are connected to the correct OLIU 36 NOTE If the report in this step indicates wrong fiber connec...

Page 1541: ...9 Type OLIU into MAIN 1 OLIU slot and reconnect optical fibers 42 At the starting node connect the OC 12 faceplate connector between MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P 24 29 Type OLIUs Wait until OC12 connector failed alarm clears 43 CAUTION The update upd command must be executed at the Node with both 24 29 Type OLIUs installed NOTE After the update at this node the inc OC 12 LOF alarm remains until the 24 29 T...

Page 1542: ...e Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I for an explanation of the command parameters and 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineer...

Page 1543: ...rcuit Order 363 206 285 Page 15 of 24 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 1 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1544: ...NTP 024 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 16 of 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 2 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1545: ...of 24 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 3 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1546: ... 2000 Page 18 of 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 4 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1547: ... 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 5 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1548: ...00 Page 20 of 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 6 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1549: ... 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 7 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1550: ...22 of 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 8 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1551: ...ary 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 9 Basic 4 Node OC 3 Ring for OC 3 to OC 12 Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 ...

Page 1552: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 024 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 24 of 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1553: ...ation with one OC 3 TARP Release 13 or later shelf single homed 0X1 on the OC 12 shelf being removed This procedure uses a 3 node OC 12 ring as an example for the upgrade See Figure 1 This procedure will eliminate the NODE 1 OC 12 shelf and replace it with the NODE 5 OC 3 shelf after equipping the OC 3 shelf with 24 29 Type OLIUs NOTE A spare OC 3 shelf is required to preprovision the SYSCTL and 2...

Page 1554: ...wait until alarms clear Label each fiber and repeat this step on the other MAIN OLIU 5 Use rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor commands to determine the configuration of the OC 3 ring being upgraded and how the individual nodes are connected 6 Upgrade all OC 3 nodes to OC 3 TARP Release 13 or later software if required DLP 532 A In Service Local Software Download DLP 562 B In Service Remote Sof...

Page 1555: ... An inc OC 3 LOS blinking FAULT LED on OLIU alarm will occur at the other node connected to the removed fibers Other nodes will receive inc VT and STS AIS alarms At the starting OC 3 NODE in this example NODE 5 OC 3 remove optical fibers from MAIN 1 OLIU then remove MAIN 1 OLIU See Figure 2 11 At the starting OC 12 NODE in this example NODE 1 OC 12 remove optical fibers from MAIN B 1 OLIU and labe...

Page 1556: ...DE NODE 5 OC 3 disconnect optical fibers from MAIN 2 P OLIUs and remove existing OLIUs 19 At the starting OC 3 NODE NODE 5 OC 3 install new 24 29 Type OLIU into MAIN 2 P OLIU slot 20 At the starting OC 12 NODE NODE 1 OC 12 disconnect optical fibers from MAIN B 2 P OLIUs and label 21 At the starting OC 3 NODE NODE 5 OC 3 connect optical fibers from adjacent OC 12 node MAIN B 1 OLIUs to MAIN 2 P 24 ...

Page 1557: ...ISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 25 At the starting OC 3 NODE NODE 5 OC 3 test protection switching and optical fiber integrity by disconnecting and reconnecting one at a time the MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P OLIU fiber connections Wait until alarms clear between disconnecting the fibers Figure 1 Basic 3 Node OC 12 Ring for Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1558: ...63 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 025 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 2 Basic 3 Node OC 12 Ring for Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type ...

Page 1559: ...5 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 7 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 3 Basic 3 Node OC 12 Ring for Ring Upgrade 24 29 Type 24 29 Type ...

Page 1560: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 025 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1561: ...Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that the DDM 2000 is in service and a new RT node shelf is being added to the Path Switched OC 3 or OC 12 Ring configuration See Figure 1 NOTE It is assumed that optical loops are installed on the new shelf that the new shelf has been tested in a looped back configuration and that the proper release of software has been loaded System Turnup NTP ...

Page 1562: ...LS GO TO Figure 1 Adding an RT Node to an Existing Ring Network MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 IN IN IN TSI A B C OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 IN IN OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 2 IN OUT IN OUT Node 2 Node 3 Node 1 Node 6 New Node 7 Node 4 Node 5 Ring 1 Ring 2 ...

Page 1563: ... the cross connections required Use rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor commands to determine systems sites in the network and how they are connected to each other 4 NOTE Two or more shelves in the same network cannot have the same system name or TID set by the set ne command Verify no duplicate TID settings exist The rtrv ne command may be used at each shelf in the network to display settings ...

Page 1564: ...larm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on separate nodes The AGNE parameter of the set ne command may have been set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne co...

Page 1565: ... VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provi...

Page 1566: ... Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in a ring it must be enabled at all nodes of the ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configuration of OC 3 or OC 12 lines See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a descrip...

Page 1567: ... of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 11 WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper op...

Page 1568: ... NOTE If the option switch setting is changed an update must be done by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the TGS TG3 circuit packs are reinstalled NOTE If external timing is selected and the NE ACTY LED remains lighted after the TGS TG3 circuit pack is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational mode of the system If the mode is Holdover ...

Page 1569: ... to the adjacent node DLP 514 19 Connect optical fibers from the other adjacent shelf site to new shelf MAIN 2 P OLIU Ensure that the correct fibers are connected to the proper OLIU MAIN 2 P in one node to MAIN 1 MAIN B 1 in an adjacent node 20 NOTE If the report in this step indicates wrong fiber connections or no connection verify that fecom is ON rtrv fecom and check fiber integrity Use rtrv ma...

Page 1570: ...ed DLP 515 23 Perform end to end OC 3 or OC 12 optical line test on optical spans being established 24 NOTE Proper cross connections must be made at each shelf to establish the complete end to end path for the DS1 DS3 EC 1 port being tested After one path ring1 or ring2 has been tested use the sw path command at both ends to test the other ring path Perform appropriate end to end transmission test...

Page 1571: ... Clearing TAD 100 NOTE The craft interface terminal CIT rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor commands may be used to retrieve a map of the SONET network including a list of the systems in the network and how they are connected The rtrv crs vt1 command may be used to retrieve VT1 5 DS1 cross connections within the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 system The rtrv crs sts1 command may be used to retrieve STS...

Page 1572: ...6 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 7 6 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE The set ne command also designates a shelf as an alarm gateway network element AGNE Shelves may be assigned an alarm group number default alarm number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm g...

Page 1573: ... bypassing the node just removed Ensure all alarms in the ring configuration are off If alarms are present verify fiber connections and integrity 9 If the removed shelf is not to be left powered power down the shelf per local procedures then proceed to Step 12 Otherwise continue with Step 10 DLP 505 10 If OLIU circuit packs are not removed connect optical fiber loops to OLIUs 11 NOTE The UPD INIT ...

Page 1574: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 027 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1575: ...ablish the system NOTE Three IMA LAN circuit packs can be installed in LOW SPEED GROUP A B or C when the associated FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is equipped with the BBG2B MXRVOs Only one IMA LAN circuit pack is allowed in a LOW SPEED GROUP if the associated FUNCTION UNITS group is equipped with the BBG2 MXRVOs NOTE This procedure assumes that BBG2 or BBG2B MXRVO circuit packs have already been i...

Page 1576: ...ersion Report and verify that the proper service and protection if required MXRVO circuit packs have been installed in FUNCTION UNITS group s A B or C being put into service 3 At the LAN terminating nodes of the circuit being established determine from work order and office records which LAN port is to be put into service and what options are to be selected DLP 518 4 At each LAN terminating node s...

Page 1577: ...ed service slots 9 At each LAN terminating node use the set t1 and set lan command to set the characteristics of the LAN port and protocols of the circuit being established See the Commands and Reports section of Volume I of this manual for an explanation of these commands 10 At each LAN terminating node make the appropriate cable connection s to the DS1 DS3 cross connect point s or equivalent con...

Page 1578: ...E In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pas...

Page 1579: ... circuit order 14 Make necessary VT1 5 STS1 cross connections at each node in the network DLP 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 559 C Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 D Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 15 Use the opr lpbk t1 command to loopback the DS1s at the far end 16 Use the rtrv pm lan command to determine the performa...

Page 1580: ...omatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of th...

Page 1581: ...plers to connect the splitter to the optical line This procedure has been tested using a Gould fiber splitter which introduces 3 dB of loss into the fiber span The amount of loss may differ for the type of splitter used and must be considered when doing an upgrade If there is not enough excess loss budget in the optical spans between the CO and first RT to allow the use of a splitter and fiber cou...

Page 1582: ...ologies installers will help you plan and execute the network upgrade For more information contact your Lucent Technologies Account Representative Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 2 Notify maintenance center that alarms will be generated 3 NOTE The Network Side User Side parameters of the set fecom command must be set opposite at each end of the...

Page 1583: ...dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections...

Page 1584: ...TE BBF4 TG3 circuit packs cannot be mixed with BBF2 BBF2B BBF2C TGS circuit packs in the same DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf Before performing this procedure ensure that both TGS TG3 circuit packs are installed in the shelf then use the switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command to switch to the protection TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 if not already ACTIVE Use rtrv sync command to verify that the ...

Page 1585: ...ruary 2000 Page 5 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 11 Use set fecom dcc m com disabled command to disable far end communications fecom at Node 1 Figure 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1586: ...uary 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 12 At Node 1 install optical splitter in optical line between Node 1 MAIN 1 OUT and Node 2 MAIN 1 IN as shown in Figure 2 Figure 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1587: ... BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 13 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch to the service MAIN 1 line main 1 OLIU active rx See Figure 3 Figure 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1588: ...y 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 14 At Node 1 remove optical fiber from OLIU MAIN 2 P OUT and connect it to the other output of the optical splitter See Figure 4 Figure 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1589: ...IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 15 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active rx at Node 2 See Figure 5 Figure 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1590: ... OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 16 Disconnect the fiber from the optical splitter output going to Node 2 MAIN 1 IN Connect the fiber from Node 2 MAIN 1 IN to Node 1 MAIN 2 P OUT See Figure 6 Figure 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1591: ...W IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 17 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active rx at Node 2 See Figure 7 Figure 7 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1592: ...000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 18 Remove optical splitter from Node 1 MAIN 1 OUT and Node 2 MAIN 2 P IN Connect optical fiber from Node 1 MAIN 1 OUT to Node 2 MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 8 Figure 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1593: ...e 13 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 19 At Node 1 install optical splitter in optical line between Node 1 MAIN 1 IN and Node 2 MAIN 1 OUT as shown in Figure 9 Figure 9 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1594: ... IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 20 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active rx at Node 1 See Figure 10 Figure 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1595: ...5 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 21 Disconnect optical fiber from Node 1 MAIN 2 P IN and connect remaining optical splitter output to MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 11 Figure 11 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1596: ...W IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 22 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active rx at Node 1 See Figure 12 Figure 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1597: ...DM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 23 At Node 1 remove optical splitter output from MAIN 1 IN and connect optical fiber from Node 2 MAIN 2 P OUT to Node 1 MAIN 1 IN See Figure 13 Figure 13 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1598: ...OW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 24 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active rx at Node 1 See Figure 14 Figure 14 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1599: ...AIN 2 P IN and Node 2 MAIN 1 OUT Connect optical fiber from Node 2 MAIN 1 OUT to Node 1 MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 15 26 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active at Node 2 See Figure 15 Figure 15 DDM 2000 OC 3 Point to Point to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1600: ...nstalled proceed to Step 32 31 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm gr...

Page 1601: ...uide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning Use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing as required 33 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in a ring it must be enabled at all nodes of the ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC...

Page 1602: ... command retrieves the Synchronization Report This report displays the provisioning and operational information on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set...

Page 1603: ...ectrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure requires that the system be taken out of service long enough to change OLIU optical fiber connections to the ring configuration It is assumed that Release 8 software is initially installed in each shelf to support ...

Page 1604: ...s if not already done Protection OLIUs are required 6 At each shelf use set ne tid tid crs manual command to set cross connect mode to manual 7 NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT...

Page 1605: ...eters for proper provisioning If necessary use set sync command to change timing provisioning 9 Use set fecom dcc m com disabled command to disable far end communications fecom at the near end shelf 10 CAUTION Transmission configuration information for in service systems is stored on the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 In some instances for example during system tests or while performing thi...

Page 1606: ...nd to verify that the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 is ACTIVE Unplug the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 11 CAUTION This step will interrupt service until the optical lines have been properly reconnected Notify maintenance center and other required personnel that service will be interrupted NOTE In the ring configuration optical fibers from MAIN 1 at one node connect to MAIN 2 P at t...

Page 1607: ...p 16 15 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For...

Page 1608: ...ide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning Use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing as required 17 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in a ring it must be enabled at all nodes of the ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC ...

Page 1609: ...command retrieves the Synchronization Report This report displays the provisioning and operational information on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set ...

Page 1610: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 030 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1611: ...f proper circuit packs have not been installed and the system is in service on other groups refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add a new group MXRVO NOTE Three IMA LAN circuit packs can be installed in LOW SPEED GROUP A B or C when the associated FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is equipped with the BBG2B MXRVOs Only one IMA LAN circuit pack is allowed in a LOW SPEED GROUP...

Page 1612: ...MA LAN has an optical connector on the faceplate for optical cable Install cable to connector on faceplate of IMA LAN circuit pack 6 Upgrade all LAN nodes to latest IMA LAN software release if required DLP 525 A In Service Local Software Download DLP 528 B In Service Remote Software Download 7 At each LAN terminating node use the set t1 and set lan command to set the characteristics of the LAN por...

Page 1613: ...nnections are made at intermediate nodes NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross c...

Page 1614: ... circuit order 12 Make necessary VT1 5 STS1 cross connections at each node in the network DLP 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 559 C Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 D Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 13 Use the opr lpbk t1 command to loopback the DS1s at the far end 14 Use the rtrv pm lan command to determine the performa...

Page 1615: ...matically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of the...

Page 1616: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 031 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1617: ...ports are to be discontinued and verify no alarms exist on the system 3 CAUTION Removing the wrong cross connection may cause service interruption Use the rtrv crs command to determine the proper cross connections From work order or rtrv crs command determine the DS1 VT1 5 cross connections for circuit being discontinued 4 NOTE LOW SPEED slots cannot be unequipped without an alarm until all port c...

Page 1618: ...nect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections NOTE The following commands may be used to convert delete enter and retrieve cross connections cnvt crs dlt crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 ent crs vt1 ent crs sts1 rtrv crs v...

Page 1619: ...able from the RJ45 or optical connector on the faceplate of the IMA LAN circuit pack FAULT LEDs begin flashing on IMA LAN circuit pack with signals removed 9 CAUTION Removing the wrong cross connection may cause service interruption Use the rtrv crs command to determine the proper cross connections From work order or rtrv crs command determine the DS1 VT1 5 cross connections for circuit being disc...

Page 1620: ...ioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections NOTE The following commands may be used to convert delete enter and retrieve cross connections cnvt crs dlt crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 ent ...

Page 1621: ...a small pointed object such as a ball point pen to operate it Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL at the LAN terminating nodes or use the upd command to update the equipment list CP removed alarm will retire 15 Use the dlt crs vt1 command to delete the pass through cross connections at each nonterminating node for all LAN service being removed if required 16 If all circuit packs ...

Page 1622: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 032 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1623: ...ith this procedure If all the nodes of the network have not been equipped and installed refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to equip the DDM 2000 shelves and establish the system NOTE The BBF6 T1EXT circuit pack can be used only with the BBG2B MXRVO circuit pack in the Group 4 shelf NOTE If the DS1 terminating end s are in a DDM 2000 OC 3 this procedure assumes that MXRVO c...

Page 1624: ...and format At each DDM 2000 OC 3 terminating end use the rtrv eqpt command to obtain the Equipage and Version Report and verify that the proper service and protection if required MXRVO circuit packs have been installed in FUNCTION UNITS group s A B or C being put into service 3 At the T1 terminating node s of the circuit being established determine which T1 port s is to be put into service and wha...

Page 1625: ... MXRVO and protection T1EXT circuit packs CAUTION When a T1EXT circuit pack is switched to protection removal of any other T1EXT circuit pack in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will result in a loss of service to the protected T1EXT and the removed T1EXT circuit pack Removal of any 177A Retainer Card in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will result in a degradation of service Install 177A Retainer Cards into all ...

Page 1626: ...ll drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future yo...

Page 1627: ...ode in the network DLP 546 A Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 D Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 12 NOTE For a T1 circuit in a path protected ring network the sw path address command must be used at the terminating nodes and dual rin...

Page 1628: ...omatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command Use the set state t1 command to set the port state of th...

Page 1629: ...stalled refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to equip the DDM 2000 shelves and to establish the end to end network NOTE This procedure assumes that STS1E circuit packs optioned for low speed have been installed during the initial shelf turnup at the EC 1 terminating end s of the circuit The other terminating end s may be equipped with DS3 STS1E or MXRVO and DS1 DS1PM circuit...

Page 1630: ...report lists information about each EC 1 port This information includes attributes set by the set ec1 command and parameters set by switches on the circuit pack See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv ec1 command format Use the rtrv ec1 command to obtain the EC1 Port Provisioning Report and verify the hardware and software option settings 4 NOTE DS1 DS1PM ...

Page 1631: ... any LEDs or alarms are activated refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 and follow the appropriate trouble clearing procedure 9 If both terminating nodes are equipped with STS1E circuit packs to terminate the EC 1 continue with Step 10 Otherwise refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to establish initial end to end DS1 DS3 service 10 NOTE Ring releases support only manual VT1 5 an...

Page 1632: ... you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provisioned as STS 1 cross connections NOTE The following commands may be used to convert dele...

Page 1633: ...ve path and repeat this test on the other path DLP 510 A DS1 Single OC 3 Ring Test DLP 554 B DS1 Dual Ring DRI Test DLP 511 C DS3 Single OC 3 Ring Test DLP 553 D S3 Dual Ring DRI Test 13 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the EC 1 port of the circuit being established 14 NOTE If a port is in the nmon n state the signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not autom...

Page 1634: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 034 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1635: ...ervice and that a new group is being equipped with STS1E circuit packs for an EC 1 interface NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 At the EC 1 terminating end s determine which FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is being equipped 2 Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 3 Verify no DS1 DS1PM circuit...

Page 1636: ...t each shelf to configure the transmission path for each DS3 DS1 circuit being established Either terminating drop cross connections or drop and continue cross connections are made at terminating nodes and pass through cross connections are made at intermediate nodes NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections...

Page 1637: ... order or office records 10 Make necessary VT1 5 STS1 cross connections for each node DLP 546 A Single OC 3 Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Configuration DLP 560 F Single Dual OC 3 OC 12 Configuration 11 Perform the appropria...

Page 1638: ...signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state ec1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command...

Page 1639: ... are installed at the other terminating node s of the circuit It further assumes that the EC 1 interface is being discontinued not just an individual DS1 If DS1 DS3 service is being discontinued see System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to discontinue DS1 DS3 service At the EC 1 terminating node determine which EC 1 port is to be discontinued verify service has been removed and verify...

Page 1640: ...inating node s for the EC 1 interface is equipped with DS1 circuit packs then either STS1 or VT1 5 cross connections will be present The rtrv crs sts1 command retrieves the STS 1 Cross Connect Report The rtrv crs vt1 command retrieves the VT1 Cross Connect Report From the work order or rtrv crs command determine the cross connections for circuit being discontinued Use the rtrv crs command at each ...

Page 1641: ...ired 7 Use the dlt crs vt1 or dlt crs sts1 command to delete the pass through cross connections at each non terminating node for all service being discontinued if required 8 If STS1E circuit packs are at the other terminating node remove the service and protection STS1E circuit packs if required 9 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the EC 1 port s of the circuit being e...

Page 1642: ...TEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 11 If the other terminating node s is equipped with DS1 DS1PM or DS3 circuit packs discontinue the DS1 DS3 service at those nodes as required NTP 011 A Discontinue DS1 service NTP 012 B Discontinue DS3 service 12 Verify all alarms are off NTP 011 NTP 012 ...

Page 1643: ...ating end s If proper circuit packs have not been installed and the system is in service on other groups refer to System Turnup Circuit Order IXL 001 for procedures to add a new FUNCTION UNITS group MXRVO NOTE If the LOW SPEED GROUP is to be equipped with any T1EXT circuit packs both service and protection MXRVO circuit packs must be installed in the corresponding FUNCTION UNITS group Also if T1 p...

Page 1644: ...LOW SPEED slot locations should be left empty in groups equipped with MXRVO and protection T1EXT circuit packs CAUTION When a T1EXT circuit pack is switched to protection removal of any other T1EXT circuit pack in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will result in a loss of service to the protected T1EXT and the removed T1EXT circuit pack Removal of any 177A Retainer Card in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will res...

Page 1645: ...n an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the pass through node in the future you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cr...

Page 1646: ... to repeat this test on the other path s Perform T1 end to end transmission test for each circuit being put into service as required DLP 510 A Ring Configuration DLP 554 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 510 C OC 3 OC 12 FiberReach Configuration 10 Use the rtrv state eqpt command to determine the port state of the T1 port s of the circuit being established 11 NOTE If a port is in the ...

Page 1647: ...changed to an EC 1 group to provide an EC 1 interface NOTE If at any point in this procedure the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner you should refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Determine which FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C is being converted 2 Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 3 At the DSX 1 remove the DS1 signals associated with t...

Page 1648: ...des From work order or rtrv crs command determine the cross connections for circuit being discontinued 6 CAUTION Removing the wrong cross connection may cause service interruption Use the rtrv crs command to determine the proper cross connections NOTE DS1 LOW SPEED slots cannot be unequipped without an alarm until all port cross connections are removed The cross connections must be removed first b...

Page 1649: ...nd to delete cross connections associated with all DS1 DS1PM circuit packs being removed 7 Remove the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs from group being converted to EC 1 service 8 Remove the MXRVO circuit packs from group being converted to EC 1 service 9 Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL to update the DDM 2000 internal equipment list 10 Verify that all alarms are off DLP 513 11 Set the...

Page 1650: ...S3 service 17 Determine the necessary cross connections for each node from the work order or office records 18 Make necessary VT1 5 STS1 cross connections for each node DLP 546 A Single OC 3 Ring Configuration DLP 550 B Dual Ring Interworking DRI Configuration DLP 557 C Single Dual OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 558 D Stand Alone OC 3 FiberReach Configuration DLP 559 E Single Dual OC 3 OC 48 Co...

Page 1651: ...signal is not monitored or alarmed The port will not automatically go to the in service i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state ec1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command...

Page 1652: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 038 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1653: ...For example in Figure 1 on page 6 if timeslot m 1 1 1 is dropped at Node 2 verify that the same timeslot is not dropped at another node If duplicates exist for example if timeslot m 1 1 1 is dropped at Node 2 m 1 1 2 is cross connected to c 1 1 1 instead of c 1 1 2 at Node 2 and then m 1 1 1 is dropped at Node 3 then you have duplicate m 1 1 1 timeslot assignments you must rearrange your timeslot ...

Page 1654: ...vailable from manufacturers such as Gould Fibercell Corning DiCon ADC and others CAUTION Plans patch facilities and loss budget calculations must be available for the fiber line to be connected between the CO and the last RT to form the ring network CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be...

Page 1655: ...and Node 2 the first RT use an optical splitter to convert the two nodes into a ring configuration This part of the procedure is similar to a point to point to ring upgrade Use the rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 2 Notify maintenance center that alarms will be generated 3 NOTE The Network Side User Side parameters of the set fecom command must be set o...

Page 1656: ...ll low speed DS1 STS 1 cross connections to corresponding VT1 5 cross connections 8 Use rtrv sync command to check timing mode and parameters for proper provisioning If necessary use set sync command to change timing provisioning to that specified on the work order 9 CAUTION Transmission configuration information for in service systems is stored on the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 In some...

Page 1657: ... configuration may differ but the procedures are the same for any drop or add drop configuration Add traffic is defined in relation to a head end node A head end node is determined for the network and should be the node that terminates the most traffic In this procedure the head end node is Node 1 CO and other nodes are designated as Node 4 last RT RTn Node 3 next to last RT RTn 1 and Node 2 RTn 2...

Page 1658: ... 039 Circuit Order 363 206 285 Page 6 of 32 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1659: ...2 An optical splitter is used to convert the optical span to a ring configuration At Node 1 and Node 2 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch to the protection line Use the rtrv state eqpt main all command to check switch state main 2 OLIU active See Figure 2 12 Use set fecom dcc m com disabled command to disable far end communications fecom at Node 1 Figure 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or ...

Page 1660: ... Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 13 At Node 1 install optical splitter in MAIN 1 OUT optical line as shown in Figure 3 Figure 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1661: ...OW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 14 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch to the service MAIN 1 line main 1 OLIU active See Figure 4 Figure 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1662: ...0 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 15 At Node 1 remove optical fiber from OLIU MAIN 2 P OUT and connect it to the other output of the optical splitter See Figure 5 Figure 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1663: ...ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 16 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active at Node 2 See Figure 6 Figure 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1664: ...2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 17 Disconnect the optical splitter output from the fiber going to Node 2 MAIN 1 IN and connect the fiber to Node 1 MAIN 2 P OUT See Figure 7 Figure 7 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1665: ... ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 18 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active at Node 2 See Figure 8 Figure 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1666: ...DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 19 At Node 1 remove optical splitter from MAIN 1 OUT Connect optical fiber from Node 1 MAIN 1 OUT to Node 2 MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 9 Figure 9 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1667: ... DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 20 Disconnect optical fiber from MAIN 1 IN at Node 1 and install optical splitter in MAIN 1 IN optical line as shown in Figure 10 Figure 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1668: ...ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 21 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 only use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active at Node 1 See Figure 11 Figure 11 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1669: ...32 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 22 Disconnect optical fiber from Node 1 MAIN 2 P IN and connect remaining optical splitter output to MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 12 Figure 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1670: ... ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 23 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active at Node 1 See Figure 13 Figure 13 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1671: ...00 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 24 At Node 1 remove optical splitter output from MAIN 1 IN and connect optical fiber from Node 2 MAIN 2 P OUT to Node 1 MAIN 1 IN See Figure 14 Figure 14 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1672: ...IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO 25 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 1 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the service line main 1 OLIU active at Node 1 See Figure 15 Figure 15 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1673: ...r from MAIN 2 P IN Connect optical fiber from Node 2 MAIN 1 OUT to Node 1 MAIN 2 P IN See Figure 16 27 NOTE Wait until FAULT LED on MAIN OLIU extinguishes before attempting switch At Node 2 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active at Node 2 See Figure 16 Figure 16 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1674: ...gure 17 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade 29 At Node 1 CO and Node 2 disconnect fiber from MAIN 2 P OUT at the CO and MAIN 1 IN at Node 2 Disconnect fiber from MAIN 2 P IN at the CO and MAIN 1 OUT at Node 2 See Figure 18 30 At the next to last Node Node 3 use the switch line fn c pri manual command to switch service to the protection line fn c 2 OLIU active at Node 3 At the la...

Page 1675: ...Node Node 3 disconnect optical fiber from MAIN 1 OUT at Node 4 and FN C 1 IN at Node 3 Disconnect fiber from MAIN 1 IN at the Node 4 and FN C 1 OUT at Node 3 See Figure 18 Figure 18 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade DLP 532 32 At Node 1 CO locally download TARP Release 13 or later software Then use set fecom dcc m2 com disabled command to disable DCC at Node 1 DLP 532 ...

Page 1676: ...is referred to as Add traffic At Node 1 CO use the ent crs vt1 command or ent crs sts1 command to set up main to main pass through cross connections associated with all STS VT timeslots that are terminated on other nodes of the ring but are not terminated at the CO 34 CAUTION Plans patch facilities and loss budget calculations must be available for the fiber line to be connected between the CO and...

Page 1677: ... 4 RTn locally download TARP Release 13 or later software 36 NOTE Service interruption will occur if the following step is not performed for all timeslots that terminate at other nodes in the ring network At last Node 4 RTn use the ent crs vt1 command or ent crs sts1 command to set up all main to main pass through cross connections associated with all remaining STS VT timeslots that are terminated...

Page 1678: ...ed prior to disconnecting the fibers from this node to the downstream node to minimize out of service time For example if channels are added and dropped between Node 3 and Node 4 pass through cross connections must be established in all remaining nodes to minimize service interruption For all added channels use the ent crs command s to set up pass through cross connections from fn c to main at all...

Page 1679: ...re 20 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop Network to Ring Upgrade 43 At Node 2 RTn 2 and Node 3 RTn 1 use the switch line main pri manual command to switch service to the protection line main 2 OLIU active See Figure 21 44 At Node 3 RTn 1 disconnect the optical fibers from MAIN 1 OLIUs At Node 2 RTn 2 disconnect the optical fibers from FN C 1 OLIUs See Figure 21 45 Connect optical fiber from Node 3 RTn 1 MAIN 1 OU...

Page 1680: ... RTn 1 locally download TARP Release 13 or later software 47 Reinstall TGS TG3 circuit pack into TIMING slot 1 Use the switch sync s circuitpack pri reset command to reset the manual protection switch 48 At Node 4 RTn 1 use the ent crs vt1 command or ent crs sts1 command to set up all main to main pass through cross connections associated with all remaining STS VT timeslots that are terminated on ...

Page 1681: ... nodes to be converted Figure 22 shows the completed ring configuration Figure 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 Drop or Add Drop Network to Ring Upgrade 50 Use set fecom dcc all com enabled command at all nodes to enable far end communications fecom 51 What Release of software is installed in the system If Release 15 software is installed continue with Step 52 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 5...

Page 1682: ...en set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm This alarm is valid for Release 15 only Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 53 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ul...

Page 1683: ...rfaces at any node in a ring it must be enabled at all nodes of the ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configuration of OC 3 lines See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv oc3 command format Use the rtrv oc3 command to obtain the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report and verify if Kbyte Sb...

Page 1684: ... command retrieves the Synchronization Report This report displays the provisioning and operational information on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set...

Page 1685: ...components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000 OC 12 shelves in the system have passed the looped transmission ...

Page 1686: ... rtrv eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 20000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records ...

Page 1687: ...ngle homed configuration For example set oc3 fn a app 0X1 8 What Release of software is installed in the system If Release 15 software is installed continue with Step 9 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 10 9 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this single homed OC 3 For e...

Page 1688: ... in work order or office records OC 12 Reference 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II DLP 510 11 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3...

Page 1689: ...e I and 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 13 NOTE Two or more shelves...

Page 1690: ...w shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 16 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 36...

Page 1691: ...st OC 3 node back to the host OC 12 node At the near end remove the optical loop from the OLIU for example in Figure 1 Node 5 OC 12 shelf FN A 1 associated with the optical span being established At the other end of the optical span remove the optical loop from the associated OLIU for example in Figure 1 Node 7 OC 3 shelf MAIN 1 OLIU 18 NOTE The section data communication channel DCC used for far ...

Page 1692: ...e of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The single homed DDM 2000 OC 3 access network is now ready for initial service to be established For DS3 EC 1 STS 3c and video terminations on...

Page 1693: ...SI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT Node 3 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 ...

Page 1694: ...1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 5 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS NS US NS US OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 FN D 1 FN D 2 21 Type OLIUs 0X1 or video NS US NS US NS US NS US 23 Type OLIUs US NS dcc mb1 dcc mb2 MAIN B 1 MAIN B 2 dcc a1 dcc a2...

Page 1695: ...t strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 in the appropriate DDM 2000 FT 2000 documentation NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 or FT 2000 systems have been established in required individual ring configurations Ring TARP...

Page 1696: ...IU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must be used to verify that the span length can be supported DLP 504 At the DDM 2...

Page 1697: ...e alarm during a fiber loopback use the set fecom address com disable command to disable the DCC At DDM 2000 nodes install OLIU optical loops DLP 505 A DDM 2000 OC 3 DLP 504 B DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual 5 Determine the optical loss of each OC 3 optical span from office records or by making the required measurements 6 Remove optical loops from OLIUs in the OC 3 optical span being establishe...

Page 1698: ...ss syncmsg Kbyte Sbyte command to enable sync messaging between the DDM 2000 FUNCTION UNITS OLIUs connecting to the other ring DRI nodes 9 At each DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 DRI node use the set oc3 oc12 address syncmsg disabled command to disable sync messaging between the DDM 2000 MAIN OLIUs connecting the adjacent DRI nodes of the DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 ring For example in the top DDM 2000 OC 3 ring in F...

Page 1699: ...command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on...

Page 1700: ...be set See 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual for an explanation of the command parameters See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning At the DDM 2000 shelf use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA fie...

Page 1701: ... CO 4 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 TRMTR RCVR RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node Secondary Node OLIU OLIU RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node OLIU RCVR TRMTR RCVR ...

Page 1702: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 041 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1703: ...s to support OC 3 IS 3 applications If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office reco...

Page 1704: ... each FT 2000 OC 48 and DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf with a release that supports OC 3 interfaces FT 2000 Ring TARP Release 8 or later OC 48 and DDM 2000 Ring TARP Release 13 or later OC 3 if not already performed 4 CAUTION Ensure traffic is being carried through the FT 2000 primary node to prevent unnecessary service hits for example node B in Figure 1 FT 2000 command CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnectio...

Page 1705: ...de associated with the FT 2000 secondary dual ring interworking node remove BBG6 STS1E circuit pack s from function unit slot s being upgraded to OLIUs for example node D in Figure 1 6 Momentarily depress UPD button on SYSCTL or use the upd command from the CIT 7 At the FT 2000 secondary dual ring interworking node for example node A in Figure 1 use FT 2000 procedures in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 ...

Page 1706: ...r communication and to allow the end to end line tests to work when the optical span is established Default condition in DDM 2000 is enabled for the DCC channel If it has been disabled use the set fecom command at the DDM 2000 shelf to enable far end communications At the DDM 2000 shelf use the set fecom address com enabled nsus ns us command to enable far end communications fecom and set Network ...

Page 1707: ...red per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on separate nodes The AGNE parameter of the set ne command may have been set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbe...

Page 1708: ...e OC 3 node associated with the FT 2000 primary node Note that only cross connections at the DRI node are being discontinued when using the procedures of NTP 036 20 At the OC 3 node associated with the FT 2000 primary dual ring interworking node remove both BBG6 STS1E circuit packs from function unit slots being upgraded to OLIUs for example node C in Figure 2 21 Momentarily depress UPD button on ...

Page 1709: ...DDM 2000 use the set fecom address com enabled nsus ns us command to enable far end communications fecom and set Network Side ns User Side us parameters 26 At the FT 2000 shelf use CONFIGURATION Set OC3 command to set the protection mode to 0 X 1 for the OC 3 slot used for DRI connections if only one Optical Interface is used for the DRI connection If two Optical Interfaces are used for the DRI co...

Page 1710: ...Set ULSDCC L3 command be set See 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual for an explanation of the command parameters See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning At the DDM 2000 shelf use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to desi...

Page 1711: ...AILS GO TO 32 At FT 2000 primary node use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 Line Reset command to switch the designated tributary from secondary node to primary node Switch traffic to primary node 33 Remove all EC 1 DS3 connections between the nodes with BBG6 STS1E LAA4 STS1E circuit packs removed if required 34 The upgrade is now complete ...

Page 1712: ...IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A C EC 1 OC 3 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node Secondary Node OLIU STS1E A B D C OLIU STS1E Traffic carried thru Primary node ...

Page 1713: ...IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A C OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node Secondary Node OLIU A B D C OLIU OLIU OLIU Traffic carried thru Secondary Node ...

Page 1714: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 042 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1715: ...See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves in the system have passed the looped transmission test s System Turnup NTP 016 and the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 ring has been established System Turnup NTP 022 It is also assumed the DD...

Page 1716: ... circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must be used to verify that the span length can be supported DLP 504 At the host OC 3 or OC 12 node verify install 26G2 U 27G U or 27G2 U OLIU circuit packs in FUNCTION UNITS slots A B or C being used for FiberReach access 5 NOTE If fecom is enabled an inconsistent DCC values alarm will occur when the OLIUs are l...

Page 1717: ...9 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 10 9 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE...

Page 1718: ... NOTE All unused ports on the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU must be set to nmon with the set state oc1 command At the near end remove the optical loop from the 26G2 U 27G U or 27G2 U OLIU OC 1 line 1 or 2 for example in Figure 1 OC 3 shelf FUNCTION UNITS A 1 OC 1 line 1 associated with the optical span being established At the other end of the optical span remove the optical loop from the associated OLIU for ...

Page 1719: ...vice Manual for an explanation of the command parameters and 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi Vendor Operations Interworking Guide for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning Use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing as required 14 NOTE The rtrv pm line command in the following procedure displays per...

Page 1720: ... ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 1 Example Single Home Ring Configuration Connections A B C FUNCTION UNITS OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 MAIN OUT IN 22G U OUT IN 22G U 1 2 P OUT IN 26G U OUT IN 26G U MAIN 1 MAIN 2 1 2 P DDM 2000 FiberReach OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 ...

Page 1721: ...FN C US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 dcc m1 dcc m2 NS NS NS 27 Type OLIUs US NS dcc m1 1 dcc m2 1 dcc m1 2 dcc m2 2 dcc a1 1 dcc a2 1 dcc a1 2 dcc a2 2 dcc b1 1 dcc b2 1 dcc b1 2 dcc b2 2 dcc c1 1 dcc c2 1 dcc c1 2 dcc c2 2 NS US NS US NS US dcc a dcc b dcc c MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 4 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 5 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 ...

Page 1722: ...FN C 2 dcc m1 dcc m2 NS NS NS 27 Type OLIUs US NS dcc m1 1 dcc m2 1 dcc m1 2 dcc m2 2 dcc a1 1 dcc a2 1 dcc a1 2 dcc a2 2 dcc b1 1 dcc b2 1 dcc b1 2 dcc b2 2 dcc c1 1 dcc c2 1 dcc c1 2 dcc c2 2 NS US NS US NS US dcc a dcc b dcc c MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 12 OC 12 A A 1 2 P 27G U OLIU US NS US NS 26 Type OLIUs MAIN 1 ...

Page 1723: ... strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves in the system have passed the looped transmission test s System Turnup NTP 016 and the host DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 ring has been es...

Page 1724: ...r or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexer Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must be used to verify that the span length c...

Page 1725: ... set ne command to make new settings 8 What Release of software is installed in the system If Release 15 software is installed continue with Step 9 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 10 9 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway networ...

Page 1726: ...when cross connections are made In Figures 3 and 4 note that all traffic from the FiberReach shelf will be directed to Node 7 because of the slot positions that terminate the OC 1 line NOTE A dual homed ring configuration requires that the first FiberReach MAIN 1 OLIU connect to FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIU on one host OC 3 shelf The last FiberReach MAIN 2 OLIU connects to the FUNCTION UNITS 2 P OLIU on ...

Page 1727: ...ommand at each shelf to enable far end communications At each shelf use the set fecom address com enabled command to ensure far end communications fecom is enabled DLP 514 12 Perform optical fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established 13 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and...

Page 1728: ...end to end OC 1 line test 15 Repeat this procedure from Step 10 for all OC 1 optical spans being established in the DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 1 or OC 12 OC 1 network Ensure that the last optical span connected to the OC 3 host shelf is connected to an OLIU in the opposite slot as the one in the first host OC 3 shelf for example slot 2 P at one node and slot 1 at the other node 16 The dual homed FiberReach ...

Page 1729: ...MAIN 2 Node 4 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P MAIN 1 MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Ring 2 Ring 1 IN OUT Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 1 A B C DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 OC 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 5 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring 2 P A A 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 6 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 No...

Page 1730: ...OUT IN OUT IN OUT Ring 2 Ring 1 IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 OC 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 12 OC 12 2 P A A 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics Node 5 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 1 DDM 20...

Page 1731: ...1 2 P 2 P 2 P IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Ring 1 Ring 2 IN OUT Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 1 B A C MAIN 2 MAIN 1 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 5 A C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 7 A B C C B 1 2 P 2 P IN OUT 1 1 2 P A DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring OC 3 OC 3 OC 1 OC 1 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT 1 A IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 No...

Page 1732: ... 2 MAIN 1 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 12 OC 12 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 2 P 2 P IN OUT 1 1 2 P A OC 12 OC 12 OC 1 OC 1 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT 1 A IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 B A C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 B A C OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics Node 7 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 5 ...

Page 1733: ...Turnup 363 206 285 Page 11 of 14 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 5 Example of User Side Network Side Value Settings OC 3 Ring OC 3 OC 1 OC 1 OC 3 ...

Page 1734: ...2 FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 dcc m1 dcc m2 NS NS NS 27 Type OLIUs US NS dcc m1 1 dcc m2 1 dcc m1 2 dcc m2 2 dcc a1 1 dcc a2 1 dcc a1 2 dcc a2 2 dcc b1 1 dcc b2 1 dcc b1 2 dcc b2 2 dcc c1 1 dcc c2 1 dcc c1 2 dcc c2 2 NS US NS US NS US dcc a dcc b dcc c MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 26 Type OLIUs MAIN 1 MAIN 2 US NS dcc m1 dcc m2 DDM 2000 FiberReach DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defa...

Page 1735: ...T IN 26G U MAIN 1 MAIN 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach A B C FUNCTION UNITS DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring 1 2 P A B C FUNCTION UNITS OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 1 2 P OC 3 OC 1 OC 1 OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 OC 1 OC 1 Node 5 Node 4 OUT IN OUT IN 26G U 26G U MAIN 1MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach OUT IN OUT IN 26G U 26G U MAIN 1MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1...

Page 1736: ... 2 DDM 2000 FiberReach A B C FUNCTION UNITS DDM 2000 OC 12 1 2 P A B C FUNCTION UNITS OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 1 2 P OC 12 OC 1 OC 1 OUT OUT IN IN 27G U 1 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 OC 1 OC 1 Node 5 Node 4 OUT IN OUT IN 26G U 26G U MAIN 1MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach OUT IN OUT IN 26G U 26G U MAIN 1MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 DDM 2000 FiberReach OC ...

Page 1737: ...t be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf in the system has passed the looped transmission test s System Turnup NTP 016 It is also assumed the DDM 2000 FiberReach shelves have been equi...

Page 1738: ...c must be used to derive timing from the FUNCTION UNITS C slot if equipped NOTE At the OC 3 shelf if line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing reference was not available at shelf turnup the TGS TG3 option switches are probably set for free running Before the end to end system is established the specified timing mode must be set on the TGS TG3 circuit packs ...

Page 1739: ...ftware is installed in the system If Release 15 software is installed continue with Step 8 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 9 8 NOTE The Remote NE Status rnestat parameter of the set ne command must be enabled prior to designating the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default ...

Page 1740: ... last FiberReach node back to the host OC 3 node NOTE All unused ports on the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU must be set to nmon with the set state oc1 command At the near end remove the optical loop from the 26G2 U 27G U or 27G2 U OLIU OC 1 line 1 or 2 for example in Figure 1 OC 3 shelf MAIN 1 OC 1 line 1 associated with the optical span being established At the other end of the optical span remove the optica...

Page 1741: ...berReach Multiplexer Wideband Narrowband Shelf TARP Release 3 and Later User Service Manual for an explanation of the command parameters and 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineering rules for subnetwork partitioning Use the ent ulsdcc l3 command to designate the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing...

Page 1742: ...P 045 System Turnup 363 206 285 Page 6 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 1 Example Stand Alone OC3 OC1 Configuration Connections ...

Page 1743: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 045 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 7 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Figure 2 Example of User Side Network Side Value Settings ...

Page 1744: ...NTP 045 System Turnup 363 206 285 Page 8 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1745: ...ischarge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that the DDM 2000 is in service and is being upgraded from Release 7 1 or 7 2 software to TARP Release 13 or 15 TARP Release 13 or later software requires that a new BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL and a BBG9 OHCTL be installed in the shelf This procedure must be performed locally at all shelves in the same control network NOTE If t...

Page 1746: ...f is upgraded single ended operations will not be available and major alarms section DCC channel failed will exist until all shelves are upgraded NOTE This procedure will not affect transmission when properly performed Before performing this procedure on an in service system ensure that both TGS TG3 circuit packs are installed in the shelf and use the switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command t...

Page 1747: ... start a 10 second countdown on the FE ID display 9 8 7 etc During this countdown the SYSCTL may be safely removed If the SYSCTL is failed the countdown may not occur Remove BBG5 SYSCTL circuit pack 7 Remove BBG7 OHCTL circuit pack DLP 500 8 Install BBG9 OHCTL 9 NOTE If upgrading from Release 7 1 to TARP Release 13 or 15 all shelves after the software download is successfully completed the FAULT L...

Page 1748: ...NS US parameters Use the set ne and set fecom commands to set these parameters on the new controllers TID Shelf CO RT Network Side User Side NS US If other parameters have to be reset from default during this upgrade use the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the set commands 11 Repeat this procedure from Step 2 for all shelves being upgraded if not already performed ...

Page 1749: ...atic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that FT 2000 shelves in the system have passed local tests and the FT 2000 ring has been established It is also assumed the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves have been equipped and tested 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release ...

Page 1750: ...r to 0X1 See CONFIGURATION Set OC3 or CONFIGURATION Set OC12 command in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual Provision Low Speed Slot and Port Parameters DLP 517 5 At FT 2000 shelf verify assign DCC channels to FT 2000 low speed OC 3 or OC 12 slots See CONFIGURATION Enter Assignment DCC command in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release ...

Page 1751: ...or set oc12 main 1 dcc distinct and set oc12 main 2 dcc distinct 9 NOTE This procedure will establish the OC 3 or OC 12 ring configuration starting from the FT 2000 host node far end to the first OC 3 or OC 12 node near end then continuing to the next OC 3 or OC 12 node until the final connection is made from the last OC 3 or OC 12 node back to the host FT 2000 node NOTE The Network Side NS User S...

Page 1752: ...is reinserted use the CIT and the rtrv sync command to check the operational mode of the system If the mode is Holdover instead of External check that the incoming timing references are connected Also check Mode Switching revertive or nonrevertive and the external DS1 Line Code Format switch settings DLP 513 Set timing mode on DDM 2000 TGS TG3 circuit packs to the timing mode specified in work ord...

Page 1753: ...mand retrieves the Synchronization Report This report displays the provisioning and operational information on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set syn...

Page 1754: ... The AGNE parameter of the set ne command may have been set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 16 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the FT 2000 via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 OC ...

Page 1755: ...fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established 19 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Serv...

Page 1756: ...C 12 ring is complete back to the host FT 2000 shelf 22 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to v...

Page 1757: ... 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 048 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 047 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 057 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 049 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 ...

Page 1758: ...DM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us MAIN 1 US NS NS dcc m1 dcc a dcc b dcc c NS 22 Type OLIUs 0X1 Rings application MAIN 2 NS dcc m2 FN A FN B FN C 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 US NS US NS NODE 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2...

Page 1759: ... fecom nsus ns us MAIN 1 US NS NS dcc m1 dcc a dcc b dcc c NS 24 29 Type OLIUs 0X1 Rings application MAIN 2 NS dcc m2 FN A FN B FN C 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 US NS US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT ...

Page 1760: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 047 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1761: ...tic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that FT 2000 shelves in the system have passed local tests and the FT 2000 ring has been established It is also assumed the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves have been equipped and tested 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 1...

Page 1762: ... to 0X1 See CONFIGURATION Set OC3 or CONFIGURATION Set OC12 command in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual Provision Low Speed Slot and Port Parameters DLP 517 5 At FT 2000 shelf verify assign DCC channels to FT 2000 low speed OC 3 or OC 12 slots See CONFIGURATION Enter Assignment DCC command in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8...

Page 1763: ...12 node near end then continuing to the next OC 3 or OC 12 node until the final connection is made from the last OC 3 or OC 12 node to the other host FT 2000 node NOTE The Network Side NS User Side US parameters of the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 set fecom command and the FT 2000 DCC orientation must be set opposite at each end of the optical spans For example see Figures 2 and 3 Use the rtrv fecom com...

Page 1764: ...ternal DS1 Line Code Format switch settings DLP 513 Set timing mode on DDM 2000 TGS TG3 circuit packs to the timing mode specified in work order or office records 11 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 or OC 12 main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12...

Page 1765: ...ts section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 13 NOTE Two or more shelves in the same network cannot have the same system name or TID set by the set...

Page 1766: ... new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 16 NOTE If auto reconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the FT 2000 via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 ring to connect to the FT 2000 If the DDM 2000 shelf connecting to FT 2000 via MA...

Page 1767: ...fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established 19 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Serv...

Page 1768: ...OC 12 ring is complete to the other host FT 2000 shelf 22 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to...

Page 1769: ... 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 048 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 047 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 057 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 049 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 ...

Page 1770: ... Type OLIUs 0X1 Rings application MAIN 2 NS dcc m2 FN A FN B FN C OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 0X1 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 NS OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS NODE 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS NODE 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 0X1 US 1A ...

Page 1771: ...FN B FN C OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 0X1 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 NS OC 12 OC 12 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS OC 12 0X1 US 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR T...

Page 1772: ...NTP 048 System Turnup 363 206 285 Page 12 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1773: ...und wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure assumes that the FT 2000 OC 48 ring is in service and a new OC 3 optical span is being added between the OC 48 ring and DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 ring See Figure 1 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing...

Page 1774: ...UNITS C slots if the shelf or network is deriving timing from the OC 3 optical links to the OC 48 network See description of the src parameter in set sync command in Volume I of this User Service Manual DLP 504 At OC 3 or OC 12 node verify install OLIU circuit packs in FUNCTION UNITS slots being used for the new OC 3 extension 4 NOTE The 22G U OLIU s requires a 10 dB LBO when it is looped on itsel...

Page 1775: ...option switch setting is changed an update must be performed by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the OLIU is reinstalled Reinstall OLIUs if removed and momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL or use the upd command 8 At FT 2000 verify provision the FT 2000 low speed OC 3 slots Protection Mode from OC 3 Parameter to 1 1 if both slots are used for the exte...

Page 1776: ...ections and verification of the optical facility 12 Use set oc3 fn a b c or d syncmsg Kbyte Sbyte command to enable sync messaging for the FUNCTION UNITS group used for the new OC 3 optical extension 13 NOTE Two or more shelves in the same network cannot have the same system name or TID set by the set ne command Verify no duplicate TID settings exist The rtrv ne command may be used at each shelf i...

Page 1777: ...way network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on separate nodes The AGNE parameter of the set ne command may have been set to yes on each new shelf during shelf turnup procedu...

Page 1778: ...o multiple areas require that the L3 Area Address and Level 2 IS parameters of the CONFIGURATION Set ULSDCC L3 command be set See 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual for an explanation of the command parameters See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for an explanation of the engineer...

Page 1779: ...in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The network is ready for service to be established For service terminations on a FT 2000 shelf use the procedures in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual to establish ...

Page 1780: ... 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 048 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 047 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 057 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 049 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 ...

Page 1781: ...0X1 Rings application MAIN 2 NS dcc m2 FN A FN B FN C 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 1 1 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 US OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NODE 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 NS DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring NODE 2 D...

Page 1782: ... B FN C 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 1 1 OC 48 1A 2A 3A 2B 1B TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 7B 8A 8B 3 LS INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 US OC 12 OC 12 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A ...

Page 1783: ...lectrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000 OC 12 shelves in the system have passed the looped transmission test s and the host DDM 2000 OC 12 r...

Page 1784: ...ection of this manual for a description of the rtrv eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexer Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or Volume 1 of this User Service manual for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must be used...

Page 1785: ...s installed in the system If Release 15 software is installed continue with Step 9 If Release 13 software is installed proceed to Step 10 9 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this dual homed OC 3 For example set oc3 main 1 dcc distinct and set oc3 main 2 dcc distinct 10 NOTE If line timin...

Page 1786: ...TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II DLP 510 11 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisione...

Page 1787: ...n of 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or di...

Page 1788: ...g the AGNE s and alarm group numbers NOTE Shelves may be designated as an alarm gateway network element AGNE and assigned an alarm group number Default alarm group number is 255 At least one AGNE is required per alarm group One primary AGNE and one backup per alarm group is recommmended For a network greater than 16 nodes the AGNE and TL1 GNE should be on separate nodes The AGNE parameter of the s...

Page 1789: ... the OC 3 line NOTE A dual homed ring configuration requires that the first OC 3 MAIN 1 OLIU connect to FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIU on one host OC 12 shelf The last OC 3 MAIN 2 P OLIU connects to the FN 2 P OLIU on the other host OC 12 shelf Intermediate OC 3 shelves on the same OC 3 ring connect from MAIN 2 P OLIU at one OC 3 shelf to the MAIN 1 OLIU at an adjacent OC 3 shelf node For example see Figur...

Page 1790: ... Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I...

Page 1791: ...t circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The dual homed DDM 2000 OC 3 access network is now ready for initial service to be established For DS3 EC 1 STS 3c...

Page 1792: ...G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN IN IN OC 12 OUT OUT OUT Node 3 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23...

Page 1793: ... B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OLIU Node 1 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT OC 12 OC 12 Node 8 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C...

Page 1794: ... 4 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 7 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS US NS NS US NS US OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us FN A 1 FN B 1 FN C 1 FN D ...

Page 1795: ...LIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 5 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS DDM 2000 OC 12 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 7 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 US NS 2 P TSI Node 4 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OUT...

Page 1796: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 050 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 14 of 14 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1797: ... U OLIUs IS 3 circuit packs in all DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves Existing 3STS1E and STS1E circuit packs will be replaced in this procedure with OLIU circuit packs to support OC 3 IS 3 applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must be used to verify that the span length can be supported NOTE This procedure assumes that the DDM 2000 systems are in service Ring TARP Release 7 or lat...

Page 1798: ...emoved The cross connections must be removed first before removing circuit packs NOTE If the OC 3 circuit pack is going to be using the same cross connects as the EC 1 circuit pack that is to be removed then the only cross connects that need to be deleted are those at the node where the circuit pack is being replaced The pass throughs can remain NTP 036 At the first set of dual ring interworking n...

Page 1799: ...ion channel DCC used for far end communications must be enabled at each network element shelf for the end to end line tests to work when the optical span is being established Default condition for the DCC channel is enabled If it has been disabled use the set fecom command at each DDM 2000 shelf to enable far end communications NOTE The network elements that terminate on each end of the optical sp...

Page 1800: ...h STS1E circuit packs from the OC 3 node For example see Figure 1 Remove the 3STS1E circuit packs from the OC 12 at node C and the STS1E circuit packs from the OC 3 at node H 16 At both OC 12 and OC 3 nodes momentarily depress the UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL or use the upd command to update the DDM 2000 internal equipment list 17 Remove all EC 1 DS3 connections between the OC 3 and OC 12 nod...

Page 1801: ...optical fiber connections and verification of the optical facility DLP 515 22 Perform end to end OC 3 IS 3 line test at DRI nodes For example between nodes C and H in Figure 1 DLP 550 23 At the upgraded DRI nodes use the ent crs sts1 or ent crs vt1 commands to make proper drop and continue cross connections 24 The upgrade is now complete DLP 514 DLP 515 DLP 550 ...

Page 1802: ...T MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C EC 1 EC 1 CO 1 CO 2 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 12 path switched ring IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D MAIN B1 OLIU MAIN B2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 D A B E D C F G H MAIN B1 OLIU MAIN B2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 D MAIN B1 OLIU MA...

Page 1803: ...d to protection removal of any other T1EXT circuit pack in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will result in a loss of service to the protected T1EXT and the removed T1EXT circuit pack Removal of any 177A Retainer Card in the same LOW SPEED GROUP will result in a degradation of service Determine which DS1 ports are to be discontinued and verify no alarms exist on the system 2 NOTE The following operation ma...

Page 1804: ...D INIT button on the SYSCTL at the T1 terminating nodes or use the upd command to update the equipment list Flashing FAULT LEDs go off 4 If a craft interface terminal CIT is available use the rtrv state eqpt command to verify that the right port has been changed from in service i to auto a state 5 CAUTION Removing the wrong cross connection may cause service interruption Use the rtrv crs command t...

Page 1805: ...E In ring configurations the following rules are used in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass thro...

Page 1806: ...XT circuit packs In order to remove an individual T1EXT the cnvt crs may have to be used to convert the STS1 cross connection to 28 individual VT1 5 cross connections If the entire group is being discontinued the STS1 cross connection may be removed if required Use the dlt crs vt1 command to delete the terminating drop node cross connections for all T1 service being removed if required 7 Use the d...

Page 1807: ...ce i state when a signal is detected as it will in the auto a state In the nmon state the port must be returned to the auto state using the set state t1 command to turn on monitoring of signal failures and before any circuit packs associated with that port can be removed from the equipment list by the upd command If circuit packs have been removed momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYS...

Page 1808: ...363 206 285 Circuit Order NTP 052 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1809: ...ures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated mann...

Page 1810: ...ption of the rtrv eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 20000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or off...

Page 1811: ...le homed configuration For example set oc3 fn a app 0X1 8 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this single homed configuration For example set oc3 main 1 dcc distinct and set oc3 main 2 dcc distinct 9 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing reference...

Page 1812: ...g mode specified in work order or office records 10 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned config...

Page 1813: ...DM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter...

Page 1814: ... an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 14 NOTE Only one remote DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf is allowed in this single homed ring configuration NOTE This single homed ring configuration requires that the FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIU on the OC 12 shelf connect to the MAIN 1 OLIU at the first OC 3 shelf from the OC 12 shelf MAIN 2 P OLI...

Page 1815: ...elves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for an explanation of the command parameters and 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Pro...

Page 1816: ... numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The single homed DDM 2000 OC 3 access network is now ready for initial service to be established For DS1 DS3 EC 1 HDSL T1 STS 3c and or LAN terminations on a DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf use the pro...

Page 1817: ...4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT OUT IN TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 M...

Page 1818: ... dcc m1 dcc m1 dcc m2 dcc m2 NS NS NS US US US NS NS NS dcc a dcc a1 dcc b2 dcc b dcc a2 dcc c1 dcc c dcc b1 dcc c2 IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 Node 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C C C C C B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A A 1 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 NS US NS NS NS NS US US US US OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults...

Page 1819: ...res other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manne...

Page 1820: ...ption of the rtrv eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 20000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or off...

Page 1821: ...le homed configuration For example set oc3 fn a app 0X1 8 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this single homed configuration For example set oc3 main 1 dcc distinct and set oc3 main 2 dcc distinct 9 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing reference...

Page 1822: ...g mode specified in work order or office records 10 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned config...

Page 1823: ...DM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter...

Page 1824: ...rnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 14 NOTE In dual homing configurations OLIU circuit packs must be installed in the correct FUNCTION UNITS slots in the host OC 12 nodes to support the direction of traffic required For example see Figures 1 and 2 In Figure 1 if an OLIU is installed in No...

Page 1825: ...e Figure 3 This procedure will establish the ring configuration starting from one OC 12 host node near end and continuing to an adjacent OC 3 node then to the next OC 3 node until the final connection is made from the last OC 3 node to the remaining OC 12 host node NOTE Unused optical connectors on OLIUs should remain looped until optical line connections are made At the near end OC 12 host node r...

Page 1826: ...f the optical span being established 17 NOTE Shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for an explanation of the command paramete...

Page 1827: ...service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The single hom...

Page 1828: ... 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P OC 3 OC 3 IN IN OUT OUT Node 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 5 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Faceplat...

Page 1829: ...B B B B B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A A A A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P TSI TSI TSI TSI TSI TSI TSI TSI OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OC 12 Node 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 5 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 8 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 1...

Page 1830: ... 3 OC 3 2 P 2 P 2 P TSI TSI TSI OC 12 22 Type OLIUs 0X1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A 1 FN B 2 FN A 2 FN C 1 FN B 1 FN C 2 US NS dcc m1 dcc m2 NS US US US NS NS dcc a1 dcc b2 dcc a2 dcc c1 dcc b1 dcc c2 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us 29 Type OLIUs OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics Node 5 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Faceplate C...

Page 1831: ...S NS NS 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P TSI TSI TSI TSI IN OUT IN OUT DDM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us 22 Type OLIUs 22 Type OLIUs 0X1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 FN A FN B FN C FN A 1 FN B 2 FN A 2 FN C 1 FN B 1 FN C 2 US US NS NS dcc m1 dcc m1 dcc m2 dcc m2 NS NS NS US US US NS NS NS dcc a dcc a1 dcc b2 dcc b dcc a2 dcc c1 dcc c dcc b1 dcc c2 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Networ...

Page 1832: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 054 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 14 of 14 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1833: ... other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner r...

Page 1834: ...eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 20000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or office records must b...

Page 1835: ...C 3 linear extension For example set oc3 fn a app 1 1 8 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this OC 3 linear extension For example set oc3 main 1 dcc identical and set oc3 main 2 dcc identical 9 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing reference was ...

Page 1836: ...g mode specified in work order or office records 10 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 3 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report This report displays the provisioned configu...

Page 1837: ...DM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter...

Page 1838: ...new shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 14 NOTE This OC 3 linear extension requires that the FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIU on the OC 3 shelf connect to the MAIN 1 OLIU at the first OC 3 shelf from the OC 3 shelf MAIN 2 P OLIU at the OC 3 shelf node connects to FUNCTION UNITS ...

Page 1839: ...elves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for an explanation of the command parameters and 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Pro...

Page 1840: ...o requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The OC 3 linear extension is now ready for initial service to be established For DS1 DS3 EC 1 STS 3c T1 HDSL and or LAN terminations on a DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf use the procedures in...

Page 1841: ...ode 5 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 IN OC 3 OUT OC 3 OC 3 IN OUT OUT IN TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A ...

Page 1842: ... FN B FN C FN A 1 FN B 2 FN A 2 FN C 1 FN B 1 FN C 2 US US NS NS dcc m1 dcc m1 dcc m2 dcc m2 NS NS NS US US US NS NS NS dcc a dcc a1 dcc b2 dcc b dcc a2 dcc c1 dcc c dcc b1 dcc c2 IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 Node 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C C C C C B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A A 1 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 NS US NS NS NS NS US US US US OC...

Page 1843: ... static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that all DDM 2000 OC 12 shelves in the system have passed the looped transmission test s and the DDM 2000 OC 12 ring has been established as r...

Page 1844: ...cription of the rtrv eqpt command format NOTE If work order or office records do not specify OLIU types refer to 363 206 200 DDM 20000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide and or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of OLIU circuit packs and applications Optical line power measurements and or ...

Page 1845: ...OC 3 linear extension For example set oc3 fn a app 1 1 8 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 command at the remote OC 3 shelf to verify set application dcc parameter for the OC 3 MAIN slots being used for this OC 3 linear extension For example set oc3 main 1 dcc identical and set oc3 main 2 dcc identical 9 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing reference was...

Page 1846: ...06 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II DLP 510 10 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 ring and in the FUNCTION UNITS slots of the host OC 12 shelf NOTE The rtrv oc3 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report T...

Page 1847: ...n of 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I or 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or dis...

Page 1848: ...Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 14 NOTE This OC 3 linear extension requires that the FN 1 OLIU on the OC 12 shelf connect to the MAIN 1 OLIU at the first OC 3 shelf from the OC 12 shelf MAIN 2 P OLIU at the OC 3 shelf node connects to the MAIN 1 OLIU at an adjacent OC 3 shelf node The MAIN 2 P OLIU at the last OC 3 shelf on the OC 3 ring connects ...

Page 1849: ...rtitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I and 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual Volume I for an explanation of the command parameters a...

Page 1850: ...e Additionally transmission tests should be performed to verify the continuity and quality of the established circuit The OC 3 linear extension is now ready for initial service to be established For DS3 EC 1 STS 3c and video terminations on a DDM 2000 OC 12 shelf use the procedures in 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer TARP Release 7 User Service Manual TOP Volume II to establish those service...

Page 1851: ...DM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT Node 3 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 1...

Page 1852: ...1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Node 5 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS NS US NS US OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us FN A 1 FN A 2 FN B 1 FN B 2 FN C 1 FN C 2 FN D 1 FN D 2 21 Type OLIUs 0X1 or video NS US NS US NS US NS US 23 Type OLIUs US NS dcc mb1 dcc mb2 MAIN B 1 MAIN B 2 dcc a1 dcc a2...

Page 1853: ...de 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT OUT IN TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN ...

Page 1854: ... dcc m1 dcc m1 dcc m2 dcc m2 NS NS NS US US US NS NS NS dcc a dcc a1 dcc b2 dcc b dcc a2 dcc c1 dcc c dcc b1 dcc c2 IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 Node 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C C C C C B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A A 1 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 NS US NS NS NS NS US US US US OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults...

Page 1855: ... A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that FT 2000 shelves in the system have passed local tests and the FT 2000 ring has been established It is also assumed the DDM 2000 OC 3 sh...

Page 1856: ...provision the FT 2000 low speed OC 3 OC 12 slots Protection Mode from OC 3 OC 12 Parameter to 1 1 See CONFIGURATION Set OC3 or CONFIGURATION Set OC12 command in 365 575 103 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Release 8 1 Through 9 1 User Service Manual 5 At FT 2000 shelf verify assign DCC channels to FT 2000 low speed OC 3 OC 12 slots See CONFIGURATION Enter Assignment DCC command in 365 575 103 FT 200...

Page 1857: ... 12 node back to the host FT 2000 node NOTE The Network Side NS User Side US parameters of the OC 3 OC 12 set fecom command and the FT 2000 DCC orientation must be set opposite at each end of the optical spans For example see Figure 2 Use the rtrv fecom set fecom command at the DDM 2000 or the CONFIGURATION Enter Assignment DCC command at the FT 2000 to verify set Network Side User Side parameters...

Page 1858: ...packs to the timing mode specified in work order or office records 10 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 OC 12 main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 OC 12 linear extension it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 OC 12 linear extension NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning R...

Page 1859: ...synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual and the OC 3 manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 12 NOTE Two o...

Page 1860: ...w shelf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 14 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the FT 2000 via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 ring to connect to the FT 2000 If the DDM 2000 shelf connecting to FT 2000 via M...

Page 1861: ...ber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established 17 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Servic...

Page 1862: ...linear extension is complete back to the host FT 2000 shelf 20 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests should be perform...

Page 1863: ...000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 048 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 047 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 057 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 049 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 ...

Page 1864: ...7B 8A 8B TRMTR RCVR LS INTFC TRMTR RCVR FT 2000 OC 48 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 7B 8A 8B TRMTR RCVR LS INTFC OC 48 TRMTR RCVR FT 2000 OC 48 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 7B 8A 8B TRMTR RCVR LS INTFC OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 NS A 1 A 2 P B 1 B 2 P C 1 C 2 P NS OC 3 1 1 US US DDM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus us 22 Type OLIUs 1 1 Rings application MAIN 1 identical dcc main F...

Page 1865: ... FT 2000 OC 48 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 7B 8A 8B TRMTR RCVR LS INTFC OC 48 TRMTR RCVR FT 2000 OC 48 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 7B 8A 8B TRMTR RCVR LS INTFC OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 NS A 1 A 2 P B 1 B 2 P C 1 C 2 P NS OC 12 1 1 US US DDM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus ns us 22 Type OLIUs 1 1 FN B dcc b FN C dcc c NS NS NS nc ddm 03 OC 48 Faceplate Connector Passes Thro...

Page 1866: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 057 Issue 3 June 2001 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1867: ... 2000 OC 3 shelves only If an OC 12 shelf is being added to the ring fibers to support single homing the original OC 3 shelf at the CO use the procedures of NTP 024 instead of this procedure NOTE This procedure uses a 4 node OC 12 ring as an example for the OC 12 OLIU ring upgrade Figure 1 This upgrade starts at Node 1 and proceeds clockwise Local procedures will have to be written using the conce...

Page 1868: ...hnologies to provide this in service upgrade Experienced Lucent Technologies installers will help you plan and execute the network upgrade For more information contact your Lucent Technologies Account Representative Use the rtrv alm command at the OC 12 ring to verify that no alarms locks or switches are present Figure 1 Example of OC 12 24 Type to OC 12 29 Type Ring Upgrade ...

Page 1869: ...connecting the cable connected to J45 on the rear of the shelf at the GNE node 5 Use the rtrv ne command at each node in the network to determine if the RneStat parameter is enabled If it is disable it at each node using the set ne command It must remain disabled until this upgrade is completed CAUTION Sync autoconfiguration must be enabled at each line timed node in the network 6 At each line tim...

Page 1870: ... Node 1 in this example remove the faceplate cable connector remove optical fibers from MAIN 1 OLIU and lift the faceplate latch then remove MAIN 1 OLIU 12 Determine if the removed 24 Type OLIU is equipped with an LBO in its OUT connector If it is remove and reinstall it into the OUT connector on the replacement 29 Type OLIU NOTE When the 29 Type OLIU is installed in this step an unexpected CP typ...

Page 1871: ...esent If the update is successful proceed to Step 14 If the MAIN 1 update fails you will see the message main 1 OLIU not updated OC12 upgrade aborted followed by one or more descriptive messages indicating the reason for the failure A Line Fault message indicates that the shelf has detected a degradation of the incoming OC 12 optical signal Verify the optical input level and fiber connections and ...

Page 1872: ...C 12 LOS alarm clears The inc VT AIS and inc STS1 AIS alarms clear downstream 17 Install a 29 Type OLIU into MAIN 2 P OLIU slot reconnect optical fibers and connect the faceplate connector Wait until the blinking FAULT LED on the OLIU goes off before continuing The OHCTL may continue flashing for several minutes 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for all Nodes until all applicable nodes have been upgrad...

Page 1873: ... wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that WaveStar TDM 2 5G shelves in the system have passed local tests and the WaveStar TDM 2 5G OC 48 ring has been established It is also assumed the DDM 20...

Page 1874: ...termine the optical loss of each optical span from office records or by making the required measurements 4 At WaveStar TDM 2 5G verify provision the WaveStar TDM 2 5G low speed OC 3 OC 12 slots to 1 1 enable DCC channels and install circuit packs See Create New Optical Port Protection Group T 302 procedure in 365 371 102 WaveStar TDM 2 5G User Service Manual 5 Use the rtrv oc3 set oc3 or rtrv oc12...

Page 1875: ... opposite at each end of the optical spans For example see Figure 2 Use the rtrv fecom set fecom command at the DDM 2000 or the Enable Disable DCC Terminations T 305 procedure at the WaveStar TDM 2 5G to verify set Network Side User Side parameters at each end of all optical spans being established 7 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing referenc...

Page 1876: ... packs to the timing mode specified in work order or office records 8 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 OC 12 main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 OC 12 linear extension it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 OC 12 linear extension NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning R...

Page 1877: ...ynchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual and the OC 3 manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 10 NOTE Two or...

Page 1878: ...helf during shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 12 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 ring to connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G If the DDM 2000 shelf connecting...

Page 1879: ...orm optical fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established See 365 371 102 WaveStar TDM 2 5G User Service Manual 15 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 206...

Page 1880: ...3 OC 12 linear extension is complete back to the host WaveStar TDM 2 5G shelf 18 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests...

Page 1881: ... TDM 2 5G OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 Configurations WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 061 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 060 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 059 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G ...

Page 1882: ...A 1 A 2 P B 1 B 2 P C 1 C 2 P US OC 3 1 1 NS NS DDM 2000 OC 3 DCC Network Side NS User Side US Defaults set tecom nsus us 22 Type OLIUs 1 1 Rings application MAIN 1 identical dcc main FN A dcc a FN B dcc b FN C dcc c US NS NS NS nc ddm 02 2 6 Port Unit PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN 11 16 Port Unit OC 48 192 OC 48 192 OC 48 192 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN WaveStar TDM 2 5G 10G 1 2 6 Port Unit PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN ...

Page 1883: ...ide NS User Side US Defaults set fecom nsus us us 22 Type OLIUs 1 1 FN B dcc b FN C dcc c NS NS NS nc ddm 04 Faceplate Connector Passes Through Undropped STSs FN A dcc a 22 Type OLIUs 1 1 identical MAIN dcc m US OC 3 Shelf with OC 12 Optics OC 48 192 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN WaveStar TDM 2 5G 10G 1 2 6 Port Unit PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN 11 16 Port Unit OC 48 192 WaveStar TDM 2 5G 10G PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN ...

Page 1884: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 059 Issue 3 June 2001 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1885: ...tion exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that WaveSta...

Page 1886: ...or later software upgrade the WaveStar TDM 2 5G host shelf with proper software Verify that the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves are equipped with TARP Release 15 ring software 3 Determine the optical loss of each optical span from office records or by making the required measurements 4 At WaveStar TDM 2 5G verify provision the WaveStar TDM 2 5G low speed OC 3 OC 12 slots to 0X1 enable DCC channels and insta...

Page 1887: ...set opposite at each end of the optical spans For example see Figure 2 Use the rtrv fecom set fecom command at the DDM 2000 or the Enable Disable DCC Terminations T 305 procedure at the WaveStar TDM 2 5G to verify set Network Side User Side parameters at each end of all optical spans being established 7 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing refer...

Page 1888: ... circuit packs to the timing mode specified in work order or office records 8 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 or OC 12 main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning Report T...

Page 1889: ...mation on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 10 NOTE Two or more...

Page 1890: ...ring shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 12 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 ring to connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G If the DDM 2000 shelf con...

Page 1891: ...rform optical fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established See 365 371 102 WaveStar TDM 2 5G User Service Manual 15 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 2...

Page 1892: ... 12 linear extension is complete back to the host WaveStar TDM 2 5G shelf 18 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests sho...

Page 1893: ...DM 2 5G OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 061 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 060 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 059 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G ...

Page 1894: ...dcc c NS 22 Type OLIUs 0X1 Rings application MAIN 2 NS dcc m2 FN A FN B FN C MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 US NS US NS NODE 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS NODE 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 1 6 Port Units Port Units 2 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OU...

Page 1895: ...c m2 FN A FN B FN C MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 US NS US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Faceplate Connector Passes Through Undropped STSs OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 1 6 Port Units Port Units 2 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PO...

Page 1896: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 060 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1897: ...ion exposure CAUTION DDM 2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge A static ground wrist strap must be worn when handling the circuit packs See electrostatic discharge considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE If the DDM 2000 fails to respond in the indicated manner refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 NOTE It is assumed that WaveStar...

Page 1898: ...or later software upgrade the WaveStar TDM 2 5G host shelf with proper software Verify that the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves are equipped with TARP Release 15 ring software 3 Determine the optical loss of each optical span from office records or by making the required measurements 4 At WaveStar TDM 2 5G verify provision the WaveStar TDM 2 5G low speed OC 3 OC 12 slots to 0X1 enable DCC channels and insta...

Page 1899: ...set opposite at each end of the optical spans For example see Figure 2 Use the rtrv fecom set fecom command at the DDM 2000 or the Enable Disable DCC Terminations T 305 procedure at the WaveStar TDM 2 5G to verify set Network Side User Side parameters at each end of all optical spans being established 7 NOTE If line timing mode is specified or external timing mode is specified but the timing refer...

Page 1900: ... circuit packs to the timing mode specified in work order or office records 8 NOTE If Kbyte or Sbyte sync messaging is enabled for the OC 3 or OC 12 main 1 and main 2 optical interfaces at any node in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring it must be enabled at all nodes in the OC 3 or OC 12 ring NOTE The rtrv oc3 or rtrv oc12 command retrieves the OC 3 Line Provisioning Report or OC 12 Line Provisioning Report T...

Page 1901: ...mation on the synchronization attributes of the DDM 2000 See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv sync command format Use the rtrv sync command to obtain the Synchronization Report and verify if Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled or disabled Use the set sync command to enable or disable the Sync Autoreconfiguration parameter as required 10 NOTE Two or more...

Page 1902: ...ring shelf turnup procedures to suppress an AGNE communication failure alarm Use the set ne command to designate the AGNE s and alarm group numbers as required 12 NOTE If Sync Autoreconfiguration is enabled the DDM 2000 shelf that will connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G via the MAIN 1 should be the first of the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 ring to connect to the WaveStar TDM 2 5G If the DDM 2000 shelf con...

Page 1903: ...rform optical fiber connections and verification of the integrity of the optical span being established See 365 371 102 WaveStar TDM 2 5G User Service Manual 15 NOTE DDM 2000 shelves that are part of a subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that the NSAPAREA field and level 2 IS IS routing parameters of the ent ulsdcc l3 command be set See Section 11 Commands and Reports in 363 2...

Page 1904: ...C 12 linear extension is complete back to the host WaveStar TDM 2 5G shelf 18 NOTE Establishing service requires that the proper slots in each terminating node be properly equipped with the correct circuit pack s for the type of service being established It also requires numerous cross connections in each of the nodes representing the path of the required service Additionally transmission tests sh...

Page 1905: ...DM 2 5G OC 48 DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Configurations WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Dual homing configuration NTP 061 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 Single homing configuration NTP 060 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 linear 1 1 extension NTP 059 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G WaveStar TDM 2 5G ...

Page 1906: ...cc m2 FN A FN B FN C 0X1 NS OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS NODE 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS NODE 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 0X1 US OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 1 1 6 6 Port Units Port Units Port Units Port Units 2 2 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PO...

Page 1907: ... B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A 1 US NS OC 12 US OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Faceplate Connector Passes Through Undropped STSs 0X1 0X1 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 1 1 6 6 Port Units Port Units Port Units Port Units 2 2 PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1 OUT PORT 1 IN PORT 1...

Page 1908: ...363 206 285 System Turnup NTP 061 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1909: ...elf Test Detailed Level Procedure DLP 539 Fuse Remove 48V DC User Panel Detailed Level Procedure DLP 555 Generic Software Version Identification Retrieve Detailed Level Procedure DLP 531 Replace BBG8 BBG8B BBG5 SYSCTL In Service Detailed Level Procedure DLP 501 Install New Generic Program Network Element Software Local Detailed Level Procedure DLP 532 Install New Generic Program Network Element So...

Page 1910: ...tailed Level Procedure DLP 509 Upgrade DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 7 1 or 7 2 to TARP Release 13 or 15 System In Service Non Trouble Clearing Procedure NTP 046 Establish TL1 X 25 Interface Detailed Level Procedure DLP 538 Upgrade Timing Detailed Level Procedure DLP 535 Reference Only Procedures Option Settings Check Set Detailed Level Procedure DLP 513 Replace Circuit Pack Reference Only Detailed Level ...

Page 1911: ...up and restore features to protect provisioning information in ring applications These features save a copy of a node s provisionable parameters so they can be restored at a later date if necessary These features provide backup and restore for Cross connections DS1 port options DS3 port options EC 1 port options OC 3 line options See the CPro 2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool on ...

Page 1912: ...NTP 002 Operation 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1913: ...tion Flashing Clear TAP 110 Alarm Critical CR Clear TAP 101 Alarm Major MJ Clear TAP 102 Alarm Minor MN Clear TAP 112 Alarm NE ACTY Only Clear TAP 117 Alarm Power Minor PMN Clear TAP 104 ED 8C733 30 G7 Fan Shelf Alarm Clear TAP 118 Trouble Report Clear TAP 105 Trouble During Network Element Program Upgrade Clear TAP 116 Trouble During IMA LAN Program Upgrade Clear TAP 122 TAD 100 TAP 109 TAP 110 T...

Page 1914: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing IXL 001 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1915: ...ges received at the operations interface After analyzing the reports center personnel may dispatch someone to the site indicating a local alarm condition The trouble clearing procedures in this manual assume that troubles have been isolated to a particular node and are being used by technicians that have been dispatched to the site The second level of maintenance is a local visual inspection of th...

Page 1916: ...it pack has failed One recommendation as a first step for determining the cause of a failure is to unseat and then reseat the suspected circuit pack For example if a DS3 circuit pack is reported faulty that circuit pack should be unseated and then reseated before being returned as defective This will cause an automatic recovery and diagnostic operation to be performed on that DS3 circuit pack If t...

Page 1917: ... cartons before opening any packaging 3 If possible open all circuit packs at a static safe work position using properly grounded wrist straps and table mats that can dissipate static electricity 4 Whenever possible wait to remove circuit packs from their protective antistatic packaging until it is time to insert them into a bay 5 Never touch a circuit pack s components conductors or connector pin...

Page 1918: ...TAD 100 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1919: ...521 2 NOTE The rtrv alm command can be used to display a report of active DDM 2000 OC 3 alarm and status conditions The Commands and Reports section of this manual gives a description of the command NOTE The Active Alarm and Status Report is output automatically following CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual repo...

Page 1920: ...cation in the Description column of the Active Alarm and Status Report starting with the highest alarm level Critical listed in the Alarm Level column 4 Use opr aco command to silence active audible office alarms if required 5 Find the trouble description in Table A for the highest alarm level and go to the indicated step or procedure Active Alarms and Status Report Alarm Source Date Time Srv Desc...

Page 1921: ...0X1 inc OC12 LOS inc OC12 LOF inc OC12 sig failed BER inc OC12 sig degrade BER Failure of OLIU CP at near or far end or failure of receive fiber TAP 119 ring 0X1 inc STS1 LOP OC12 slotaid If failure on both OC 12 lines unprotected removal or failure of MXRVO or DS3 CP at far end Step 21 If failure on only one OC 12 line Failure of OLIU CP at near or far end TAP 119 ring 0X1 inc OC1 LOS inc OC1 LOF...

Page 1922: ...iring Step 7 inc EC1 line AIS Failure of the STS1E CP or equivalent at other end of EC 1 line Step 25 inc STS1 LOP EC1 Failure of the near end or far end STS1E CP Step 25 CRITICAL CR LED lighted inc STS1 AIS Incomplete or incorrect cross connect provisioning in an end to end network unprotected removal or obscure failure of a DS3 STS1E MXRVO or OLIU CP at the far end unprotected optical line failu...

Page 1923: ...Step 18 CP not allowed crs CP does not support the manual cross connection s currently provisioned for this slot Change CP or change cross connect ions CP not allowed timing When associated with TIMING slot current CP switch settings do not support the sync timing provisioned Change TGS TG3 switches DLP 513 or change sync parameters set sync When associated with FUNCTION UNITS slot C CP type does ...

Page 1924: ...TS1E CP in the companion FUNCTION UNITS slot 2nd CP required for BBF6 BBF9 The BBF6 T1EXT or BBF9 IMA LAN CPs require both FUNCTION UNITS slots in the group to be equipped with MXRVO CPs Insert a second MXRVO CP in the companion FUNCTION UNITS slot CRITICAL CR LED lighted FAULT LED lighted on circuit pack unexpected CP switches unexpected CP type Switch settings invalid different from other circui...

Page 1925: ... lighted or flashing If YES then do TAP 111 if linear extension Do TAP 119 if ring configuration If NO then continue with Step 10 10 NOTE Failure of both the service and protection TGS TG3 MXRVO STS1E DS3 or TMUX circuit packs will activate a Critical alarm Are the FAULT LEDs lighted not flashing on a service and protection circuit pack of the same type If YES then continue with Step 11 If NO then...

Page 1926: ...orrect settings If switch settings are to be changed from what they were previously update the equipment list by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the circuit pack is reinstalled 17 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 18 Have two of the same type service and protection TGS TG3 MXRVO STS1E DS3 or TMUX circuit packs been removed from the system If YES then continue wi...

Page 1927: ...e the MXRVO or DS3 circuit pack associated with the identified OLIU slot in the alarm message Reference DLP 523 24 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 25 If the source address is a function unit slot the likely cause of trouble is a failure of the equipment at the far end of the EC 1 line towards the STSX or the near end STS1E circuit pack Replace STS1E circuit pack DLP 523 If trouble does not ...

Page 1928: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 101 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 10 of 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1929: ...ds and Reports section of this manual gives a description of the command NOTE The Active Alarm and Status Report is output automatically following CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual report Note the information in the Source Address and Description columns for the top entry entries above the first single dashed ...

Page 1930: ...See Addresses in the Commands and Reports section of this manual Use the rtrv alm command to get another report if necessary Note the local trouble indication in the Description column of the Active Alarm and Status Report starting with the highest alarm level Major listed in the Alarm Level column 4 Use opr aco command to silence active audible office alarms if required 5 See Table A for trouble ...

Page 1931: ...F5 JMPR CP in slot 4 P of the LOW SPEED GROUP associated with the FUNCTION UNITS slots where the 27G2 U OLIUs are installed CP not allowed eqpt A DS1 DS1PM CP is installed in a LOW SPEED slot associated with a FUNCTION UNITS slot provisioned for DS3 STS1E_L low speed or OLIU CP service Remove DS1 CP or change function unit to MXRVO or STS1E_H CP high speed ExternalMinor External minor alarm enviro...

Page 1932: ... or shelf connector Step 8 inc EC1 line AIS Failure of STS1E CP or equivalent at far end of EC 1 line Step 8 inc STS1 LOP EC1 Failure of the far end STS1E CP or failure of the STS1E CP at the near end Step 8 MAJOR MJ LED lighted inc OC3 line AIS inc OC12 line AIS Failure of OLIU CP at far end Step 61 MAJOR MJ LED lighted FAULT LED flashing on DS1 DS1PM or T1EXT CP inc from DSX DS1 LOS inc from DSX...

Page 1933: ...pt rtrv state eqpt inc STS1 AIS Incomplete or incorrect cross connect provisioning in end to end network In ring applications unprotected removal or failure of DS3 MXRVO or STS1E CP at far end fiber or OLIU CP failure TAP 120 inc VT AIS Incomplete or incorrect cross connect provisioning in end to end network In ring applications unprotected removal or failure of DS1 DS1PM CP at far end fiber or OL...

Page 1934: ...nerics as a result of upgrade downgrade system command or reseating while IMA LAN CPs are present Clearable alarm by pressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL or upd command SYSCTL IMA gen incompatible Rebooting SYSCTL SW generics as a result of upgrade downgrade system command or reseating while IMA LAN CPs are present Unclearable alarm Must load compatible SW in SYSCTL or IMA LAN CP unexpected ...

Page 1935: ...nc If no trouble found check incoming timing reference signals If timing reference signals are bad issue trouble report of bad incoming timing reference signal s If no trouble found with timing references replace TGS TG3 circuit packs Reference DLP 523 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE MAJOR MJ LED lighted unsupported DCC connection DCC is enabled on an OC 1 connection between the MAIN slo...

Page 1936: ...inue with Step 13 13 In alarm report is there any indication of OLIU or fiber trouble at near end or far end such as inc OC3 FERF or inc OC12 FERF alarm message If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then proceed to Step 16 14 NOTE If there is a DCC failure a remote login to the shelf connected through the Source Address cannot be done The rtrv alm rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor commands ...

Page 1937: ...LP 522 and use the reset command to reset SYSCTL at the far end 19 Is the FAULT LED on the OHCTL circuit pack still flashing section DCC channel failed If YES then proceed to Step 24 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 20 NOTE Unseating and reseating the SYSCTL performs a reset procedure which restarts the software program Unseat and reseat SYSCTL circuit pack Do not depress UPD INIT...

Page 1938: ...to DLP 501 and replace SYSCTL at far end terminal If the FAULT LED is still flashing after the SYSCTL is replaced replace the OHCTL DLP 523 first at one end and then the other if trouble still exists 27 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 28 Is the FAULT LED lighted on the SYSCTL If YES then continue with Step 29 If NO then proceed to Step 34 29 Remove SYSCTL and check switch settings Reference...

Page 1939: ...ED still lighted If YES then proceed to Step 42 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 40 The problem appears to be in the backplane of the DDM 2000 or another circuit pack in the shelf is causing the FAULT LED on the SYSCTL to light Remove service from one function group A B or C and unseat all circuit packs associated with that group If the trouble clears it means that one or more of ...

Page 1940: ...AUTION If a DS1 is switched to protection removal of any other DS1 DS1PM circuit pack or 177P Retainer Card in the same group will result in a loss of service to the protected DS1 and the removed DS1 DS1PM circuit pack Has an unprotected DS1 DS1PM circuit pack or more than one DS1 DS1PM circuit pack been removed from the system If YES then continue with Step 46 If NO then proceed to Step 48 46 Det...

Page 1941: ...rect settings If switch settings are to be changed from what they were previously update the equipment list by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the circuit pack is reinstalled 52 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 53 Is there an inc VT AIS alarm indication If YES then do TAP 120 If NO then do TAP 103 54 NOTE Alarm may be caused by circuit packs inserted into the w...

Page 1942: ...anion circuit pack Reference DLP 513 58 Are switch settings correct If YES then do TAP 103 If NO then continue with Step 59 59 Change switch settings to the correct settings Use sw command to switch to other circuit pack before removing pack If switch settings are to be changed from what they were previously update the equipment list by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL afte...

Page 1943: ... or when the switch mode is inhibited or locked and a failure occurs on a service circuit pack Is the FAULT LED on an OLIU lighted CP failed or flashing inc OC3 LOS or inc OC12 LOS etc If YES then do TAP 111 if linear extension Do TAP 119 if ring configuration If NO then continue with Step 2 2 Are the FAULT LEDs on both a service and protection circuit pack of the same type lighted not flashing CP...

Page 1944: ...o Step 12 8 Replace either of the service DS1 DS1PM circuit packs with the lighted FAULT LED Reference DLP 523 9 Is the FAULT LED on the circuit pack just replaced off If YES then continue with Step 10 If NO then do TAP 106 10 Replace the other service DS1 DS1PM circuit pack with the lighted FAULT LED Reference DLP 523 11 Is the FAULT LED on the circuit pack just replaced off If YES then STOP YOU ...

Page 1945: ...nd Reports section of this manual for a description of the switch commands and the rtrv alm command report descriptions Use the switch commands to reset switching mode or priority If you need assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTAC per local operating instructions 15 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1946: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 103 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1947: ... at the remote terminal 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 5 What type of RT configuration do you have If Bulk Power then continue with Step 6 If Distributed Power then proceed to Step 8 6 Use documentation for your bulk power plant to clear trouble Check AC circuit breakers and verify AC power is present at the RT enclosure 7 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 8 Using digital multimeter...

Page 1948: ... continue with Step 15 If NO then proceed to Step 27 15 Replace one 336A RECTIFIER 16 Did alarm clear within 20 seconds If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 17 17 Replace another 336A RECTIFIER 18 Did alarm clear within 20 seconds If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then proceed to Step 27 19 Is fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped ...

Page 1949: ...time for AC power If necessary equip RT with fully charged batteries or other power source to maintain power until AC power is restored 26 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 27 NOTE If alarms remain multiple troubles exist and trouble analysis must be repeated If you have a J1C182BA Power Shelf use SD 7C117 and SD 7C118 to locate trouble If another power shelf or powering arrangement is used u...

Page 1950: ...TAP 104 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1951: ...eplate of a DS1 DS1PM T1EXT DS3 or STS1E circuit pack flashing inc LOS If YES then continue to Step 5 If NO then proceed to Step 7 5 There appears to be an incoming DS1 DS3 or EC 1 signal failure Refer to TAP 110 and clear the condition 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 7 Is the FAULT LED on the faceplate of any circuit pack in the DDM 2000 lighted not flashing CP failed If YES then continu...

Page 1952: ...ars to be operating correctly with no failures present Return a report of NO TROUBLE FOUND 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 14 Replace the circuit pack that failed the LED test Reference DLP 523 15 Repeat the LED test 16 Did all the circuit packs pass the LED test If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 17 17 NOTE The failure is not in the circuit ...

Page 1953: ... 3 Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 6 4 Use the CIT and reset command to reset SYSCTL 5 Is the FAULT LED on the affected circuit pack still lighted If YES then proceed to Step 8 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 6 NOTE Unseating and reseating the SYSCTL performs a reset procedure which restarts the software program Unseat and reseat SYS...

Page 1954: ... 11 Is the FAULT LED on the affected circuit pack still lighted If YES then proceed to Step 17 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 12 Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 13 If NO then proceed to Step 15 13 Use the CIT and reset command to reset SYSCTL 14 Is the FAULT LED on the affected circuit pack still lighted If YES then proceed to Step 17 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE C...

Page 1955: ... the SYSCTL and any circuit pack with an inconsistent diagnostic indication with the corresponding circuit packs in another DDM 2000 If the problem moves with the circuit packs it means that one or more of the circuit packs is defective If the problem stays with the original DDM 2000 the entire assembly but not the circuit packs should be replaced The DDM 2000 has a printed backplane and cannot be...

Page 1956: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 106 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1957: ...ote login to the near end system if not already performed Reference DLP 521 2 NOTE The Active Alarms and Status Report is output automatically following CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual report Note the information in the Source Address and Description columns for the top entry entries above the first single d...

Page 1958: ...eports section of this manual Use the rtrv alm command to get another report if necessary Does the Source Address of any top entry above the first single dashed line in the alarm report indicate a local alarm If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 6 4 Find the Alarm Level for the local alarm in Table A and go to the indicated procedure 5 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1959: ...o the system nearest to the system with a FAILED communications status or issue a trouble report on the system you cannot log into NOTE The far end alarms refer to alarms in the same alarm group as the local network element For systems you cannot log into FT 2000 issue a trouble report on the system indicated in the Active Alarms and Status Report If possible enter the rlgn TID command to log in t...

Page 1960: ...A FB failed MN A 48 volt power feeder or a fuse on the user panel has failed FA or FB LED identifies failure AC power failed PMN The AC power supply to a remote terminal cabinet has failed ACO active Status The parallel telemetry outputs and audible office alarms normally active due to the alarm conditions in the system are being suppressed See the opr aco command AGNE communication failure MJ A r...

Page 1961: ...G U 27G2 U OLIUs are installed BBF5 required in LS 4 MJ A BBF5 JMPR circuit pack is missing from a shelf Group 3 or earlier with two 27G2 U OLIU circuit packs in the corresponding FUNCTION UNITS slot pair Install BBF5 JMPR circuit pack in slot 4 of the LOW SPEED GROUP associated with the corresponding FUNCTION UNITS slots where the 27G2 U OLIUs are installed communication failure Status The system...

Page 1962: ...or DS1PM circuit pack should be removed from the shelf or the FUNCTION UNITS circuit pack should be replaced with an MXRVO or STS1E_H high speed circuit pack CP not allowed timing CR or MN When associated with a TIMING slot the current circuit pack switch settings do not support the synchronization timing provisioned The user should change the circuit pack switches or change the settable synchroni...

Page 1963: ...opback ABN A loopback toward the optical fiber is active on the specified T3 port See the opr lpbk t3 and rls lpbk t3 commands DS3 loopback to fiber ABN A loopback toward the optical fiber is active on the specified T3 port See the opr lpbk t3 and rls lpbk t3 commands DS3 loopback to DSX ABN A loopback toward the DSX is active on the specified T3 port See the opr lpbk t3 and rls lpbk t3 commands D...

Page 1964: ...n the Active Alarms and Status Report for this condition can be provisioned this is the default message See the rtrv attr env and set attr env commands fan control relay failed MN The thermostat on the SYSCTL circuit pack indicates that the cooling fan should be turned on and the fan control relay on the SYSCTL circuit pack failed to operate The system will continue to operate but it might overhea...

Page 1965: ...set or a lockout or inhibit switch request is received See the switch fn and switch ls commands frequency error MJ This alarm condition indicates that an incoming timing signal has an unacceptable frequency offset Likely causes A DS1 external timing reference to the local shelf or a remote shelf has a frequency offset greater than about 20 hertz holdover mode active NE ACTY System is in holdover s...

Page 1966: ...ceived in the DS1 signal incoming from the DSX 1 or the energy at the DS1 input is below a preset threshold Likely causes Hard failure of upstream equipment or facility towards the DSX 1 The DS1 input is disconnected at the backplane or the DSX 1 equipment is failed or removed at DSX 1 inc from DSX DS1 sig fail MJ MN or None The bit error ratio BER in the DS1 signal incoming from the DSX 1 exceeds...

Page 1967: ...ovides the DS1 timing reference or failure of the connection to the timing supply inc DS1 sync ref OOL MJ or MN The incoming DS1 synchronization reference signal is out of lock OOL The frequency of the clock providing the DS1 reference signal is out of specification Likely cause Failure of the office timing supply that provides the DS1 timing reference inc from DSX DS3 AIS CR MJ MN or NE ACTY The ...

Page 1968: ...ed at both ends inc from DSX DS3 sig fail CR The bit error ratio BER in the incoming DS3 signal exceeds the provisioned failure threshold 10 3 or 10 6 Likely causes Failure of the upstream equipment or facility towards the DSX 3 cross talk in office wiring or unprotected failure of DS3 circuit pack inc EC1 FERF NE ACTY The system has detected the EC 1 far end receive failure FERF signal in the inc...

Page 1969: ...ce wiring or failure of the STS1E circuit pack at the far end inc EC1 sig failed BER CR MJ MN or None The bit error ratio BER in the received EC 1 signal exceeds the provisioned threshold of 10 5 or 10 9 Likely causes Failure of the STS1E circuit pack at the near end failure of the incoming cable cross talk in office wiring or failure of the STS1E circuit pack at the far end inc LAN fail from cust...

Page 1970: ...d description of the failure should be indicated in an associated status message The corresponding AID follows the same guidelines as for the previous message inc LAN Link LOCD Status This status message indicates a loss of cell delineation LOCD failure from the SONET side into the IMA LAN circuit pack An LOCD condition may result from a failure of the ATM Asynronous Transfer Mode mapping function...

Page 1971: ...k An LODS condition results from excessive differential delay between one or more DS1 paths in the IMA channel The condition is cleared by changing the routing of the DS1 channels so that the maximum differential delay is less than 50 ms This message may have a source address corresponding to one or more DS1 ports assigned to the IMA LAN circuit pack e g a 1 1 and should always be accompanied by a...

Page 1972: ...ion on the local area network If the LAN is operating in the half duplex mode this message may result from a far end IMA LAN circuit pack failure inc AAL5 Err from sonet Status This status message indicates that the IMA LAN circuit pack has dropped one or more AAL5 protocol packets incoming from the SONET side This message has the source address of an IMA LAN port e g a 1 and should always be acco...

Page 1973: ...g a 1 inc IMA Grp Fail Startup FE Status This status message indicates that the far end IMA LAN circuit pack is stuck in the IMA Group Startup state This could result from a far end IMA LAN circuit pack failure or if the near end IMA LAN circuit pack does not acknowledge the far end s transition to the Startup State This message has the source address of an IMA LAN port e g a 1 inc IMA Grp Insuff ...

Page 1974: ...r inc OC1 LOS CR or MN The system has detected loss of signal LOS condition on the OC 1 line Likely cause Failure of the OLIU or equivalent circuit pack at far end failure of the receive fiber or failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the near end inc OC1 sig degrade BER CR or MN The bit error ratio BER in the specified OC 1 line exceeds the provisioned soft error threshold 10 9 to 10 5 but below the...

Page 1975: ... inc OC3 sig degrade BER CR or MN The bit error ratio BER in the specified OC 3 line exceeds the provisioned soft error threshold 10 9 to 10 5 but below the hard error threshold of 10 3 Likely causes Failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the near end failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the far end failure of the receive fiber or incorrect setting of the optical power switch on the OLIU circuit pack ...

Page 1976: ...he specified OC 12 line exceeds the provisioned soft error threshold 10 9 to 10 5 but below the hard error threshold of 10 3 Likely causes Failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the near end failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the far end failure of the receive fiber or incorrect setting of the optical power switch on the OLIU circuit pack inc OC12 sig failed BER CR or MN The bit error ratio BER in t...

Page 1977: ...not be found for eight consecutive frames in the identified STS 1 signal Likely causes If this condition occurs on the STS 1 on both OC 3 lines the likely cause is an unprotected failure of an MXRVO or a DS3 circuit pack at the far end If this condition occurs on only one OC 3 line the likely cause is failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the near end or far end inc STS1 LOP OC12 slotaid CR or MN Th...

Page 1978: ... active OC 3 line The system responds to the STS 1 yellow signal by transmitting DS1 or DS3 yellow toward the DSX Likely causes Incomplete or incorrect cross connect provisioning in end to end network unprotected unidirectional failure of the OLIU circuit pack or fiber at some point in the end to end path inc VT AIS CR MJ MN or None The system has detected VT path alarm indication signal AIS incom...

Page 1979: ...or a DS1 LOW SPEED slot has been unequipped inc VT yellow NE ACTY The far end is detecting VT AIS or VT LOP and inserting VT yellow in its transmit signal Likely causes Unprotected failure of a DS1 circuit pack at the near end a DS1 circuit pack at the far end an MXRVO circuit pack at the near end an MXRVO circuit pack at the far end or fiber at some point in the end to end path inconsistent DCC v...

Page 1980: ...n a MegaStar 2000 system the SONET subsystem session is active but is unable to communicate with the RADIO subsystem invalid CP switches CR or MN When associated with a TIMING slot this message means that the timing mode switch settings on the TGS TG3 circuit pack are invalid lockout of protection ABN When associated with an OC 3 line this message means that the identified line is not selected as ...

Page 1981: ...ector failed MN Failure or removal of the OC 12 24G U 24H U or 29G U 29H U OLIU faceplate connector which carries STS 1 STS 3c ring pass through traffic on the OC 12 ring interface on the OC 3 shelf OHCTL CP failed MJ Internal equipment failure of the OHCTL circuit pack OHCTL standby boot fail MN OHCTL circuit pack failed during local or remote software download OLIU CP failed CR or MN Internal eq...

Page 1982: ...partially compatible MJ Clearable alarm by upd command The SYSCTL and IMA LAN generic are partially compatible Likely cause Rebooting SYSCTL software generics as a result of upgrade downgrade system command or reseating while IMA LAN circuit packs are present will result in a comparison with the IMA LAN circuit pack software generic which may result in this alarm SYSCTL IMA gen incompatible MJ Unc...

Page 1983: ...ed For LOW SPEED slots equipped with DS1 circuit packs or FUNCTION UNITS slots equipped with DS3 DS1 or T1EXT circuit packs this message means that a change in a circuit pack switch setting was made When associated with a TIMING slot equipped with TGS TG3 circuit packs this message means 1 The timing mode switch settings on the TGS TG3 circuit pack are a different from those on the companion TGS T...

Page 1984: ...slot if a 24G U 24H U OLIU or 29G U 29H U OLIU is inserted into a MAIN slot of a Release 11 OC 3 shelf expecting a 22 Type OLIU the alarm level for the resulting unexpected CP type alarm is status If the 24G U 24H U OLIU or 29G U 29H U OLIU fails a OLIU CP failed alarm is reported but the status condition is maintained until the circuit pack is removed unsupported DCC connection MJ DCC is enabled ...

Page 1985: ...e with Step 3 3 Is a CIT available If YES then proceed to Step 7 If NO then continue with Step 4 4 Are there associated LED indications for example NE ACTY LED lighted CR MJ MN PMN etc LED lighted when alarm is present etc If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then proceed to Step 11 5 NOTE Unseating and reseating the SYSCTL performs a reset procedure which restarts the software program Unseat an...

Page 1986: ...sponding circuit packs in another DDM 2000 If the problem moves with the circuit packs it means that one or more of the circuit packs is defective If the problem stays with the original DDM 2000 the entire assembly but not the circuit packs should be replaced The DDM 2000 has a printed backplane and cannot be repaired in the field NOTE A CIT and the system rtrv commands may be helpful in determini...

Page 1987: ...lighted If YES then continue with Step 2 If NO then proceed to Step 4 2 NOTE It is better to clear the higher priority alarms CR MJ etc first although in most cases this will not clear an ABN alarm If the higher priority alarm is cleared first you can then use this procedure to clear the ABN alarm NOTE In some cases clearing an ABN alarm will result in a higher priority alarm being cleared For exa...

Page 1988: ... Active Alarm and Status Report is output automatically following CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual report Note the information in the Source Address and Description columns for the top entry entries above the first single dashed line in the Active Alarm and Status Report Figure 1 for example abnormal a 1 1 MM...

Page 1989: ...mand to silence active audible office alarms if required 8 Find the trouble description in Table A for the highest alarm level and note the related commands Table A Abnormal ABN Alarm and Status Conditions Description Related Commands forced switch inhibit switch switch line switch fn switch sync lockout of protection switch line switch ls lockout of service manual switch switch ls manual sync mod...

Page 1990: ...e for you to clear the condition causing the ABN indication If YES then proceed to Step 14 If NO then continue with Step 12 12 There is nothing more to be done until the reason for the ABN condition is known 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 14 Use the appropriate command to clear the abnormal condition The command will be rls lpbk or switch 15 Is the ABN indicator still lighted If YES the...

Page 1991: ...roceed to Step 10 5 NOTE There is an incoming DS1 signal failure This failure can be further isolated using a CIT Connect the CIT to the connector on the User Panel and establish session Reference DLP 521 6 Refer to the Commands and Reports section of this manual under RTRV and use the rtrv commands to further isolate the particular incoming DS1 signal failure 7 Switch service to protection If LED...

Page 1992: ...ntinue with Step 10 If NO then do TAP 108 10 Switch service to protection If LED is flashing on protection DS3 STS1E issue trouble report of bad incoming DS3 EC 1 signal from DSX 3 STSX cross connect point If LED is not flashing on protection DS3 STS1E replace service DS3 STS1E circuit pack DLP 523 With a CIT use the command rtrv alm to verify the alarm 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1993: ...nd receive to the same line CAUTION When removing circuit packs always remove the one without a lighted ACTIVE LED first NOTE A lighted FAULT LED on the OLIU indicates that either the receiver the transmitter or both has failed A flashing FAULT LED on the OLIU indicates that either the near end receiver far end transmitter or incoming receive fiber has failed A lighted ACTIVE LED indicates that th...

Page 1994: ... with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 5 3 Determine the reason the circuit pack s was removed If the same circuit pack is to be reinserted and switch setting is not changed reinstall the circuit pack If the circuit pack was removed and switch setting changed reinstall the circuit pack DLP 514 and momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL If the circuit pack is not to be reinserted mo...

Page 1995: ...ceed to Step 14 12 NOTE Indications are that both incoming receive optical fiber lines have failed or both near end or far end service and protection OLIUs have failed or both TGS TG3 MXRVO or DS3 circuit packs have failed or been removed Check for failed or removed TGS TG3 MXRVO or DS3 circuit packs Replace failed circuit packs DLP 523 Use local procedures to check optical fiber connections and t...

Page 1996: ... rtrv state eqpt report indicates active for the protection line slot 2 P indications are that the protection line is failed If the service line slot 1 indicates active rx at both ends of the system the service line is carrying all service Use CIT and rtrv state eqpt command to check switch status at BOTH ends of the system 18 Use CIT and switch line command to reset switch and switch both near en...

Page 1997: ...oth It may be necessary to perform a switch line at the near end and at the far end to switch both transmit and receive to the same line Is FAULT LED lighted or flashing on both service and protection OLIUs If NO then continue with Step 25 If YES then proceed to Step 32 25 Is ACTIVE LED lighted on OLIUs with lighted FAULT LEDs If YES then continue with Step 26 If NO then proceed to Step 27 26 Use ...

Page 1998: ...tion switch using the rtrv state eqpt command this procedure can not go any further Use the LED indications the rtrv alm and rtrv state eqpt commands to analyze the trouble Look for protection switch locks or inhibits If the system is found to be completely out of service replace circuit packs with lighted FAULT LEDs If system is still in service and a protection switch can place all service on ei...

Page 1999: ...CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual report Note the information in the Source Address and Description columns for the top entry entries above the first single dashed line in the Active Alarm and Status Report Figure 1 for example MINOR dcc m2 MM DD HH MM SS nsa section dcc channel failed Figure 1 Example of Acti...

Page 2000: ... See Addresses in the Commands and Reports section of this manual Use the rtrv alm command to get another report if necessary Note the trouble indication in the Description column of the Active Alarm and Status Report starting with the highest alarm level Minor listed in the Alarm Level column 4 Use opr aco command to silence active audible office alarms if required 5 Find the trouble description ...

Page 2001: ...nd protection OLIU CP in MAIN 2 P slot or failure of receive fiber on the protection line at near end TAP 111 automatic protection switch APS automatic lock Four automatic switches of one DS1 DS1PM CP in 10 minutes DS1 intermittent failure Replace DS1 DS1PM CP DLP 523 CP not allowed crs CP does not support the manual cross connection s currently provisioned for this slot Change CP or change cross ...

Page 2002: ...and status report for this condition can be provisioned this is the default message See the rtrv attr env and set attr env commands Use rtrv attr env command at RT to determine trouble ExternalMinor The external minor alarm input environmental alarm input 15 is active Typically this input will be connected to the power shelf and will indicate that the DC power or the cooling fan in a remote termin...

Page 2003: ... LOF inc DS1 sync ref BER inc DS1 sync ref AIS inc DS1 sync ref OOL inc DS1 sync ref EOOF inc DS1 sync ref OOL Failure of incoming sync ref signal TGS TG3 CP provisioned for wrong frame format SF or ESF Step 17 MN LED lighted FAULT LED flashing on DS3 CP inc from DSX DS3 LOS inc from DSX DS3 sig fail Equipment failed or removed at DSX 3 Step 15 MN LED lighted FAULT LED flashing on OLIU CP inc OC1 ...

Page 2004: ...OC3 slotaid If failure on both OC 3 lines unprotected removal or failure of MXRVO or DS3 CP at far end Step 38 If failure on only one OC 3 line Failure of OLIU CP at near or far end TAP 111 linear 1 1 TAP 119 ring 0X1 inc STS1 LOP OC12 slotaid If failure on both OC 12 lines unprotected removal or failure of MXRVO or DS3 CP at far end Step 38 If failure on only one OC 12 line Failure of OLIU CP at ...

Page 2005: ...failure affecting only one ring direction A VT yellow alarm message is not returned for a non service affecting VT AIS TAP 120 inc VT LOP Unprotected failure of DS1 DS1PM or MXRVO CP at near end or far end Replace CP associated with alarm inc VT sig degrade BER An OLIU CP failure or a fiber failure at some point on the failed ring TAP 119 inc VT unequipped An VT1 5 cross connect has been deleted i...

Page 2006: ...de and node connected to the source address no communication with other end Step 42 MN LED lighted FAULT LED lighted on affected circuit pack OHCTL standby boot fail SYSCTL standby boot fail SYSCTL or OHCTL CP failed during local or remote software download Replace SYSCTL or OHCTL CP and try software download again or download a compatible version of software unexpected CP switches unexpected CP t...

Page 2007: ... YES then do TAP 106 If NO then return to Step 2 11 Is the FAULT LED on the faceplate of one or more circuit packs flashing If YES then continue with Step 12 If NO then proceed to Step 19 12 Find the circuit pack s with the flashing LED s in Table B below and go to the indicated step 13 There is an incoming DS1 signal failure Switch service to protection If LED is flashing on protection DS1 DS1PM ...

Page 2008: ...8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 19 Have two of the same type service and protection TGS TG3 MXRVO STS1E DS3 or TMUX circuit packs been removed from the system If YES then continue with Step 20 If NO then proceed to Step 22 20 Determine the reason the circuit packs were removed If the same circuit pack is to be reinserted and no switch settings are changed reinstall the circuit pack If the...

Page 2009: ... board for blown fuses or tripped breakers Replace fuse or reset breaker if necessary Is 48V fuse blown on User Panel If YES then continue with Step 26 If NO then do TAP 113 26 NOTE The fuses on the G1 shelf User Panel are 5 amp indicator type fuses COMCODE 405697442 With older fuse types insure the indicator end of the fuse is placed into the fuse cap so the indicator can protrude through the hol...

Page 2010: ...s listed in the above note and replace blown 48V fuse If fuse does not blow again reinstall all removed circuit packs one at a time beginning with the SYSCTL Replace any circuit pack that causes the fuse to blow DLP 523 If fuse blows again with one of each pair of circuit packs removed reinstall removed circuit packs and repeat the procedure for the remaining circuit packs except DS1s If fuse blow...

Page 2011: ...ment list by momentarily depressing the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL after the circuit pack is reinstalled 37 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 38 Indications are that there is an unprotected failure or removal of a MXRVO or DS3 circuit pack at the far end associated with the identified OLIU slot at the near end Determine location of the circuit pack s from office records or use the rtrv crs...

Page 2012: ...the shelf connected through the Source Address cannot be done The rtrv alm rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor commands can be used to check for DCC failure for MAIN and FUNCTION UNITS A B or C Also use rtrv fecom command to see if fecom has been disabled Note Source Address of DCC channel failure Check optical fibers connected through the Source Address per local procedures If no trouble found...

Page 2013: ...inal 50 Is the FAULT LED on the OHCTL circuit pack still flashing If YES then continue with Step 51 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 51 At far end terminal reset SYSCTL by unseating and reseating SYSCTL or by using a CIT and the reset command if not already performed If FAULT LED is still flashing after a reset refer to DLP 501 and replace SYSCTL at far end terminal If the FAULT L...

Page 2014: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 112 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 16 of 16 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2015: ...with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 5 4 Look for blown fuses and or lighted LEDs on the battery shelf battery charger or fan assembly Is there any indication of trouble If YES then do TAP 114 If NO then continue with Step 5 5 Is a CIT available If YES then proceed to Step 11 If NO then continue with Step 6 6 NOTE Unseating and reseating the SYSCTL performs a reset procedure which restarts the s...

Page 2016: ... A lists some remaining possible causes of a minor alarm Obtain a CIT and establish session with the DDM 2000 system Reference DLP 521 11 Use CIT and rtrv alm command to get an alarm and status report See the REPORT DESCRIPTIONS section of this manual under RTRV ALM for a description of each message retrieved with the rtrv alm command 12 Refer to Table A Are any of the conditions listed in the Des...

Page 2017: ... lock Service associated with a DS1 circuit pack has been automatically switched and locked onto the protection DS1 circuit pack The APS lock will remain active until midnight Step 14 APS channel failed The APS channel on the protection OC 3 line has failed Step 17 ExternalMinor DC power or fan failure at a remote terminal far end TAP 114 environmentxx A miscellaneous discrete input is active This...

Page 2018: ...cuit pack is not to be reinserted momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL to remove the circuit pack from the inventory 22 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 23 NOTE Indications are that a circuit pack has been installed in a wrong slot switch settings are invalid or different from a companion circuit pack or switches are set differently from what they were before a circuit pack ...

Page 2019: ...D THIS PROCEDURE 31 NOTE The problem appears to be in the backplane wiring of the DDM 2000 One way to verify this is to swap the SYSCTL and any circuit pack with an inconsistent diagnostic indication with the corresponding circuit packs in another DDM 2000 If the problem moves with the circuit packs it means that one or more of the circuit packs is defective If the problem stays with the original ...

Page 2020: ...TAP 113 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 6 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2021: ... with Step 4 4 Is bulk power J1C182BB bulk power shelf being used If YES then proceed to Step 25 If NO then continue with Step 5 5 Is OPEN BATT LED on 337A BATTERY CHARGER lighted at RT battery shelf If YES then continue with Step 6 If NO then proceed to Step 25 6 Condition DMM digital multimeter to measure voltage 7 Measure voltage at 48B and GND and 48L and GND jacks on the LDU faceplate 8 Does ...

Page 2022: ...tton on 337A BATTERY CHARGER Is BAT DISCHG LED lighted If YES then continue with Step 15 If NO then proceed to Step 16 15 NOTE HIGH RATE CHG ON LED will remain lighted until batteries reach approximately 58 volts If batteries are completely discharged it may take approximately one day for HIGH RATE CHG ON LED to go out Release HIGH RATE CHG ACTIVATE pushbutton Does BAT DISCHG LED go off and is HIG...

Page 2023: ... to battery shelf and proceed to Step 24 23 Replace battery packs one at a time until 48 volts is present at output jacks on battery shelf 24 Does alarm clear If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 25 25 Is FAN ALARM LED lighted on a fan assembly If YES then continue with Step 26 If NO then proceed to Step 37 26 Remove FAN H and FAN L fuses on correspondin...

Page 2024: ...kages and reinstall fan assembly and fuses 33 Is fan assembly FAN ALARM LED off If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE f1 If NO then continue with Step 34 34 Remove FAN H and FAN L fuses on corresponding BFU 35 Replace fan assembly with new fan assembly and install fuses 36 Is fan assembly FAN ALARM LED off If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Ste...

Page 2025: ...S then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 42 42 Reinstall original 336A RECTIFIER 43 If you need technical assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTAC per local operating instructions 44 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2026: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 114 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2027: ...epeat the LED test 3 Did the same LED fail the test again If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 4 NOTE Using the CIT and reset command or unseating and reseating the SYSCTL restarts the software program Enter reset command or unseat and reseat SYSCTL circuit pack Do not depress UPD INIT button 5 Repeat the LED test 6 Did the same LED s fail the test aga...

Page 2028: ...iagnostic indication with the corresponding circuit packs in another DDM 2000 If the problem moves with the circuit packs it means that one or more of the circuit packs is defective If the problem stays with the original DDM 2000 the entire assembly but not the circuit packs should be replaced The DDM 2000 has a printed backplane and cannot be repaired in the field If you need technical assistance...

Page 2029: ... software If YES then continue with Step 2 If NO then proceed to Step 4 2 Indications are that you are trying to download software that is incompatible with the shelf type for example DDM 2000 OC 12 software into a DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf or Controller type for example ring software prior to Release 9 into BBG8 BBG8B and BBG9 controllers Find compatible software If you need assistance notify your supe...

Page 2030: ... has been removed or the program has previously been erased from the SYSCTL Check that the PC is operating properly and the diskette has not been removed Check PC to CIT port connections Has program installation procedure been tried more than once If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then proceed to Step 15 8 Was the following or similar message received ins prog tid DENY SSTP Status execution s...

Page 2031: ...proceed to Step 19 If NO then continue with Step 14 14 NOTE It is assumed that the program installation failed in one of two ways before the old program was erased or after the old program was erased If the program installation failed after 1 minute the DDM 2000 may have erased its old program and will be unable to report alarms or do protection switches If program installation failed within 1 min...

Page 2032: ...ll the old program B If a P was displayed in the FE ID display during a software download and you cannot load the program from the far end you can force the download To load another version of software unseat and then reseat the SYSCTL and immediately push and hold the FE SEL and UPD INIT buttons at the same time until a P appears in the FE ID display Release buttons and repeat the download proced...

Page 2033: ...ep 20 If YES then proceed to Step 23 20 CAUTION Replacing the SYSCTL involves updating the internal memory on the circuit pack Replace the SYSCTL or OHCTL Reference DLP 523 21 Repeat program installation procedure Reference DLP 532 22 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 23 If you need technical assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologi...

Page 2034: ...TAP 116 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 6 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2035: ... The Active Alarm and Status Report is output automatically following CIT log in The report shown in Figure 1 is an example that shows one entry There may be many entries in the actual report Note the information in the Source Address and Description columns for the top entry entries above the first single dashed line in the Active Alarm and Status Report Figure 1 for example ne acty m2 1 1 1 MM D...

Page 2036: ...ction or operations interface DCC X 25 etc where the event occurred See Addresses in the Commands and Reports section of this manual Use the rtrv alm command to get another report if necessary Note the trouble indication in the Description column of the Active Alarm and Status Report 4 Find the trouble description in Table A and perform the indicated repair procedure s 5 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED TH...

Page 2037: ...isioning both systems the same set sync and rtrv sync commands The condition can be cleared by repairing at least one of timing references if both are failed and resetting synchronization mode protection switch with command switch sync s mode pri reset inc OC1 line AIS The system detects inc OC 1 line AIS on active incoming OC 1 line Likely cause Failure of OLIU circuit pack at far end TAP 119 inc...

Page 2038: ... the OLIU circuit pack at the near end the OLIU circuit pack at the far end or the transmit fiber on the specified line TAP 119 inc OC3 FERF The system detects the OC 3 far end receive failure FERF signal in the incoming OC 3 signal Likely causes The far end has detected an incoming signal failure on the specified OC 3 line This may be caused by failure of the OLIU circuit pack at the near end the...

Page 2039: ... LED lighted indicates fan filter needs replacing FAN FAULT 1 2 3 or 4 LED lighted indicates single fan failure Execute ALARM RESET after failure is cleared Is POWER ON LED lighted on fan shelf If NO then continue with Step 2 If YES then proceed to Step 9 2 Are POWER RESET A and B circuit breakers tripped pins extended If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 7 3 Reset circuit b...

Page 2040: ...r to trip The fan shelf must be repaired within 4 hours of minor alarm indication Service interruption and or circuit pack failure may occur if fan shelf is not replaced 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 7 Trouble in power feeder s Check office battery distribution fuse panel for blown fuses Check power feeders to fan shelf Power must be restored within 4 hours of minor alarm indication Ser...

Page 2041: ...f 16 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 17 Is CONTROL FAULT LED lighted on fan shelf If YES then continue with Step 18 If NO then proceed to Step 20 18 CAUTION Exercise care in removing the fiber tray or fiber support bracket to prevent damage to the optical fibers NOTE To remove a fan shelf located between two OC 3 shelves it may be necessary to remove either the fiber tray from the top OC 3 ...

Page 2042: ...2000 equipment to overheat If experienced personnel are not available to clean the air flow sensor element it is recommended you replace the fan shelf NOTE Trouble in fan shelf or air flow sensor Replace fan shelf or clean air flow sensor within 4 hours of minor alarm indication Service interruption and or circuit pack failure may occur if fan shelf is not replaced Are you going to clean the air f...

Page 2043: ...ve 2 screws holding fan in place Slide out fan pack Remove fan pack 2 See Figure 2 29 Locate air flow sensor Figure 2 and direct a gentle blast of clean dry air toward the center of the vertical sensor orifice 30 Reinsert fan pack 2 Reinstall screws and connect fan cable 31 Reinstall front cover and momentarily depress the ALARM RESET button 32 Is FILTER REPLACE LED lighted on fan shelf If YES the...

Page 2044: ... DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER 35 Momentarily depress the ALARM RESET button to reset alarms 36 Verify that all fan shelf alarm LEDs are extinguished and no circuit breakers are tripped 37 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 1 DDM 2000 Fan Shelf Front Cover Removed ...

Page 2045: ...TAP 118 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 7 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 2 DDM 2000 Fan Shelf Air Flow Sensor Location ...

Page 2046: ...363 206 285 Trouble Clearing TAP 118 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2047: ...tch path all pri manual command to switch all VT STS paths to the OLIU and fiber that are not being removed or replaced CAUTION If timing source has been previously set to optical line main 1 or main 2 that has failed use the set sync src main 1 or main 2 command to select timing source from good optical line NOTE A lighted FAULT LED on the OLIU indicates that either the receiver the transmitter o...

Page 2048: ... button on the SYSCTL to remove the circuit pack from equipment inventory 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 5 Is OLIU s installed in correct slot s rtrv eqpt If NO then continue with Step 6 If YES then proceed to Step 8 6 Remove optical fibers from circuit packs if connected then remove circuit pack s from wrong slot s Install circuit pack s into correct slot s Reconnect optical fibers DLP ...

Page 2049: ...ecessary If no trouble is found in the optical fibers replace OLIU s at near end first DLP 523 If trouble still exists replace OLIU s at far end Check for removed or failed TGS TG3 MXRVO or DS3 circuit packs at the far end If trouble still exists trouble is in receive optical fiber associated with OLIU with flashing LED Clear trouble in optical fiber per local procedures 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED...

Page 2050: ...TAP 119 Trouble Clearing 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2051: ...the service is cross connected to a DS1 DS3 or EC1 drop can be caused by missing or incorrect cross connections at the other terminal shelf or at any shelves where the service should be pass through cross connected NOTE An STS1 may contain only one VT when dropped causes an inc STS1 AIS since it is the only one connected in the STS1 Does the alarm and status report indicate incoming VT AIS or STS1...

Page 2052: ...ommand at both shelves to verify that the shelves are properly equipped for the service being provided If the shelves are not properly equipped install circuit packs as required 8 Have all indications of STS1 AIS cleared If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 9 9 Using the rlgn command where possible or have the central maintenance center login to every sh...

Page 2053: ...S then continue with Step 15 If NO then proceed to Step 17 15 Use the commands ent crs and dlt crs as necessary to correct the provisioning 16 Have all indications of VT AIS cleared If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 17 17 NOTE If the service is STS1 cross connected at either terminating shelf both terminating shelves must be equipped to terminate the ...

Page 2054: ... records If service is cross connected through other maintenance subnetworks such as dual ring interworking DRI look for missing cross connections in the other subnetworks 20 Are there any missing cross connects If YES then continue with Step 21 If NO then proceed to Step 24 21 At any shelves with missing cross connects use ent crs to provision the pass through cross connect 22 Use the rtrv alm co...

Page 2055: ...ltage at fuse holder FA or FB 4 Does voltage measure less than 40 volts DC If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then proceed to Step 7 5 CAUTION During brownout conditions the SYSCTL will suspend normal operations No alarms will be generated and CIT commands will not work Local and remote logins will not work Trouble in power feeder s Check office battery distribution panel for low voltage condi...

Page 2056: ...TED THIS PROCEDURE 11 NOTE Unseating and reseating SYSCTL circuit pack performs a reset procedure which restarts the software program Unseat and reseat SYSCTL circuit pack or use reset command Do not press UPD INIT pushbutton 12 Is trouble cleared If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 13 13 CAUTION Replacing the SYSCTL involves updating the internal memor...

Page 2057: ...If NO then proceed to Step 4 2 Indications are that you are trying to download IMA LAN software into a network element that does not support this feature i e installing IMA LAN software into an OC 3 shelf running Release 13 0 If you need assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTAC per local operating instructions 3 STOP YOU HAVE COMP...

Page 2058: ...k that the PC is operating properly and the diskette has not been removed Check PC to CIT port connections Has program installation procedure been tried more than once If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then proceed to Step 15 8 Was the following or similar message received ins prog tid DENY SSTP Status execution stopped Far end not responding If YES then continue with Step 9 If NO then procee...

Page 2059: ... port to CIT connection Check PC disk drive and floppy diskette 15 NOTE The new program installation may have failed because of faulty diskettes Disconnect PC and repeat program installation procedure Use your backup diskettes containing new generic program if available If you need technical assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTA...

Page 2060: ...uit pack Replace the SYSCTL or OHCTL Reference DLP 523 21 Repeat program installation procedure Reference DLP 532 22 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 23 If you need technical assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTAC per local operating instructions 24 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE DLP 523 DLP 532 ...

Page 2061: ...SYSCTL DLP 549 circuit packs before new software can be installed DLP 561 An OHCTL must have software installed and it must be the same as the software in the BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL If no software is installed or if the software is not compatible with software in the SYSCTL you must find circuit packs with compatible software or install new software in both the OHCTL and SYSCTL when the SYSCTL is insta...

Page 2062: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 500 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2063: ...the system to run the new software Before performing this procedure ensure that both TGS TG3 circuit packs are installed in the shelf If possible use the switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command to switch to the protection TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 if not already ACTIVE Use rtrv sync command to verify that the protection TGS TG3 circuit pack is ACTIVE 2 Are you replacing a BBG8 BBG...

Page 2064: ...the FE SEL pushbutton on the SYSCTL at the same time to start a 10 second countdown 9 8 7 etc on the FE ID display During this countdown remove the SYSCTL If the SYSCTL is failed the countdown may not occur 5 Set all SYSCTL switch S1 sections S1 1 S1 2 and S1 3 to OFF to set the product shelf type See Figure 1 6 Set all SYSCTL switch S2 sections S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 S2 5 S2 6 S2 7 and S2 8 to OFF F...

Page 2065: ... Panel lights after approximately 5 seconds MJ and NE LEDs may light or flash briefly FAULT LED on the SYSCTL goes off after approximately 5 seconds ABN LED goes off after approximately 15 seconds Approximately 1 minute and 30 seconds after the ABN LED goes off the FAULT LED on the OHCTL goes off and the CR LED on the User Panel begins to flash 9 Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSC...

Page 2066: ... with the transmission configuration of the shelf the letter P d or C will be displayed in the FE ID display Observe one of the following indications on the FE ID display Note the indication and follow the suggested procedure A Letter P in FE ID Display Indicates no software installed in SYSCTL Find circuit packs with compatible software and repeat this procedure or install new software using the ...

Page 2067: ...rt the current shelf provisioning Proceed to Step 11 F Letter U in FE ID Display Indicates SYSCTL Switch S1 is not set properly for type of shelf being equipped Remove SYSCTL Correct switch settings and repeat this procedure G Letter E in FE ID Display Indicates SYSCTL must be replaced Get replacement SYSCTL and repeat this procedure H Letter F in FE ID Display Indicates SYSCTL faceplate latch is ...

Page 2068: ... download another version original version or new version of software Do you want to run the current version of software that is in the SYSCTL If NO then continue with Step 12 If YES then proceed to Step 14 12 Find circuit packs with compatible software and repeat this procedure or install new software using the procedures of DLP 532 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 14 To force the system...

Page 2069: ... display If the software version is not the correct version you must find circuit packs with the correct software or install new software using the procedures of DLP 532 16 NOTE If you are using this procedure to replace a SYSCTL that was already in service there may have been some options set using the craft interface terminal CIT Refer to DLP 512 and set any required options 17 STOP YOU HAVE COM...

Page 2070: ...DLP 501 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 8 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2071: ... are to be equipped with BBG6 STS1E circuit packs 2 Determine from office records the length of the STS1E cabling between the DDM 2000 and the STSX cross connect point 3 Refer to Table A and Figure 1 Install the STS1E option jumpers per Table A 4 NOTE The BBG6 STS1E circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of one EC 1 signal through the DDM 2000 Multiplexer STS1E high speed mode interfaces wi...

Page 2072: ...onse FAULT LED on the STS1E lights for about 20 seconds then goes off ACTIVE LED lights on the first BBG6 STS1E circuit pack of the pair installed 6 If required seat a second protection BBG6 STS1E circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group slot A 2 P B 2 P or C 2 P of the same FUNCTION UNITS group Response FAULT LED on the STS1E lights for about 20 seconds then goes off ACTIVE LED remains off 7 Repeat t...

Page 2073: ...r when a BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 is installed either the MAIN OLIUs or FUNCTION UNITS C OLIUs can be selected as the synchronization source using the command set sync src main fn c NOTE In addition to the same options as the BBF2 TGS the BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 may be provisioned to provide a DS1 output for intershelf timing distribution mult mode or for network timing distribution sync mo...

Page 2074: ...y is used when both NE s have access to and are receiving its timing from BITS clocks The recommendation is to have these BITS synchronized to references which are traceable to the same PRS If these guidelines are followed the subnetwork created by these two NE s would be operating synchronously Note DDM 2000 systems are designed to operate in pleisiochronous timing topologies The DS1 output gener...

Page 2075: ...xternal Sync Out This timing topology is not supported The two network elements will be operating asynchronously from each other External Mult Line Timing This topology is used when one of the NE s does not have access to an external synchronous reference and needs to be synchronized to an NE whose timing is traceable to a PRS The NE provisioned for Line Timing will derive its timing from the NE p...

Page 2076: ...ned for External Sync Out timing thus operating synchronously with that respective NE The NE provisioned for External Sync Out should be reprovisioned for External Mult to prevent the timing loop existing in the actual provisioning If Synchronization Messaging is enabled on both NE s the DS1 output reference on NE 1 will carry DS1 AIS and NE 2 will derive its timing and that of the DS1 output port...

Page 2077: ... NE s will derive the DS1 output reference from each other thus creating a timing loop The NE with access to a BITS which has an input reference traceable to a PRS and is sourced from an element other than this NE should be reprovisioned for External Mult to prevent the timing loop If Synchronization Messaging is enabled on both NE s the DS1 output reference in one of the NE s will carry DS1 AIS a...

Page 2078: ... an alarm is generated Refer to Table C and Figure 1 BBF2 TGS or Table D and Figure 2 BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 Set the timing mode as required for the TGS circuit pack being installed Figure 1 BBF2 TGS Option Switch Table C BBF2 TGS Timing Mode Switch Setting Timing Mode Switch S1 Settings S1 3 S1 4 Free Running ON ON DS1 External MULT Mode OFF ON Line Timed ON OFF Invalid OFF OFF ...

Page 2079: ...S BBF4 TG3 Timing Mode Switch Settings Timing Mode Switch S1 Settings S1 3 S1 4 S1 5 DS1 Output Free Running ON ON OFF DS1 External MULT Mode OFF ON OFF Line Timing MAIN ON OFF OFF Line Timing SYNC OUT Mode ON OFF ON DS1 External SYNC OUT Mode ON ON ON Invalid OFF OFF ON Invalid OFF OFF OFF Invalid OFF ON ON Factory default Main OLIU is default FUNCTION UNIT C by set sync command ...

Page 2080: ...timing mode set to either DS1 External or Line Timed sync out mode If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 5 4 Refer to Table F and set the DS1 line coding and frame format as required for the TGS TG3 circuit pack See Figures 1 and 2 Table E Equalizer Switch Settings Equalization S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 0 to 131 ON ON OFF 131 to 262 ON OFF ON 262 to 393 ON OFF OFF 393 to 524 OFF ON ON 5...

Page 2081: ...ssion configuration information is stored in the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 During software download procedures the software checks the information stored in the TGS TG3 circuit pack If the information is incompatible with the controller software information an alarm is generated NOTE If a signal has previously been applied to the original BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 circuit pack the FA...

Page 2082: ...ction TGS TG3 in TIMING slot 2 Response FAULT LED on TGS TG3 lights for about 15 seconds then goes off ACTIVE LED remains off 7 Is timing mode set to external DS1 If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 8 If the NE ACTY LED on the User Panel remains on use the CIT command rtrv sync to verify that the operational mode of the system is External If the opera...

Page 2083: ...leaned properly CAUTION If optical fiber cables are routed beneath the OLIUs be careful not to pinch or crush the fibers when the OLIUs are inserted NOTE 22D U 22G U 24G U 24H U 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U or 29G U 29H U OLIUs require a 10 dB LBO when looped NOTE To ensure proper path protection switching in ring configurations if optical spans terminate in 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIUs at one node and 22G U 22G...

Page 2084: ...med ring configuration requires that the first FiberReach MAIN 1 OLIU connect to FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIU on one host OC 3 shelf The last FiberReach MAIN 2 OLIU connects to the FUNCTION UNITS 2 P OLIU on the other OC 3 host shelf Intermediate FiberReach shelves on the same OC 1 ring connect from MAIN 2 OLIU at one FiberReach shelf to the MAIN 1 OLIU at an adjacent FiberReach shelf node NOTE The DDM 2...

Page 2085: ... UNITS 2 P slot Response FAULT LED and ACTIVE LED lights FAULT LED begins to flash after about 10 seconds The FAULT LED may go off for a few seconds before starting to flash 3 Are 24G U 24H U or 29G U 29H U OLIUs being installed If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 7 4 Connect OC 12 connector ribbon cable between 24G U 24H U or 29G U 29H U OLIUs in the MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 P sl...

Page 2086: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 504 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2087: ... damaging the LEDs that protrude through the opening in the faceplate of the OLIU CAUTION Avoid excessive bending of the optical jumper used to loop the OLIU on itself CAUTION All optical fiber connectors and couplings should be properly cleaned DLP 527 Signal performance may be degraded if the connectors and couplings are not cleaned properly NOTE The 22D U 22G U 24G U 24H U 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U a...

Page 2088: ...e Figures 1 2 and 3 NOTE The 22F is equipped with ST type connectors NOTE The 22F U 22F2 U 22G2 U 22G3 U and 22G4 U OLIUs are shipped with a 0 dB SC type connector installed on each OLIU A 0 dB ST type connector is shipped loose in the packaging with each OLIU Optional SC ST or FC 0 dB or attenuated buildouts can be ordered separately Table A NOTE The 22F 22F U 22F2 U 22G2 U 22G3 U and 22G4 U OLIU...

Page 2089: ...DLP 505 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 3 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 ST Type Universal Buildout Figure 2 FC PC Type Universal Buildout ...

Page 2090: ...0 dB Lightguide Buildouts Code Comcode Connector Type Cable Connection Label Color A3060 106708951 SC SM SM MM MM None A3070 106795354 ST SM SM MM MM None A3080 106795404 FC PC SM SM MM MM None Table B Single Mode Lightguide Jumpers Code Comcode Length Feet Connectors FS1EP EP 2 107149494 2 ST ST LS1SC SC 2 106908247 2 SC SC LS1FP FP 10 106593825 10 FCPC FCPC ...

Page 2091: ...S 2 P OLIUs if required Table A 5 Use lightguide jumpers to loop the IN and OUT connectors of the MAIN 2 or FUNCTION UNITS 2 P OLIU s Tables B Response FAULT LED stops flashing In ring releases ACTIVE LED remains on Minor MN major minor MJ MN if rings alarm goes off If responses are not correct check connections and looping fibers Clean connectors and repeat Step 5 If responses are still not corre...

Page 2092: ...4H U 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U or 29G U 29H U OLIUs replace the 0 dB LBO on the OUT buildout block s with the required 10 dB LBO on the MAIN 1 or FUNCTION UNITS 1 OLIUs Table C Table C Universal 10 dB Lightguide Buildouts Code Comcode Connector Type Cable Connection Label Color A3060D1 107406159 SC SM SM Black A3070D1 107406191 ST SM SM Black A3080D1 107406233 FC PC SM SM Black A2060D 106795289 SC MM MM...

Page 2093: ...ute or more for LEDs and alarms to sta bilize after the OLIU s are looped 9 For the 22D U 22G U 24G U 24H U 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U or 29G U 29H U OLIUs replace the 0 dB LBO on the OUT buildout block s with the required 10 dB LBO on the MAIN 2 or FUNCTION UNITS 2 P OLIUs Table C 10 Use lightguide jumpers to loop the IN and OUT connectors of the MAIN 2 or FUNCTION UNITS 2 P OLIU s Tables D and E Respon...

Page 2094: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 505 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2095: ...TS group slot A 1 B 1 or C 1 as required Response FAULT LED on the MXRVO lights for about 20 seconds then goes off ACTIVE LED lights on first MXRVO installed in each FUNCTION UNITS group slot 3 NOTE If the group is to be equipped with any BBF3 DS1PM circuit packs both service and protection BBG2 BBG2B MXRVO circuit packs must be installed If required seat a second MXRVO into slot 2 P of the same F...

Page 2096: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 506 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2097: ...e installed in both FUNCTION UNITS 1 2 P slots and are independent There is no protection between the BBG19 DS3 circuit packs Determine which FUNCTION UNITS group slot s A B or C is being equipped with DS3 TMUX circuit packs 2 Determine from office records the length of the DS3 cabling between the DDM 2000 and the DSX 3 cross connect point 3 NOTE The only hardware option settings on DS3 circuit pa...

Page 2098: ...DLP 507 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 BBG4 BBG4B BBG19 DS3 LBO Option Settings Figure 2 BBG20 TMUX Option Settings ...

Page 2099: ...cuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group slot A 1 B 1 or C 1 Response FAULT LED on the DS3 TMUX lights for about 20 seconds then goes off ACTIVE LED lights on the first DS3 TMUX circuit pack of the pair installed 6 If required seat a second protection DS3 TMUX circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group slot A 2 P B 2 P or C 2 P of the same FUNCTION UNITS group Response FAULT LED on the DS3 TMUX lights for abou...

Page 2100: ... slot 1 at one terminating node is associated with the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group slot 2 P at the other terminating node NOTE If response is not correct in the following procedures replace the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack Seat BBG19 DS3 circuit packs in FUNCTION UNITS group slots A B or C being equipped Response FAULT LED on the BBG19 DS3 lights for about 20 seconds then goes off ACT...

Page 2101: ...line coding B8ZS or AMI required of the DS1 signal Switch 1 section 8 S1 8 is unused and ignored by the system NOTE To set switch to ON depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled ON in the figure To set switch to OFF depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled OFF in the figure Refer to Figure 1 and Table A and set LBO option switches Note Invalid switch settings will cause the FAUL...

Page 2102: ...ed The rtrv t1 command may be used to check line code settings Refer to Table B and Figure 1 and set the line code option switches if required Note Switch 1 section 8 S1 8 is unused and ignored by the system Figure 1 DS1 DS1PM Option Settings 4 NOTE If the response is not correct when the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack is installed check option switch setting If settings are correct replace the DS1 DS1PM ...

Page 2103: ... NOTE If BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit packs are installed in service slots then a BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM circuit pack must be installed in the protection slot if protection is required Is protection DS1 circuit pack being installed If YES then continue with Step 7 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 7 Refer to Figure 1 and Table A and set LBO option switches on protection DS1 DS1PM circuit pac...

Page 2104: ...DLP 508 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2105: ...command to test LEDs Where address address identifier of the system slot or user panel that contains the LEDs to be tested Default is all r number of times 1 through 10 test is repeated Response All LEDs for the specified address identifier light For a SYSCTL LED test all segments of the SYSCTL FE ID display including the period light After 10 seconds all LEDs go off After another 10 seconds a com...

Page 2106: ...leased the LEDs remain lighted until the full software version code is displayed If the ACO button is still depressed when the software version code has completed cycling the display goes blank for 2 seconds and starts cycling through the software version code again This continues as long as the ACO button is depressed Depress the ACO button on the User Panel Response All LEDs and the SYSCTL 7 seg...

Page 2107: ... rtrv t3 command may be used to check for proper DS1 or DS3 option settings Ensure proper DS1 line coding settings AMI B8ZS at DS1 ends of the circuit NOTE Transmission tests in the mux direction may be local or end to end tests see Figure 1 Transmission tests in the demux direction may be local cross connect tests see Figure 2 The Commands and Reports section of this manual under TEST TRMSN T1 gi...

Page 2108: ...n of this manual for more information on cross connection provisioning NOTE A CIT is required for this test on a ring configuration because manual cross connections have to be made at all shelves Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 2 If NO then proceed to Step 3 2 At the near end DDM 2000 connect the CIT to the CIT jack on the User Panel if required Reference DLP 521 3 NOTE Work orde...

Page 2109: ...ed DS3 signal and the other terminating end is equipped with DS1 DS1PM or T1EXT circuit packs the DS1 transmission test can be performed from the DS3 terminating end using the test trmsn t1 command after using the opr lpbk t1 command at the far end equipped with DS1 DS1PM or T1EXT circuit packs to loop back the test signal The DS1 transmission test can also be performed from the DS1 terminating en...

Page 2110: ...5 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 510 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in MUX Direction Figure 2 Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in DEMUX Direction ...

Page 2111: ...9 NOTE The DS1 DS1PM circuit packs are connected to a DSX 1 cross connect T1EXT circuit packs are connected to a T1 interface and the TMUX circuit pack is connected to a DSX 3 cross connect See Figure 2 At the near end DSX 1 DSX 3 cross connection or T1 interface associated with the DDM 2000 being tested connect a patch cord from the OUT jack to the IN jack for the DS1 or T1 channel to be tested 1...

Page 2112: ...he mux direction use the switch path command to switch the path to the other ring and then repeat this test before releasing loopbacks The DS1 circuit under test has passed the DS1 transmission test Remove the looping patch cords from the cross connect point Use the rls lpbk t1 or rls lpbk t3 command to release loopback s at the far end if required 18 At the near end and the far end DDM 2000 momen...

Page 2113: ...he group and is protection circuit pack installed If YES then continue with Step 26 If NO then proceed to Step 30 26 Unseat the service DS1 DS1PM TMUX or T1EXT circuit pack associated with the circuit under test 27 Repeat the DS1 transmission test with the DS1 or M13 test set 28 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 29 If NO then proceed to Step 34 29 Reseat the DS1 DS1...

Page 2114: ...ext step 38 Has the DS1 DS1PM TMUX or T1EXT circuit pack that failed the test been replaced If YES then proceed to Step 41 If NO then continue with Step 39 39 Replace the DS1 DS1PM TMUX or T1EXT circuit pack that failed the test Reference DLP 523 40 Repeat this procedure for the DS1 DS1PM TMUX circuit pack that failed 41 Trouble may be in the DSX cross connect wiring T1 interface wiring VT1 STS1 c...

Page 2115: ...ith a DS3 test set or M13 test set NOTE When this procedure is used to do end to end tests one DDM 2000 shelf will be referred to as the near end and the other shelf as the far end These designations are arbitrary either shelf can be the near end or the far end shelf NOTE Proper cross connections must be made at each shelf to establish the complete end to end path for the DS3 circuit being tested ...

Page 2116: ... are completed remove the temporary circuit packs perform an update and reinstall the STS1E circuit packs NOTE If one terminating end is equipped with TMUX circuit packs to provide for bidirectional termination of one M13 or C bit formatted DS3 signal and the other terminating end is equipped with DS1 DS1PM circuit packs either DS1 or DS3 transmission tests may be performed For DS3 tests both ends...

Page 2117: ...opback is established at the far end provision the far end DS3 for CC mode with no AIS set t3 address mode cc ais no Otherwise if the VMR mode is used then only errors in the receive direction will be monitored and the system may not recognize that a loopback is up Connect a patch cord from the OUT jack to the IN jack at the far end DSX 3 or STSX cross connect point associated with the DS3 channel...

Page 2118: ... the DS3 signal dirn direction of the test If dirn mux direction is toward fiber dur duration of the test in minutes 1 120 default is 1 Figure 1 Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in MUX Direction 9 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 13 If NO then proceed to Step 35 10 See Figure 2 At the near end DSX 3 cross connection associated with the DDM 2000 being tested connect ...

Page 2119: ... is toward DSX dur duration of the test in minutes 1 120 default is 1 12 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 13 If NO then proceed to Step 35 Figure 2 Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in DEMUX Direction 13 Is this the first service being placed on the group and is a protection DS3 circuit pack installed If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then proceed to Step 18 14...

Page 2120: ...n test Remove the looping patch cords from the cross connect point Use the rls lpbk t3 command to release loopback s at the far end if required 19 At the near end and the far end DDM 2000 momentarily depress the UPD INIT button or use the upd command on the SYSCTL to update the SYSCTL 20 If violation monitor removal mode was set differently than the original mode in Step 5 reprovision the mode to ...

Page 2121: ... on the group and is protection circuit pack installed If YES then continue with Step 27 If NO then proceed to Step 30 27 Unseat the service DS3 or TMUX circuit pack associated with the circuit under test 28 Repeat the DS3 transmission test with the DS3 or M13 test set 29 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 30 If NO then proceed to Step 35 30 Reseat the DS3 or TMUX ci...

Page 2122: ... connect wiring STS1 cross connections in the ring network or the shelf backplane Use the rtrv crs sts1 command to ensure proper STS1 cross connections have been made at each shelf in the ring for the DS3 being tested If no trouble found check DSX cross connect wiring and backplane connections If other alarms or trouble indications are present refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 to isolate the troub...

Page 2123: ... rtrv tl1msgmap command ent osacgmap Creates entries in the X 25 subnetwork application context map This map lists the permanent virtual circuits PVCs and switched virtual circuit SVC available in the X 25 channel and maps them to operation systems OS application contexts ent ulsdcc l3 Provisions the user settable fields in Layer 3 of the OSI stack Layer 3 parameters include user settable fields o...

Page 2124: ...umbers and designates the Central Office Remote Terminal parameter Sets the Idle Channel Signal parameter set passwd Sets or changes a users password All users can change their own passwords set pmthres line Sets the thresholds of the line performance parameters Also enables or disables the processing of the threshold crossings for these performance parameters set pmthres sect Sets the thresholds ...

Page 2125: ...output mode to select the source of the DS1 sync output Other optional features are set from the CIT but are not lost if the SYSCTL is replaced CAUTION Execution of these commands may be service affecting These features may be found under the following listings ent crs sts1 Specifies STS 1 cross connect routing Used in establishing service and or performing transmission tests ent crs sts3c Specifi...

Page 2126: ...ignal or not monitored NMON set state ec1 Sets the state of a low speed EC 1 port to be automatically monitored AUTO for a good signal or not monitored NMON set state t1 Sets the state of a low speed port to be automatically monitored AUTO for a good signal or not monitored NMON set state t3 Sets the state of a DS3 port to be automatically monitored AUTO for a good signal or not monitored NMON set...

Page 2127: ...30 sec 2 set attr alm Alarm clear delay 0 30 sec 15 set attr alm Power minor almn level MN MJ MN set attr alm OC1 degrade threshold 10 5 to 10 9 10 6 set oc1 AIS almn level of NSA OC 1 Line AIS CR MJ MN NA NA set oc1 OC3 degrade threshold 10 5 to 10 9 10 6 set oc3 Sync messaging K byte S byte disabled K byte set oc3 AIS almn level of NSA OC 3 Line AIS CR MJ MN NA NA set oc3 DccMode distinct identi...

Page 2128: ...NMON AUTO AUTO set state t1 Environmental alarm level CR MJ MN NA MN set attr env Environmental alarm type 10 characters set attr env Environmental alarm description 26 characters set attr env Control point description 26 characters set attr cont Far end communication over DCC enabled disabled enabled set fecom DCC identity for OSI ntwks userside networkside see command pgs set fecom Lanreset y n ...

Page 2129: ...imer 1 to 1440 mins 5 mins ent ulsdcc l4 TARP data cache enable or disable enable ent ulsdcc l4 NSAP system identifier 12 hex digits see command pgs ent ulsdcc l4 TARP data cache ent ulsdcc l4 TARP system tid 20 characters see command pgs ent ulsdcc l4 Target identifier 20 characters ent ulsdcc l4 TARP organization id 6 hex digits 000000 ent ulsdcc l4 TARP reserved 4 hex digits see command pgs ent...

Page 2130: ...rovisioned via signal detection noOverride means read and use switch settings on circuit pack Track means the source for iming will be selected from the active received OC 3 line specified This command is available to privileged users only Rings Setting this parameter also affects DS1 output source and DS1 sync output mode See set sync command in Section 11 Commands and Reports This parameter is n...

Page 2131: ...ication PJC 1 13841 1384 1 900 40 1 900 30 1 900 30 1 63 20 1 63 30 1 63 2 1 65535 60 1 1328736 132874 1 65535 900 1 65535 90 1 65535 90 1 4095 60 1 4095 90 1 255 4 1 9999999 5760 line line line line line line line line OC 1 Line B2 Coding Violations CV B2 Errored Seconds ES B2 Errored Seconds Type A ESA B2 Errored Seconds Type B ESB B2 Severely Errored Seconds SES B2 Unavailable Seconds UAS STS P...

Page 2132: ...095 90 vtl vtl vtl DS1 Path ES P Errored Seconds SES P Severely Errored Seconds UAS P Unavailable Seconds ES PFE Errored Seconds SES PFE Severely Errored Seconds UAS PFE Unavailable Seconds CV P SF Coding Violations CV P ESF Coding Violations CV PFE Coding Violations 1 900 65 1 63 10 1 63 10 1 900 65 1 63 10 1 63 10 1 16383 72 1 16383 13296 1 16383 13296 1 65535 648 1 4095 100 1 4095 10 1 65535 64...

Page 2133: ...tory Find the circuit pack in Table A and go to the indicated step If you were sent here from another procedure return to that procedure after setting options There are no option switches on these circuit packs Table A Circuit Packs Circuit Pack Step BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL Step 2 BBG9 OHCTL BBF2 TGS Step 7 BBF2B BBF2C TGS Step 11 BBF4 TG3 Step 11 BBF5 JMPR 22D U OLIU 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU 22G U 22G2 U ...

Page 2134: ...h toward side labeled ON in the figure To set switch to OFF depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled OFF in the figure 4 If SYSCTL is being installed in shelf for the first time initial shelf turnup only OHCTL installed at this time and switches have not been set set all switch S2 sections S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 S2 5 S2 6 S2 7 and S2 8 to OFF See Figure 1 5 Set all SYSCTL switch S1 sections...

Page 2135: ...ng This topology is not supported Both systems are operating asynchronously from each other Free Running Line Timing This topology is allowed but results in having a SONET subnetwork operating asynchronously with respect to other NE s in the network The NE s deriving timing off the NE provisioned for Free Running will be synchronized to it but not to a PRS on the network If automatic synchronizati...

Page 2136: ...g synchronously Note DDM 2000 systems are designed to operate in pleisiochronous timing topologies The DS1 output generated by each NE is regenerated from the input DS1 timing reference and could be used to distribute this reference to other shelves colocated in the same bay to conserve ports on the BITS Line Timing Line Timing Caution This topology creates a timing loop and it is not supported Th...

Page 2137: ...that switches S1 1 and S1 2 be set the same as the original settings or an update upd command must be performed Is timing mode set to DS1 External If YES then continue with Step 11 If NO STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 9 Refer to Table D and Figure 2 and set the DS1 line coding and frame format as required for the TGS circuit pack 10 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table D BBF2 TGS D...

Page 2138: ... BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 In external timing mode the BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 gets timing from an external DS1 reference input NOTE In line timed mode the BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 gets timing from a reference clock recovered from a received OC 3 line rate signal Either the MAIN 1 MAIN 2 P or FUNCTION UNIT C OLIU can be selected as the synchronization source using the command set sync src main ...

Page 2139: ...1 timing output is normally used to synchronize other NE s to a PRS In this topology the timing of the Free Running NE is being distributed by the use of the DS1 output timing reference in the absence of Synchronization Messaging In the presence of Synchronization Messaging the DS1 output will carry DS1 AIS If automatic synchronization reconfiguration is supported and enabled in a system the NE 2 ...

Page 2140: ... of the NE provisioned for External Sync out will carry an unframed all ones DS1 signal DS1 AIS in the present topology If automatic synchronization reconfiguration is supported and enabled in a system both NEs will attempt to break the potential timing loop NE 1 will attempt to break the loop by inserting DS1 AIS on its DS1 output port NE 2 will attempt to switch to another line timing source if ...

Page 2141: ...provide a synchronization reference to a BITS External Sync Out External Sync Out Caution This topology can potentially create a timing loop if synchronization messaging is not enabled on both NE s In this topology both NE s will derive the DS1 output reference from each other thus creating a timing loop The NE with access to a BITS which has an input reference traceable to a PRS and is sourced fr...

Page 2142: ...2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 circuit pack s Figure 3 BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 Option Switch Table F BBF2B BBF2C TGS BBF4 TG3 Timing Mode Switch Settings Timing Mode Switch S1 Settings S1 3 S1 4 S1 5 DS1 Output Free Running ON ON OFF DS1 External MULT Mode OFF ON OFF Line Timing MAIN ON OFF OFF Line Timing SYNC OUT Mode ON OFF ON DS1 External SYNC OUT Mode ON ON ON Invalid OFF OFF ON Invalid OFF OFF OFF I...

Page 2143: ... mode set to either DS1 External or Line Timed sync out If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 14 Refer to Table H and Figure 3 and set the DS1 line coding and frame format as required for the TGS TG3 circuit pack 15 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table G Equalizer Switch Settings Equalization S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 0 to 131 ON ON OFF 131 to 262 ON OFF ...

Page 2144: ...settings on the DS3 TMUX circuit pack are the LBO settings shown in Figure 5 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the LBO jumpers they are factory test points and should be ignored Install the DS3 option jumpers per Table I and Figures 4 and 5 18 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 4 BBG4 BBG4B BBG19 DS3 Option Settings Table I DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length Ft 734A C...

Page 2145: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 513 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 13 of 20 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 5 BBG20 TMUX Option Settings ...

Page 2146: ...sed and ignored by the system NOTE To set switch to ON depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled ON in the figure To set switch to OFF depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled OFF in the figure Refer to Table J and Figure 6 and set LBO option switches Figure 6 DS1 DS1PM Option Settings Table J DS1 DS1PM Cable LBO Settings Note 613C 608C Cable Length feet 1249C Cable Length feet ...

Page 2147: ... set t1 command the circuit pack switch settings will have no effect The rtrv t1 command may be used to check line code settings Refer to Table K and Figure 6 and set the line code option switches if required 22 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table K DS1 DS1PM Line Code Settings Line Code Format Switch S1 Settings S1 4 Port 1 S1 5 Port 2 S1 6 Port 3 S1 7 Port 4 S1 8 Note B8ZS OFF OFF OFF O...

Page 2148: ...ugh the DDM 2000 Multiplexer STS1E high speed mode interfaces with the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs in a function unit group at the VT G rate STS1E low speed mode interfaces with the OLIU circuit packs at the STS 1 rate Determine STS1E mode of operation high speed or low speed 26 Set switch S1 to mode of operation required HIGH SPEED MODE or LOW SPEED MODE 27 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figu...

Page 2149: ... pack option switch settings from office records or work order 29 Set HDSL option switches per Table M and Figure 8 30 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 8 BBF8 HDSL Control Switch Table M HDSL Control Switch Settings Control Settings Switch S1 Settings S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 Master OFF OFF Slave ON ON Local OFF OFF Remote ON ON ...

Page 2150: ... the circuit pack switch settings will have no effect The software override will remain active until the set t1 command is executed again and the noOverride option is selected The rtrv t1 command may be used to check line code settings Refer to Table N and Figure 9 and set the line code option switches if required 33 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 9 BBF6 T1EXT Option Settings Table ...

Page 2151: ...cated on the bottom circuit board shown in Figure 10 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the power jumpers they are factory test points and should be ignored Refer to Table O and Figure 10 and set power jumpers Figure 10 IMA LAN Power Settings Table O IMA LAN Power Settings Corresponding FUNCTION UNITS IMA Power Setting MXRVO Circuit Pack 5 V 48 V BBG2 MXRVO X BBG2B MXRVO X 4...

Page 2152: ...DLP 513 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 20 of 20 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2153: ...OC 3 and OC 1 optical fiber spans For each span determine the loss of each optical fiber and install the proper LBO Then connect the fibers to the associated IN and OUT connectors of each OLIU at the end of the span NOTE When installing LBOs the rule for single mode optical fibers is for the LBO to be installed on the OUT transmit connector of the OLIU For multimode optical fibers install the LBO ...

Page 2154: ... 107149627 100 ST ST FS1E A 2 105420905 2 ST 2016A Biconic FS1E A 10 105420947 10 ST 2016A Biconic FS1E A 25 105423958 25 ST 2016A Biconic FS1E A 50 105424006 50 ST 2016A Biconic FS1E A 100 105424022 100 ST 2016A Biconic LS1SC SC 2 106908247 2 SC SC LS1SC SC 10 106908270 10 SC SC LS1SC SC 25 106908304 25 SC SC LS1SC SC 50 106908346 50 SC SC LS1SC SC 100 106908395 100 SC SC LS1FP FP 10 106593825 10...

Page 2155: ...cal fiber is single mode but multimode can be used For the DDM 2000 FiberReach 26G2 U OLIUs the recommended optical fiber is single mode but multimode can be used The DDM 2000 27G U 27G2 U OLIUs require single mode optical fiber Table B Multimode Lightguide Jumpers Code Comcode Length Feet Connectors FL1E E 2 105351795 2 ST ST FL1 EP EP 04 107150161 4 ST ST FL1 EP EP 10 107150195 10 ST ST FL1 EP E...

Page 2156: ...n proceed to Step 9 If NO then continue with Step 6 Optical Power Measurement Steps 6 through 9 are used to measure optical power Replace LBOs with 0 dB LBOs per Figures 1 2 3 4 and or 5 Connect the optical fiber transmit cable to the OLIU OUT connection Measure the optical power of the optical fiber receive cables at the other ends using an optical power meter 6 At both ends of the optical span r...

Page 2157: ...d MAIN 2 P slots depending on the application NOTE For DDM 2000 OC 12 ring configurations optical fibers extend in two different directions to make up the ring At each shelf node in the ring the DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 OLIU or DDM 2000 OC 12 MAIN B 1 OLIU will connect to the OC 3 MAIN 2 P OLIU or OC 12 MAIN B 2 P OLIU in another node and the OC 3 MAIN 2 P OLIU or OC 12 MAIN B 2 P OLIU will connect to...

Page 2158: ...DM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 to OC 3 Fiber Optic Connections and Line Buildouts 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 22F U 22F2 U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 22F U 22F2 U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU ...

Page 2159: ...o 33 8 0 15 0 to 31 8 0 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 3 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 3 0 to 8 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 8 0 to 34 0 0 0 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 33 8 0 15 0 to 31 8 0 22D U OLIU Controlled Uncontrolled Env MM Fiber Only 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 34 0 0 14 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 31 8 0 Notes 1 Measured power is de...

Page 2160: ...ections and Line Buildouts 21G 21G U 21G2 U 21G3 U OLIU 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U 22F 22F2 U OLIU 21G 21G U OLIU 21G U OLIU OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf OC 12 Shelf 22F U 22F2 U OLIU 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 22F U 22F2 U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 21G2 U 21G3 U OLIU 21G U 21G2 U 21G3 U OLIU ...

Page 2161: ... 0 21G2 U 21G3 U OLIU 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 3 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 3 0 to 8 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 8 0 to 34 0 0 0 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 33 8 0 0 0 to 31 8 0 22F 22F U 22F2 U OLIU 8 0 to 10 0 10 8 0 to 10 0 10 10 0 to 15 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 8 0 to 34 0 0 0 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 33 8 0 15 0 to 31 8 0 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to...

Page 2162: ...ure DLP 514 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 10 of 18 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 to FT 2000 LS INTFC Fiber Optic Connections and Line Buildouts 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 22F 22F U 22F2 U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU ...

Page 2163: ... 0 5 15 0 to 34 0 0 7 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 33 8 0 8 0 to 34 0 0 LAA5 IS3 FT 2000 5 0 to 14 0 10 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 15 0 5 15 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 33 8 0 15 0 to 34 0 0 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU 0 0 to 5 0 15 0 0 to 3 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 3 0 to 8 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 8 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 30 8 0 22D U OLIU 14 0 to 15 0 5 14 0 to 34 0 0 15 0 to 30 8...

Page 2164: ...o 5 0 15 0 0 to 5 0 15 5 0 to 10 0 10 5 0 to 10 0 10 10 0 to 15 0 5 10 0 to 15 0 5 15 0 to 31 0 0 15 0 to 31 0 0 27G U 27G2 U OLIU DDM 2000 0 0 to 5 0 15 5 0 to 10 0 10 10 0 to 15 0 5 15 0 to 31 0 0 26G2 U OLIU DDM 2000 0 0 to 5 0 15 5 0 to 10 0 10 10 0 to 15 0 5 15 0 to 31 0 0 Notes 1 Measured power is defined to be the measured power of the light emitted from receive fiber connector at OLIU 2 Th...

Page 2165: ... 9 0 5 9 0 to 31 0 0 Notes 1 Measured power is defined to be the measured power of the light emitted from receive fiber connector at OLIU 2 The minimum measured received power allows for optical path penalty and unallocated margin Connector loss is not allotted for it should already be accounted for in the optical power measurement 3 The margin for falling within the max rx power is 1 0 dB LBO 24G...

Page 2166: ...to 13 0 10 4 0 to 9 0 5 4 0 to 9 0 5 13 0 to 18 0 5 9 0 to 31 0 0 9 0 to 31 0 0 18 0 to 34 0 0 23H 23H U OLIU OC 12 Shelf 2 0 to 3 0 20 2 0 to 1 0 15 2 0 to 1 0 15 3 0 to 8 0 15 1 0 to 4 0 10 1 0 to 4 0 10 8 0 to 13 0 10 4 0 to 9 0 5 4 0 to 9 0 5 13 0 to 18 0 5 9 0 to 31 0 0 9 0 to 31 0 0 18 0 to 34 0 0 Notes 1 Measured power is defined to be the measured power of the light emitted from receive fi...

Page 2167: ... FC SM SM Black 15 dB A3080F1 107406241 FC SM SM Green Table L Universal Single Mode SM SC Lightguide Buildouts Lightguide Buildout LBO Code Comcode Connector Type Fiber Connection Label Color 0 dB A3060 106708951 SC SM SM MM MM None 5 dB A3060B1 107406142 SC SM SM Blue 10 dB A3060D1 107406159 SC SM SM Black 15 dB A3060F1 107406167 SC SM SM Green Table M Universal Multimode MM ST Lightguide Buildo...

Page 2168: ...nector 14 Did FAULT LED go off on the near end OLIU If NO then continue with Step 15 If YES then proceed to Step 16 15 Check optical fiber connections at both ends of the fiber Verify the integrity of the fiber connections by ensuring OLIU output at one end is connected to the correct OLIU input at the other end Verify proper systems have been connected by using the rtrv map neighbor command Figur...

Page 2169: ...5 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Site3NE1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Site7NE1 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 00...

Page 2170: ...outed in bay framework Reinstall front cover and tighten three screws 19 Repeat this procedure for each fiber span to be connected until the end to end system is established 20 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS DCC NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 N 39 840F 80 000...

Page 2171: ...lines between two DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves and may be performed with the DDM 2000 in service or out of service NOTE It is assumed that each DDM 2000 has passed the local looped transmission tests and a CIT is available If these tests have not been completed refer to the appropriate procedure and perform the tests NOTE This test must be performed locally at each shelf location associated with the opti...

Page 2172: ...er one of the following commands rtrv pm line main 1 if service line is being tested rtrv pm line main 2 if protection line is being tested rtrv pm line main all if both lines are being tested Response The following CIT report will indicate the status of the equipment The current time line should indicate that there are no errors Other time lines may exist with numbers greater than zero The Comman...

Page 2173: ...eed to Step 9 8 Repeat this procedure from Step 3 at other locations 9 Did report indicate errors If YES then continue with Step 10 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 10 Trouble may be in optical fiber and or connections Trouble may also be in OLIUs If the report indicated trouble when the report was obtained from the near end of the span trouble may be in the receive direction see ...

Page 2174: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 515 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2175: ...on of the test alm command Use the test alm command to perform alarm tests Note the audible and visual alarm indications during the test 4 Did the DDM 2000 pass the alarm tests If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then proceed to Step 17 5 NOTE It is assumed that the DDM 2000 is powered and running with loops at the low speed cross connections and that the high speed terminatio...

Page 2176: ...g through the openings in the faceplates of the circuit packs 12 Unseat the protection DS1 DS1PM and a service DS1 DS1PM circuit pack in the same LOW SPEED GROUP 13 Is the major MJ alarm activated If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then proceed to Step 16 14 Reseat both circuit packs Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs protruding through the openings in the faceplates 15 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLE...

Page 2177: ...code lc parameters are set using the set t1 command a software override will be active and the circuit pack switch settings will have no effect The software override will remain active until the set t1 command is executed again and the noOverride option is selected The rtrv t1 command may be used to check line code settings Refer to Table A and Figure 1 and set the line code option switches if req...

Page 2178: ...UP being equipped The SYSCTL automatically provisions the protection T1EXT circuit pack to match the line code setting B8ZS or AMI of any service T1EXT circuit pack that it protects NOTE If T1EXT circuit packs are installed in service slots then a T1EXT circuit pack must be installed in the protection slot if protection is required Is protection T1EXT circuit pack being installed If YES then conti...

Page 2179: ...e option settings on IMA LAN circuit packs are the power settings located on the bottom circuit board shown in Figure 1 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the power jumpers they are factory test points and should be ignored Refer to Figure 1 and Table A and set power jumpers Figure 1 IMA LAN Power Settings Table A IMA LAN Power Settings Corresponding FUNCTION UNITS IMA Power...

Page 2180: ...k is allowed in a LOW SPEED GROUP if the associated FUNCTION UNITS group is equipped with the BBG2 MXRVOs Seat IMA LAN circuit pack in required slot of LOW SPEED group being equipped Response FAULT LED on IMA LAN circuit pack lights and may remain lighted for about 40 seconds and then goes off 3 Repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each service IMA LAN circuit pack being installed 4 Install 177A ...

Page 2181: ...switch was done 5 Use the switch address pri reset command to reset switch 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 7 NOTE The alarm delay is provisionable from 0 to 30 seconds This procedure assumes the alarm delay is set for the default of 2 seconds To test a low speed switch to protection unplug one of the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs if installed Response NE ACTY LED on User Panel lights MN LED lig...

Page 2182: ...d Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER 11 Reseat the circuit pack that was removed Response After 2 seconds all LEDs go OFF 12 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2183: ...e rtrv t1 command to check line code settings Use rtrv alm command to verify that no alarms locks loops or switches are present 2 Is a new DS1 DS1PM circuit pack being installed If YES then proceed to Step 12 If NO then continue with Step 3 3 CAUTION To minimize hits on in service ports on the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack having a DS1 port added it is recommended to either use a CIT to manually switch t...

Page 2184: ... option switches as required and reinstall DS1 DS1PM circuit pack Reference DLP 513 6 Momentarily depress UPD INIT pushbutton on SYSCTL to update equipment list 7 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 8 Option settings on the DS1 DS1PM must be set or verified as set before placing the DS1 port in service Wait until the protection DS1 DS1PM is available or obtain a CIT to set the options 9 STOP YO...

Page 2185: ...are used to disconnect the cross connect wiring associated with unused service DS1 LOW SPEED slots from the DDM 2000 s internal protection bus Remove 177A Retainer Card from the DS1 slot being equipped 13 Set option switches and install new DS1 DS1PM circuit pack Reference DLP 508 14 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE DLP 508 ...

Page 2186: ...DLP 520 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2187: ...ecomes unpowered with the SYSCTL inserted CIT communications will be lost to all shelves Once the shelf is repowered CIT communications are restored without established login sessions being dropped If shelves are not powered the SYSCTL should not be inserted NOTE With a CIT baud rate of 19200 CIT communication to a shelf may fail if the CIT bay mult cabling is connected to the shelf but not termin...

Page 2188: ...C port security to be enabled If security is enabled on a port users must enter a valid login and password to access the system through that port NOTE The system always has three privileged user logins to minimize the chance that both users will forget their passwords at the same time You must be logged into the system as a privileged user to set security add change or delete logins and to execute...

Page 2189: ...re is an MJ alarm condition on the system the prompt will be MJ NOTE After the prompt the system will respond to commands entered The command set link pg may be used to set the vertical size of the displayed page on the CIT Page pg length may be set from 3 to 150 lines with a default length of 24 lines The page length is set to default each time a new CIT session is started See the Commands and Re...

Page 2190: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 521 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2191: ...been enabled on the DCC port being accessed a login and password are required to do the remote login NOTE Far end communications fecom must be enabled in the far end shelf in order to remote login to that shelf The command rtrv fecom can be used locally at the far end shelf to determine if fecom DCC LAN is enabled or disabled The set fecom command can be used at the far end shelf to enable DCC LAN...

Page 2192: ...remote terminal Response CIT prompts with login 3 If security has been enabled enter your login and password when you are prompted If security has not been enabled enter two carriage RETURNs Response System responds with 4 NOTE After the prompt the remote system will respond normally to any commands entered just as if you were physically connected to the remote terminal See the Commands and Report...

Page 2193: ...d to the remote terminal will end the remote session and return control to the near end CIT A logout entered to the near end terminal will terminate the local and remote sessions Use the command logout to log out of the remote terminal session and return control to the near end terminal 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2194: ...DLP 522 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2195: ... one without the lighted ACTIVE LED first NOTE When a replacement circuit pack except the SYSCTL is configured the same as the original circuit pack it may be inserted with no further action When a replacement circuit pack is different different code or different switch options from the original the SYSCTL UPD INIT button must be momentarily depressed to update the inventory Find the circuit pack ...

Page 2196: ... service to the standby slot before removing the MXRVO circuit pack being replaced There are no options to be set on the BBG2 BBG2B MXRVO circuit pack Remove old MXRVO and install replacement MXRVO Response FAULT LED on the MXRVO lights for about 13 seconds and then goes off 5 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM Step 34 BBF5 JMPR Step 39 BBG6 STS1E Step 41 BBF8 HDSL Step 47 BBF...

Page 2197: ...o software is installed in the OHCTL or if the software is not compatible with the software in the SYSCTL the letter d will be displayed in the FE ID display on the SYSCTL If this occurs you must find circuit packs with compatible software or install new software in both the OHCTL and SYSCTL DLP 532 Install OHCTL into AUXCTL slot If software is not loaded or is incompatible load new software using...

Page 2198: ...roper timing modes may cause the system to act unpredictably or cause a service interruption for example if all nodes are set to line timed mode NOTE The BBF2 TGS timing mode may be provisioned as Free Running DS1 External or Line Timed In free running mode the BBF2 TGS gets timing from an oscillator on the BBF2 TGS In external timing the BBF2 TGS gets timing from an external DS1 reference input I...

Page 2199: ...rk elements will be operating asynchronously from each other External Mult Line Timing This topology is used when one of the NE s does not have access to an external synchronous reference and needs to be synchronized to an NE whose timing is traceable to a PRS The NE provisioned for Line Timing will derive its timing from the NE provisioned for External Mult timing thus operating synchronously wit...

Page 2200: ...ailable is an optical reference provision to Line Timing with the proper source using the set sync command If automatic synchronization reconfiguration is supported and enabled in a system both NEs will attempt to switch to another line timing source if available to prevent a timing loop Table C BBF2 TGS Timing Mode Switch Setting Timing Mode Switch S1 Settings S1 3 S1 4 Free Running ON ON DS1 Ext...

Page 2201: ...a momentary transmission hit on all shelves in the bay NOTE A TGS circuit pack is required in TIMING slot 1 to protect against accidentally downloading wrong software and interrupting transmission Transmission configuration information is stored in the TGS circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 During software download procedures the software checks the information stored in the TGS 1 circuit pack If the i...

Page 2202: ... set to line timed mode NOTE In line timed mode the BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 gets timing from a reference clock recovered from a received OC 3 line rate signal Either the MAIN 1 MAIN 2 P or FUNCTION UNIT C OLIU can be selected as the synchronization source using the command set sync src main main 1 main 2 or fn c NOTE Table E depicts all the possible timing topologies which can be encountered o...

Page 2203: ...1 timing output is normally used to synchronize other NE s to a PRS In this topology the timing of the Free Running NE is being distributed by the use of the DS1 output timing reference in the absence of Synchronization Messaging In the presence of Synchronization Messaging the DS1 output will carry DS1 AIS If automatic synchronization reconfiguration is supported and enabled in a system the NE 2 ...

Page 2204: ...Line Timing Caution This topology might create a timing loop In this topology the NE provisioned for Line Timing will derive its timing from the NE provisioned for External Sync Out timing thus operating synchronously with that respective NE The NE provisioned for External Sync Out should be reprovisioned for External Mult to prevent the potential timing loop existing in the actual provisioning If...

Page 2205: ...f available to prevent the timing loop External Mult External Mult This topology is used when both NE s have access to and are receiving its timing from BITS clocks The recommendation is to have these BITS synchronized to references which are traceable to the same PRS If these guidelines are followed the subnetwork created by these two NE s would be operating synchronously Note DDM 2000 systems ar...

Page 2206: ...nabled on both NE s the DS1 output reference in one of the NE s will carry DS1 AIS and the other NE will generate a DS1 output carrying a framed DS1 all ones signal Line Timing Line Timing Caution This topology creates a timing loop and it is not supported The NE with access to an external timing reference traceable to a PRS if available should be provisioned for External Mult If the reference ava...

Page 2207: ...S or BBF4 TG3 circuit pack s Figure 2 BBF2B BBF2C TGS BBF4 TG3 Option Switch Table F BBF2B BBF2C TGS BBF4 TG3 Timing Mode Switch Settings Timing Mode Switch S1 Settings S1 3 S1 4 S1 5 DS1 Output Free Running Factory default ON ON OFF DS1 External MULT Mode OFF ON OFF Line Timing MAIN MAIN MAIN 1 OLIU is default FUNCTION UNIT C by set sync command ON OFF OFF Line Timing SYNC OUT Mode ON OFF ON DS1 ...

Page 2208: ...Subsequent removal or replacement of the TGS TG3 requires that switches S1 1 and S1 2 be set the same as the original settings or an update upd must be performed Is timing mode set to either DS1 External or Line Timed sync out If YES then continue with Step 16 If NO then proceed to Step 17 Table G Equalizer Switch Settings Equalization S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 0 to 131 ON ON OFF 131 to 262 ON OFF ON 262 to ...

Page 2209: ...n TIMING slot 1 During software download procedures the software checks the information stored in the TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 If the information is incompatible with the controller software information an alarm is generated NOTE If a signal has previously been applied to the original BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BBF4 TG3 circuit pack the FAULT lamp will flash when the new BBF2B BBF2C TGS or BB...

Page 2210: ...ansmit and receive to the same line CAUTION When removing circuit packs always remove the one without the lighted ACTIVE LED first Remove optical fiber cables before removing circuit pack and take care to avoid damage to fibers during removal or installation of the circuit pack CAUTION Before installing OLIUs ensure all optical fiber connectors and couplings have been properly cleaned DLP 527 Sign...

Page 2211: ...replaced Response MN LED OC12 connector failed alarm will light 25 Remove old OLIU and install same type replacement OLIU Response FAULT LED on OLIU flashes 26 NOTE The FAULT LED on the OLIU may flash from 15 seconds to 3 minutes and 25 seconds depending on the provisioned signal degrade threshold Connect optical cables to replacement OLIU Response FAULT LED on the OLIU goes off 27 Connect the OC ...

Page 2212: ... only option settings on the DS3 TMUX circuit pack are the LBO settings shown in Figures 3 and 4 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the LBO jumpers they are factory test points and should be ignored Refer to Table I and Figures 3 and 4 and install the DS3 option jumpers Figure 3 BBG4 BBG4B BBG19 DS3 Option Settings Table I DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length Ft 734A Cable 735A Cab...

Page 2213: ...NOTE If a signal has previously been applied to the original DS3 TMUX circuit pack the FAULT lamp will flash when the new DS3 TMUX is installed until the signal tests good Remove old DS3 TMUX and install replacement DS3 TMUX Response FAULT LED on the DS3 TMUX flashes for about 15 seconds and then goes off 33 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2214: ...s unused and ignored by the system On the BBF3 BBF3B DS1PM S1 8 must be set to OFF NOTE To set switch to ON depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled ON in the figure To set switch to OFF depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled OFF in the figure Refer to Table J and Figure 5 and set LBO option switches Table J DS1 DS1PM Cable LBO Settings Note 613C 608C Cable Length feet 1249C ...

Page 2215: ...ay be used to check line code settings Refer to Table K and Figure 5 and set the line code option switches if required Figure 5 DS1 DS1PM Option Settings Table K DS1 DS1PM Line Code Settings Line Code Format Switch S1 Settings S1 4 Port 1 S1 5 Port 2 S1 6 Port 3 S1 7 Port 4 S1 8 Unused Note B8ZS OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF AMI ON ON ON ON Note Switch 1 section 8 S1 8 on the BBF1 BBF1B DS1 is unused and ig...

Page 2216: ...DS1 DS1PM circuit pack is installed until the signal tests good NOTE A DS1PM circuit pack must be replaced with the same type circuit pack to retain the proper feature applications Also if protection is required and DS1PM circuit packs are installed in the service slots the protection circuit pack must be a DS1PM circuit pack A CP not allowed eqpt alarm will be generated if a DS1PM circuit pack is...

Page 2217: ...363 206 285 Page 23 of 30 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER BBF5 JMPR 39 There are no options to be set on the BBF5 JMPR circuit pack Remove old JMPR and install replacement JMPR 40 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2218: ... the DS1 DS1PM circuit packs in a LOW SPEED GROUP at the VT G rate STS1E low speed mode interfaces with the OLIU circuit packs at the STS 1 rate Determine STS1E mode of operation high speed or low speed 44 Set switch S1 to mode of operation required HIGH SPEED MODE or LOW SPEED MODE 45 NOTE If a signal has previously been applied to the original STS1E circuit pack the FAULT LED will flash when the...

Page 2219: ... 206 285 Page 25 of 30 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 6 BBG6 STS1E Option Settings Table L STS1E LBO Settings Cable Length Ft 734A Cable 735A Cable LBO Setting 0 to 225 0 to 125 LBO IN 225 to 450 125 to 250 LBO OUT ...

Page 2220: ...gnal has previously been applied to the original HDSL circuit pack the FAULT LED may flash when the new HDSL is installed until the signal tests good Remove old HDSL and install replacement HDSL Response FAULT LED on the HDSL flashes for about 15 seconds and then goes off 50 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 7 BBF8 HDSL Control Switch Table M HDSL Control Switch Settings Control Settin...

Page 2221: ...ay flash when the new T1EXT is installed until the signal tests good Remove old T1EXT and install replacement T1EXT Response FAULT LED on the T1EXT flashes for about 40 seconds and then goes off 54 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 8 BBF6 T1EXT Option Settings Table N T1 Line Code Settings Line Code Format Switch S1 Settings S1 1 Port 1 S1 2 Port 2 S1 3 Unused S1 4 Unused S1 5 Unused B...

Page 2222: ...located on the bottom circuit board shown in Figure 9 If there are other jumpers on the circuit pack similar to the power jumpers they are factory test points and should be ignored Refer to Table O and Figure 9 and set power jumpers Figure 9 IMA LAN Power Settings Table O IMA LAN Power Settings Corresponding FUNCTION UNITS IMA Power Setting MXRVO Circuit Pack 5 V 48 V BBG2 MXRVO X BBG2B MXRVO X 48...

Page 2223: ... and install replacement IMA LAN in required slot of LOW SPEED group 57 Connect cable to RJ 45 connector on BBF9 IMA LAN or optical cable to optical connector on BBF10 IMA LAN Response FAULT LED on IMA LAN circuit pack lights and may remain lighted for about 40 seconds and then goes off 58 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2224: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 523 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 30 of 30 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2225: ...YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 4 3 Remove ONE of the 48 V fuses at the top of the User Panel Reference DLP 555 4 CAUTION Exercise care not to short meter probe across fuse contacts in fuse holder Use multimeter to measure DC voltage at front of fuse holder s Place negative probe on top fuse contact G3 or G4 shelves and the other probe to a solid chassis ground Requirement...

Page 2226: ...lf User Panel are 5 amp indicator type fuses COMCODE 405697442 Install 48 V DC fuses in User Panel fuse holders 12 Is any fuse blown If YES then continue with Step 13 If NO then proceed to Step 17 13 Replace blown fuse Reference DLP 555 14 Did fuse blow again If YES then continue with Step 15 If NO then proceed to Step 17 15 Trouble in User Panel or backplane connector Refer trouble to the organiz...

Page 2227: ...Starting with OC 3 Release 15 0 if an ins prog command is issued in addition to the TID the user will be prompted for Program Type with a value of either nesw for NE software generic or lansw for IMA LAN software generic NOTE The new command format is ins prog tid pgmtype lansw where the TID entered is that of the shelf where you want to install the new software Verify that no DCC failures or tran...

Page 2228: ...s in the same directory the files for each generic type must be copied to a separate directory on the hard disk drive If you are going to use the PC hard disk to load software to the shelf copy all files on the source floppy disks containing the IMA LAN files to a directory on the hard disk Then use the cd command to change to the appropriate hard drive directory containing the software 7 If you a...

Page 2229: ...COM1 or COM2 RS 232 port of the PC If a P or d is displayed in the FE ID display the PC must be connected to the front CIT port Connect PC to CIT port by connecting one end of an RS 232 cable to the COM of the PC and the other end of the cable to the front or rear CIT port on the OC 3 shelf 11 The FE ID display on the SYSCTL will show on of the following preceding software installation Note the in...

Page 2230: ...CTL faceplate latch is not fully latched Indicates SYSCTL faceplate latch is not fully seated If SYSCTL has just been replaced unplug SYSCTL and repeat procedures of DLP 501 If original SYSCTL has just been unplugged and reseated properly seat the faceplate latch A reset occurs after the facelate is seated H If a flashing letter L is displayed in the FE ID display this indicates a low voltage cond...

Page 2231: ...is installed on the port C Ensure first number 1 disk of program being installed is inserted if using floppies D Ensure diskette is inserted in correct drive E Ensure the proper command was used to go to the drive with the diskette or to the proper directory containing the software F Check for invalid COM port Exit TERM Alt F2 then restart TERM using term COM1 or term COM2 G If the download still ...

Page 2232: ...the shelf being downloaded to for new program download Response PC responds with 17 NOTE After the system prompt the system will respond normally to commands entered The Commands and Reports section of Volume 1 of this manual gives a description of the commands Use rtrv ne command to retrieve the name tid of the shelf having new program installed or see TID in response above Lucent Technologies DD...

Page 2233: ...ownload may take up to 5 minutes Response ABN and NE ACTY LEDs light on User Panel and a P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the shelf receiving the program PC starts download and prints the following message Searching for optimal transfer rate Handshake established at baudrate baud In progress The dots continue to print until program installation is complete If floppy disks are being used i...

Page 2234: ...t the shelf containing the IMA LAN circuit pack to download dormant software Dormant software download may take up to 2 minutes Response The addressed IMA LAN resets after the software is installed The IMA LAN FAULT LED goes on for the duration of the reset and goes off after the reset 25 Was response correct If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then proceed to Step 26 26 NOTE ...

Page 2235: ...eceive the software Software download may take up to 2 minutes Response The addressed IMA LAN resets after the software is installed The IMA LAN FAULT LED goes on for the duration of the reset and goes off after the reset 28 Did apply command successfully complete If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then call your local RTAC or CTS ...

Page 2236: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 525 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 10 of 10 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2237: ...derations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure may be used to connect modems and a craft interface terminal CIT to the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer system for use in provisioning the system from a remote location NOTE This procedure must be performed at both the DDM 2000 location and remote CIT location to set the parameters of modems and terminal NOTE Modems supporting a large set of opti...

Page 2238: ...CEO modems support 1200 and 2400 baud rates The Lucent Technologies 2296 modem supports 4800 or 9600 baud rates Full duplex 8 data bits No parity bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit No flow control Transparent data mode ON Required for software download on some modems Direct operating mode ON Required for software download on some modems 2 Are you at the DDM 2000 location or remote CIT location If DDM 200...

Page 2239: ...helf Dialup access to the network element via the modem is now ready Tables A and B show the EIA 232 D pins required for use with the DDM 2000 PC Response Comment ATH OK hang up on hook AT F OK resets to factory defaults AT C1 OK data carrier is present when on ATS0 2 OK answer on 2 rings AT W OK wait for second dial tone Table A Pin Connections for Modem Using DB 25 Cable EIA 232 D Pin Front Acce...

Page 2240: ...eive Data Receives data from modem Pin 3 Transmit Data Transmits data to the modem Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready CIT notifies the modem that they are connected Pin 5 Signal ground Signal ground Pin 6 Data Set Ready Modem notifies the CIT that the modem is connected and ready to receive data Pin 7 Request to Send CIT is requesting clearance from the modem so it can send data Pin 8 Clear to Send Modem n...

Page 2241: ...tart a session with the default shelf The default shelf is the shelf that is physically connected to the CIT NOTE Security is available to protect against unauthorized access to the system If security is enabled users must enter a valid login and password to access the system NOTE To set baud rate automatically enter two carriage returns cr two lowercase a s aa or two uppercase A s AA All other ch...

Page 2242: ...se LUC zero two and LUC03 uppercase LUC zero three For Release 9 0 or earlier the defaults for the privileged user logins are ATT01 uppercase ATT zero one ATT02 uppercase ATT zero two and ATT03 uppercase ATT zero three The login banner for Release 9 0 and earlier reads AT T DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Release a b c If security has been enabled enter your login and then enter your password when promp...

Page 2243: ...t will be MJ NOTE After the prompt the system will respond to commands entered The command set link pg may be used to set the vertical size of the displayed page on the CIT Page pg length may be set from 3 to 150 lines with a default length of 24 lines The page length is set to default each time a new CIT session is started See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of t...

Page 2244: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 526 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2245: ...ns Only the components being assembled at this particular time should be cleaned Keep all dust caps and plugs in place until time to make connections Clean optical fibers and connectors on OLIU or LBOs If 22F OLIU go to Step 2 If 22F U 22F2 U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U 22D U 24G U 24H U 26G2 U 27G U 27G2 U 29G U 29H U OLIU using universal LBOs go to Step 7 If in line LBOs go to Step 15 If lightgui...

Page 2246: ...s using canned air held at least 3 inches 8 cm away 12 Clean the inside of the block using a pipe cleaner moistened with isopropyl alcohol 13 Blow any lint or dust from inside the block using canned air at least 3 inches 8 cm away 14 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 15 Is LBO 0 dB or attenuated If 0 dB LBO go to Step 16 If attenuated LBO go to Step 19 16 Clean LBO by placing a pipe cleaner m...

Page 2247: ...tor with lint free optical quality tissue moistened with isopropyl alcohol 22 Carefully wipe fiber end face and sides of connector again with clean dry lint free optical quality tissue 23 Blow any lint or dust from fiber end face and sides of connector using canned air at least 3 inches 8 cm from connector 24 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2248: ...DLP 527 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2249: ...pgraded and the software is running normally or has been installed as a dormant copy For procedures to download software locally to a shelf see DLP 525 NOTE Starting with OC 3 Release 15 0 if a cpy prog or ins prog command is issued in addition to the TID the user will be prompted for Program Type with a value of either nesw for NE software generic or lansw for IMA LAN software generic NOTE The ne...

Page 2250: ...MA LAN software to a remote shelf directly from a PC use the ins prog tid pgmtype lansw command NOTE If you want to load new IMA LAN software to a remote shelf via the DCC from a local shelf which already contains the new IMA LAN software log in either physically or remotely to the shelf containing the new software and then enter the cpy prog command The cpy prog command is used only to copy softw...

Page 2251: ...eric or lansw for IMA LAN software generic 7 Are you using ins prog or cpy prog command to download software to far end shelf If CPY PROG then continue with Step 8 If INS PROG then proceed to Step 16 8 CAUTION Only one cpy prog procedure at a time should be performed in the same maintenance subnetwork Simultaneous cpy prog procedures in the same network may fail Connect and establish session with ...

Page 2252: ...p to 7 10 minutes Response ABN and NE ACTY LEDs lights on User Panel A P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the far end shelf receiving the program Download begins and the following message is displayed In progress The dots continue to print until program installation is complete After installation is completed the PC prints the following completion message lan cpy prog TID COMPLD IMA LAN Gen...

Page 2253: ...e copied to a separate directory on the hard disk drive If you are going to use the PC hard disk to load software to the shelf copy all files on the source floppy disks containing the IMA LAN files to a directory on the hard disk Then use the cd command to change to the appropriate hard drive directory containing the software 19 If you are going to load the software from floppy disks use the appro...

Page 2254: ...m A null modem adapter is required to use this port with the PC The cable from the CIT port on the DDM 2000 shelf must be connected to the COM1 or COM2 RS 232 port of the PC Connect PC to front CIT port by connecting one end of an RS 232 cable to the COM of the PC and the other end of the cable to the front or rear CIT port in OC 3 23 NOTE The FE ID display on the remote SYSCTL must show on of the...

Page 2255: ...r the second message After you press any key the terminal emulator is loaded and the terminal responds as follows Interface ready Type Alt h for help Communications established 25 NOTE The default shelf is the shelf physically connected to the PC To set baud rate automatically enter two carriage returns cr two lower case a s aa or two upper case A s AA All other characters are ignored Enter two ca...

Page 2256: ...cal shelf being used for new program download Response PC responds with 29 NOTE After the system prompt the system will respond normally to commands entered The Commands and Reports section of this manual gives a description of the commands Use rtrv map network command to retrieve the name tid of the remote shelf having new program installed login password Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 Multipl...

Page 2257: ...P 122 32 Enter a y or yes and a carriage return to execute the program Software download may take up to 5 minutes Response ABN LED lights on User Panel A P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the far end shelf receiving the program for uncompressed executing copy download not if dormant copy is being loaded PC starts download and prints the following message Searching for optimal transfer rate...

Page 2258: ...mmunications can be reestablished with far end shelf using rtrv map network command Verify that Comm Status is good not FAILED as indicated by a blank in the report 37 Is communication status good between local and remote shelf If YES then proceed to Step 40 If NO then continue with Step 38 38 Dispatch technician to remote site and perform local software download procedures Reference DLP 525 39 ST...

Page 2259: ... If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then proceed to Step 44 44 NOTE If there is an indication that the apply command has failed on the addressed circuit pack s or is in the hung state the apply command should be reattempted Execute the rtrv alm command to know if the IMA LAN program installation is still In progress lan program installation IP rtrv hsty to know if IMA LAN pro...

Page 2260: ...DLP 528 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 12 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2261: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 529 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 1 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Unused ...

Page 2262: ...DLP 529 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2263: ...DLP 530 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 1 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Unused ...

Page 2264: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 530 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2265: ...on If the ACO button is depressed longer than 2 seconds the 7 segment display goes blank for 2 seconds and then each digit of the generic software version code is scrolled through the display The LEDs remain lighted while the code is being displayed When the ACO button is released the LEDs remain lighted until the full software version code is displayed If the ACO button is still depressed when th...

Page 2266: ...DLP 531 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2267: ...software to a remote shelf using ins prog or cpy prog command see DLP 562 NOTE If upgrading from earlier non TARP software releases to TARP Release 13 0 and later after the first shelf is upgraded single ended operations will not be available and major alarms section DCC channel failed will exist until all shelves are upgraded The node farthest away should be upgraded first working back to the loc...

Page 2268: ...ble 13 0 15 0 7 1 n Ring C Incompatible OSI stack requires special considerations See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for special considerations C 7 2 n Ring C C 8 0 n Linear C C 8 1 n Linear C C 9 0 n Ring U U 9 1 n Ring X X 11 0 n Ring X X 13 0 n Ring X X 15 0 n Ring X X Note All DDM 2000 OC 3 shelves in a subnetwork should be u...

Page 2269: ...ormant software version See the Commands and Reports section in Volume 1 of this manual for a description of the apply command Before performing this procedure ensure that both TGS TG3 circuit packs are installed in the shelf then use the switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command to switch to the protection TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 if not already ACTIVE Use rtrv sync command to ver...

Page 2270: ... software must be force downloaded locally using these procedures Proceed to Step 19 C FE ID Display Blank Indicates compatible software is installed in OHCTL and SYSCTL This procedure assumes the installed software version is not the correct version Depress ACO button for longer than 2 seconds to display software version on the FE ID display Proceed to Step 9 D Letter d in FE ID Display Indicates...

Page 2271: ...ndicates SYSCTL must be replaced Get replacement SYSCTL and repeat procedures of DLP 501 H Letter F in FE ID Display Indicates SYSCTL faceplate latch is not fully seated If SYSCTL has just been replaced unplug SYSCTL and repeat procedures of DLP 501 If original SYSCTL has just been unplugged and reseated properly seat the faceplate latch A reset occurs after the faceplate is seated I Flashing Lett...

Page 2272: ... Can t find script init if you see it after starting the terminal emulator Response Two brief messages are printed and you are instructed to Press any key to continue after the second message After you press any key the terminal emulator is loaded and the terminal responds as follows within 2 minutes CTRM ready Type Alt h for help Communications established Searching for optimal transfer rate Hand...

Page 2273: ...sregard message Can t find script init if you see it after starting the terminal emulator Response Two brief messages are printed and you are instructed to Press any key to continue after the second message After you press any key the terminal emulator is loaded and the terminal responds as follows CTRM ready Type Alt h for help Communications established 10 NOTE The default shelf is the shelf phy...

Page 2274: ...Use rtrv ne command to retrieve the name tid of the shelf having new program installed or see TID in response above 14 Enter the command ins prog tid or ins prog tid prmtype nesw Where tid the target identifier shelf name for the DDM 2000 shelf having the new program installed Where pgmtype the type of software you want to install Response Testing For Program Installation After several seconds the...

Page 2275: ...he program PC starts download and prints the following message Searching for optimal transfer rate Handshake established at baudrate baud In progress The dots continue to print until program installation is complete If floppy disks are being used insert each diskette when prompted After installation is completed the PC prints the following completion message ins prog TID COMPLD Generic a b c is in...

Page 2276: ...the terminal emulator is loaded and the terminal responds as follows CTRM ready Type Alt h for help Communications established 20 Unplug and reseat the SYSCTL and immediately push and hold the FE SEL and UPD INIT buttons at the same time until a P appears in the FE ID display takes approximately 15 seconds The software download automatically begins and may take 20 to 45 minutes Response PC starts ...

Page 2277: ...r changes or is incompatible with the version that you have this indication will occur See Table A You can force the system to run the current software or back out of this procedure by loading another version of software You must decide if you want the system to run this current version of software that has been loaded or if you want to download another version original version or new version of s...

Page 2278: ...inserted in correct drive D Ensure the proper command was used to go to the drive with the diskette or to the proper directory containing the software E Check for invalid COM port Exit TERM Alt F2 then restart TERM using term COM1 or term COM2 F If the download still does not start as indicated by the In progress message and rows of dots within 2 minutes after the P appears in the FE ID display ch...

Page 2279: ...ed as a dormant copy in this shelf The original software is still the executing software The apply command must be used at this shelf to install the dormant copy of software as an executing copy When the apply command is executed during an upgrade from Release 9 1 there is 30 minute delay before the dormant copy installation begins When the apply command is executed during an upgrade from Release ...

Page 2280: ...TL resets after the software is installed LEDs and FE ID display go off on SYSCTL and User Panel You are logged off the system After approximately 5 minutes you can log back into the shelf and reestablish communications 37 Was response correct If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 38 38 Did the letter C appear in the FE ID display If NO then do Trouble Cl...

Page 2281: ...2000 generic program may be installed with either a desktop PC or a portable PC The diskettes may be either 3 inch floppy disks or 5 inch floppy disks Main Unit The main unit of the PC contains the CPU central processing unit disk drive s and memory among other things All main units have some common features which include ON OFF Switch This switch is used to switch the PC ON or OFF It is usually l...

Page 2282: ...a The single floppy disk drive is referred to as drive A and the hard disk is usually referred to as drive C Other combinations of floppy and hard drives arepossible but all that is required is asingle floppy drive as a minimum The procedures in this manual for installing a newgeneric program indicate using drive A Monitor The monitor sometimes called a display screen may be eithermonochrome or co...

Page 2283: ... preferable to reset it using one of the following two methods RESET button Not all PCs have a RESET button but if yours does it provides an easy way to reset the PC Alternatively the following method may work Hold down the Ctrl Alt and Delete keys all at the same time If RESET or Ctrl Alt and Delete keys are not effective turn OFF the PC wait a few seconds and turn it back ON Rebooting the PC cle...

Page 2284: ... diskette in a protective envelope when not in use Keep the diskette in a dry place Keep the diskettes away from magnetic fields or objects for example magnetic screwdriver DO NOT Touch any of the exposed surfaces of the diskette itself handle it by the edge of the jacket Very tiny scratches fingerprints or dust can ruin a diskette Bend a diskette Write on a diskette label with a ballpoint pen or ...

Page 2285: ...notch on the left if provided 3 Slide the diskette in as far as it will go but do not force it You may hear a click when the diskette is all the way in CAUTION Do not attempt to force the diskette into the drive If resistance is felt or it does not slide in easily remove the diskette and insert it again 4 Close latch the disk drive door When you are instructed to insert a diskette into a drive it ...

Page 2286: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 533 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2287: ...OS operating system software If you are not sure how to do this instructions are given in the Starting MS DOS Software section The new generic program software requires MS DOS software Release 2 1 or later To load the version of MS DOS software you can copy the MS DOS onto the first diskette and then copy the new generic program software to that diskette also Once you have done that simply insert ...

Page 2288: ...le A appears on the display screen This is how MS DOS software lets you know it is ready for you to type a command Formatting a New Diskette You will need a blank diskette s It is a good practice to label diskettes so that you can keep track of them You should prepare a label for the diskette s marked as DDM 2000 OC 3 Release a b c working copy The a b c is the release version that you are copying...

Page 2289: ... message appears to tell you that the format is complete In addition you will see several lines of messages about total disk space available Finally you will be prompted to format another disk with the following message Format another Y N If you do not need to format another disk type n and Enter The system will respond with a prompt A display Remove the diskette from the disk drive and place it i...

Page 2290: ...sing the PC hard disk all the files listed in the README file must be on the hard disk in the directory from which you will do the installation To read the contents of the README file use the more README command To list the files on the hard disk or floppy diskette use the dir p command Copying Files Hard Disk System Set up your hard disk so that when you turn on your computer it starts up using t...

Page 2291: ... memory to the working copy diskette which you inserted into drive A When the copy is complete it will display the following message INSERT DISKETTE FOR DRIVE A STRIKE ANY KEY WHEN READY Open the drive door and remove the working copy diskette from the drive Insert the original diskette into the drive and close the door Depress any key The MS DOS software now begins where it left off This process ...

Page 2292: ...can into the PC s memory and then displays the following message Insert TARGET diskette in drive A Strike any key when ready Remove the working copy source diskette insert the new target diskette and press any key It is not necessary to preformat the new diskette the diskcopy command will do this for you Depending on the amount of memory in your computer you may be prompted to repeat this several ...

Page 2293: ...e in drive A Insert TARGET diskette in drive B Strike any key when ready Wait for the disk drive indicator light to go off Remove the MS DOS disk from drive A and insert the working copy diskette the source Insert a new diskette into drive B the target It is not necessary to preformat the new diskette the disk copy command will do this for you Press any key when ready The disk drive indicators on ...

Page 2294: ...DLP 534 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 8 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2295: ...t pack option switches as required Reference DLP 513 3 Is timing mode DS1 External If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then proceed to Step 6 4 Check external timing references to ensure they are good 5 NOTE ED 8C724 20 G339 G340 or G341 cables are used to connect timing references to shelf 1 in a bay ED 8C724 20 G373 or G374 rear access or ED 8C724 21 G414 and G415 front access cables are used...

Page 2296: ... as shown in Table B if required 7 CAUTION A momentary transmission hit error will occur when the TGS circuit pack is switched Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then proceed to Step 9 8 Use switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command to switch timing to protection TGS in TIMING slot 2 if not already active Response ACTIVE LED lights on TGS circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 Tab...

Page 2297: ...on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 12 NOTE The critical CR alarm LED may light for up to 15 seconds after the UPD INIT button is depressed on the SYSCTL This does not indicate a service interruption Momentarily depress the UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL Response FAULT LED lights on TGS circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 FAULT LED goes off on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 after about 15...

Page 2298: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 535 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2299: ...R Perform Test of RT Batteries Using 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST SET 1 CAUTION Service interruption will occur if batteries are disconnected and AC power is not available Obtain 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST SET 197A and place near batteries to be tested Figure 1 Figure 1 197A Battery Load Test Set Test Connections ...

Page 2300: ...CHARGER associated with batteries to be tested is HIGH RATE CHG ON indicator lighted If YES then continue with Step 6 If NO then proceed to Step 7 6 Batteries are on high charge and may require up to 24 hours to charge Do not perform this procedure until HIGH RATE CHG ON indicator on BATTERY CHARGER goes off 7 CAUTION Service interruption will occur if batteries are disconnected and AC power is no...

Page 2301: ...atteries must not be connected or disconnected when TESTING indicator is lighted NOTE This test must run for a full 15 minutes to be valid or until all batteries indicate REPLACE The STOP button should only be used if a problem occurs during the test if the test is to be terminated early because of loss of AC power or all batteries indicate REPLACE The START CONTINUE button is used to continue the...

Page 2302: ...p 17 Response STOP indicator on test set lights 15 After 15 minutes the test set COMPLETE indicator lights 16 Is any REPLACE indicator on test set lighted If YES then continue with Step 17 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 17 Unplug and set aside all defective batteries 18 Install and connect replacement batteries to battery shelf Reconnect any remaining good batteries to battery s...

Page 2303: ... MULTIPLEXER Check 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST SET 1 Obtain 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST SET SeeFigure 1 Figure 1 197A Battery Load Test Set Arrangement 2 Remove cover from test set 3 At test connector head verify battery fuse holders each contain a 20 Amp fast blow fuse 4 Obtain one KS 21906 L4 battery ...

Page 2304: ...est set fan operate If YES then proceed to Step 15 If NO then continue with Step 7 7 Connect battery lead to remaining BATT plugs one at a time and note if fan operates 8 Did test set fan operate for any BATT plug connection If YES then proceed to Step 11 If NO then continue with Step 9 9 NOTE The test set is intended to test fully charged batteries Before new batteries or replacement batteries ar...

Page 2305: ... 16 Does status display indicate which battery was connected status GOOD or REPLACE of the battery and is READY indicator lighted If YES then continue with Step 17 If NO then proceed to Step 35 17 Does status display indicate GOOD or REPLACE If YES then proceed to Step 19 If NO then continue with Step 18 18 DANGER A high discharge current is present at connector head if TESTING indicator is lighte...

Page 2306: ...IME display start counting time If YES then proceed to Step 24 If NO then continue with Step 23 23 DANGER A high discharge current is present at connector head if TESTING indicator is lighted Batteries must not be connected or disconnected when TESTING indicator is lighted There is a defective test set Depress STOP button unplug battery and return test set for repair 24 Depress test set STOP butto...

Page 2307: ... shown on TIME display 30 During 15 minute test period does test set show REPLACE If YES then continue with Step 31 If NO then proceed to Step 32 31 Note that battery being used is defective 32 After 15 minutes does COMPLETE indicator light If YES then continue with Step 33 If NO then proceed to Step 34 33 Unplug battery Store connector head in test set cover Reinstall cover STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETE...

Page 2308: ...DLP 537 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 6 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2309: ...erations At central office operations DDM 2000 interface shelf connect the TL1 X 25 cable to J45 on the shelf backplane 2 Connect CIT and establish session Reference DLP 521 3 Are you discontinuing TBOS or parallel telemetry If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 4 Are you discontinuing TBOS or parallel telemetry If PARALLEL continue with Step 5 If TBOS ...

Page 2310: ...DLP 538 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2311: ...pressed 3 Release ALARM TEST button 4 Momentarily depress ALARM RESET button to reset alarms 5 CAUTION Exercise care in removing the fiber tray or fiber support bracket to prevent damage to the optical fibers NOTE To remove the front cover of a fan shelf located between two OC 3 shelves it may be necessary to remove either the fiber tray from the top OC 3 shelf if it is a G1 shelf or the fiber sup...

Page 2312: ...an filter is located on the bottom of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf that is installed immediately below the fan shelf Magnetic strips around the perimeter of the filter hold the filter in place in the bottom cavity of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf Verify that fan filter is properly installed 10 Reinstall front cover of shelf 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table A DDM 2000 Fan Shelf Switch Settings ...

Page 2313: ...at is installed immediately below the fan shelf Magnetic strips around the perimeter of the filter hold the filter in place in the bottom cavity of the DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf Remove fan filter by pulling on it 2 Install new filter with magnetic strips facing up into the bottom cavity of the DDM 2000 shelf 3 Momentarily depress the ALARM RESET button to reset alarms if required 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLET...

Page 2314: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 540 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2315: ... If Enable or Disable System Security continue with Step 3 If Edit Delete or Enter a User s Login proceed to Step 15 3 NOTE You must be logged into the system as one of the three privileged users to enable or disable system security Initially the defaults for the privileged user logins for TARP Release 13 0 or later are LUC01 uppercase LUC zero one LUC uppercase LUC zero two and LUC03 uppercase AT...

Page 2316: ...e following message followed by an alarm and status report 5 NOTE After the prompt the system will respond to commands entered The set link pg command may be used to set the vertical size of the displayed page on the CIT Page pg length may be set from 3 to 150 lines with a default length of 24 lines Did you use the default privileged user login LUC01 LUC02 or LUC03 and password DDM 2000 to log int...

Page 2317: ...he rtrv secu command retrieves the Port Security Configuration Report This report provides CIT and DCC port security and timeout information See the Commands and Reports section of this manual for a description of the rtrv secu command format Use the rtrv secu command to obtain the Port Security Configuration Report and note the CIT DCC port security and timeout information 9 NOTE The set secu com...

Page 2318: ...ormation for the CIT and or DCC ports 11 NOTE There are four types of users General users may execute any commands that are not restricted to privileged users Maintenance users may execute commands that obtain nonprivileged system reports perform protection switching loopback activities and perform some other maintenance activities Privileged users may execute any command including restricted comm...

Page 2319: ...THIS PROCEDURE 15 NOTE You must be logged into the system as one of the three privileged users to edit delete or enter a user s login Initially the defaults for the privileged user logins for TARP Release 13 0 or later are LUC01 uppercase LUC zero one LUC02 uppercase LUC zero two and LUC03 uppercase LUC zero three however these defaults may have been changed At the login prompt enter a valid privi...

Page 2320: ...re not displayed on the CIT At the password prompt enter a valid password provided by your DDM 2000 administrator Response CIT prints the following message followed by an alarm and status report Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Release a b c TID date time M rtrv alm all COMPLD Active Alarms and Status Report ...

Page 2321: ...ileged users may execute any command including restricted commands Reports only users may only execute commands that obtain nonprivileged system reports Refer to Security in the Administration and Provisioning section of this manual for more information about restricted commands NOTE Three privileged and up to 100 nonprivileged general maintenance and or reports only logins are supported If a user...

Page 2322: ...on of the rtrv lgn command format Use the rtrv lgn command to obtain the Login Provisioning Report and verify the user logins and user types 19 NOTE Setting logins passwords does not set system security In addition to assigning valid logins passwords CIT and or DCC port security must be enabled to secure a system Repeat this procedure to enable system security if required 20 See the Commands and R...

Page 2323: ...lable OLIU installed in slot 2 P protection line good and no locks inhibits or forced switches in effect CAUTION Before installing OLIUs ensure all optical fiber connectors and couplings have been properly cleaned DLP 527 Signal performance may be degraded if the connectors and couplings are not cleaned properly CAUTION Ensure that necessary optical power levels will be met with different type of ...

Page 2324: ...far end to switch both transmit and receive to the same line Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 5 3 NOTE The rtrv state eqpt command may be used to verify that only the protection line is active In the Equipment State Report the Switch State should show active only for the protection OLIU Also the green ACTIVE LEDs should be lighted only on protection OL...

Page 2325: ...slot 1 and connect optical fibers Ensure OLIU output at one end is connected to the correct OLIU input at the other end Reference DLP 514 9 Momentarily depress the UPD INIT button on the SYSCTL Response FAULT LED lights on OLIU in slot 2 P FAULT LED goes off on OLIU in slot 1 10 Did FAULT LED go off on OLIU in service slot 1 If YES then continue with Step 11 If NO then do TAP 111 11 NOTE If existi...

Page 2326: ...DLP 527 14 Install new OLIU into protection slot 2 P and connect optical fibers Ensure OLIU output at one end is connected to the correct OLIU input at the other end Reference DLP 514 15 Did FAULT LED go off on OLIU in protection slot 2 P If YES then continue with Step 16 If NO then do TAP 111 16 Verify optical fiber cables are placed correctly in the fiber tray and are properly routed in the bay ...

Page 2327: ...mode is set to DS1 External sync out or Line Timing sync out See the Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces section of this manual for a description of DS1 timing outputs Verify that there are no alarms or protection switches present on the system 2 Are you changing timing mode to DS1 External If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 5 3 Check external timing references to ...

Page 2328: ...t will occur whenever the TGS TG3 circuit pack is switched Is a CIT available If YES then continue with Step 7 If NO then proceed to Step 8 7 Use the switch sync s circuitpack pri manual command to switch timing to TIMING slot 2 if not already active Response ACTIVE LED lights on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 8 If Sync Autoreconfiguration has been enabled rtrv sync on a line timed shelf an...

Page 2329: ...uption Momentarily depress the UPD INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL Response FAULT LED goes off on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 and lights on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 ACTIVE LED goes off on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 2 and lights on TGS TG3 circuit pack in TIMING slot 1 13 Remove TGS TG3 circuit pack from TIMING slot 2 and set option switches to timing mode required Ref...

Page 2330: ...DLP 543 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2331: ...TE When this procedure is used to do end to end tests one DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer will be referred to as the near end and the other assembly as the far end These designations are arbitrary either assembly can be the near end or the far end assembly 2 See Figure 1 If local tests are being performed the fiber loopback at the near end 22D U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU must be in place If end to...

Page 2332: ... set 9 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 10 If NO then proceed to Step 15 10 Reseat the 22D U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU circuit pack associated with the circuit under test 11 The 22D U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU circuit pack under test has passed the OC 3c transmission test Remove the looping patch cords from the cross connections 12 At the near end and t...

Page 2333: ...U 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G4 U OLIU circuit pack that failed 18 Trouble may be in the LGX cross connections or the shelf backplane If other alarms or trouble indications are present refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 to isolate the trouble If no alarms or indications are present and a CIT is available use the RETRIEVE commands for example rtrv alm rtrv hsty etc to check for other trouble indications ...

Page 2334: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 544 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2335: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 545 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 1 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Unused ...

Page 2336: ...DLP 545 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2337: ...l Also read the description of the following commands in the Commands and Reports section of this manual ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 dlt crs vt1 and cnvt crs NOTE You may have to log in to more than one node to get a complete map of the network using the rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor command If a drawing of the network is not provided with the work ord...

Page 2338: ...work and rtrv map neighbor command to retrieve a map of the network which lists all the systems and how they are connected to each other Sample output reports are shown in Figures 2 3 and 4 Ring 1 Ring 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 IN OUT IN OUT Node 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 IN OUT IN OUT Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT IN OUT Node 4 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 IN OUT IN OUT Node 5 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 IN OUT IN OUT Node 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 IN OUT ...

Page 2339: ...5 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Site3NE1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Site7NE1 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 00...

Page 2340: ...le ring configurations cross connections consist of pass through cross connections in addition to the terminating cross connections For example in Figure 1 if the terminating nodes are at Node 1 and Node 5 then pass through cross connections will have to be made at Nodes 2 3 4 and 6 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS DCC NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Y 39 840F 80 00...

Page 2341: ...he pass through nodes for the service being established 5 Use the rtrv eqpt command at each node to verify that each shelf is properly equipped for the service being established For example is the group or slot being used for service at the terminating ends equipped with the proper MXRVO and or DS1 DS1PM circuit packs if DS1 service is being established 6 NOTE Cross connections supporting DS3 serv...

Page 2342: ...ecords if this port is already in service before continuing with this procedure If cross connections are already assigned or improperly assigned refer trouble to the organization responsible for facility design Improperly assigned cross connections may have to be deleted using the dlt crs commands 8 NOTE The channel state provisioning feature provides IS AUTO and NMON states for VT and STS channel...

Page 2343: ...After all cross connections are made use the rtrv alm command to verify no alarms are present 12 If DS3 cross connections have been established and the terminating nodes are equipped with BBG4B DS3 circuit packs use set trace sts1 command to check integrity of cross connect path Reference DLP 563 13 If ne acty inc VT AIS inc STS1 AIS inc VT unequipped or inc STS1 unequipped alarms are present look...

Page 2344: ... 1 1 address of VT1 5 channel in STS1E circuit pack in group A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 1 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 TSI STS1E Node 5 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 TSI MXRVO Node 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 pass through connections...

Page 2345: ...rs sts1 m 1 m 1 Node 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 m 1 to m 1 p...

Page 2346: ...0 OC 3 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 TSI TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 DS3 BBG4B m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 m 1 to m ...

Page 2347: ...1 a 1 1 address of VT1 5 channel in STS1E circuit pack in group A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 1 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 TSI STS1E Node 5 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 TSI MXRVO Node 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 pass through connecti...

Page 2348: ...rcuit pack 1 in group A m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 2 DS1 m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connection ent crs vt1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 2 IN OUT IN OUT Node 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 TSI A B C m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections a to m 1 1 1 and a to m 1 1 2 ent crs vt1 a m 1 1 1 and ent crs vt1 a m 1 1 2 where EC 1 a a...

Page 2349: ...tailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 13 of 20 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 10 Path Protected Ring OC 3 Network DS1 to TMUX with VT1 5 Cross Connections 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU ...

Page 2350: ... 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 546 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 14 of 20 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 11 STS 1 Path Protected Ring OC 12 Network OC 3 with OC 12 Optics with VT1 5 Cross Connections ...

Page 2351: ...nnections a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit pack 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit pack 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Op...

Page 2352: ...h Protected Ring OC 12 Network OC 3 with OC 12 Optics T1 to EC 1 with VT1 5 Cross Connections a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit pack 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12 Optics ...

Page 2353: ... Connections a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit pack 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 to m 1 1 2 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 2 where a 1 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit pack 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 2 OC 12 Path Switched Ring with OC 3 Shelves with OC 12...

Page 2354: ...S1 a 1 1 address of VT1 5 channel in DS1 circuit pack in group A m 3 1 1 address of STS 3 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 1 A B C TSI MXRVO Node 5 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C TSI MXRVO Node 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C m 3 1 1 to m 3 1 1 pass through connections Node 4 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 TSI A B C Node 6 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C m 3 1 1 to m 3 1 1 pass through connections Node 3 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C m 3 1 1 to m...

Page 2355: ...PEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 and VT 2 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 and VT 2 M13 or C bit formatted DS3 m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ...

Page 2356: ...LAN circuit pack in LOW SPEED GROUP A m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 address of STS 1 in in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 and VT 2 MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 and VT 2 m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 and m 1 1 2 to m 1 1 2 pass through connections m 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 an...

Page 2357: ...ude through opening in faceplate of OLIU CAUTION Avoid excessive bending of optical jumper and cables CAUTION All optical fiber connectors couplings and buildouts should be properly cleaned DLP 527 Signal performance may be degraded if connectors couplings or buildouts are not cleaned properly NOTE It may take from 15 seconds to 3 minutes and 25 seconds for FAULT LEDs to stop flashing depending on...

Page 2358: ...utes and insure a bit error rate BER result of 10 10 or better 4 Did OLIU pass BER test If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 5 5 Clean optical attenuators and connectors and repeat test If test fails again replace OLIU Table A OC 3 OC 12 OLIU Optical Power Levels OC 3 OLIU Power Level dBm 22G U 22G2 U 22G3 U 22G3 U 34 0 22F 22F U 22F2 U 34 0 22D U 33 8 C...

Page 2359: ...k removal does not require the removal of the fan shelf NOTE To remove the front cover of a fan shelf located between two OC 3 shelves it may be necessary to remove either the fiber tray from the top OC 3 shelf if it is a G1 shelf or the fiber support bracket if the shelf is a G3 or G4 shelf Remove fan shelf front cover by turning front latch assemblies according to the markings on the front cover...

Page 2360: ...cedure DLP 548 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER 4 Reinstall fan pack screws and reconnect the fan cable 5 Remount fan shelf front cover and tighten latch assemblies 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2361: ...or installing the SYSCTL in a new shelf for the first time initial shelf turnup only OHCTL installed at this time For procedures to replace an in service SYSCTL refer to DLP 501 Set all SYSCTL switch S1 sections S1 1 S1 2 and S1 3 to OFF to set the product shelf type See Figure 1 2 Set all SYSCTL switch S2 sections S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 S2 5 S2 6 S2 7 and S2 8 to OFF Figure 1 SYSCTL Option Settings ...

Page 2362: ...ton on the SYSCTL is recessed to prevent its accidental operation You will need a small pointed object such as a ballpoint pen to operate it NOTE Ignore the MJ MN and NE ACTY LEDs on the User Panel Read the remainder of this step and Step 6 before installing the SYSCTL then seat the SYSCTL If the following responses do not occur proceed to Step 7 Response FAULT LED on BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL lights and ...

Page 2363: ...cations in the FE ID display Note the indication and follow suggested procedure A Nothing displayed in the FE ID display indicates that compatible software is installed in the OHCTL and SYSCTL Proceed to Step 10 B The letter P displayed in the FE ID display indicates that no software is installed in the SYSCTL If the P is followed by a period P it means that a previous download attempt has failed ...

Page 2364: ... FE ID display indicates a low voltage condition brownout on the shelf Use TAP 121 to clear brownout condition 8 Find circuit packs with compatible software and repeat this procedure or install new software using the procedures of DLP 561 9 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 10 Retrieve generic software version ID by depressing the ACO button longer than 2 seconds and observing version code on...

Page 2365: ...ongly suggested that you read Cross Connection Provisioning in the Administration and Provisioning section of this manual Also read the description of the following commands in the Commands and Reports section of this manual ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 and dlt crs vt1 NOTE You will have to login to more than one node in each ring to get a complete map of the ne...

Page 2366: ...AIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C A B C CO 1 CO 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 4 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 5 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 3 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C I...

Page 2367: ...er Sample output reports are shown in Figures 2 3 and 4 Figure 2 Sample Report From rtrv map network Command Network Map for Site6NE1 TID Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 R5 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Site3...

Page 2368: ...ervice being established Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Site5NE1 main 2 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS DCC NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 O...

Page 2369: ...ode in the future you should provision the pass throughs as VT1 5 cross connections Also provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross con nect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted cnvt crs to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provi sioned as STS 1 cross connections From work order circuit ord...

Page 2370: ...command shows that the cross connection is already established you should determine from office records if this port is already in service before continuing with this procedure If cross connections are already assigned or improperly assigned refer trouble to the organization responsible for facility design Improperly assigned cross connections may have to be deleted using the dlt crs commands 8 NO...

Page 2371: ...f the ent crs commands is used to identify which ring rotation will be continued as well as dropped at a node For example if Ring 2 continues to the next node then ring m2 At the dual ring interworking node sites determine the ring Ring 1 or Ring 2 rotation that will be continued to each node For example in Figure 5 note that at CO 1 in the top ring configuration Ring 2 is continued to CO 2 In the...

Page 2372: ...e the set trace sts1 command to verify the proper cross connect path of a STS 1 cross connected STS 1 signal 17 After all cross connections are made use the rtrv alm command to verify no alarms are present 18 If DS3 cross connections have been established and the terminating nodes are equipped with BBG4B DS3 circuit packs use set trace sts1 command to check integrity of cross connect path Referenc...

Page 2373: ... where dc type of cross connection drop and continue m2 ring transmitting to next dual ring interworking node Ring 2 Ring 1 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 4 RT 2 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 5 m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT CO 3 m 1 to m 1 pass through connection ent crs sts1 m 1 m 1 MAIN 1 OLIU ...

Page 2374: ... Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 10 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 6 Dual Ring Interworking Cross connections OC 3 with TMUX OC 12 Optics 24 29 Type OLIU 24 29 Type OLIU ...

Page 2375: ...b 1 1 where b 1 1 address of VT1 5 channel in TMUX circuit pack in group B m 7 1 1 address of STS 1 7 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 ent crs sts1 mb 7 c 2 cct dc ring mb2 ent crs sts1 mb 7 c 2 cct dc ring mb1 ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 b 1 1 cct dc ring m1 ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 b 1 1 cct dc ring m2 where mb 7 address of STS 1 7 in MAIN OLIU c 2 address of ED1 port 2 in 3STS1E circuit pack in FNC dc type of cross ...

Page 2376: ...here b 1 1 address of T1 port 1 pack 1 in T1EXT circuit LOW SPEED GROUP B m 2 1 1 address of STS 1 2 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 ent crs sts1 mb 2 c 2 cct dc ring mb2 ent crs sts1 mb 2 c 2 cct dc ring mb1 ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 b 1 1 cct dc ring m1 ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 b 1 1 cct dc ring m2 where mb 2 address of STS 1 2 in MAIN OLIU c 2 address of ED1 port 2 in 3STS1E circuit pack in FNC dc type of cross c...

Page 2377: ...be replaced in the field NOTE This procedure provides instructions for replacement of the User Panel in an ED 8C724 30 G3 or G4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf Tools Accessories and Material The following is required Preparation 2 If the shelf is in service verify that the shelf is free of alarms and that no protection switches are active Remove service from the shelf Table A Tools Accessories and Material Qu...

Page 2378: ...g board 9 Install the new User Panel reconnecting the three cable plugs Cable plug J4 connects to the top connector J5 to the middle connector and J6 to the bottom connector 10 Reconnect shelf power lead connector P1 to the bay power riser connector J1 and verify that the PWR ON LED on the User Panel lights Verification and Completion 11 Disconnect shelf power lead connector P1 Reconnect shelf pow...

Page 2379: ...e User Panel light Continue to depress the ACO TST pushbutton and the release number of the software installed in the shelf should be displayed in the SYSCTL window 17 Use CIT and verify that you can log into the shelf If you cannot establish a session check cable connections Reference DLP 521 18 Service may now be restored to the shelf 19 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE DLP 521 ...

Page 2380: ...DLP 551 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2381: ...n exposure CAUTION Use static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on DDM 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components Is buildout being installed or removed If Installing then continue with Step 2 If Removing then continue with Step 5 2 Remove protector caps and plugs if equipped from buildout and buildout block 3 Align lightguide buildo...

Page 2382: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 552 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 ST Type Buildout Old Version Figure 2 ST Type Universal Buildout ...

Page 2383: ...C Type Universal Buildout 5 Depress locking tab on the buildout until locking tab is free from the locked position rotate the buildout counterclockwise to the stop position and separate the buildout block by pulling it toward you Only the old version of the ST type buildout is shown Refer to the appropriate figure in Step 3 for the specific buildout type ...

Page 2384: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 552 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 5 ST Type Buildout Old Version 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 2385: ...etworks When this procedure is being used to perform end to end DS3 tests it is assumed that the complete end to end systems have already been tested and that only a particular DS3 channel is being tested at this time NOTE A CIT is required for this test to make verify cross connections and to switch paths of the DS3 being tested The transmission test can be performed either with a CIT and the aut...

Page 2386: ...terminating end If the CIT and test trmsn t3 command is being used to perform the test and you are at the EC 1 terminating end the rlgn command may be used to log into the DS3 end to perform the test using the test trmsn t3 command NOTE When both terminating ends are equipped with STS1E circuit packs DS3 transmission tests may be performed For DS3 tests one end may be temporarily equipped with DS3...

Page 2387: ...sing the rlgn command if possible and use the opr lpbk t3 address or opr lpbk ec1 address command to loop back the DS3 or EC 1 port s at the far end Use logout or toggle crtl t command to return control of CIT to near end 4 CAUTION Execution of switch commands may affect service Check local procedures before performing switch commands NOTE If this transmission test is to be performed for each path...

Page 2388: ...tion would be set up as follows Figures 4 through 6 5 Are you using CIT and test trmsn t3 command to perform this test If YES then continue with Step 6 If NO then proceed to Step 23 6 Are you doing this test in the mux or demux direction If MUX direction then continue with Step 7 If DEMUX direction then proceed to Step 9 7 At the near end DDM 2000 use the following command to perform a test of the...

Page 2389: ... 2000 being tested connect a patch cord from the OUT jack to the IN jack for the DS3 channel to be tested 10 Use the following command to perform a DS3 transmission test in the demux direction to test the DS3 loop in the DSX direction test trmsn t3 address dirn demux dur Where address address identifier of the DS3 signal dirn direction of the test If dirn demux direction is toward DSX dur duration...

Page 2390: ...n address pri manual Response The green ACTIVE LED lights on the protection circuit pack 14 Repeat the transmission test in the mux or demux direction using the following command test trmsn t3 address dirn mux or demux dur 15 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 16 If NO then proceed to Step 37 16 Use the following command to clear active switch requests on the protect...

Page 2391: ... any additional DS3 circuits to be tested 22 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 23 At the cross connection associated with the near end DDM 2000 connect the DS3 test set to the IN and OUT jacks associated with the circuit under test 24 Use the DS3 test set to test for error free transmission 25 Was the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 26 If NO then proceed to Step 37 2...

Page 2392: ...failed been replaced If YES then proceed to Step 40 If NO then continue with Step 38 38 Replace the DS3 circuit pack that failed the test Reference DLP 523 39 Repeat this procedure for the DS3 circuit pack that failed 40 Trouble may be in the DSX cross connect wiring STS1 cross connections in the network if ring configuration or the shelf backplane Use the rtrv crs sts1 command to ensure proper ST...

Page 2393: ...path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 MAIN 1 OL...

Page 2394: ...e path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 O...

Page 2395: ...e path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 2 Ring 1 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 M...

Page 2396: ...e path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 O...

Page 2397: ...U A B C EC 1 EC 1 A B C CO 3 CO 4 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 RING 1 ACTIVE DS1 DS3 EC 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path ...

Page 2398: ...ts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT ...

Page 2399: ...ts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT ...

Page 2400: ...sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT...

Page 2401: ...1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node Secondary Node STS1E STS1E RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR Primary ...

Page 2402: ...E MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR R...

Page 2403: ...ates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicate...

Page 2404: ...ates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicate...

Page 2405: ...g networks When this procedure is being used to perform end to end DS1 tests it is assumed that the complete end to end systems have already been tested and that only a particular DS1 channel is being tested at this time NOTE A CIT is required for this test to make verify cross connections and to switch paths of the DS1 being tested The transmission test can be performed either with a CIT and the ...

Page 2406: ...rminating end If the CIT and test trmsn t1 command is being used to perform the test and you are at the EC 1 terminating end you may be able to use the rlgn command to log into the DS1 end to perform the test using the test trmsn t1 command NOTE When both terminating ends are equipped with STS1E circuit packs one end may be temporarily equipped with DS1 DS1PM and MXRVO circuits packs to perform th...

Page 2407: ...at the near end OLIUs must be in place If end to end tests are being performed do ONE of the following a Connect a patch cord from the OUT jack to the IN jack at the far end DSX 1 or STSX cross connection associated with the DS1 channel to be tested b Log into the far end terminal and use the opr lpbk t1 address or opr lpbk ec1 address command to loop back the DS1 or EC 1 port s at the far end Use...

Page 2408: ... Detailed Level Procedure DLP 554 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in MUX Direction Figure 2 Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in DEMUX Direction ...

Page 2409: ...mples local procedures should be developed to test the DS1 circuits being equipped A sketch of the network may need to be made and the paths to be tested should be determined as shown in the examples in this procedure Use the necessary switch commands to set up the DS1 path being tested For example if the configuration looks like Figure 3 use the switch path sts1 command for test 1 to make Ring 1 ...

Page 2410: ...d DSX 1 cross connection associated with the DDM 2000 being tested connect a patch cord from the OUT jack to the IN jack for the DS1 channel to be tested 10 Use the following command to perform a DS1 transmission test in the demux direction to test the DS1 loop in the DSX direction test trmsn t1 address dirn demux dur Where address address identifier of the DS1 signal dirn direction of the test If...

Page 2411: ...1 circuit path under test has passed the DS1 transmission test Have all required paths been tested If NO then continue with Step 18 If YES then proceed to Step 19 18 Repeat this procedure from Step 4 for the next path to be tested 19 Remove the looping patch cords from the cross connect point Use the rls lpbk t1 command to release loopback s at the far end if required 20 At the near end and the fa...

Page 2412: ...s the test successful error free If YES then continue with Step 30 If NO then proceed to Step 37 30 Reseat the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack associated with the circuit under test 31 The DS1 circuit path under test has passed the DS1 transmission test Have all required paths been tested If NO then continue with Step 32 If YES then proceed to Step 33 32 Repeat this procedure from Step 4 for the next path ...

Page 2413: ...hat failed the test been replaced If YES then proceed to Step 44 If NO then continue with Step 42 42 Replace the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack that failed the test Reference DLP 523 43 Repeat this procedure for the DS1 DS1PM circuit pack that failed 44 Trouble may be in the DSX cross connect wiring VT1 STS1 cross connections in the network if ring configuration or the shelf backplane Use the rtrv crs com...

Page 2414: ... path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 MAIN 1 O...

Page 2415: ...e path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 O...

Page 2416: ...e path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 2 Ring 1 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 M...

Page 2417: ...e path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 MAIN 1 O...

Page 2418: ...U A B C EC 1 EC 1 A B C CO 3 CO 4 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 RING 1 ACTIVE DS1 DS3 EC 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path ...

Page 2419: ...ts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT ...

Page 2420: ...ts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT ...

Page 2421: ...sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 3 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE OC 12 path switched ring D MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT IN OUT MAIN B2 OLIU MAIN B1 OLIU A B C D IN OUT...

Page 2422: ...1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR Primary Node Secondary Node STS1E STS1E RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR RCVR Primary ...

Page 2423: ...E MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 1 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR TRMTR R...

Page 2424: ...ates Ring 2 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 2 ACTIVE RING 2 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicate...

Page 2425: ...ates Ring 1 active sw path sts1 or sw path vt1 used to switch path RING 1 ACTIVE RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 2 OLIU MAIN 1 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 1 RING 2 ACTIVE Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 line switched ring RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR DS1 DS3 EC 1 RING 1 ACTIVE MAIN 1 OLIU MAIN 2 OLIU A B C IN OUT IN OUT RT 2 Ring 2 Ring 1 DS1 DS3 EC 1 Ring 2 Ring 1 rtrv state path command indicate...

Page 2426: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 554 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 22 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2427: ... the other incoming power feeder Does fuse indicator indicate blown fuse If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then proceed to Step 7 3 Replace 48 V blown fuse 4 Did fuse blow again If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then proceed to Step 7 5 Trouble in User Panel or backplane connector If you need assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Techn...

Page 2428: ...itive lead and terminal E2 of terminal board TB1 negative lead Requirement Voltage must be between 41 75 V and 60 0 V DC 10 Was requirement met If YES then continue with Step 11 If NO then proceed to Step 19 11 Reinstall SYSCTL and OHCTL 12 You can safely remove one fuse as required if power is maintained to the shelf through the other fuse 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 14 See Figure 2...

Page 2429: ...ed to the shelf through the other fuse 18 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 19 Trouble in User Panel power feeder s or office battery distribution If you need assistance notify your supervisor your local technical support organization or call Lucent Technologies RTAC per local operating instructions If User Panel needs to be replaced see DLP 551 20 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE DLP 5...

Page 2430: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 555 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 ED 8C724 31 G1 User Panel for ED 8C724 30 G1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf ...

Page 2431: ...DLP 555 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 5 of 6 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 2 ED 8C724 31 G2 User Panel for ED 8C724 30 G3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf ...

Page 2432: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 555 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 6 of 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 3 ED 8C724 31 G3 User Panel for ED 8C724 30 G4 DDM 2000 OC 3 Shelf ...

Page 2433: ...the integrity of the OC 1 fiber lines between the DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 FiberReach shelves and may be performed with the DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 FiberReach in service or out of service NOTE It is assumed that each DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 FiberReach have passed the local looped transmission tests and a CIT is available If these tests have not been completed refer to the appropriate proce...

Page 2434: ...re should be no change in readings from the first report Enter the command init pm reg all if allowed 4 Wait 20 seconds 5 Enter one of the following commands rtrv pm line fn a or b or c 1 1 if service line is being tested rtrv pm line fn a or b or c 1 2 if service line is being tested rtrv pm line fn a or b or c 2 1 if protection line is being tested rtrv pm line fn a or b or c 2 2 if protection l...

Page 2435: ...ed trouble when the report was obtained from the near end of the span trouble may be in the receive direction see Figure 1 If the report indicated trouble when the report was obtained from the far end of the span trouble may be in the transmit direction Check optical fiber and connections Clean optical fiber connections DLP 527 If no trouble found in the optical fibers replace OLIU s DLP 523 assoc...

Page 2436: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 556 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2437: ...n Volume 1 of this manual Also read the description of the following commands in the Commands and Reports section of this manual and the DDM 2000 OC 3 manual ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 and dlt crs vt1 NOTE You will have to log in to more than one node in each ring to get a complete map of the network using the rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor command If ...

Page 2438: ...C B 1 1 2 P 2 P MAIN 1 MAIN 2 LS A 1 LS B 1 LS C 1 LS D 1 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Ring 2 Ring 1 IN OUT Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 1 A B C DDM 2000 FiberReach OC 1 OC 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Node 5 A B C 27G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P OC 3 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring 2 P A A 1 IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 6 A B C IN OUT IN OUT MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Node 3 A B C ...

Page 2439: ...ther Sample output reports are shown in Figures 2 3 and 4 Figure 2 Sample Report From rtrv map network Command Network Map for Site6NE1 TID Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 R5 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Sit...

Page 2440: ...NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Site5NE1 main 2 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS DCC NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 N 39 840F 80 000000 000...

Page 2441: ...r the service being established 5 From work order or circuit order determine the host OC 3 and OC 12 node s that connects to the OC 1 FiberReach ring s 6 NOTE The cct parameter of the ent crs vt1 command specifies the cross connect type The valid values are two way dc and locked Two way applies to add drop hairpin 0X1 ring and pass through connections The dc parameter applies to dual ring intercon...

Page 2442: ...3 or OC 12 shelf must be connected to the MAIN 1 OLIU in the FiberReach shelf The 27G U 27G2 U OLIU or 26G2 U OLIU in FUNCTION UNITS group A B or C slot 2 P of the OC 3 or OC 12 shelf must be connected to the MAIN 2 OLIU in the FiberReach shelf NOTE The 26G2 U OLIU may be substituted for the 27G U 27G2 U OLIU in the OC 3 or OC 12 shelf FUNCTION UNITS slots when only one OC 1 single homed or dual h...

Page 2443: ...d a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross connects to drop DS1s at a later time 3 On STS 1 path switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provi sioned as STS 1 cross connections From work order or circuit order determine the cross connections STS 1 or VT1 5 to be made at each node pass through terminating drop and host OC 3 or OC 12 node s associated wi...

Page 2444: ...e circuit being established use the ent crs vt1 command to make the terminating cross connections for example Node 1 and FiberReach node in Figure 5 ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 a 1 1 cct twoway 12 At the host OC 3 or OC 12 ring node sites make proper cross connections For example in Figures 5 and 6 at Node 5 if VT1 5 channel 1 VTG 1 STS 1 from the MAIN 1 OLIU is to be cross connected to FUNCTION UNITS gro...

Page 2445: ...t crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of DS1 circuit pack 1 in LS group A DS1 port 1 m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 1 address of OC 1 line 1 VTG 1 VT1 5 channel VT 1 in OLIU circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group A slot 2 P m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 1 m 1 1 1...

Page 2446: ...DLP 557 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 10 of 22 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 6 Example of Dual Homing OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2447: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 557 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 11 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 7 Example of Dual Homing OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2448: ...DLP 557 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 12 of 22 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 8 Example of Dual Homing Intra Function Unit OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2449: ... channel in STS1E circuit pack in group A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 address of DS1 circuit pack 1 in LS group A DS1 port 1 m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 1 address of OC 1 line 1 VTG 1 VT1 5 channel VT 1 in OLIU circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS gr...

Page 2450: ...DLP 557 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 14 of 22 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 10 Example of Single Homing Intra Function Unit OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2451: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 557 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 15 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 11 Example of Single Homing Inter Function Unit OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2452: ...DLP 557 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 16 of 22 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 12 Example of Single Homing Intra Ring Hairpin OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2453: ...206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 557 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 17 of 22 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 13 Example of OC 3 Single Homing Function Unit Local Drop Hairpin OLIU to OLIU Cross connections ...

Page 2454: ...path to specified ring ringid m2 specifies ring ring 2 from which channel is received Data received on the low speed port is transmitted via the same OLIU on other ring ring 1 a 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 m 1 1 1 cct locked ringid m1 where a 1 1 address of DS1 circuit pack 1 in LS group A DS1 port 1 m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 cct locked locks path to specified ring ring...

Page 2455: ...T 1 a 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 1 address of OC 1 line 1 VTG 1 VT1 5 channel VT 1 in OLIU circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group A m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 MXRVO MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C m 1 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 1 m 1 m...

Page 2456: ...group A slot 2 P m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 a 1 1 1 to m 1 1 1 ent crs vt1 a 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 where a 1 1 1 address of OC 1 line 1 VTG 1 VT1 5 channel VT 1 in OLIU circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group A slot 1 m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 MXRVO MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A A A A B B B B C C C C m 1 m 12...

Page 2457: ... group A T1 port 1 m 1 1 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN OLIU VTG 1 VT 1 cct locked locks path to specified ring ringid m1 specifies ring ring 1 from which received Data received on transmitted via the same OLIU on other ring ring 1 channel is the low speed port is T1 T1 MXRVO MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A A A A B B B B C C C C m 1 m 12 m 12 m 12 ...

Page 2458: ...Single Homing Function Unit Local Drop Hairpin OLIU to DS3 Cross connections a 1 to c ent crs sts1 a 1 c where a 1 address of OC 1 line 1 in OLIU circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group A c address of DS3 circuit pack in FUNCTION UNITS group C OC 12 OC 12 BBG4B DS3 BBG4B DS3 DS3 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 12 m 12 m 12 m 12 ...

Page 2459: ... Provisioning section in Volume 1 of this manual Also read the description of the following commands in the Commands and Reports section of this manual ent crs vt1 rtrv crs vt1 and dlt crs vt1 NOTE You will have to login to more than one node in each ring to get a complete map of the network using the rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor command If a drawing of the network is not provided with t...

Page 2460: ... MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 Sample Network Schematic Log in to any node in the ring and use the rtrv map network and or rtrv map neighbor command to retrieve a map of the network which lists all the systems and how they are connected to each other Sample output reports are shown in Figures 2 3 and 4 ...

Page 2461: ... 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Site3NE1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Site7NE1 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 000...

Page 2462: ... being passed through at the OC 3 host node then the cross connection may be provisioned as either a pass through STS 1 or VT1 5 However if you anticipate dropping VT1 5s from the OC 3 node in the future you should provision the OC 3 as VT1 5 cross connections Provisioning now as a VT1 5 cross connect will avoid a hit on traffic if the STS 1 cross connect has to be converted to 28 VT1 5 cross conn...

Page 2463: ... SPEED GROUP A a 1 1 is to be connected to timeslot m 2 1 1 and the rtrv crs vt1 command shows that the cross connection is already established you should determine from office records if this port is already in service before continuing with this procedure If cross connections are already assigned or improperly assigned refer trouble to the organization responsible for facility design Improperly ...

Page 2464: ... cross connection At Node 2 in Figure 5 the command ent crs vt1 m 1 1 1 a 1 1 cct twoway would be used to make the cross connection 10 Use the rtrv crs vt1 command to verify that the proper connection has been made If an improper cross connection is made use the dlt crs vt1 command to delete the improper cross connection and reenter the cross connection 11 After all cross connections are made use ...

Page 2465: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 558 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 7 of 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 5 Example of Stand Alone OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2466: ...DLP 558 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 8 of 8 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 6 Example of Stand Alone OC 3 OC 1 Cross connections ...

Page 2467: ...anual and the DDM 2000 OC 3 manual ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 dlt crs sts1 and dlt crs vt1 NOTE You will have to login to more than one node in each ring to get a complete map of the network using the rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor command If a drawing of the network is not provided with the work order it is recommended that you draw a simple schematic of the netwo...

Page 2468: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 559 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 Sample Single Homed OC 3 Network Schematic ...

Page 2469: ...DLP 559 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 3 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 2 Sample Dual Homed OC 3 Network Schematic ...

Page 2470: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 559 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 3 Sample OC 3 Linear Extension OC 3 Network Schematic ...

Page 2471: ... order or circuit order determine the host OC 48 node s that connects to the OC 3 or OC 12 ring s or extensions 7 Use the rtrv eqpt command at each node in the network to verify that each shelf is properly equipped for the service being established Ensure that OLIU circuit packs are installed in the correct slots in the host OC 48 nodes 8 NOTE Cross connections supporting DS1 services may be eithe...

Page 2472: ...h switched rings all nodes in the ring must be provi sioned as STS 1 cross connections From work order or circuit order determine the cross connections STS 1 or VT1 5 to be made at each node pass through terminating drop and host OC 48 node s associated with the kind of service being established 9 Starting at one of the terminating nodes for the DS1 STS 1 circuit being established use the rtrv crs...

Page 2473: ...3 or OC 12 Node 2 and 3 in Figures 4 through 7 ent crs vt1 m 1 2 1 b 2 1 cct twoway 12 At the host FT 2000 OC 48 ring node sites make proper cross connections 13 Use the rtrv crs vt1 or rtrv crs sts1 command to verify that the proper connections have been made If an improper cross connection is made use the dlt crs vt1 or dlt crs sts1 command to delete the improper cross connection and reenter the...

Page 2474: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 559 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 8 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 4 Example of Single Dual Homing OC 48 OC 3 Cross connections ...

Page 2475: ...DLP 559 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 9 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 5 Example of FT 2000 with OC 3 Extensions to OC 3 Ring Cross connections ...

Page 2476: ... INTFC FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 b 2 1 to m 2 2 1 ent crs vt1 b 2 1 m 2 2 1 where b 2 1 address of DS1 port 1 LAN circuit slot in LOW SPEED GROUP B 2 m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs m 2 2 1 to m 2 2 1 pass through ent crs vt1 m 2 2 1 m 2 2 1 where m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs See FT 2000 documentation for informatio...

Page 2477: ... FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 b 2 1 to m 2 2 1 ent crs vt1 b 2 1 m 2 2 1 where b 2 1 address of T1 port 1 T1EXT circuit in LOW SPEED GROUP B pack 2 m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs m 2 2 1 to m 2 2 1 pass through ent crs vt1 m 2 2 1 m 2 2 1 where m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs m 2 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 2 in MAIN OLIUs See FT 2000 documentation for information on ...

Page 2478: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 559 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 12 of 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2479: ...Commands and Reports section of this manual and the DDM 2000 OC 3 manual ent crs sts1 ent crs vt1 OC 3 only rtrv crs sts1 rtrv crs vt1 OC 3 only dlt crs sts1 and dlt crs vt1 OC 3 only NOTE You will have to login to more than one node in each ring to get a complete map of the network using the rtrv map network and rtrv map neighbor command If a drawing of the network is not provided with the work o...

Page 2480: ...MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT Node 3 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT OUT IN...

Page 2481: ...LIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 IN IN IN OC 12 OUT OUT OUT Node 3 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU ...

Page 2482: ...12 Node 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 6 DDM 2000 OC 12 IN OC 12 OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT OUT IN TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C ...

Page 2483: ... C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P TSI MAIN 1 MAIN 2 A B C C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A 1 2 P OC 3 OC 3 IN IN OUT OUT Node 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 5 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 Faceplate Connector Pas...

Page 2484: ...ther Sample output reports are shown in Figures 5 6 and 7 Figure 5 Sample Report From rtrv map network Command Network Map for Site6NE1 TID Product Type Level 2 IS NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 R5 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0273 00 R6 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad07f 00 R7 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0732 00 Sit...

Page 2485: ...NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06f 00 Site5NE1 main 2 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00000e3a0372 00 Neighbor Map for Site6NE1 TID Connected Thru Product Type Level 2 IS DCC NSAP Site6NE1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Y 39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 08006alad06e 00 Site7NE1 main 1 N 39 840F 80 000000 000...

Page 2486: ... NOTE In dual homing configurations Figures 8 9 11 and 12 OLIU circuit packs must be installed in the correct slots in the host OC 12 nodes to support the direction of traffic required For example in Figures 8 and 11 for traffic to be routed between Node 1 See Figures 2 and 4 and the OC 3 system the 21 22 Type OLIU must be installed in FUNCTION UNITS group A B C or D slot 1 of Node 5 and FUNCTION ...

Page 2487: ...ds NOTE In ring configurations you should use the following rules in establishing cross connections in each ring 1 All terminating drop connections including DRI if present from the same STS 1 timeslot must be provisioned the same either all VT1 5 or STS 1 2 If all 28 VT1 5s DS1s in an STS 1 are being passed through at a node in a VT1 5 path switched ring then the cross connection may be provision...

Page 2488: ...ar to the port states for DS1 ports When a cross connection is made to a point of termination the channel is in the AUTO state and alarming is disabled The channel must receive a good signal from either ring to cause the channel to transition to in service IS At all nonterminating pass through nodes in the network use the ent crs vt1 or ent crs sts1 command to provision pass through connections Fo...

Page 2489: ...se the set trace sts1 command to verify the proper cross connect path of a STS 1 cross connected STS 1 signal 14 After all cross connections are made use the rtrv alm command to verify no alarms are present 15 If DS3 cross connections have been established and the terminating nodes are equipped with BBG4B DS3 circuit packs use set trace sts1 command to check integrity of cross connect path Referen...

Page 2490: ... OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS US NS NS US OC 3 OC 3 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 12 mb 1 to a 1 ent crs sts1 mb 1 a 1 where mb 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN B OLIU a 1 address of STS 1 in group A OLIU mb 1 to a 1 ent crs sts1 mb 1 a 1 where mb 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN B OLIU a 1 address of STS 1 in group A OLIU b 2 1 to m 1 2 1 ent crs vt1 b 2 1 m 1 2 1 where b ...

Page 2491: ...LIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS DDM 2000 OC 12 1 1 21G U OLIU 3STS1E 3STS1E mb 1 to b 1 ent crs sts1 mb 1 b 1 where mb 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN B OLIU b 1 address of STS 1 in group B OLIU mb 1 to b 2 ent crs sts1 mb 1 b 2 where mb 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN B OLIU b 2 address of STS 2 in group B 3STS1E circuit pack mb 1 to b 1 ent crs sts1 mb 1 b 1 where mb 1 address...

Page 2492: ...S NS US NS US OC3 OC3 Node 6 MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS MAIN B1 23G 23G U OLIU MAIN B2 P 23G 23G U OLIU A B C 21G U OLIU C B 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P A D D 1 2 P TSI US NS IN OUT DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 Node 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 2 P 21G U OLIU mb 1 to mb 1 ent crs sts1 mb 1 mb 1 where mb 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN B1 OLIU mb ...

Page 2493: ...ss of STS 1 in LOW SPEED GROUP A OLIU b 2 1 to m 1 2 1 ent crs vt1 b 2 1 m 1 2 1 where b 2 1 address of DS1 port 1 circuit pack 2 in LOW SPEED GROUP B m 1 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 1 in MAIN OLIUs IN OUT IN OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 Node 1 A A A B B B C C C C C C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 NS US NS NS NS US US US O...

Page 2494: ...port 1 T1EXT circuit in LOW SPEED GROUP B pack 2 m 1 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 1 in MAIN OLIUs OC 12 IN OUT IN OUT OC 12 NS US OC 3 OC 3 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 Node 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C C C C C B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P A A A A 1 1 1 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 US US US US NS NS NS NS 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P TSI TSI TSI TSI IN OUT IN OUT OC 12 Pa...

Page 2495: ...of STS 1 in MAIN 1 OLIU m 1 address of STS 1 in MAIN 2 OLIU b 2 1 to m 1 2 1 ent crs vt1 b 2 1 m 1 2 1 where b 2 1 address of DS1 port 1 IMA LAN circuit pack LOW SPEED GROUP B m 1 2 1 address of VT 1 VTG 2 STS 1 in MAIN OLIUs IN OUT IN OUT OC 12 OC 12 IN OUT MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 Node 1 A A A A B B B B C C C C C C C C B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 ...

Page 2496: ...DLP 560 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 18 of 18 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2497: ...s may be new from the factory or circuit packs used previously that may be loaded with software For procedures to download software locally to a fully equipped in service shelf see DLP 532 For procedures to download software remotely to a fully equipped in service shelf see DLP 562 NOTE It is assumed that the BBG9 OHCTL and BBG8 BBG8B SYSCTL circuit packs have been installed per DLP 500 and DLP 54...

Page 2498: ...d locally using these procedures Proceed to Step 7 C FE ID Display Blank Indicates compatible software is installed in OHCTL and SYSCTL This procedure assumes the installed software version is not the correct version Version is displayed on the FE ID display when the ACO button is depressed for longer than 2 seconds Proceed to Step 7 D Letter d in FE ID Display Indicates OHCTL has no software or t...

Page 2499: ...eplate when installing SYSCTL H Flashing Letter L in FE ID Display Indicates a low voltage condition brownout on the shelf Clear trouble using Trouble Clearing TAP 121 Letter P in FE ID Display 4 Ensure PC is connected to the front CIT CIT 1 connector of shelf receiving software If floppies are being used ensure the first number 1 diskette is installed in floppy drive If hard drive is being used e...

Page 2500: ...established Searching for optimal transfer rate Handshake established at baudrate baud In progress The dots continue to print until program installation is complete If using floppies insert each diskette when prompted After installation is completed the PC prints the following completion message ins prog TID COMPLD Generic a b c is installed The SYSCTL resets and the terminal is logged off the sys...

Page 2501: ...he same time until a P appears in the FE ID display approximately 15 seconds Software download may take up to 45 minutes Response PC starts download and prints the following message Searching for optimal transfer rate Handshake established at baudrate baud In progress The dots continue to print until program installation is complete If using the floppy disks insert each diskette when prompted Afte...

Page 2502: ...ate appears 4 Momentarily depress the Esc Escape key to activate the new baud rate 13 Ensure first number 1 disk of program being installed is inserted if using floppies 14 Ensure diskette is inserted in correct drive 15 Ensure the proper command was used to go to the drive with the diskette or to the proper directory containing the software 16 Check for invalid COM port Exit TERM Alt F2 then rest...

Page 2503: ...been installed as a dormant copy For procedures to download software in a new shelf initial installation see DLP 561 For procedures to download software locally to a shelf see DLP 532 NOTE If upgrading from earlier software releases to TARP Release 13 0 and later after the first shelf is upgraded single ended operations will not be available and major alarms section DCC channel failed will exist u...

Page 2504: ...Current Release Upgrade to When doing an upgrade it is recommended that the latest point release of software be used if possible 13 0 15 0 7 1 n Ring C Incompatible OSI stack requires special considerations See 824 102 144 Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide For TARP Releases for special considerations C 7 2 n Ring C C 8 0 n Linear C C 8 1 n Linear C C 9 0 n Ring ...

Page 2505: ...owed directly from a PC use the ins prog tid or ins prog tid pgmtype nesw command where the tid entered is that of the remote shelf where you want to install the new software and the pgmtype is the type of software you want to install After using the ins prog tid or ins prog tid pgmtype nesw command to download software to one shelf you must exit term Alt F2 and re execute term before starting a s...

Page 2506: ...t nodes that derive timing from the OC 3 line NOTE If you are using a PC operating in a Windows environment you must exit Windows and restart your PC in MS DOS mode before performing these download procedures For example if your PC is running Windows 95 you must exit Windows by clicking on the Start button then Shut Down then Restart the computer in MS DOS mode Obtain equipment check software and ...

Page 2507: ...ute the program Software download may take up to 20 minutes Response ABN LED lights on User Panel A P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the far end shelf receiving the program for uncompressed executing copy download not if dormant copy is being loaded At DDM 2000 shelves connected directly to the shelf receiving the program MJ and NE ACTY LEDs light on User Panel and FAULT LED flashes on OH...

Page 2508: ...e from same shelf If there is no period after the P the software can only be downloaded locally using the procedures of DLP 532 B Nothing displayed in the FE ID display indicates that compatible soft ware is installed in the OHCTL and SYSCTL and you may download software remotely if remote software downloading is permitted for this release Ensure PC is connected to the front CIT CIT 1 If floppies ...

Page 2509: ...shelf default 17 Was response correct If YES then proceed to Step 19 If NO then continue with Step 18 18 Check PC to CIT port connections Make sure the cable is connected between the PC COM port and the CIT connector on the DDM 2000 If the rear CIT connector is being used on the DDM 2000 make sure a null modem is installed on the port Check term setup and make sure the com port selected matches th...

Page 2510: ... 20 NOTE After the system prompt the system will respond normally to commands entered The Commands and Reports section of this manual gives a description of the commands Use rtrv map network command to retrieve the name tid of the remote shelf having new program installed login password Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer Release a b c TID date time M rtrv alm all COMPLD Active Alarms an...

Page 2511: ...rriage return to execute the program Software download may take up to 45 minutes Response ABN LED lights on User Panel A P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the far end shelf receiving the program for uncompressed executing copy download not if dormant copy is being loaded PC starts download and prints the following message Searching for optimal transfer rate Handshake established at baudrat...

Page 2512: ...lank in the report 28 Is communication status good between local and remote shelf If YES then proceed to Step 31 If NO then continue with Step 29 29 Dispatch technician to remote site and perform local software download procedures Reference DLP 532 30 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 31 Use rlgn tid command to remotely login to far end shelf Reference DLP 522 32 NOTE If a dormant copy was lo...

Page 2513: ...olume 1 of this manual for a description of the apply command The apply command allows you to coordinate the software download across the network Are you going to use the apply command at this time to load dormant version of software If YES then continue with Step 35 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 35 Use the rlgn tid command to login again to the remote shelf then execute the ap...

Page 2514: ...DLP 562 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 12 of 12 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2515: ...hich DDM 2000 OC 3 network elements are the source and destination terminating network elements for the STS 1 path s to be traced 3 NOTE When performing this test one DDM 2000 terminating shelf will be referred to as the near end and the other terminating shelf as the far end These designations are arbitrary either shelf can be the near end or the far end shelf Establish a login to the near end te...

Page 2516: ...Expected Incoming Path Trace exptrc string the same as you did for the trc string at the near end terminating element Provision the Outgoing Path Trace f cotrc f1 string the same as you did for the exptrc string at the near end terminating element 9 Use rtrv trace sts1 address command to retrieve the provisioned transmit and receive path trace strings for the STS 1 channel being tested 10 Did the ...

Page 2517: ...pected Incoming Path Trace EXPTRC at this node matches exactly the Outgoing Path Trace string TRC entered at the other terminating node circuit packs Verify cross connections and terminating addresses at all nodes Repeat this test from Step 9 14 Has the rtrv trace sts1 address command been performed at both terminating ends If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue wit...

Page 2518: ...DLP 563 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 4 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2519: ...ward side labeled ON in the figure To set switch to OFF depress rocker or slide switch toward side labeled OFF in the figure Refer to Figure 1 and Table A and set option switches Figure 1 BBF8 HDSL Control Switch 2 NOTE A maximum of three HDSL circuit packs including protection can be installed with current BBG2 MXRVO circuit packs installed in the associated LOW SPEED group Table A HDSL Control S...

Page 2520: ...his procedure from Step 1 for each service HDSL circuit pack being installed 4 NOTE One protection HDSL circuit pack may be installed in slot 8 P of each LOW SPEED group being equipped If required refer to Figure 1 and Table A and set option switches on protection HDSL circuit pack 5 If required install protection HDSL circuit pack into slot 8 P of low speed group being equipped 6 Install 177A Ret...

Page 2521: ...n Figure 1 had their Sync Source src set to main1 the farthest node from the external timing source would be Node D NOTE Note that in Figure 2 if Node B is changed to Sbyte first then Node C will go into holdover Note that in Figure 3 if Node D is changed to Sbyte first then Node C and Node B none of the nodes will go into holdover Use the rtrv sync set sync command at each node in the network to ...

Page 2522: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 565 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 2 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 1 Normal OC 3 Ring Using Kbyte Messaging ...

Page 2523: ...DLP 565 Detailed Level Procedure 363 206 285 Page 3 of 4 Issue 2 February 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 2 Abnormal Sequence of Changing Kbyte to Sbyte One Node in Holdover ...

Page 2524: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 565 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER Figure 3 Normal Sequence of Changing Kbyte to Sbyte ...

Page 2525: ... port 3 Working copies of the new system generic program diskette s 4 Software Release Description for software being installed 2 Before beginning the software installation procedure the following is strongly suggested a Become familiar with the characteristics and operating procedures of your PC and the MS DOS operating system Reference DLP 533 b Operate laptop PCs on AC power during download pro...

Page 2526: ...oftware to the shelf copy all files on the source diskettes s floppies to a directory on the hard disk for example GEN_1301 for generic version 13 0 1 6 If you are going to load the software from the hard disk use the cd command to change to the appropriate hard drive directory containing the software If you are going to load the software from the floppies use the appropriate MS DOS command for ex...

Page 2527: ...lf rear access CIT port is configured for a modem A null modem is required to use this port with the PC NOTE The cable from the CIT port on the DDM 2000 must be connected to the COM COM1 or COM2 RS 232 port of the PC If a P or d is displayed in the FE ID display the PC must be connected to the front CIT port Connect PC to CIT port by connecting one end of an RS 232 cable to the COM port of the PC ...

Page 2528: ...363 206 285 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 566 Issue 2 February 2000 Page 4 of 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2529: ...12 Quick Maintenance Guide Contents 1 Purpose and Scope 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Product Description 3 Troubleshooting Problem Receipt Diagnosis Resolution 4 Escalation 5 Completion of Maintenance 6 List of Common Spares 7 Test Equipment and Tools 8 Training Courses 9 Product Documentation ...

Page 2530: ...363 206 285 Page 2 of 2 Issue 3 June 2001 DDM 2000 OC 3 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 2531: ...multiplexing up to 84 DS1 signals 3 DS3 signals 3 EC 1 signals 6 OC 1 signals or a combination of DS1 EC 1 DS3 and OC 1 signals into a SONET standard 51 84 Mb s OC 1 155 52 Mb s OC 3 or 622 08 Mb s OC 12 signal It can be connected in network configurations such as point to point linear drop hubbing add drop and self healing ring b Panel Layout The DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 Multiplexer Figure 3 can be co...

Page 2532: ... X X X X AT T AT T FAULT FAULT AT T 2 3 4 GROUP A AT T FAULT S1 1 BBF1 BBF1 S1 1 DS1 5 DS1 X X X X X X X X X X AT T FAULT 1 S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 BBF1 BBF1 BBF1 C S1 1 S1 1 SYSCTL BBG9 OHCTL BBG8 FA 4 AUX CTL S1 1 FAULT DS1 BBF1 BBF1 5 AT T AT T FAULT S1 1 BBF1 BBF1 S1 1 DS1 S1 1 DS1 DS1 8 P X X X X X X X X X X AT T FAULT AT T FAULT AT T FAULT S1 1 DS1 AT T FAULT BBF1 BBF1 BBF1 BBF1 6 B S1 1 ...

Page 2533: ...Low Speed Interface DS3 DS3 Low Speed Interface STS1E EC 1 Interface MXRVO VT to STS1 Multiplexer OLIU Optical Line Interface Unit TGS TG3 Sychronous Timing Generator D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 6 7 D S 1 D S 1 D S 1 2 3 4 D S 3 D S 3 1 D S 1 5 D S 1 1 C T G 2 T G 1 O L I U O L I U M X R V O M X R V O S T S 1 1 1 1 A B S Y S C T L U S E R A N E L P AUXCTL SYSCTL 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 8 P O H C T L Timing Main Gro...

Page 2534: ...ed on a PC via a modem The types of alarms are Critical Alarm Loss of service to more than 96 DS0 channels 4 DS1 Major Alarm Loss of service to 96 or less DS0 channels Minor Alarms c Given the high reliability of the DDM 2000 Multiplexer it is likely 80 probability that the trouble lies outside of the DDM 2000 It could be located in the upstream or downstream devices in the network and in the qual...

Page 2535: ...nt contact your Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC 1 800 225 RTAC or Lucent Customer Technical Support CTS The two hour time limit is a general guideline find out if any specific Service Level Agreements have been contracted to with the customer These will take precedence over this limit List of Common Spares Conclusion of Maintenance Process a Complete the service work ticket logging the t...

Page 2536: ...oduct Documentation The User Service Manual for this product is called DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer TARP Release 13 and Later User Service Manual Volume I and II document number 363 206 285 This and a list of other documentation for the DDM 2000 can be found at the Cuctomer Information Center webpage at www cic lucent com Follow the documentation links and search for DDM 2000 These are downloadable a...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for DDM-2000 OC-3

Brand: Lumel Pages: 10

Brand: Wetekom Pages: 50

Brand: Philips Pages: 8

Brand: Philips Pages: 20

Brand: Philips Pages: 37

Brand: Philips Pages: 40

Brand: Philips Pages: 59

System4 LTC 2650/00

Brand: Philips Pages: 76

Brand: Philips Pages: 104

Brand: Philips Pages: 154

LTC 2600 Series

Brand: Philips Pages: 46

Brand: Extech Instruments Pages: 16

Brand: Extech Instruments Pages: 15

Brand: Velleman Pages: 24

Brand: Vorel Pages: 6

Brand: Amprobe Pages: 17

Brand: Sifam Tinsley Pages: 16

Brand: Beta Pages: 454

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands